Original instructions

PRECISION TURNING CENTER

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

FANUC : 16i/18i/21i-TB/0i/30i/31i/32i/Nakamura-Tome FANUC

Ro 15 Netsuno, Hakusan, Ishikawa, 920-2195 Japan

4810004EEQ
Apr. 2022
{4810004EEQ}

C-NA104204-A2205
 CONTENTS
Volume 1
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ··················································································· 1-1

2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING ··································································2-1

2-1 NC Program ········································································································ 2-1
2-2 Preparation for Programming···················································································· 2-2
2-3 Program Sheet ····································································································· 2-4
2-4 Control for Multi-path Machines ··············································································· 2-5
2-4-1 TW Series ····································································································· 2-5
2-4-2 WT Series, WY Series, Super NTJ, NTJ-100, SC-100X2··············································· 2-6
2-4-3 WTW Series ·································································································· 2-7
2-4-4 WTS, NTM3, NTY3 Series·················································································· 2-8
2-4-5 STW/NTX (W)/NTXL/JX-250 Series ···································································· 2-9
2-4-6 STS/NTX(S)/NTJX/NTMX/MX5/NTMXL/MX-100series ·········································· 2-10

3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION ············································································· 3-1

3-1 Tool Motion Commands ························································································· 3-1
3-2 Decimal Point Programming ···················································································· 3-4
3-3 X and Z (or U and W) ···························································································· 3-5
3-3-1 X (Coordinate value in diametrical direction) ···························································· 3-5
3-3-2 Z (Coordinate value in longitudinal direction) ··························································· 3-5
3-3-3 U (Diametrical motion distance) ··········································································· 3-5
3-3-4 W (Longitudinal motion distance) ········································································· 3-5
3-3-5 Examples of absolute and incremental mode programming ············································ 3-6

4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ··························································4-1

4-1 Positioning (G00) ································································································· 4-9
4-2 Linear Interpolation (G01) ······················································································ 4-11
4-3 Feedrate Command (F Function) ·············································································· 4-13
4-3-1 Synchronous feed (Feed per revolution mode) (G99) ················································· 4-13
4-3-2 Asynchronous feed (Feed per minute mode) (G98) ··················································· 4-13
4-4 Automatic Chamfering, Corner Rounding, and Direct Input of Drawing Dimensions·················4-14
4-4-1 Automatic chamfering or corner rounding ······························································ 4-15
4-4-2 Direct input of drawing dimensions ····································································· 4-18
4-5 Circular Interpolation (G02, G03) ············································································· 4-20
4-6 Dwell (G04) ······································································································· 4-23
4-7 Zero Point Return ································································································ 4-24
4-7-1 Automatic return to reference point (G28)······························································ 4-24
4-7-2 In-position check invalid reference point return (G28.2) ············································· 4-25
4-8 Thread Cutting (G32) ···························································································· 4-26

5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND ········································································5-1

5-1 Spindle Rotation Command ····················································································· 5-2
5-2 Constant Surface Speed Control ················································································ 5-5
5-3 Limitation on the G96 mode (Constant surface control function) ·········································· 5-7
5-3-1 WT-150, WT-250, Super-NTJ, NTJ-100, STS-40, STW-40, NTX: Machines equipped
with 16/18iTB control ······················································································· 5-7
5-3-2 Winding change motor type ················································································ 5-8

6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)·············································6-1

7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION) ······················································7-1

7-1 M-code List (WT series, WY series, SC series, AS-200, AS-200L, TMC series) ······················· 7-1

-i-
C-NA104204-A2205
 7-2 M-code List (WTS150, NTM3, NTY3 series, WTW150)··················································· 7-28
7-3 M-code List (New TW series, STS40, STW40, Super NTJ, NTX(S), NTX(W), NTXL) ···········7-45
7-4 M-code List (NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, NTX(II), NTRX-300,
NTRX-300L, JX-250)··························································································· 7-63
7-5 Description of M Codes ························································································· 7-82

8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ············································································· 8-1

8-1 Program Number and Program Name ·········································································· 8-1
8-2 Sequence Number (N) ···························································································· 8-2
8-3 Block Delete (/) ···································································································· 8-3
8-4 Subprograms ······································································································· 8-4
8-4-1 Making a subprogram ······················································································· 8-5
8-5 Calling Out Subprograms from the Memory Card ··························································· 8-8
8-6 End of Program ··································································································· 8-10

9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS ················································································ 9-1

9-1 Simple Fixed Cycle (G90, G92, G94) ·········································································· 9-1
9-1-1 O.D. and I.D. turning cycle (G90) ········································································· 9-1
9-1-2 Thread cutting cycle (G92) ················································································· 9-4
9-1-3 Facing cycle (G94)··························································································· 9-9
9-2 Multiple Repetitive Cycles (G70 - G76) ······································································ 9-12
9-2-1 Rough O.D. turning cycle (G71) ········································································· 9-12
9-2-2 Rough facing cycle (G72)················································································· 9-15
9-2-3 Pattern repeating cycle (G73) ············································································ 9-17
9-2-4 Finishing cycle (G70) ····················································································· 9-20
9-2-5 Face cutting-off cycle (G74)·············································································· 9-21
9-2-6 Outer diameter grooving cycle (G75) ··································································· 9-22
9-2-7 Compound thread cutting cycle (G76) ·································································· 9-23
9-2-8 Precautions on programming multiple repetitive cycles (G70 - G76) ······························· 9-27

10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42) ································· 10-1

10-1 Imaginary Tool Nose····························································································· 10-2
10-2 Workpiece Position in Reference to Tool Motion Direction ···············································10-3
10-3 Setting the Nose R Compensation Data and Imaginary Tool Nose Code Number······················10-5
10-3-1 Cutting direction in the G42 mode······································································· 10-6
10-3-2 Cutting direction in the G41 mode ······································································· 10-6
10-4 Start-up ············································································································ 10-7
10-4-1 Simultaneous designation of G41/G42 with motion command ······································ 10-7
10-4-2 Independent designation of G41/G42 ··································································· 10-8
10-5 Cancelling Nose R Compensation Mode (G40) ····························································· 10-9
10-5-1 Workpiece located in direction not related to motion command in G40 block ···················· 10-10
10-5-2 Designation of G41/G42 in the G41/G42 mode ······················································ 10-13
10-5-3 Blocks without motion commands······································································ 10-14
10-6 Cautions on Designating Nose R Compensation Function ··············································· 10-15
10-7 Imaginary Tool Nose Code Numbers and Tool Paths ····················································· 10-17
10-8 Examples of the Programs Using Tool Nose R Compensation Function ······························· 10-18
10-9 Changing the Offset Direction················································································ 10-19
10-9-1 Tool paths generated according to the offset mode change between G41 and G42 ·············· 10-19
10-9-2 O.D. turning after facing ················································································· 10-20
10-9-3 Grooving and chamfering example ····································································· 10-21

11 TAILSTOCK ···································································································· 11-1

11-1 Automatic Tailstock ······························································································ 11-1
11-2 Manual Tailstock ································································································· 11-1
11-3 Tailstock Cycle (G348) (Manual Knock Type) ······························································ 11-2
11-4 NC Tailstock Screen ····························································································· 11-4

- ii -
C-NA104204-A2205
 11-4-1 NC tailstock screen ························································································ 11-4
11-4-2 Manual operation ·························································································· 11-5
11-4-3 Automatic operation ······················································································· 11-6
11-4-4 Related parameters ························································································· 11-6

12 BAR FEEDER ·································································································· 12-1

12-1 Bar Stopper Method ····························································································· 12-1
12-1-1 Bar advance command and work supply command (M61) ··········································· 12-2
12-1-2 Preliminary feed command (M1061) ···································································· 12-2
12-2 Bar Pulling-out Method ························································································· 12-3
12-3 Top Cut Cycle (Bar Change Cycle) ············································································ 12-5
12-3-1 Operation···································································································· 12-5
12-4 Separate Block Delete Function from Top Cut Signal (SC Series (other than SC-100X2),
AS-200, and AS-200L) ························································································· 12-5
12-4-1 G code ······································································································· 12-5
12-4-2 Program example ·························································································· 12-6
12-4-3 PMC parameter····························································································· 12-6

13 PARTS CATCHER ···························································································· 13-1

13-1 Parts Catcher “B” (WT-250, WT-150, Super NTJ and Super NTM3) ····································13-3
13-2 Parts Catcher for Turret ························································································· 13-8
13-2-1 Program command ························································································· 13-9
13-2-2 Interlock ···································································································· 13-10
13-2-3 Program example ························································································· 13-12
13-2-4 Restriction matters in parts catcher for turret ·························································· 13-13

14 C-AXIS CONTROL ··························································································· 14-1

14-1 C-axis Connection································································································ 14-1
14-2 Rotary Tool Spindle Speed······················································································ 14-4
14-3 Rotary Direction of the Rotary Tool ··········································································· 14-4
14-4 Miscellaneous Functions ························································································ 14-6
14-5 MATA-BEI C-axis Control ····················································································· 14-9
14-5-1 MATA-BEI C-axis Connection··········································································· 14-9
14-5-2 Changing to the MATA-BEI C-axis selection: M491 ················································· 14-9
14-5-3 Returning to the spindle selection: M441 ······························································ 14-10
14-5-4 Rotary tool spindle speed (lower turret) ······························································· 14-10
14-5-5 Rotary direction of the rotary tool (lower turret) ······················································ 14-10
14-5-6 Miscellaneous functions ················································································· 14-11
14-5-7 MATA-BEI C-axis specification in SC series (One-path lathe) (18i-TB) ························· 14-12
14-5-8 MATA-BEI C-axis specification in SC series (Two-path lathe) (0i-TD/Nakamura-Tome
FANUC) ···································································································· 14-12
14-5-9 R-side C-axis specification in NTX(Ⅱ) (One-path lathe) ··········································· 14-12
14-6 C-axis (MATA-BEI C-axis) Feed Program ································································· 14-13
14-6-1 Positioning of C-axis at a rapid traverse (G00) ······················································· 14-13
14-6-2 Cutting feed of C-axis (G01) ············································································ 14-13
14-7 Fixed Cycles for Drilling ······················································································ 14-14
14-7-1 Face drilling cycle (G83) and side drilling cycle (G87)·············································· 14-17
14-7-2 Face tapping cycle (G84) and side tapping cycle (G88) ············································· 14-19
14-7-3 Face boring cycle (G85) and side boring cycle (G89)················································ 14-20
14-7-4 Canceling the drilling cycle (G80) ······································································ 14-21
14-7-5 Repeating the drilling cycle·············································································· 14-21
14-7-6 Cautions on programming fixed drilling cycles ······················································· 14-21
14-8 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1) ···························································· 14-23
14-8-1 Command format ························································································· 14-23
14-8-2 Polar coordinate interpolation plane ···································································· 14-23
14-8-3 Program examples ························································································ 14-24

- iii -
C-NA104204-A2205
 14-8-4 Polar coordinate interpolation of MATA-BEI C-axis (A-axis) in SC series (One-path
machine) (18i-TB) ························································································ 14-26
14-9 C-axis Command by Mixture Control (WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series) ··························· 14-27
14-9-1 Miscellaneous functions ················································································· 14-27
14-9-2 Program examples ························································································ 14-28

15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES ····················· 15-1

15-1 M Codes ··········································································································· 15-1
15-2 Precautions when Executing Spindle Synchronization Control ···········································15-2
15-3 Programming ····································································································· 15-3
15-3-1 SC Series with MATA-BEI ··············································································· 15-3
15-3-2 TW Series ··································································································· 15-4
15-3-3 WTW-150 series ··························································································· 15-6
15-3-4 WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series ··············································································· 15-10
15-3-5 STW-40, NTX(W), NTXL, JX-250 ···································································· 15-14
15-3-6 NTX(Ⅱ), NTRX-300, NTRX-300L with R-spindle specification ································· 15-18
15-3-7 Remarks on synchronous program······································································ 15-19
15-4 Setting of Spindle Phase Synchronous Position ··························································· 15-20
15-4-1 When M93 is available ··················································································· 15-22
15-4-2 When M93 is not available ·············································································· 15-25
15-5 Spindle Synchronization Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G496/G497) ·········································· 15-27
15-5-1 Operating condition ······················································································· 15-27
15-5-2 Program command ························································································ 15-28
15-6 C-axis Synchronization Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G496 C1./G497)······································· 15-30
15-6-1 Operating condition ······················································································· 15-30
15-6-2 Program command ························································································ 15-31

16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING ················································································· 16-1

16-1 Balanced Cutting ································································································· 16-2
16-1-1 Command format ·························································································· 16-2
16-1-2 Sample program ···························································································· 16-2
16-1-3 Precautions·································································································· 16-3
16-2 Machining Examples (WT series, WY series, Super NTJ, and NTJ-100)································16-4
16-2-1 Reducing the time for indexing ·········································································· 16-4
16-2-2 Combined turning with the upper and lower turrets ··················································· 16-6

17 RIGID TAPPING ······························································································ 17-1

17-1 Program Example ································································································ 17-1
17-2 Reverse Rigid Tapping Method ················································································ 17-2
17-2-1 Spindle reverse rigid tapping ············································································· 17-2
17-2-2 Rotary tool reverse rigid tapping ········································································· 17-2
17-3 MATA-BEI Rigid Tapping Method in SC(other than SC-100X2) and TMC Series (One-path
Lathe) ·············································································································· 17-2
17-3-1 Program example ·························································································· 17-2
17-3-2 MATA-BEI rigid tapping ················································································· 17-2
17-4 M Codes ··········································································································· 17-3

18 POLYGONAL TURNING ··················································································· 18-1

18-1 Polygonal Turning (Except WT-100, WY-100, WY-100II, Super NTY3, NTY3-100 (Milling
6000min-1), TW-8, NTJ-100, SC-100 (Including Super NTY3 Jumbo, NTY3-100 (Milling
8000min-1), NTY3-150 and NTY3-250)) ····································································· 18-1
18-1-1 M codes ····································································································· 18-1
18-1-2 Programming ······························································································· 18-1
18-1-3 Details of polygonal turning command ································································· 18-2
18-2 Polygonal Turning (WT-100, WY-100, WY-100II, Super NTY3, NTY3-100 (Milling
6000min-1), TW-8, NTJ-100, SC-100 (Except Super NTY3 Jumbo, NTY3-100 (Milling
8000min-1), NTY3-150 and NTY3-250)) ····································································· 18-3

- iv -
C-NA104204-A2205
 18-2-1 Program command ························································································· 18-3
18-2-2 Program example ·························································································· 18-4
18-3 L-Spindle Polygonal Turning by R-spindle Tool (SC-100X2) ·············································18-5
18-3-1 M codes ····································································································· 18-5
18-3-2 Programming ······························································································· 18-5
18-3-3 Details of polygonal turning command ································································· 18-6

19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL) ············································ 19-1

19-1 Programming ····································································································· 19-1
19-2 Conditions and Limitations ····················································································· 19-1
19-3 Program Examples (WT series, WY series, SC-100X2) ···················································· 19-2
19-3-1 Program example 1 ························································································ 19-2
19-3-2 Program example 2 ························································································ 19-3
19-4 Program Examples (STW-40, NTX(W), NTXL, JX-250 series) ··········································19-4
19-4-1 Program example 1 ························································································ 19-4
19-4-2 Program example 2 ························································································ 19-5
19-4-3 Program example 3 ························································································ 19-6
19-4-4 Program example 4 ························································································ 19-7
19-5 Back Milling Function by M Code Command for C-axis Selection [WT series, WY series,
Super NTJ, NTJ-100, SC series, and NTX(Ⅱ)] ····························································· 19-8
19-5-1 Programming ······························································································· 19-8
19-5-2 Program example 1 ························································································ 19-9
19-5-3 Program example 2 ······················································································· 19-10
19-5-4 Program example 3 ······················································································· 19-11

20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE ······················································································ 20-1

20-1 Combinations of Machining and Sample Programming (WT series, WY series, Super NTJ,
and NTJ-100) ····································································································· 20-1
20-2 Combinations of Machining and Sample Programming (WTS-150, NTM3, NTY3 Series) ·········20-8

21 MIRROR IMAGE FOR Z-AXIS ··········································································· 21-1

21-1 Mirror Image Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G360/G361) ·························································· 21-2
21-2 Program Example ································································································ 21-2

22 ATC CYCLE ···································································································· 22-1

22-1 ATC Tool Exchange Cycle G340 ·············································································· 22-1
22-1-1 ATC tool exchange operation (G340 T .) ·························································· 22-1
22-1-2 Program example for ATC cycle ········································································· 22-7
22-1-3 ATC tool alignment (G340 M746) ······································································· 22-8
22-2 ATC Tool Condition Screen ···················································································· 22-9
22-3 ATC Next Tool Preparation Command G341 ································································ 22-9

23 SWING B-AXIS ································································································ 23-1

23-1 Swing B-axis (Tool Spindle Swing Type) ···································································· 23-2
23-1-1 Workpiece coordinate system and tool offset of upper unit (Tool spindle) ························· 23-2
23-1-2 The setting of X-axis tool geometry offset (Tool point offset) ······································ 23-10
23-1-3 Tool offset conversion function G342 (Tool spindle swing type) ··································· 23-11
23-1-4 Program commands······················································································· 23-12
23-1-5 Program examples ························································································ 23-15
23-1-6 Simple tool head control function G343 (Tool spindle swing type) ································ 23-17
23-1-7 Tool center point control mode ON/OFF cycle G435/G436 (Tool spindle swing type) ········· 23-20
23-1-8 Dynamic switching of diameter / radius specification of the X-axis ······························· 23-23
23-1-9 Tool offset conversion function G322 (tool offset at B−45 deg. position for tool spindle) ······ 23-27
23-2 Swing B-axis (Turret Head Swing Type) ··································································· 23-30
23-2-1 Workpiece coordinate system and tool offset of upper unit (Tool spindle) ························ 23-30
23-2-2 Tool offset conversion function G344 (Tool spindle swing type) ··································· 23-34
23-2-3 Program commands······················································································· 23-35

-v-
C-NA104204-A2205
 23-2-4 Program examples of G344 ·············································································· 23-38
23-2-5 Program example of G344 J1. ··········································································· 23-39
23-2-6 Simple tool head control function G345 (Turret head swing type) ································· 23-40
23-2-7 Tool center point control mode ON/OFF cycle G435/G436 (Turret head swing type) ·········· 23-43

24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ·········································· 24-1

24-1 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G368/G369) (Tool
Spindle Swing Type) ···························································································· 24-5
24-1-1 Program commands························································································ 24-5
24-1-2 Program example ·························································································· 24-9
24-1-3 B value omission in G368 ··············································································· 24-10
24-2 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G358/G369) [Turret
Swing Type] ···································································································· 24-11
24-2-1 Program commands······················································································· 24-11
24-2-2 Direction of wear offset ·················································································· 24-16
24-2-3 Program example ························································································· 24-20
24-2-4 “A” value omission in G358 ············································································· 24-21

- vi -
C-NA104204-A2205
Volume 2
25 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE ············································································25-1
25-1 Manual Handle Retrace Function ·············································································· 25-1
25-2 Manual Handle Retrace Operation ············································································· 25-1
25-3 Restrictions and Cautions on Manual Handle Retrace Function ··········································25-2

26 Y-AXIS ···········································································································26-1
26-1 Y-axis Knock······································································································ 26-1
26-2 Program Examples ······························································································· 26-1
26-3 Y-axis Operations in Manual Mode············································································ 26-2
26-4 Interlocks for Y-axis ····························································································· 26-2
26-5 Precaution Matters for Y-axis Offset ·········································································· 26-3
26-6 Y-axis Knock Unit is Installed with the Following Machines ·············································26-3

27 AUTOMATIC DOOR ··························································································27-1

27-1 Outline ············································································································· 27-1
27-2 AUTOMATIC DOOR Push-button Operations ······························································ 27-1
27-3 M Codes ··········································································································· 27-1
27-4 Conditions for Operations and Interlocks ····································································· 27-2
27-5 Program Examples and Operation Patterns ··································································· 27-5
27-5-1 Program examples for SC(other than SC-100X2), AS-200, TMC series, NTX(Ⅱ),
NTRX-300, and NTRX-300L ············································································ 27-5
27-5-2 Program examples for TW series with a partition ····················································· 27-7
27-5-3 Program examples for TW series without a partition················································· 27-10
27-5-4 Program examples for WT/WY series, Super NTJ, NTJ-100, STS, NTX(S), Super
NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, SC-100X2 ················································ 27-13
27-5-5 Program examples for STW, NTX (W), NTXL, JX-250 ············································ 27-16
27-5-6 Program examples for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series················································ 27-19
27-5-7 Program examples for WTW with a partition ························································· 27-22
27-5-8 Program examples for WTW without a partition ····················································· 27-26

28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK ······················································28-1

28-1 Correct Chucking Check Display ·············································································· 28-1
28-2 Manual Correct Chucking Check ·············································································· 28-2
28-3 M Codes ··········································································································· 28-4
28-4 Correct Chucking Check and Transfer Programming ······················································· 28-5
28-5 PMC Parameter ··································································································· 28-7
28-6 PMC Timer ········································································································ 28-8
28-7 Alarm ·············································································································· 28-9
28-8 Warning ·········································································································· 28-10

29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

·····················································································································29-1
29-1 M Code ············································································································ 29-1
29-2 Programming ····································································································· 29-1
29-3 Related Parameters ······························································································· 29-5

30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES ···············································30-1

30-1 M Code ············································································································ 30-1
30-2 Reference Address ······························································································· 30-1
30-3 Branch Program ·································································································· 30-1
30-4 Cycle Pattern and Procedure for Creating Program ························································· 30-2
30-5 Flow of Operation Cycle ························································································ 30-5
30-6 Program Example: WT150 ····················································································· 30-6
30-7 Precautions ········································································································ 30-8

vii
--
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/ NTJ/
NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2 ·············································31-1
31-1 Specification ······································································································ 31-1
31-2 G Code ············································································································· 31-5
31-3 M Code ············································································································ 31-5
31-4 How to Create the Program ····················································································· 31-7
31-5 Actual Operation ······························································································· 31-12
31-6 Status Check Screen ··························································································· 31-13
31-7 Other Explanations and Precautions ········································································· 31-17
31-8 Alarm ············································································································ 31-20
31-9 Program Example WT/WY series/
NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100 ·································· 31-21
31-9-1 G411F1. Manual work change, L-R transfer ·························································· 31-22
31-9-2 G411F2. Manual work change, R-L transfer ·························································· 31-26
31-9-3 G411F3. Manual work change, same workpiece for L and R, no transfer ························· 31-30
31-9-4 G411F5. Manual work change only on L-chuck ······················································ 31-34
31-9-5 G411F6. Manual work change only on R-chuck ······················································ 31-36
31-9-6 G411F11. Bar loading (upper turret) + Parts catcher unloading ···································· 31-38
31-9-7 G411F13. Bar loading (upper turret) + GR unloading ··············································· 31-51
31-9-8 G411F14. Bar loading (lower turret) + GR unloading ··············································· 31-61
31-9-9 G411F12. Bar loading (lower turret) + Parts catcher unloading ···································· 31-71
31-9-10 G411F21. WS→L→R→WS GR double hand operation ············································ 31-84
31-9-11 G411F22. WS→L→R→WS GR single hand operation ············································· 31-94
31-9-12 G411F23. WS→L→WS/WS→R→WS without L-R transfer, GR double hand operation
(Type A) ·································································································· 31-104
31-9-13 G411F23. WS→L→WS/WS→R→WS without L-R transfer, GR double hand operation
(Type B) ·································································································· 31-109
31-9-14 G411F26. GR loading + Parts catcher unloading L→R transfer·································· 31-114
31-10 Program Example NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 ·············································31-124
31-10-1 G411F1. Manual work change, L-R transfer ························································ 31-125
31-10-2 G411F2. Manual work change, R-L transfer ························································ 31-132
31-10-3 G411F3. Manual work change, same workpiece for L and R, no transfer ······················· 31-139
31-10-4 G411F5. Manual work change only on L-chuck ···················································· 31-144
31-10-5 G411F6. Manual work change only on R-chuck ···················································· 31-147
31-10-6 G411F12. Bar loading (lower turret) + Parts catcher unloading ·································· 31-150
31-10-7 G411F14. Bar loading (lower turret) + GR unloading ············································· 31-162
31-10-8 G411F21. WS→L→R→WS GR double hand operation ·········································· 31-174
31-10-9 G411F22. WS→L→R→WS GR single hand operation ··········································· 31-184
31-10-10 G411F23. WS→L→WS/WS→R→WS without L-R transfer, GR double hand
operation ································································································· 31-194
31-11 Program Example NTY3 series ··································································· 31-201
31-11-1 G411F1. Manual work change, L-R transfer ························································ 31-202
31-11-2 G411F2. Manual work change, R-L transfer ························································ 31-209
31-11-3 G411F3. Manual work change, same workpiece for L and R, no transfer ······················· 31-216
31-11-4 G411F5. Manual work change only on L-chuck ···················································· 31-221
31-11-5 G411F6. Manual work change only on R-chuck ···················································· 31-224
31-11-6 G411F11. Bar loading (upper turret) + Parts catcher unloading ·································· 31-227
31-11-7 G411F12. Bar loading (lower turret) + Parts catcher unloading ·································· 31-239
31-12 Trouble Shooting on G411 ········································································· 31-251
31-13 Program Resume Function········································································· 31-256
31-13-1 Setting the program resume function ································································· 31-258
31-13-2 Procedure to operate program resume function ····················································· 31-261
31-13-3 Warning message ······················································································· 31-261
31-14 G411 F15./ F16. Pattern ············································································ 31-262

viii
--
C-NA104204-A2205
32 ECOREG UNIT ································································································32-1
32-1 M Code ············································································································ 32-1
32-2 Program Example ································································································ 32-1
32-3 Parameter Description ··························································································· 32-2

33 IDLE OPERATION ····························································································33-1

33-1 Idle Operation Screen···························································································· 33-1
33-2 Description of Operation ························································································ 33-2
33-3 Flow of Operation and the Precautions ······································································· 33-3
33-4 Warnings··········································································································· 33-5

34 1/2 REDUCTION HOLDER (SERVO MILLING TYPE) ··············································34-1

34-1 Reduction Holder Application ·················································································· 34-1
34-2 Employing Several 1/2 Reduction Holders ··································································· 34-1
34-2-1 M code ······································································································ 34-1
34-2-2 Setting ······································································································· 34-1
34-2-3 Programming ······························································································· 34-1
34-2-4 Example of programming (polygonal turning using 1/2 reduction holder) ························· 34-2
34-3 Employing Only One 1/2 Reduction Holder ································································· 34-3
34-3-1 M codes ····································································································· 34-3
34-3-2 Setting ······································································································· 34-3
34-3-3 Programming ······························································································· 34-3
34-3-4 Example of programming polygonal turning using 1/2 reduction holder ··························· 34-4
34-4 Interlock and Cautions··························································································· 34-4

35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION) ···················································35-1

35-1 M Code ············································································································ 35-1
35-2 Program Example ································································································ 35-1
35-3 How to Execute Breakage Detector in ATC Cycle Command “G340” ···································35-2
35-4 Related Parameters ······························································································· 35-5
35-5 Long Tool Breakage Detection Command in NTRX-300L ················································35-6
35-6 Detecting Position ································································································ 35-7

36 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (MULTIPOINT) ······························································36-1

36-1 G codes ············································································································ 36-1
36-2 Program Example ································································································ 36-2

37 MACHINING CHECK FUNCTION (CUT IN CHECK) ················································37-1

37-1 Description of this Function ···················································································· 37-1
37-2 Flow of this Function ···························································································· 37-1
37-3 Switches on Operation Panel ··················································································· 37-2
37-4 Restrictions ········································································································ 37-3
37-5 Warnings··········································································································· 37-4

38 HOBBING FUNCTION ·······················································································38-1

38-1 Program Command ······························································································ 38-1
38-2 Program Example ································································································ 38-2
38-3 Retract Function ·································································································· 38-3
38-3-1 NC parameter for retract function········································································ 38-3

39 INTERLOCK FOR HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT ···················································39-1

39-1 Description ········································································································ 39-1
39-2 Condition for Interlock ·························································································· 39-2

40 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ·····················································40-1

40-1 Explanations of Additional G Codes ·········································································· 40-1

ix
--
C-NA104204-A2205
 40-2 Storing Programs ································································································· 40-1
40-3 Alarm ·············································································································· 40-1

41 ON/OFF CHANGEOVER FUNCTION WITH EXTERNAL M CODES ···························41-1

41-1 Description ········································································································ 41-1
41-2 M code ············································································································· 41-1
41-3 Related Parameter ································································································ 41-1

42 MIST COLLECTOR ···························································································42-1

42-1 Description ········································································································ 42-1

43 DRY TYPE CHIP FLUSH AIR BLOW ····································································43-1

43-1 One Chip Flush Air Blow Unit ················································································· 43-1
43-1-1 PMC parameter····························································································· 43-1
43-1-2 M code ······································································································ 43-1
43-2 Two Chip Flush Air Blow Units ··············································································· 43-1
43-2-1 Air blow cycle ······························································································ 43-1
43-2-2 PMC parameter····························································································· 43-2
43-2-3 PMC timer ·································································································· 43-2
43-2-4 M code ······································································································ 43-2
43-2-5 Interlock ····································································································· 43-2

44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION································································ 44－1

44-1 Oscillation Cutting Mode ON/OFF ·········································································· 44－1
44-1-1 Program commands······················································································ 44－1
44-1-2 Program example ························································································ 44－4
44-2 Oscillation Motion ····························································································· 44－5
44-2-1 Oscillation command ···················································································· 44－5
44-2-2 Setting for oscillation conditions······································································· 44－5
44-2-3 Oscillation Motion in Machining at Taper and Circular Arc ······································ 44－10
44-3 Use with Other Functions ··················································································· 44－11
44-4 Restrictions ···································································································· 44－12

45 PROGRAM RESTART ···················································································· 45－1

45-1 NC Parameter ··································································································· 45－2
45-2 PMC Parameter ································································································· 45－2

46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING ········································································ 46－1

46-1 Tool Offset and Work Coordinate System for Superimposed Machining ······························46－2
46-2 Superimposed Control Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G458/G459) ·············································46－3
46-3 Superimposed Setting Function on Process Edit Screen·················································· 46－7

x
--
C-NA104204-A2205
APPENDIX

1 INCOMPLETE THREAD ················································································· APP-1

2 NT NURSE STANDARD FUNCTIONS ······························································· APP-4

2-1 NT Operation Message Display Function ································································· APP-4
2-1-2 Warning/alarm detailed message retrieval function ················································· APP-6
2-2 NT Guidance Display Function ············································································· APP-8
2-3 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract Position Display Function ··············································APP-10

3 LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY ······································································· APP-11

4 CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAM EXAMPLE ······················································· APP-12

4-1 Text Data Output to Memory Card or USB Memory by DPRNT Command ························APP-12
4-2 Reading/Writing Custom Macro Variables of Other Turret Heads ····································APP-14
4-3 Reading NC Parameter Values by PRM Command ·····················································APP-15
4-4 B-axis Incremental Command ·············································································· APP-15
4-5 Extracting the Tool Number and Offset Number from the Modal T-code····························APP-16

xi
--
C-NA104204-A2205
MEMO

xii
--
C-NA104204-A2205
 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The applicable numerical controls (NC) for this programming manual are
FS-16iTB, FS-18iTB, FS-21iTB, FS-0iTC, FS-30i, FS-31i, FS-32i, FS-0iTD,
FS-0iTF/Nakamura-Tome FANUC, FS-0iTF Plus/Nakamura-Tome FANUC.

The numerical control (NC) lathe is a machine incorporating a numerical control

system, which operates a lathe to machine a specific product in accordance with
the program.

Thus, before machining a product with the NC lathe, a program according to the
specific protocol must be created with all the numeric values and symbols neces-
sary for machining, including dimensions of the intended product, cutting speeds,
spindle rotating speeds, feed rates for tools used, traveling passage of the cutter,
etc.

Creating a program by referring to the machining drawing is called “program-

ming”.

This instruction manual thoroughly describes the various functions and operating
procedures necessary for programming.

We recommend that all programmers and operators using the machine read and
understand instruction manual completely in order to get the highest performance
from the machine.

＊ This information is subject to change without notice.

＊ The information contained in this manual is the property of
NAKAMURA-TOME PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. and all
rights are reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced
or transmitted in any purpose without the prior written consent
of NAKAMURA-TOME PRECISION IND. CO., LTD.
＊ The manual has been prepared as carefully as possible. If you
feel an error or area of difficulty is present, please contact our
nearest representative.
＊ This manual is drawn up based on standard specification.
Please check if special specifications are used for the machine or
not. If special specifications are used, please also see the at-
tached presented documents for your machine.
＊ Moreover, this product is subject to the export-related regula-
tions of the country. When further transport of this product to
another country is being considered, the permission under the
regulations of the country to which the product is to be trans-
ported is required.

1-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

MEMO

1-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-1 NC Program
For the NC lathes, the machining procedures performed by operators of the con-
ventional lathe are described NC programs and the handle operations are auto-
matically done by means of the electric motor. That is, positioning and feed of a
cutting tool, start and stop of the spindle, selection of the cutting tool, and other
operations are stored in the NC memory with corresponding symbols to operate
the NC lathe for machining the intended product.
For example, when a beginner learns operation of conventional lathe, he/she is in-
structed VERBALLY to “Change the spindle gear”, “Set the rotating speed to
1,000 rpm” and “Press the spindle forward rotation switch”. For NC lathes, these
instructions are given in the same sequence as when the conventional lathe is
manually operated, but in the form of “commands” included in NC programs.
However, full attention must be paid, since wrong commands may cause malfunc-
tion of the machine.

Table 2-1 Verbal Instructions and Corresponding Commands

Engine Lathe CNC Lathe

Set the rotating speed at 1,000 min-1 S1000;
Press the spindle start switch (forward direction) M03;
Index a tool T0100;
Approach a tool to workpiece G00 X60. Z0;
Discharge coolant M08;
Stop the spindle M05;

<For Your Reference>

A letter (or a symbol) is called a character.
(M, S, I, 0, ••• )
A unit of information arranged in a certain order is called a word.
(M42, T0100, X60;)
A unit of information separated from each other with the EOB (end of block) code
is called a block.
S100 M03 ;
G00 X60. Z0 ;
A semi-colon (;) is used for the EOB code.

2-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-2 Preparation for Programming

Create an NC program in the following procedure:
(1) Referring to the part drawing, examine the shape and machining portions of
the material used, specification of the machine, etc.
(2) Examine the chucking method.
Examine and then determine the tooling, machining method and conditions.
(3) Calculate the coordinate of the machining portions.
Prepare the program sheet in the order of machining.
(4) According to the program sheet, resister commands in the NC memory.
(5) Make the job instruction list specifying the details of manual operations as
well as setup information such as the chucking method, tooling method, and
NC operating procedures.
(6) Check errors in the NC program.
The NC program thus created by the programmer will be delivered to the operator.
Then, the operator should perform the following:
(7) Store the NC program into the NC memory and check the stored program
without mounting a workpiece.
(8) Run the program to machine a workpiece, following the instructions given
on the job instruction list.
(9) Check dimensions and surface roughness of the finished workpiece. If di-
mensions are not within the specified allowance or surface roughness is not
satisfactory, edit the program.
In the programming, the following must be carefully observed by the program-
mer:
(a) Selection of optimum cutting conditions
(b) Selection of the shortest tool paths for the reduction of cutting time
(c) Effective utilization of various functions

2-2
C-NA104204-A2205
2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

The above indicated procedure is summarized in the chart below:

Fig. 2-1 Flow from Part Drawing to Product

2-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-3 Program Sheet

In the program sheet prepared by a programmer, all information necessary to con-
trol an NC lathe is entered conforming to the prescribed rule.
The NC lathe operates according to the commands given from the NC program
that is created based on the program sheet. Prepare the accurate program sheet for
operating the NC lathe.
Full care must be taken, since an inaccurate program sheet may result in loss of
time and cost or sometimes cause troubles.
Learn and observe the rules in preparing the program sheet carefully as explained
in this manual.

NC PROGRAM SHEET
Type of ma-
Program No.
chine
Name of
Material
Workpiece
No.
Process Programmer Date

/ N G X (U) Z (W) I K F, S, T, M Remark

2-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-4 Control for Multi-path Machines

2-4-1 TW Series
For 2-spindle and 2-turret NC lathes (TW series), left and right units of machine
can be programmed and operated independently.
For these machines, special M codes are provided to synchronize the execution of
L-unit and R-unit programs at a certain block using M codes (M100 to M199).
The programs are stored in the L-unit memory and R-unit memory separately.
The program for the R-unit can be programmed assuming that it is located at the
L-unit. Therefore, if the workpieces of the same type are machined using the
L-unit and the R-unit at the same time, the same program can be used.

In response to the cycle start signal, the programs stored in the L-unit memory and
the R-unit memory are executed simultaneously to control the L-unit and R-unit
axes.

2-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-4-2 WT Series, WY Series, Super NTJ, NTJ-100, SC-100X2

For a 2-turret NC lathe (WT Series, WY Series, Super NTJ, NTJ-100, and
SC-100X2), upper unit and lower unit of machine can be programmed and oper-
ated independently.
For these machines, special M codes are provided to synchronize the execution of
upper and lower unit programs at a certain block using M codes (M100 to M199).
The programs are stored in the upper unit memory and lower unit memory sepa-
rately. The program for the upper unit can be made assuming that it is located at
the lower unit.

In response to the cycle start signal, the programs stored in the upper unit memory
and the lower turret memory are executed simultaneously to control the upper and
lower unit axes.

2-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-4-3 WTW Series

For 2-spindle and 4-turret NC lathes, left upper unit, left lower unit, right upper
unit, and right lower unit of machine can be programmed and operated inde-
pendently.
For these machines, special M codes are provided to synchronize the execution of
upper unit and lower unit programs of L or R unit at a certain block using M
codes (M100 to M199), and synchronize the execution of L-unit and R-unit pro-
grams at a certain block using M codes (M800 to M849). Refer to Section
7.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION).
The programs are stored in the upper unit memorys and lower unit memorys of
the L-unit and R-unit separately. The program for the lower unit can be made as-
suming that it is located at the upper unit. The program for the R-unit can be pro-
grammed assuming that it is located at the L-unit. Therefore, if the workpieces of
the same type are machined using the L-unit and the R-unit at the same time, the
same program can be used.

In response to the cycle start signal, the programs stored in the each unit memory
are executed to control each axis.

2-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-4-4 WTS, NTM3, NTY3 Series

For WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series composed of 2-spindle and 3-turret NC lathes, left
upper unit, right upper unit, and lower unit of machine can be programmed and
operated independently.
For these machines, special M codes are provided to synchronize the execution of
left upper, right upper and lower unit programs at a certain block using M codes
(M100 to M199).
The programs are stored in the left upper unit memory, the right upper unit
memory and the lower unit memory separately. The program for the right upper
unit can be made assuming that it is located at the left upper unit. Therefore, if the
workpieces of the same type are machined using the left upper unit and the right
upper unit at the same time, the same program can be used.

In response to the cycle start signal, the programs stored in the each unit memory
are executed simultaneously to control the each axis.

2-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-4-5 STW/NTX (W)/NTXL/JX-250 Series

For STW/NTX (W)/NTXL/JX-250 series composed of 2-spindle, 2-turret and
ATC tool, upper unit, left lower unit, and right lower unit of machine can be pro-
grammed and operated independently.
For these machines, special M codes are provided to synchronize the execution of
upper unit, left lower unit and right lower unit programs at a certain block using
M codes (M100 to M199).
The programs are stored in upper unit memory, left lower unit and right lower unit
separately. The program for right lower unit can be made assuming that it is lo-
cated at the left lower unit. Therefore, if the workpieces of the same type are ma-
chined using the left lower unit and the right lower unit at the same time, the same
program can be used.

Y2-axis

Y3-axis (OP)

(OP)

In response to the cycle start signal, the programs stored in the each unit memory
are executed simultaneously to control each axis.

2-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 2 BEFORE STARTING PROGRAMMING

2-4-6 STS/NTX(S)/NTJX/NTMX/MX5/NTMXL/MX-100series
For STS/NTX(S)/NTJX/NTMX/MX5/NTMXL/MX-100 series composed of
2-spindle, lower turret and ATC tool, upper unit and lower unit of machine can be
programmed and operated independently.
For these machines, special M codes are provided to synchronize the execution of
upper unit and lower unit programs at a certain block using M codes (M100 to
M199).
The programs are stored in upper unit memory and lower unit memory separately.
The program for lower unit can be made assuming that it is located at upper unit.
Therefore, if the workpieces of the same type are machined using lower unit and
upper unit at the same time, the same program can be used.
In response to the cycle start signal, the programs stored in the each unit memory
are executed simultaneously to control the each unit axes.

2-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

3-1 Tool Motion Commands
(1) Motion of a cutting tool is expressed using the coordinate words X and Z (U
and W).

3-1
C-NA104204-A2205
3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

[WTS, NTM3/NTY3 series]

[STW/NTX(W)/NTXL/JX-250 series]

[STS/NTX(S)/NTJX/NTMX/MX5/MX-100 series]

3-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

－Ｂ２ ＋Ｂ２

[NTX (II)/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L]

The position in diametrical direction is designated with X or U.

The position in longitudinal direction is designated with Z or W.

(2) The tool motion is expressed with either of two dimensioning modes; the
absolute and incremental modes.
(3) In the absolute dimensioning mode, dimension words X and Z are used.
The origin (X0, Z0) of the coordinate system is taken at the center on the
finished workpiece end face, and tool position is defined in reference to this
origin.
(4) In the incremental dimensioning mode, dimension words U and W are used.
Target position of the tool motion is defined in reference to the present tool
position. In other words, tool motion is defined using motion distance from
the present tool position.
(5) Sections of almost all workpieces machined with the NC lathe are circle.
Therefore, the absolute dimensioning mode is used for programming since
the programming error can be minimized by directly programming the
workpiece diameter rather than designating tool motion distance.
(6) The plus (+) and the minus (-) signs are used to define the position in refer-
ence to the origin. The plus (+) sign may be omitted while the minus (-) sign
must always be specified.

3-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

3-2 Decimal Point Programming

In various NC command data, data of the coordinate value command, time and
speed can be programmed with a decimal point.
(1) Command format
G X123.45 Z123. I120. K123.4 F0.35;
(2) Address
A decimal point can be used in the data specified with the following address
characters:
X, Z, U, W, I, K, R, F, C, A …etc.
(3) Programming method
The following examples show differences between the commands with and
without a decimal point.
• Without decimal point • With decimal point
X 254730 X 254.73
Z 125000 Z 125.
X 25000 X 25.
Z 127500 Z 127.5
U 2000 U 2.
F 350 F 0.35

The above commands are assumed the input unit of 0.001 mm.
(a) By entering a decimal point in the data, it indicates the decimal position
of the data expressed in units of “mm” or “inch”.
If no decimal point is entered, the least digit represents the least input
increment set by parameter.
(b) Both types of data with and without decimal points can be used in the
same program.
(c) If a digit following the least input increment is designated with a deci-
mal point program data, such portion is rounded off.
(Example: X 123.4567 → X 123.457)
NOTE: Data is interpreted in completely different value according to the use of
a decimal point. Therefore, pay sufficient attention when writing a nu-
meric value.

3-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

3-3 X and Z (or U and W)

3-3-1 X (Coordinate value in diametrical direction)
(1) Command format
X □□□□□.□□□ (Metric)
X □□□.□□□□ (Inch)
(2) Specify the position of the cutting tool in diameter, in units of 0.001 mm or
0.0001 inches.
Example: To specify the 60.5 mm diameter O.D. turning, designate it as
X60.5 or X60500.
3-3-2 Z (Coordinate value in longitudinal direction)
(1) Command format:
Z □□□□.□□□ (Metric)
Z □□□.□□□□ (Inch)
(2) Specify the longitudinal position of the cutting tool in units of 0.001 mm or
0.0001 inches.
Example: To specify the position 12 mm at the chuck side from the
workpiece end face, designate it as Z-12. or Z-12000.
3-3-3 U (Diametrical motion distance)
(1) Command format:
U □□□□.□□□ (Metric)
U □□□.□□□□ (Inch)
(2) Designate the motion distance of the cutting tool in the diametrical direction
from the present position.
(3) As a U command indicates the diametrical distance, actual motion distance is
a half of the designated value.
3-3-4 W (Longitudinal motion distance)
(1) Command format:
W □□□□.□□□ (Metric)
W □□□.□□□□ (Inch)
(2) Designate the motion distance of the cutting tool in the longitudinal direction
from the present position.

3-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 3 EXPRESSING TOOL MOTION

3-3-5 Examples of absolute and incremental mode programming

• Program example

Absolute mode Incremental mode

Point A X40. Z30. Point A
Point P1 X15. Z5. Point P1 U−25. W−25.
Point P2 Z−15. Point P2 W−20.
Point P3 X20. Z−35. Point P3 U5. W−20.
Point P4 X35. Point P4 U15.

Fig. 3-1 Program Examples in Absolute and Incremental Mode

3-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

The preparatory functions are designated using address G, followed by 2-digit
numbers, and define the mode in which commands are executed.
G codes are largely classified into the following two categories:
Type Meaning
One-shot The G code is valid only in the specified block.
The G code remains valid until another G code in the
Modal
same G code group is executed.

<Example>
G00 and G01 codes are modal G codes in the same G code group.
G01 X ;
Z ;
X ; The G01 code is valid for these three blocks.
G00 Z ;
NOTE: For more information on G codes, refer to the Operator’s Manual for
the NC system.

4-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

Table 4-1 G Code List

B: Standard O: Option x: Not selectable C: Standard when C-axis is selected
Standard/
Option
G Codes Group Function
16i/18iT/30i/
21iT OiT
31i/32i
◤ G00 01 Positioning (Rapid traverse) B B B
G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) B B B
G02 Circular interpolation CW B B B
G03 Circular interpolation CCW B B B
G04 00 Dwell B B B
*5
G07.1(G107) Cylindrical interpolation C C C
◤ G10 Programmable data input B B B
G11 Programmable data input cancel B B B
21 *5
G12.1(G112) Polar coordinate interpolation mode C C C
*5
◤ G13.1(G113) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode C C C
16 *4
G17 XpYp plane selection x x x
◤ G18 ZpXp plane selection B B B
G19 YpZp plane selection *4 x x x
G20 06 Inch data input B B B
G21 Metric data input B B B
◤ G22 09 Stored stroke limit function ON O O O
G23 Stored stroke limit function OFF O O O
◤ G25 08 Spindle speed fluctuation detect ON O O B
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detect OFF O O B
G27 00 Reference point return check B B B
G28 (G28.2) Automatic return to reference point B B B
*1 *1
G30 (G30.2) 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return B B B
G30.1 Floating reference point return O × ×
G31 Skip function B B B
G32 01 Thread cutting B B B
G34 Variable lead thread cutting O O B
G36 00 Automatic tool compensation X O O O
G37 Automatic tool compensation Z O O O
◤ G40 07 Tool nose radius compensation cancel B B B
G41 Tool nose radius compensation left B B B
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right B B B
00 Coordinate system setting/Max. spindle speed
G50 B B B
setting
G50.2 20
◤ Polygon machining cancel O*6 O O*7
(G250)
G51.2
Polygon machining O*6 O O*7
(G251)

4-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

Standard/
Option
G Codes Group Function
16i/18iT/30i/
21iT OiT
31i/32i
G52 00 Local coordinate system setting O O B
G53 Machine coordinate system selection O O B
◤ G54 14 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection B B B
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection B B B
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection B B B
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection B B B
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection B B B
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection B B B
G65 00 Macro call B B B
G66 12 Macro modal call B B B
◤ G67 Macro modal call cancel B B B
04 Opposed turret mirror image ON, or balance cutting
mode (WT, WY, WTW, WTS, STW, STS series,
G68 O*3 O x
NTJ, NTM3, NTY3 series, JX-250/NTJX/
NTMX/MX5/MX-100/NTX(W)/NTX(S)/NTXL)
Opposed turret mirror image ON, or balance cutting
mode cancel (WT, WY, WTW, WTS, STW, STS
◤ G69 O*3 O x
series, NTJ, NTM3, NTY3 series, JX-250/NTJX/
NTMX/MX5/MX-100/NTX(W)/NTX(S)/NTXL)
G70 00 Finishing cycle B B B
G71 Rough cutting cycle B B B
G72 Rough facing cycle B B B
G73 Pattern repeating cycle B B B
G74 Cutting-off cycle B B B
G75 Outer diameter grooving cycle B B B
G76 Compound-thread cutting cycle B B B
◤ G80 10 Drilling fixed cycle cancel C C C
G80.4 28 Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation O x x
G81.4 Electronic gear box: synchronization start O x x

4-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

Standard/
Option
G Codes Group Function
16i/18iT/30i/
21iT OiT
31i/32i
G83 10 Face drilling cycle C C C
G84 Face tapping cycle C C C
G85 Face boring cycle C C C
G87 Side face drilling cycle C C C
G88 Side face tapping cycle C C C
G89 Side face boring cycle C C C
G90 01 Outer/Internal diameter turning cycle B B B
G92 Thread cutting cycle B B B
G94 End face turning cycle B B B
G96 02 Constant surface speed control B B B
◤ G97 Constant surface speed control cancel B B B
G98 05 Per minute feed B B B
◤ G99 Per revolution feed B B B
*1 Only the second reference point is standard. The third and
fourth reference points are optional.
*2 This function is optional unless LUCK-BEI is attached.
*3 This function is standard with the WT, WY, WTW, WTS, STW,
STS series, NTJ, NTJ-100, NTM3, NTY3 series,
JX-250/NTJX/NTMX/MX5/MX-100/NTX(W)/NTX(S)/NTXL.
*4 XpYp plane selection, and YpZp plane selection are standard when
Y-axis is equipped with.
*5 This function is unavailable for TW-8.
*6 This function is standard with the STW, STS series, NTX(W),
NTX(S), and NTXL.
*7 This function is standard with the 0i-TD, 0i-TF, and 0i-TF Plus.
NOTE: Some G codes are standard or optional depending on the model of NC
lathe (with MATA-BEI, etc.) even when the same NC unit is used.
NOTE: Maximum spindle speed setting (G50) is valid when the constant sur-
face speed control is provided.
NOTE: The G codes marked with ◤ are set when the power is turned on.
NOTE: The G codes in the group 00 are not modal. They are effective only in
the block in which they are specified.
NOTE: An alarm occurs when an invalid G code is specified (P/S alarm No.
010).
NOTE: A number of G codes can be specified in the same block if they do not
belong to the same group. When a number of G codes of the same group
are specified in the same block, the G code specified last is effective.
NOTE: A G code from each group is displayed.
NOTE: G31, G36, and G37 cannot be used independently.

4-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

Table 4-2 G Code List for NT NURSE/LUCK-BEI/NC-GR

G code Unit Function

G131 NURSE Software work pusher cycle
G150 NURSE Tool setter cycle (tool setter motion)
G160 NURSE Tool setter cycle (tool breakage detection)
G196 NURSE Transfer function
G199 NURSE Turret head check function of program

G200 NURSE Spare tool indexing program command

G290 LUCK-BEI C-axis notch feed machining
G296 LUCK-BEI Transfer function

G300 NURSE Software cut-off check cycle (transfer type)

G301 NURSE Top-cut cycle (bar stopper)
G302 NURSE Top-cut cycle (cut-off)
G303 NURSE Bar stopper cycle
G304 NURSE Work pusher cycle
G305 NURSE Parts catcher cycle
G306 NURSE HAI-BEI cycle
G307 NURSE Spindle startup time program
G310 NAVI NT Work Navigator bar detecting function
G312 NAVI Work discrimination through NT Work Navigator bar position
Workpiece detection function only for SC series sub spindle A-axis in NT
G313 NAVI
work navigator
G316 NURSE High speed cutting feed mode ON
G317 NURSE High speed cutting feed mode OFF
G330 NURSE 2nd/3rd/4th reference point return
G333 NURSE Modal G code initialized function
G340 ATC tool exchange cycle
G341 ATC next tool standby
G342 Tool offset conversion function (tool spindle swing type)
G343 Simple tool center point control (tool spindle swing type)
G344 Tool offset conversion function (turret swing type)
G345 Simple tool center point control (turret swing type)
G350 NURSE Constant amount offset function (equal pitch)
G351 NURSE Constant amount offset function (optional amount)
G353 NURSE Load limit setting value renewal function for load monitor
G354 NURSE Work coordinate system shift amount modification function
G356 NURSE Acceleration/deceleration shock buffering mode ON
G357 NURSE Acceleration/deceleration shock buffering mode OFF

4-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

G code Unit Function

G358 3 dimensional coordinate conversion ON cycle (turret swing type)
G359 NURSE Optional axes torque restriction function
G360 Z-axis mirror image on cycle
G361 Z-axis mirror image off cycle
G362 Involute curve machining cycle
G367 Parts catcher (turret type) command
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion ON cycle (tool spindle swing
G368
type)
G369 Three-dimensional coordinate conversion off cycle
G370 NURSE Inclined surface circular arc machining cycle (CW)
G371 NURSE Inclined surface circular arc machining cycle (CCW)
G374 NURSE Precision drill breakage detection on
G375 NURSE Precision drill breakage detection off
G376 NURSE Software quill pusher start
G377 NURSE Software quill pusher reset
G378 NURSE Software sizing check
G379 NURSE Software cut-off check cycle (bar stopper type)
G380 NURSE Idling function
G383 NAVI NT Work Navigator deep-hole drilling cycle function
G398 NC-GR Definition of GR point data program
G399 NC-GR Definition of GR program

G411 Jump programming

G419 Arbitral angle command function for tool spindle orientation
G435 Tool center point control mode ON cycle
G436 Tool center point control mode OFF cycle
Program branch command G471 D(d) Q(q) I(i) :
G471 NURSE
when D(d)=Q(q), to sequence No.I
Program branch command G471 D(d) Q(q) P(p) :
NC-GR
when D(d)=Q(q), to sequence No.P
Program branch command G472 D(d) Q(q) I(i) :
G472 NURSE
when D(d)=/Q(q), to sequence No.I
Program branch command G472 D(d) Q(q) P(p) :
NC-GR
when D(d)=/Q(q), to sequence No.P
Program branch command G473 D(d) Q(q) I(i) :
G473 NURSE
when D(d)>=Q(q), to sequence No.I
Program branch command G473 D(d) Q(q) P(p) :
NC-GR
when D(d)>=Q(q), to sequence No.P
Program branch command G474 D(d) Q(q) I(i) :
G474 NURSE
when D(d)<=Q(q), to sequence No.I
Program branch command G474 D(d) Q(q) P(p) :
NC-GR
when D(d)<=Q(q), to sequence No.P
Program branch command G475 D(d) Q(q) I(i) :
G475 NURSE
when D(d)>Q(q), to sequence No.I

4-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

G code Unit Function

Program branch command G475 D(d) Q(q) P(p) :
NC-GR
when D(d)>Q(q), to sequence No.P
Program branch command G476 D(d) Q(q) I(i) :
G476 NURSE
when D(d)<Q(q), to sequence No.I
Program branch command G476 D(d) Q(q) P(p) :
NC-GR
when D(d)<Q(q), to sequence No.P

Program branch command G480 I(i) :

G480 NURSE
to sequence No.I
Program branch command G480 I(i) :
NC-GR
to sequence No.P
Program branch command G481 Q(q) R(r) I(i) :
G481 NURSE
when #q=#r, to sequence No.I
Program branch command G481 Q(q) R(r) P(p) :
NC-GR
when #q=#r, to sequence No.P
Program branch command G482 Q(q) R(r) I(i) :
G482 NURSE
when #q=/#r, to sequence No.I
Program branch command G482 Q(q) R(r) P(p) :
NC-GR
when #q=/#r, to sequence No.P
Program branch command G483 Q(q) R(r) I(i) :
G483 NURSE
when #q>=#r, to sequence No.I
Program branch command G483 Q(q) R(r) P(p) :
NC-GR
when #q>=#r, to sequence No.P
Program branch command G484 Q(q) R(r) I(i) :
G484 NURSE
when #q<=#r, to sequence No.I
Program branch command G484 Q(q) R(r) P(p) :
NC-GR
when #q<=#r, to sequence No.P
Program branch command G485 Q(q) R(r) I(i) :
G485 NURSE
when #q>#r, to sequence No.I
Program branch command G485 Q(q) R(r) P(p) :
NC-GR
when #q>#r, to sequence No.P
Program branch command G486 Q(q) R(r) I(i) :
G486 NURSE
when #q<#r, to sequence No.I
Program branch command G486 Q(q) R(r) P(p) :
NC-GR
when #q<#r, to sequence No.P

NOTE: G codes listed in Table 4-2 are commandable only when the following
optional functions are mounted. For details, refer to relevant instruc-
tion manuals as shown below:
NOTE: Be sure to command G codes of NT NURSE, NT Work Navigator, and
LUCK-BEI with a decimal point.
NOTE: Argument R (r) can be used for the argument D (d) of G471 to G476.

4-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

Unit Specification Reference

NURSE NT NURSE NT NURSE/NT Work Navigator instruction manual
NAVI NT Work Navigator NT NURSE/NT Work Navigator instruction manual
LUCK-BEI LUCK-BEI LUCK-BEI instruction manual
NC-GR NC-GR Gantry loader MON-BEI (NC type) instruction manual

4-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-1 Positioning (G00)

(1) Command format:
G00 X Z ; (G00 U W ;)
With this command, positioning is made to the point defined by (X, Z) at a
rapid traverse.
NOTE: If positioning is designated in the absolute mode, the coordinate system
must be established in a preceding block.
NOTE: The G00 command is modal, and remains valid until it is canceled by
another axis motion mode control G code.
NOTE: In the G00 positioning mode, axes move to the specified target position
at a rapid traverse. This means that the tool path from the present po-
sition to the target position is not always a straight line.
NOTE: In the G00 positioning mode, axes move depending on the following NC
parameter setting value.
P1401 b:tl
0:G00 is nonlinear interpolation positioning
1:G00 is linear interpolation positioning
NOTE: When three dimensional conversion function or manual handle retrace
function is used, linear interpolation positioning must be set.

4-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

• Program example (1)

G00 X50. Z0
X0
X40. Z2.
Z−20
X60. Z−40
Z−50
X80.
X100. Z20.

• Program example (2)

T____S____M____
G00 X40. Z5.
G01 Z−10. F0.2
X20.
Z−30.
X8.
G00 Z5.
X60. Z25.

4-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-2 Linear Interpolation (G01)

(1) Command format:
G01 X_____ Z_____F_____; (G01 U_____ W_____F_____;)
With this command, the cutting tool moves to the designated target point
along a straight path at the feedrate designated with an F word.
NOTE: In the G01 mode, a feedrate command must be designated using an F
word.
Feedrate may be designated in either “mm/min” mode or “mm/rev”
mode. If feedrate is designated in the “mm/rev” mode, the spindle must
be rotating.
NOTE: The G01 command is modal, and remains valid until it is canceled by
another axis motion mode control G code.
NOTE: Similarly, an F command is modal and may be omitted in the succeeding
blocks if the same feedrate is used. To change the feedrate, simply des-
ignate a required feedrate in the block where the feedrate is to be
changed.
• Program example
T_____S_____M_____; Designation of tool, spindle speed and rotating direction
G00 X40. Z5. M08; Rapid approach
G01 Z−12. F0.2 ; O.D. turning of 40 mm diameter
X50. Z−30.; Taper turning
Z−50. F0.3; O.D. turning of 50 mm diameter
X60.; Facing from 50 mm dia. to 60 mm dia.
Z−65.; O.D. turning of 60 mm diameter
X80.; Facing from 60 mm dia. to 80 mm dia.
X90. Z−70;. Chamfering (C2.5)
G00 X100. Z50.; Rapid retraction
M02; End of program

Fig. 4-1 Example of G01 Mode Program

4-11
C-NA104204-A2205
4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

NOTE: Due to a servo lag, a corner could be dulled. The tool may move inside
a specified tool path at rapid traverse rate as well.
If only the X-axis is moved in a block and only the Z-axis is moved in
the next block, then the Z-axis will accelerate during X-axis decelera-
tion and the tool path will be as shown below:

Fig. 4-2 Corner Dulling due to Servo Lag

In this case, in the block containing the corner, specifying a dwell (G04)
command allows the paths to be generated as programmed, thus elimi-
nating corner dulling.
• Program example:

G01 F0.2
X100.
G04 U0.1 ←Dwell
Z−50.

4-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-3 Feedrate Command (F Function)

Feedrates are designated using an address F, followed by a numeric value.
Axis feed designation is possible in two different modes:
they are feed per revolution mode (synchronous feed) and feed per minute mode
(asynchronous mode). With NC lathes, synchronous feed mode is generally
used.
4-3-1 Synchronous feed (Feed per revolution mode) (G99)
(1) Command format
G99;
G01 F ;
(2) Programmable range
F1 - F5000000 (0.0001 - 500.0000 mm/rev)
F1 - F9999999 (0.000001 - 9.999999 inch/rev)
(3) Restrictions on feedrate (F = feedrate, S = speed)

NOTE: The initial mode established when power is turned on is G99 mode as
set by a parameter.
NOTE: The G99 mode is modal, and remains valid until the mode is changed by
the G98 command which calls for the asynchronous feed mode.
NOTE: Programmed feedrates can be overridden in the range of 0 to 150% in
increments of 10%, using a feed override switch.
NOTE: In the G99 mode, an F command is valid only while the spindle is ro-
tating.
4-3-2 Asynchronous feed (Feed per minute mode) (G98)
(1) Command format
G98;
G01 F ;
(2) Programmable range
F1 - F4800 (Metric)
F1 - F18897 (Inch)
NOTE: The G98 mode is modal, and remains valid until the mode is changed by
the G99 command which calls for the synchronous feed mode.
NOTE: Programmed feedrates can be overridden in the range of 0 to 150% in
increments of 10%, using a feed override switch.
NOTE: In the G98 mode, an F command is valid regardless of the spindle ro-
tating state.
NOTE: In the G98 mode, the least input increment for F commands is
“mm/inch”. Not necessary to input a decimal point.

4-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-4 Automatic Chamfering, Corner Rounding, and Direct Input of Drawing Di-
mensions
“Automatic chamfering and corner R” and “direct input of drawing dimensions”
cannot be selected simultaneously. Therefore, it is necessary to set either of these
functions on the setting screen. When using these functions, check the setting
screen and set the function to use. If no display for setting appears on the setting
screen, set by the parameter setting. Refer to the description below.

• Setting screen

• NC parameter setting
NO. 3453#0 0: Automatic chamfering or corner R is enabled.
1: Direct input of drawing dimensions is enabled.

4-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-4-1 Automatic chamfering or corner rounding

(1) Automatic chamfering
It is possible to automatically chamfer the corner in the G01 mode operation.
• Command format
G01 X_____K_____F_____
(Z_____) (I_____)

Definition of the words

X and Z :End point, assuming that the chamfering is not executed.
I and K : Designate the chamfering amount in radius. The sign indicates
the axis motion direction in the next block. Designate I______
to move the axis in the X-axis positive direction in the next
block. Designate K-______ to move the axis in the Z-axis
negative direction.

(2) Corner R
It is possible to automatically round the corner in the G01 mode operation.
• Command format
G01 X_____R_____F_____
(Z_____)

Definition of the words

X and Z: End point, assuming that the corner rounding is not executed.
R: Designate the corner R in radius. The sign indicates the axis
motion direction in the next block.

Fig. 4-3 Definition of Chamfering and Corner Rounding

4-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

• Program examples
<Example 1>
N1 G01 Z−40. I3.;
N2 X50. R−5.;
N3 Z−70.;

<Example 2>
N1 G01 Z−50. R−3.;
N2 X30. K−5.;
N3 Z−80.;

<Example 3>
T0101 S_____M_____;
G00 X110. Z5.;
G01 Z−30. I5. F_____;
X140. R−5.;
Z−60. R5.;
X180. K−5.;
Z−80.;
G00 X_____Z_____;
:
:
T0202 S_____M_____;
G00 X80. Z5.;
G01 Z−30. I−5. F_____;
X50. R−5.;
Z−60. R−5.;
X20. K−5.;
Z−70.;
G00 X_____Z_____;

4-16
C-NA104204-A2205
4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

NOTE: Designate I, K, and R values in radius.

NOTE: Chamfering and corner rounding are possible for the G01 mode blocks
that call for motion of a single axis; if the first block calls for X-axis
motion then the next block must call for Z-axis motion, for example.
NOTE: Following programming is not allowed:
a) Designation of an I, K, or R word in a block that contains both X
and Z axes (alarm No. 054).
b) Designation of an I, K, or R word, defining chamfering or corner
rounding amount greater than X and/or Z-axis motion amount
(alarm No. 055).
c) Designation of an I, K, or R word in the block that is not followed
by axis motion, right angle to the preceding block axis motion, in
the G01 mode (alarm No. 051, 052).
d) Designation of I, K, and R words in the same block; any combina-
tion of these three words is not allowed (alarm No. 053).
NOTE: In actual programming, nose R must be taken into consideration.
NOTE: Chamfering and corner rounding cannot be used in a thread cutting
block.
NOTE: Address C may be used to designate chamfering if optional C-axis is not
selected. To use a C word, it is necessary to change the setting for a
system parameter.

4-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-4-2 Direct input of drawing dimensions

Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, and corner R calues, and other dimen-
sional values on machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting
these values.

(1) Command format

G01 X_____,A_____ F_____
(Z_____)(,C_____)
(,R_____)

X and Z : End point at which the chamfering and corner rounding are
executed
,A : Designate the angle of chamfering amount.
,C : Designate the chamfering value.
,R : Designate the corner rounding value.

• Program examples
<Example >

4-18
C-NA104204-A2205
4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

NOTE: Direct drawing dimension programming commands are valid only dur-
ing the memory operation.
NOTE: Some G codes are not applicable to the same block as commanded by
direct input of drawing dimensions or between blocks of direct input of
drawing dimensions which define sequential figures. For details, refer
to the FANUC instruction manual.
NOTE: Corner R function cannot be used in the threading block.
NOTE: If two or more blocks with no move command are specified between se-
quential commands of direct drawing dimension programming, alarm
PS0312 is issued.

4-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-5 Circular Interpolation (G02, G03)

A circular arc cutting is possible using the G02 or G03 command.
(1) Command format
G02/G03 X Z R F ; or
G02/G03 X Z I K F ;
G02 . . .Clockwise circular arc
G03 . . .Counterclockwise circular arc
(2) Definition of the words
X and Z : Designate the end point coordinate of the circular arc.
R : Designate the radius of the circular arc.
I : Designate the distance (signed length), in the X-axis
direction, from the start point of the circular arc to
the center.
An I word uses an incremental value, and the value
to be designated is a radius value.
K : Designate the distance (signed length), in the Z-axis
direction, from the start point of the circular arc to
the center.
A K word uses an incremental value.
F : Designate the feedrate tangential to the arc being
cut.
NOTE: G02 and G03 are modal.

Fig. 4-4 Arc Cutting Direction

4-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

(3) Simple program examples

Fig. 4-5 Simple Program Examples

• Program example

T0505 S2500 M03;

G00 X8. Z5. M08;
G01 X20. Z−1. F0.2;
Z−10.;
G02 X40. Z−20. R10.;
G01 Z−30. S1800;
G02 X40. Z−50. R15.;
G01 Z−58.;
G02 X44. Z−60. R2.;
G01 X57.;
G00 X150. Z100.;
T0500;
M30;

NOTE: I0 and K0 may be omitted.

NOTE: If both X and Z are omitted, or when the designated end point is the
same point as the start point, the following occurs depending on wheth-
er I and K words are used or an R word is used:
a) I and K words are used to define the center
A full circle is defined.
G02 I_____;
b) If an R word is used
The defined arc has 0 degree center angle. That is, no tool motion
occurs.
G02 R_____;

4-21
C-NA104204-A2205
4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

NOTE: If I, K and R words are designated in the same block, the circular arc is
defined using the R word and both I and K words are ignored.
NOTE: If the error between the radius calculated at the start point of the arc
and that calculated at the end point of the arc is greater than 0.01 mm,
an alarm is generated.

4-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-6 Dwell (G04)

Using this command, execution of a program is suspended for the specified length
of time.
(1) Command format
G04 U_____ ; or G04 X_____ ; or G04 P_____;
(2) Programmable range

Table 4-3 Programmable Range for Dwell Function

Address Programmable Range Range of Specified Time

U U0 - U9999.999 0 - 9999.999 seconds
X X0 - X9999.999 0 - 9999.999 seconds
P P0 - P9999999 0 - 9999.999 seconds
• Program example
G50 X200. Z100.;
T0404 S700 M03;
G00 X55. Z−18. M08;
G01 X44. F0.08;
G04 U0.5;
Tool stops at the button
of groove for 0.5 seconds
to stop the button of
groove.
G01 X55. F0.3;
G00 X200. Z100.;
T0400;
M01;

NOTE: The G04 command is not modal and valid only the block where it is
specified.
NOTE: Address P cannot be input with a decimal point.

4-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-7 Zero Point Return

The “zero point return” means automatic return of the cutting tool to the fixed
reference point (also called zero point) specific to individual machines.
This function is used to check the coordinate system during machining and to ex-
ecute positioning for carrying out specific machine operation.
4-7-1 Automatic return to reference point (G28)
(1) Command format
G28 X (U) Z (W) ;
The cutting tool automatically returns to the zero point via the point desig-
nated in the G28 block.
• Program example

NOTE: Before executing the automatic zero point return, it is necessary to can-
cel the tool offset and the nose R compensation function in a preceding
block.
NOTE: The dimension words (X and Z, or U and W) designated in the G28
block define a point where the cutting tool is once positioned on the way
to the zero point. A point beyond the zero point cannot be designated.

4-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-7-2 In-position check invalid reference point return (G28.2)

G28.2 command (in-position check invalid reference point return) can be used in-
stead of G28 command.
G28.2 command invalidates in-position check. Therefore, the exection time be-
comes faster than G28 command, and the cycle time is shortened.

NOTE: The execution start timing of the next block of G28.2 will be earlier because the
in-position check is invalid. Be careful of interference when using G28.2 com-
mand. For other cautios, refer to the instruction manual of the NC unit.
NOTE: G30.2 command can be used instead of G30 command (2nd, 3rd, 4th reference
point return).
NOTE: G28.2/G30.2 command cannot be used depending on the NC unit and se-
ries/edition of the system software.See the following.

NC unit Available software edition

FS16iTB B1HA: 06 edition or higher
B1HK/B1HU/B1K1/B1N1: first edition or higher
FS18iTB BEHA: 06 edition or higher
BEHK/BEHU/BEK1/BEN1: first edition or higher
FS21iTB DEHA: 06 edition or higher
DEHK/DEHU/DEK1/DEN1: first edition or higher
FS31iA G101/G111: 39.0 edition or higher
G103/G113: 22.0 edition or higher
Series other than the above: first edition or higher
FS0iTD first edition or higher
FS0iTF first edition or higher
FS31iB/32iB first edition or higher

4-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

4-8 Thread Cutting (G32)

By designating the G32 mode, thread cutting is possible in synchronous with
spindle rotation at the designated lead.
(1) Command format
G32 X_____ Z_____ F_____;
(2) Definition of the words
X and Z : Designate the coordinates of the end point of
threading operation.
F : Designate the thread lead directly.
(3) Simple thread cutting programs
•Straight thread cutting •Tapered thread cutting •Face thread cutting
G32 Z_____F_____ G32 X_____Z_____F_____ G32 X_____F_____

• Program example
T0808 S1000 M03;
G00 X45. Z5. M08;
X39.3;
G32 Z−32. F2.;
G00 X45.;
Z5.;
X38.7;
G32 Z−32.;
G00 X45.;
Z5.;
X38.2;
G32 Z−32.;
G00 X45.;
Z5.;
X37.8;
G32 Z−32.;
G00 Z−45.;
Z5.;
X37.4;
G32 Z−32.;
G00 X45.;
G00 X100. Z50.;
T0800;
M02;
NOTE: Thread lead should be designated in a radius value.
NOTE: In the G32 mode, thread cutting pattern is not repeated.

4-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

NOTE: For the thread lead, designate the lead along the Z-axis if the thread
tapered angle is less than 45°. If the tapered angle is 45° to 90°,
designate the lead along the X-axis.
NOTE: For cutting TPI thread, calculate the pitch between the threads in “mm”
in units of 1/10000 mm and designate the result of calculation following
address F.
To cut 14 TPI thread, designate as F1.8143.
(4) Thread cutting using a tapper
The G32 command is also used for cutting thread using a tapper. Usually, a
floating tap holder is used.
• Program example

T1111 S100 M03;

G00 X0 Z5. M08;
*G32 Z−20. F1.5 M05;
*G00 W5.;
G01 Z10. F1.5 S300 M04;
G00 X80. Z50.;
T1100 M05;
M01;

If the program indicated above is executed in the single block mode, the
blocks indicated by an asterisk (*) are executed continuously in a single
pressing of the cycle start switch.

4-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

MEMO

4-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

For the control of spindle rotation, programming is different between the machine
models depending on whether the machine requires the selection of spindle drive
gear range or not.

Single machine M03 FWD. rotation

spindle M04 RVS. rotation
or L-spindle M05 Stop rotating
M88 FWD. rotation (Straight holder)
Upper turret
M89 RVS. rotation
driven tool
M90 Stop rotationg

M53 FWD. rotation

R-spindle M54 RVS. rotation
M55 Stop rotationg
M488 FWD. rotation (Straight holder)
Lower turret
M489 RVS. rotation
driven tool
M490 Stop rotating

NOTE: Command spindle rotation command M codes (except M codes to stop)

with S code in the same block.
Bad example: M3; Good example: M3 S100;
S100;
NOTE: The rotating direction of rotary tools in upper and lower turrets is
shown below.
FWD.: Straight holder direction
RVS.: Cross holder direction

5-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

5-1 Spindle Rotation Command

(1) Command format
M S
Designate a required spindle speed in up to 4 digits following address S.
To rotate the spindle at 563 min-1, for example, simply designate S563.
Similarly, to rotate the spindle at 3200 min-1, designate S3200.
An S command is modal.
If a designated spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed available in the
currently selected gear range, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum
speed. The maximum and minimum spindle speeds in each gear range are
set for parameter.

(2) Programmable spindle speed range

NOTE: This table shows the standard spindle speeds. These values may change
depending on the increased power or bore size as well as other optional
functions.
Model S Command Spindle Speed Range
TMC-18 S90 to S3000 90 to 3000 min-1
AS-200 S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
SC-100 S50 to S5000 50 to 5000 min-1
SC-100X2 S60 to S6000 60 to 6000 min-1
SC-200 S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
SC-250 S50 to S5000 50 to 5000 min-1
SC-300 S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
SC-300II S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
SC-300IIL S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
SC-450 S25 to S2500 25 to 2500 min-1
TW-10 S55 to S5500 55 to 5500 min-1
TW-20 S50 to S5000 50 to 5000 min-1
TW-30 S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
WT-250 (II) S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
WTW-150 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
WTS-150 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
STW-40 S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
STS-40 S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
WT-150(II)
S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
(Including Super Mill model)
Super NTJ S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
Super NTM3 S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
Super NTX S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
WT-300 S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
SC-150II S60 to S6000 60 to 6000 min-1
WT-100 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
Super NTY3 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
NTY3-100 S60 to S6000 60 to 6000 min-1
NTY3-150 S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
Super NTJX S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
TW-8 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1

5-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

Model S Command Spindle Speed Range

SC-200L
S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
(Including Super Mill model)
WY-250
S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
(Including Super Mill model)
NTXL S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
NTY3 Jumbo S35 to S3500 35 to 3500 min-1
NTMX S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
NTMXL S50 to S5000 50 to 5000 min-1
MX-5 S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
MX-100 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
WY-100 S45 to S6000 45 to 6000 min-1
WY-100II S60 to S6000 60 to 6000 min-1
WY-150 S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
WY-250L
S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
(Including Super Mill model)
SC-450L S25 to S2500 25 to 2500 min-1
NTX(II) S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
NTY3-250 S45 to S5000 45 to 5000 min-1
NTJ-100 S42 to S6000 42 to 6000 min-1
SC-450LL S25 to S2500 25 to 2500 min-1
NTRX-300 S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
NTRX-300L S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1
JX-250 S45 to S4500 45 to 4500 min-1

• Program example
N1
T0101 S1800 M03; Designates spindle speed
and rotating direction
G00 X80. Z0.8;
G01 X20. F0.3;
G00 X75. Z2. S1500; Changes spindle speed
G01 X95. Z−40.;
G00 X80. Z0;
S1000 M04; Changes spindle speed
and rotating direction
G01 X60.;
NOTE: When specifying spindle rotation command and rotary tool spindle rota-
tion command in succession in the same program, be sure to specify
spindle rotation command after rotary tool spindle rotation command. If
specifying these commands in the wrong order, the speed command (”S”
command) issued later may be transmitted to the preceding spindle.
It is disabled to specify spindle rotation command and MATA-BEI rota-
tion command in succession regardless of the specifying order.
<Example of Correct Programming>
Spindle and rotary spindle MATA-BEI and rotary spindle
M88 S1000; M88 S1000;
M03 S100; M53 S100;

<Example of Wrong Programming>

Spindle and rotary spindle MATA-BEI and rotary spindle
M03 S100; M53 S100;
M88 S1000; M88 S1000;

5-3
C-NA104204-A2205
5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

Spindle and rotary spindle MATA-BEI and rotary spindle

M03 S100; M53 S100;
M488 S1000; M488 S1000;

Spindle and MATA-BEI Spindle and MATA-BEI

M03 S100; M53 S100;
M53 S1000; M03 S1000;

5-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

5-2 Constant Surface Speed Control

In the constant surface speed mode, required surface speed (cutting speed) can be
directly specified following address S. In this mode, spindle speed is controlled
in response to the changes in cutting tool position so that the cutting speed at the
cutting tool position is maintained to the specified surface speed.
(1) Command format
G96 S M ;
(2) Programming clamp speed
G50 S ;
In the constant surface speed control mode, spindle speed increases as the
cutting tool moves towards the center of the workpiece.
To ensure safe operation, the allowable maximum spindle speed can be des-
ignated in the format as indicated above. With this the spindle speed is
clamped at the specified speed if the spindle has to rotate at a speed exceed-
ing this limit to provide the designated surface speed.
The parameter set maximum and minimum spindle speeds restrict this setting
and, therefore, setting a speed beyond this limit is not valid.

• Program example
N_____M_____;
G50 S_____; *1
G96 T_____S_____M_____; *2
G00 X_____Z_____;
:
G01 X_____Z_____ F_____;
G50 S_____; *3
G97 S_____; *4
*1: Designates the maximum spindle speed in the constant surface speed con-
trol mode
*2: Designates the constant surface speed control mode
*3: Changes the maximum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control
mode
*4: Cancels the constant surface speed control mode

5-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

NOTE1: To execute a program in the constant surface speed control mode, it is

necessary to establish a coordinate system in which the workpiece cen-
ter take coordinate value of X0.
NOTE2: If a program is executed with the machine lock switch on, spindle speed
is calculated in response to the changes in the X coordinate values alt-
hough the axes are not moved actually.
NOTE3: The G50 S command is modal and remains valid until new G50 S
is designated.
NOTE4: For thread cutting, drilling, reaming, and tapping operations, the con-
stant surface speed control is not usually designated.
NOTE5: In the rapid traverse (G00) mode, the spindle speed is calculated based
on the X coordinate value of the target point for positioning. Therefore,
the spindle speed is not controlled during G00 mode positioning opera-
tion.
NOTE6: When the spindle speed control mode is changed from the G96 mode to
the G97 mode, and if no spindle speed is designated in the G97 mode,
the spindle speed calculated last while the spindle is controlled in the
G97 mode is used as the spindle speed for the G97 mode.
Conversely, if the mode is changed from the G97 mode to the G96 mode,
the S value designated in the G96 mode is valid. If no S command is
designated, 0 min-1 is assumed.

5-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

5-3 Limitation on the G96 mode (Constant surface control function)

5-3-1 WT-150, WT-250, Super-NTJ, NTJ-100, STS-40, STW-40, NTX:
Machines equipped with 16/18iTB control
During G96 mode, the spindle speed doesn’t change for 0.5sec, only when fol-
lowing operation is executed.
(1) WT-150, WT-250, Super-NTJ, NTJ-100, STS-40, NTX(S)
During G96 mode between Upper unit and Sub-spindle (R-spindle), Milling
rotating M-code has been commanded from Lower unit with Main spindle.

(2) STW-40,NTX(W)
During G96 mode between Lower-L unit and L-spindle, Milling rotating
M-code has been commanded on Upper unit.
The spindle speed has clamped. Constant surface control function becomes
effective. Although processing is continued, it has influence on a pro-
cessing side.
When a processing side is anxious, please check whether the spindle speed is
clamped or not in the following M-code.

• M-codes
M416 Constant surface control monitoring function ON
M417 Constant surface control monitoring function OFF

When constant surface control monitoring function is effective, spindle

speed doesn’t changed in G96 Mode, alarm A343 will be generated.
Use waiting M-code to change the timing of Milling rotation M-code.

• Program example
:
M416;
:
(Machining with G96 mode)
:
M417;
:
End of explanation

5-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

5-3-2 Winding change motor type

Usually, winding change motor is automatic change for the main spindle speed.
When using constant surface control function, the main spindle motor is fixed to
“High speed winding”.
If you need low speed, must be command following M-codes.
During G96mode, “Low speed winding”, max speed is clamping on low speed
mode max rotations.
Please refer to the operation manual of each machine “Torque-output characteris-
tic figure”.

• M-codes
M770 (L-unit) spindle winding fix (low speed mode)
M772 (L-unit) spindle winding fix release
M730 (R-unit) spindle winding fix (low speed mode) *
M732 (R-unit) spindle winding fix release *
NOTE: STS-40, STW-40 (Upper/Lower R), NTX(S), NTX(W)(Upper/Lower R),
NTXL (Upper/Lower R), NTX(II), NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, JX-250,
WTS-150 (Lower),WT-300, WY-250, and SC-150II(OPTION) only.

• Program example
:
M770; (Spindle winding fix
(low speed mode))
G96 M03 S_____; (Designates the constant
surface speed control
mode: ON)
:
(Machining) Low speed
:
winding mode
G97; (Cancels the constant
surface speed control
mode: OFF)
M772; (Spindle winding fix release)

5-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

• PMC parameter
ES4043(D4043) ; Main spindle is winding change motor type.
On the G96 mode (constant surface control)
0 : Automatic change
1 : Fix, high speed mode (standard setting)

D292 : ( L side, ) max spindle speed ( low speed winding ) *

D2292 : R side, max spindle speed ( low speed winding )

NOTE: * When WTW-150 is used, L/R is set as D292.

NOTE: When using spindle synchronization system and rigid tapping, the main
spindle motor is clamped at high speed winding regardless of specified
M-code.

5-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 5 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMAND

MEMO

5-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

Turret indexing and tool offset are programmed in the following format.
(1) Command format
T □ □ □ □
Tool offset number (geometry/wear offset)
Tool number (turret station number)

In the 4 digits of numeric value following the address T, the first 2 digits
designate the tool number (turret number) and the last 2 digits the tool offset
number.
• Tool indexing • Tool offset
T01□□ T□□01
T12□□ T□□16
T□□00 Cancellation of tool offset
NOTE: Although the T code is usually a 4-gidit command as mentioned above,
it may become a 6-digit command depending on a specification as
shown in (4).
In detail, refer to “(4) T code 6-digit specification”.
(2) Tool offset
(a) Due to an error in the mounting of a cutting tool in the turret, tool wear,
tool insert replacement, etc., actual tool nose position generates tool
paths offset from the programmed tool paths. The tool offset function
zeros this offset so that the tool nose can always generate the tool paths
as programmed.
For example, if the workpiece is finished at 62 mm diameter (O.D.)
while it is programmed as X60., this error amount is input to the X off-
set data as “-2 mm” to eliminate the error.
In other words, the tool nose generates tool paths 2 mm offset from the
previous tool paths so that the new paths coincide with the programmed
tool paths.
Therefore, by entering a tool offset number in a program for the cutting
tools that are used for machining a portion requiring high accuracy, in-
put a proper offset value when the program is executed to machine
workpieces.
(b) Designate T□□00 to cancel the tool offset function or if the function
should not be used.

6-1
C-NA104204-A2205
6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

(c) There are two methods of tool offset. The command format as shown in
(1) is currently used. However, some models use the following com-
mand format.
T □ □ □ □
Tool wear offset number

Tool number (turret station number)

and
Tool geometry offset number
Either of the two methods can be selected by modifying the following
NC parameter.
No. 5002 bit 1 = 1 (above method)
= 0 (method as described in (1))
(d) The tool geometry offset is a method of changing the absolute coordi-
nate system and the tool wear offset is a method of moving the feed axis
by the offset amount while keeping the absolute coordinate system un-
changed. Therefore, the T code may not be completed if it is com-
manded while data on the tool wear offset amount is input. This is be-
cause the movement by the offset amount cannot be done unless the
spindle is rotating in the feed per revolution mode (G99). Change to the
feed per minute mode (G98) or rapid traverse mode (G00) in such a
case.
Normally, G00 should be designated in the same line as T code.
• Program example
G00 T01 01 S200 M03;
Tool offset number “01” is used
Tool number “01” is indexed

X100. Z1.;
G01 X20. F0.3;
G00 X200. Z180.;
T0100; Cancels the tool offset function
M02;

6-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

(e) Tool paths with tool offset

Tool paths vary according to the set tool offset values as indicated fol-
lowing examples.

• Program example (1)

G00 T0101 S1000 M03;

X50. Z5.;
G01 Z−40. F0.3;
X80. Z−50.;
Z−60.;
X140. Z−160.;
G00 X150. Z100.;
T0100;
M01;

• Program example (2)

G00 T0505 S1000 M03;
X50. Z5.;
G01 Z−40. F0.3;
T0500;
X80. Z−50.;
T0515;
Z−60.;
X140. Z−160. T0500;
Z−200. T0516;
G00 X150. Z100.;
T0500;
M01;

NOTE: If a T code is designated in a block independently, axes will move cor-

responding to the designated tool offset even if an axis motion command
is not given. The axis will move at a rapid traverse if the block is gov-
erned in the G00 mode. In other modes, the axis moves at a cutting
feedrate.
NOTE: When setting the coordinate with G50 command, always cancel the tool
offset function after the completion of the processes for which the des-
ignated tool is used. If a new process is executed without canceling the
tool offset function, the new process is executed while the offset amount,
set for the previous tool, remains valid for the new tool.
NOTE: Be sure not to command G53 with T code in the same block. Abrasion
offset may not be validated.

6-3
C-NA104204-A2205
6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

(3) 24-station turret feature

24-station turret is indexed by 30 degrees. The intermediate index positions
of 12 stations are used as No. 13 to No. 24 stations. Tool holders applicable
for those intermediate stations are required.
(a) Indexing intermediate stations
For automatic operation, make a command in the same method as for
12-station turret:
Example “T13 □□”, “T24 □□”.
Station No. 13 is located between station No. 1 and No. 2.
Station No. 14 is located between station No. 2 and No. 3.
For manual operation, stations can be indexed only in zero return mode.

(4) T code 6-digit specification

The digit command of T code is usually “4-digit command”, but only when
the specification of tool offset number is over 100 according to the number
of ATC tools, the digit command will be “6-digit command”.
T □□□ □□□
Tool offset number (geometry/wear offset)
Tool number

In the 6 digits of numeric value following the address T, the first 3 digits
designate the tool number (turret number) and the last 3 digits the tool offset
number.
• Tool indexing • Tool offset
T001□□□ T□□□001
T024□□□ T□□□100
T120□□□ T□□□000 Cancellation of tool offset
NOTE: In the case of T code 6-digit specification, it is possible to change the T
code into 4-digit specification by setting the following NC parameter.
e.g.) To also set only lower turret with the T code 6-digit specification
in the series of NTX, NTXL, STW and STS, use the following
NC parameter setting.
• P5040 bit 1 When the tool offset number is over 100;
0: T code 6-digit specification
1: T code 4-digit specification

• P3032 T code maximum digits

6: T code 6-digit specification
4: T code 4-digit specification

• P3116 bit 6 T code modal display digits

1: T code 6-digit specification
0: T code 4-digit specification

6-4
C-NA104204-A2205
6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

[SUPPLEMENTAL REMARKS]
For the NT NURSE or LUCK-BEI, the following tool functions can be used when
required. For details of each function, refer to the instruction manual for NT
NURSE.
(1) Tool counter function
For controlling each tool life (number of uses, cutting time, cutting dis-
tance)
(a) Spare tool indexing function
For continuing machining until previously registered spare tools are all
used up (until each service life expires)
(b) Quick tool offset (wear) function
For ensuring quick and correct input of an offset amount for wear on the
special screen
(c) Load monitor function
For monitoring a cutting load of each tool and stopping the machine if it
exceeds a preset limit.

6-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 6 TOOL INDEXING AND TOOL OFFSET (T FUNCTION)

MEMO

6-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

The miscellaneous function is also called the M function, which designate various
auxiliary operations with 2 to 4 digits of numeric value following address M.
7-1 M-code List
(WT series, WY series, SC series, AS-200, AS-200L, TMC series)
☆ mark indicates option.
T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
M00 Program stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M01 Optional stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M02 End of program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spindle start
M03 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(forward direction)
Spindle start
M04 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(reverse direction)
M05 Spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Coolant start
M07 (low pressure cool- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ant)
Coolant start
M08 (high pressure cool- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ant)
Coolant stop
M09 (low/high pressure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
coolant)
M10 Chuck close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M00 M11 Chuck open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
to
M99 Tailstock body ad-
M12 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M21
vance
Tailstock body re-
M13 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M22
tract
Tailstock quill ad-
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M12
vance
M14
Internal spindle air
blow ON
Tailstock quill retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M13
M15
Internal spindle air
blow OFF
Spindle orientation
M18 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
cancel
M19 Spindle orientation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M20 Fixed air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M21 Fixed air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Spindle speed arrival
M22 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ M17
signal ignore
M23 Chamfering ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
M24 Chamfering OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M25 Error detect ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M26 Error detect OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M27 Dry run ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M28 Dry run OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M29 Rigid tapping mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Memory mode oper-
M30 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ation reset&restart
Workpiece conveyor
M31
start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MATA-BEI or R-unit
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M32
spindle lock ON
Automatic partition
open
MATA-BEI or R-unit
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M33
spindle lock OFF
Automatic partition
close
Internal spindle air
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
blow ON
M00 M36
Coolant blow for
to internal spindle ON
Internal spindle air
M99 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
blow OFF
M37
Coolant blow for
internal spindle OFF
Spindle selection
M41 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(C-axis OFF)
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M48 spindle internal ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
spindle air blow ON
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M49 spindle internal ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
spindle air blow OFF
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M50 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ M51
chuck close
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M51 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ M50
chuck open
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M53 spindle start (forward ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
direction)
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M54 spindle start (reverse ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
direction)
MATA-BEI or R-unit
M55 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
spindle stop

7-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
Turret or Tool spin-
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
dle air blow ON
M56
ZEN-BEI retract for
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
double-pushing
Turret or Tool spin-
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M57 dle air blow OFF
ZEN-BEI retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FMB bar change
M58 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
command
M59 HAN-BEI air blow
M60 Tool setter air blow ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ M64
Auto bar ad-
vance/LNS sprint bar
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M78
operation end con-
M61 firmation
ZEN-BEI workpiece
material feed com- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mand
M62 Automatic door open ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M63 Automatic door close ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M65 Tool setter advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M00 M66 Tool setter retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Auto bar advance 2
to M67 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M79
(OFF)
M99 Parts catcher ad-
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M73
vance
M68 L-side turret parts
catcher chute ad- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M73
vance
Parts catcher retract
(work counter data ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M74
increment)
M69 L-side turret parts
catcher chute retract
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M74
(work counter data
increment)
X-axis interlock ig-
M70 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
nore ON
X-axis interlock ig-
M71 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
nore OFF
Synchronization
position setting
M72 (Synchronization ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
completion inter-
lock)
M73 HAI-BEI advance
M74 HAI-BEI retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
R-unit automatic
M75
start (L-unit)

7-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
Drill breakage de-
M76 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tector advance
Drill breakage de-
M77 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tector retract
IEMCA bar opera-
M81 tion end confirma- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M80
tion
Chuck pressure
M82 change to low pres- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
sure
Chuck pressure
M83 change to high pres- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
sure
Cut-off checker ad-
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
vance
M84 Eject check-
er/Forcible discharge
unit advance
Cut-off checker re-
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tract
M85 Eject checker / For-
cible discharge unit
retract
M00
to M86 Spindle lock ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M99
M87 Spindle lock OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Rotary tool spindle
M88 start (forward direc- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion)
Rotary tool spindle
M89 start (reverse direc- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion)
Rotary tool spindle
M90 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
stop
C-axis selection
M91 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(C-axis connection)
Quill pressure
change to low pres- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
sure
M92
Spindle phase syn-
chronization control ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ON
Quill pressure
change to normal ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
pressure
M93
Spindle phase syn-
chronization control ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF

7-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
Side tapping cycle
M94 ON (rotary tool re- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
verse rotation)
OT interlock ignore
(-Z direction) (when
the chuck is closed)
M95
Side tapping cycle
OFF (rotary tool
M00 reverse rotation)
to
M99 Spindle speed syn-
M96 chronization control ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ON (MATA-BEI)
Spindle speed syn-
M97 chronization control ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
cancel (MATA-BEI)
M98 Sub-program call ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M99 End of sub program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M100 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆
to to
M100
to M111 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆
M199
to to
M199 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆
DNC control by
DNC
control
M200 memory card ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sub program call

7-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
Spindle/rotary tool
spindle stop (no con-
M205 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
firmation of spindle
stop)
MATA-BEI spindle
M255 stop (no confirma- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion of spindle stop)
ZEN-BEI retract for
second pushing (no
M256 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
confirmation of
spindle stop)
ZEN-BEI retract (no
M257 confirmation of ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
spindle stop)
Automatic door open
(no confirmation of
M262 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
door open end com-
pletion)
M20 Automatic door close
1 to (no confirmation of
M29
M263 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
door close end com-
9
pletion)
Parts catcher ad-
vance (no confirma-
M268 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M273
tion in the most ad-
vanced position)
Parts catcher retract
(no confirmation in
M269 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M274
the most retracted
position)
Forcible ejector ad-
vance (no confirma-
M284
tion of the advanced
end position)
Rotary tool spindle
M290 stop (no confirma- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion of spindle stop)
C-axis selection (no
M291 confirmation of ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
C-axis connection)

7-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
Motor load detection
M300 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
valid
Motor load detection
M301 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
invalid
Tool counter invalid
M302 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(one-shot)
M303 Tool counter valid ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M304 Tool counter invalid ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
In-position check
M310 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
valid at rapid feed
In-position check
M311 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
invalid at rapid feed
Confirmation of
parts catcher type G
M312 ejection cycle com- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
pletion (For
30/31/32i series)
Confirmation of
PCD ejection cycle
M313
completion (For
30/31/32i series)
M30
0 to
M code for GR
M39 M358 start/Parts catcher ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
9
type C
M359 HAN-BEI air blow ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Chatter Canceller
M365 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
function ON
Chatter Canceller
M366 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
function OFF
Parts catcher
M368 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
“B”/”G” cycle
Parts catcher “D”
M369
cycle
M code for Y-axis
machining mode
cancel (LUCK-BEI),
M370 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
including Y-axis
reference point re-
turn
M code for Y-axis
machining mode
M371 (LUCK-BEI), in- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
cluding Y-axis ref-
erence point return

7-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L
Travel command of
B2-axis
M372 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(for parts catcher
type G)
Magazine index
M376 command for drill
M30
0 to breakage detection
M39 Drill breakage detec-
9
M377 tion (Transmission
sensor type)
MATA-BEI spindle
M397
ON (LUCK-BEI)
MATA-BEI spindle
M398
OFF (LUCK-BEI)
Tool life count re-
M400
sume
M401 Cycle stop detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M402 Auto door unlock ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI C-axis
M403 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
brake off mode ON
MATA-BEI C-axis
M404 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
brake off mode OFF
Cut-off machining
M405 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
completion
Feed per minute
enable mode ON
M408 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
during a milling stop
(C-axis connection)
M40 Feed per minute
0
to enable mode OFF
M409 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M49 during a milling stop
9
(C-axis connection)
Z-axis load monitor-
M410 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ing function ON
Z-axis load monitor-
M411 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ing function OFF
Spindle position
M414 coder selection in ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
opposite side
Waiting with RZ
M415 intermediate position
passage confirmation
Constant surface
speed control mode
M416 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
monitoring function
ON

7-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Constant surface
speed control mode
M417 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
monitoring function
OFF
MATA-BEI or
M418 R-unit spindle orien- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tation OFF
MATA-BEI or
M419 R-unit spindle orien- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tation ON
MATA-BEI air blow
M420 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ON
MATA-BEI air blow
M421 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF
M422 ECOREG unit ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M423 ECOREG unit OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

R-spindle machining
M427 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆
mode selection
L-spindle machining
M428 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆
M40 mode selection
0
to Work counter data
M429
M49 increment
9
Work conveyor start
(sub) / Work con-
M431 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
veyor start for Parts
catcher “C”/”G”
Back milling mode
M432 (C-axis mixture con-
trol) ON
Back milling mode
M433 (C-axis mixture con-
trol) OFF
Turret or Tool spin-
M436 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
dle air blow ON
Turret or Tool spin-
M437 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
dle air blow OFF
Confirmation of
M440 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
machine status
MATA-BEI spindle
M441 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
selection
Back milling ma-
M442 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
chining function ON

7-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Back milling ma-

M443 chining function ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF
High-pressure cool-
M444 ant system pressure
changeover 1
High-pressure cool-
M445 ant system pressure
changeover 2
High-pressure cool-
M446 ant system pressure
changeover 3
High-pressure cool-
M447 ant system pressure
changeover 4
High-pressure cool-
M448 ant system pressure
changeover 5
High-pressure cool-
M400
M449 ant system pressure
changeover 6
to
High-pressure cool-
M499 M450 ant system pressure
changeover 7
Start of 1/2 decelera-
M454 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion holder use
Stop of 1/2 decelera-
M455 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion holder use
Air blow for
M456 HAN-BEI transmit- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ter ON
Air blow for
M457 HAN-BEI transmit- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ter OFF
M458 HAI-BEI advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M459 HAI-BEI retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI correct
M460 chucking check, ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SOL. ON
MATA-BEI correct
M461 chucking check, ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SOL. OFF

7-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

MATA-BEI correct
M462 chucking check ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
judgement
MATA-BEI correct
M465 chucking check NG ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
judgement, feed hold
Parts catcher “B”
/“G” ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
advance
HAI-BEI advance
M468 R side turret parts
catcher chute ad- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
vance
R side parts catcher
☆ ☆
advance
Parts catcher “B”
/“G” ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
retract
HAI-BEI retract
M400 M469
R side turret parts
to ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
catcher chute retract
M499 R side parts catcher
☆ ☆
retract
Y-axis feed enabling
M470 mode OFF/Y-axis ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
knock advance
Y-axis feed enabling
M471 mode ON/Y-axis ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
knock retract
B-axis interlock ig-
M472 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
nore ON
B-axis interlock ig-
M473 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
nore OFF
Spindle encoder se-
M475 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
lection clear
M code for R unit robot
M476 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1
M code for R unit robot
M477 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2
M code for R unit robot
M478 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3

7-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M code for R unit robot

M479 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
4
M code for waiting
between L- and
M480 R-units for long ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
workpieces with
NCGR203
MATA-BEI or
R-unit chuck pres-
M482 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
sure change to low
pressure
MATA-BEI chuck
M483 pressure return to ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
normal pressure
M400 Ejector advance
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to M484 (MATA-BEI)
Ejector checker
M499
Ejector retract
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M485 (MATA-BEI)
Ejector checker
Ejector advance
(MATA-BEI) (no
M486 confirmation of ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ejector advance
completion)
Rotary tool spindle
M488 start (forward direc- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion) (lower turret)
Rotary tool spindle
M489 start (reverse direc- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion) (lower turret)

7-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Rotary tool spindle

M490 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
stop (lower turret)
MATA-BEI C-axis
M491 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
selection
Stroke area limit
OFF
M492
(Parts catcher A and
turret type)
Stroke area limit ON
M493 (Parts catcher A and
turret type)
Side tapping cycle
M400 (rotary tool reverse
M494 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
rotation) (lower tur-
to
ret)
M499 Swing B-axis curvic
M495 ○
clamp
Swing B-axis curvic
M496 unclamp/disk brake ○
OFF
Swing B-axis disk
M497 ○
brake ON
Turret index re-
M498 striction OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(turret parts catcher)
Turret index re-
M499 striction ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(turret parts catcher)
M500 M code for GAN-
to TRY ROBOT or
M599 Parts catcher “C”
M600
M code for waiting
to
GANTRY ROBOT
M699

7-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Z-axis mirror image

M700 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ON
Z-axis mirror image
M701 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
OFF
M code for turret
M702 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
unclamp
C-axis brake off
M703 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mode ON
C-axis brake off
M704 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mode OFF
Completion of exe-
M705 cuting bar stopper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
operation
Coolant for chip
M706 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
removing ON
Coolant for chip
M707 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
removing OFF
M708 Coolant 3 start
Special setting
M709
(coolant 3 stop)
Tool unclamp (Tool
M700 M710
spindle)
to
M799
Tool clamp (Tool
M711
spindle)
Validating HAN-BEI
M712 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
probe
Invalidating
M713 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HAN-BEI probe
Setting laser in tool
M714 length measurement
mode
Setting laser in tool
M715 breakage detection
mode
Parts catcher “G”
M718 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Hand open
Parts catcher “G”
M719 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Hand close
Change to coolant
M720 blow for internal
upper tool spindle
Change to coolant
M721 blow for external
upper tool spindle

7-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Parts catcher “G”

M722 No-load operation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mode ON
Parts catcher “G”
M723 No-load operation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mode OFF
Parts catcher “G”
M724 Z1-axis swing inter-
lock ignore ON
Parts catcher “G”
M725 Z1-axis swing inter-
lock ignore OFF
Laser type tool
M726 breakage detector
advance
Laser type tool
M727 breakage detector
retract
Stabilizer (steady
M728 ☆ ☆ ☆
rest) knock advance
M700 Stabilizer (steady
M729 ☆ ☆ ☆
to rest) knock retract
M799 MATA-BEI or R
M730 side spindle / Low ☆ ☆
speed winding fix
MATA-BEI or R
M731 side spindle / High ☆ ☆
speed winding fix
MATA-BEI or R
M732 side spindle / wind- ☆ ☆
ing fix release
Parts catcher type G
M733 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
rotation
Parts catcher type G
M734 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
hand down
Confirmation of
parts catcher type G
M735 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ejection cycle com-
pletion
Stabilizer or R side
M736 ☆ ☆ ☆
stabilizer close
Stabilizer or R side
M737 ☆ ☆ ☆
stabilizer open

7-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

L side stabilizer
M738
close
M739 L side stabilizer open
Spindle-through
M740 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
coolant blow ON
Spindle-through
M741 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
coolant blow OFF
MATA-BEI or
M742 R-unit spindle cool- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ant blow ON
MATA-BEI or
M743 R-unit spindle cool- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ant blow OFF
ATC magazine low
M744
speed
ATC magazine low
M745
speed cancel
High pressure cool-
M748
ant blow ON
High pressure cool-
M749
M700 ant blow OFF
to Tool spindle low
M750
M799 pressure unclamp
Decode output
M751 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M51 spare)
Decode output
M752 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M52 spare)
Decode output
M753 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M53 spare)
Decode output
M754 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M54 spare)
Decode output
M755 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M55 spare)
Decode output
M756 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M56 spare)
Decode output
M757 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M57 spare)
Decode output
M758 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M58 spare)
Decode output
M760 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M60 spare)
Decode output
M761 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M61 spare)

7-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Upper turret coolant

M762 valves on right and ○
left sides ON
Upper turret coolant
M763 valves on right and ○
left sides OFF
Turret left side selec-
M764 ○
tion
Turret right side
M765 ○
selection
Turret coolant blow
M766
ON
Turret coolant blow
M767
OFF
Parts catcher “B” /
“G” advance (no
M768 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
confirmation of ad-
vance completion)
Parts catcher “B” /
M700 “G” retract (no
M769 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to confirmation of ad-
M799 vance completion)
Spindle winding fix
M770 ☆ ☆
(low speed)
Spindle winding fix
M771 ☆ ☆
(high speed)
Spindle winding fix
M772 ☆ ☆
release
Stabilizer interlock
M773
ignore ON
Stabilizer interlock
M774
ignore OFF
Rotary tool spindle
M775 position control ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mode ON
M code for L unit robot
M776 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1
M code for L unit robot
M777 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2
M code for L unit robot
M778 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3

7-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M code for L unit robot

M779 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
4
Tool spindle orienta-
M784
tion #5 position
Tool spindle orienta-
M785
tion #1 position
Tool spindle orienta-
M786
tion #2 position
Tool spindle orienta-
M787
tion #3 position
Tool spindle orienta-
M788
tion #4 position
R-unit spindle ro-
M789 tates/lower-milling
spindle rotates
L-unit spindle ro-
M790 tates/lower-milling
spindle rotates
Milling simultaneous
M700
M791 rotation with spindle ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to rotation
M799 MATA-BEI rigid
M792 ☆ ☆ ☆
tapping mode ON
MATA-BEI rigid
M793 ☆ ☆ ☆
tapping mode OFF
Spindle rigid tapping
M794 mode (reverse rota- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion) ON
Spindle rigid tapping
M795 mode (reverse rota- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion) OFF
L (main spindle) unit
M796 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
machining start
L (main spindle) unit
M797 machining comple- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion
R (sub spindle) unit
M798 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
machining start
R (sub spindle) unit
M799 machining comple- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion

7-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M800 M800
to to M code for waiting
M849 M849
HAI-BEI advance
M858 (no confirmation of ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
advance completion)
HAI-BEI retract
M859 (no confirmation of ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
retract completion)
M850
Correct chucking
to M860 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check, SOL. ON
M899
Correct chucking
M861 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check, SOL. OFF
M
Correct chucking
codes M862 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check judgement
to
Correct chucking
ignore
M865 check NG judge- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
com-
ment, feed hold
ple-
Parts catcher
tions
“B”/”G” cycle (no
of ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
confirmation of ad-
M400
vance completion)
to M868
Parts catcher ad-
M499,
vance (no confirma-
and ☆ ☆
tion of advance
M700
completion) (R-unit)
to
M799
Parts catcher retract
(Ex-
(no confirmation of
M869
cept
advance completion)
M860,
(R-unit)
861,86 Workpiece forcible
3,865) discharge unit ad-
M884 ☆ ☆ ☆
vance (no confirma-
tion of the front end)
Lower rotary tool
spindle stop (no con-
M890 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
firmation of spindle
stop)

7-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M850 MATA-BEI C-axis

to selection (no confir-
M891 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M899 mation of C-axis
connection)
M Steady rest close (no
codes M892 confirmation of the ☆
to completion)
ignore Steady rest open (no
com- M893 confirmation of the ☆
ple- completion)
tions HAN-BEI probe
of valid
M898 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M400 (no confirmation of
to the completion)
M499,
and
M700
to HAN-BEI probe
M799 invalid (no confir-
M899 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(Ex- mation of the com-
cept pletion)
M860,
861,86
3,865)
M900
to ATC tool check
M901 M900
function OFF mode
For
M901
ATC
M902
to
M951
Spe-
cial
M
code

7-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M952 ATC shutter 2 open

M953 ATC shutter 2 close
ATC change arm air
M954
blow ON
ATC tool change
M955
(arm rotating)
M956 ATC shifter advance
M957 ATC shifter retract
M958 ATC clipper advance
M959 ATC clipper retract
M960 ATC holder advance
M961 ATC holder retract
ATC arm forward
M962
rotation
ATC arm reverse
M963
rotation
ATC traverse axis
M952 M964
point P0 move
to
ATC traverse axis
M974 M965
point P1 move
ATC traverse axis
For M966
point P2 move
ATC
ATC traverse axis
M967
point P3 move
ATC side shutter
M968
open
ATC side shutter
M969 close (no confirma-
tin)
ATC tool ready
M970
command
ATC tool change
M971
command
ATC rear shutter
M972 open
ATC shutter 1
ATC rear shutter
close (no confirma-
M973 tin)
ATC shutter 1 close
(no confirmatin)

7-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M952 ATC side shutter

open (no confirma-
to
tin)
M974
M974
ATC shutter 1 open
For (no confirmatin)
ATC

M975, M976, M978

are special M-code.
GR203 entry into ma-
M975 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
chine.
GR203 exit into ma-
M975 M976 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
chine.
to
M978 GR203 hand open. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M982
M980 System optional stop
Operation pattern
M981
change 1
Operation pattern
M982
change 2
See M-code list for
M983 Gantry ROBOT or
to Parts Catcher type C.
M999 NOTE) Commanda-
Gantry ble only from the
lathe side
M
Counter head status
code M991 confirmation (for ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
G441)

7-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M100 Parts catcher “D”

0 hand open
M100 Parts catcher “D”
1 hand close
M100 Work conveyor start
2 for parts catcher “D”
M100 Work conveyor ad-
3 vance
M100 Work conveyor re-
4 tract
M100 Parts catcher “D”
5 shutter open
M100 Parts catcher “D”
6 shutter close
M100 Parts catcher “D”
M100
7 arm swing-in
M100 Parts catcher “D”
0
8 arm swing-out
to M100 Parts catcher “D”
M109
9 hand up
M101 Parts catcher “D”
9
0 hand down
M101 Confirmation for
1 PCD eject cycle
Gen-
Parts catcher “D”
eral M101
no-load operation
2
M mode ON
Parts catcher “D”
code M101
no-load operation
3
mode OFF
High pressure cool-
M102
ant interlock ignore ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1
ON
High pressure cool-
M102
ant interlock ignore ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2
OFF
M102
Chip air blow ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆
3
M102
Chip air blow OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆
4
Turret hand parts
M102 catcher
☆
5 no-load operation
mode ON

7-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Turret hand parts

M102 catcher
☆
6 no-load operation
mode OFF
M102
Turret hand open ☆
7
M102
Turret hand close ☆
8
Turret hand parts
M102
catcher ☆
9
shutter open
Turret hand parts
M103
catcher ☆
0
shutter close
Turret hand parts
M100 M103
catcher ☆
1
0 work conveyor start
to Ignoring interference
M104 interlock between
M109 ○ ○ ○
5 X/Z turret and chuck
9 ON
Ignoring interference
M104 interlock between
Gen- ○ ○ ○
6 X/Z turret and chuck
eral OFF
M104 Coolant blow above
M ☆ ☆ ☆
7 spindle ON L/(R)
code M104 Coolant blow above
☆ ☆ ☆
8 spindle OFF L/(R)
Coolant blow above
M105
spindle ☆
1
ON R
Coolant blow above
M105 spindle ☆
2
OFF R
M105 Peripheral equipment
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 stop mode
B2-axis zero position
M105
interlock cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8
ON
B2-axis zero position
M105
interlock cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9
OFF

7-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
2 Red

M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
3 Yellow

M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
4 Green

M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
5 Cyan

M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
6 Blue

M100 M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
0 7 Purple

to M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
M109 8 White

9 M107
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
9 OFF

Gen- M108
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
eral 0 Blink Mode ON

M M108
Status display lamp:
☆ ☆
code 1 Blink Mode OFF

M108
Mist collector ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
4

M108
Mist collector OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5

M108
Chip flush air blow 2
☆
6 ON

M108
Chip flush air blow 2
☆
7 OFF

M109
Chip flush air blow
☆
8 cycle

7-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

Parts catcher “D”

M110 cycle
0 (No confirmation of
advance completion)
M110
Ignoring X1Z1 axis
0 M110
interlock at PCD
to 1
swing-in ON
M119
Ignoring X1Z1 axis
9 M110
interlock at PCD
2
swing-in OFF
M
M112 Turret hand close
code ☆
8 torque limit
with-
Turret hand parts
out
M112 catcher
con ☆
9 shutter open com-
firma-
mand
tion of
Turret hand parts
com-
M113 catcher
pletion ☆
0 shutter close com-
mand
M113 Confirmation for 1
○
4 cycle completion

7-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

T
S
M
C
A C
WY100 s AS M-
WT150, WY250 S s
WT150II WY100I NTJ- SC-100 e 2
STA WT100 WT250, WY250 WT150H 2 e com
WT250II I 100 X2 r 0
WT300 L 0 r pany
N WY150 i 0
CONTENTS 0L i
e
DAR e
s
s
D
U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

U L U L U L U L U L U L U L U L

M175 Decode output off

☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1 (M751 output off)
M175
Decode output off
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2 (M752 output off)

M175
Decode output off
M170 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3 (M753 output off)
0
to M175
Decode output off
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M179 (M754 output off)
4
9
M175
Decode output off
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Gen- 5 (M755 output off)
eral
M175
M Decode output off
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
code 6 (M756 output off)

M175
Decode output off
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
7 (M757 output off)

M175
Decode output off
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
8 (M758 output off)

7-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

7-2 M-code List

(WTS150, NTM3, NTY3 series, WTW150)
☆ mark indicates option.
WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M00 Program stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M01 Optional stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M02 End of program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M03 Spindle start (forward direction) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M04 Spindle start (reverse direction) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M05 Spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M07 Coolant start (low pressure coolant) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M08 Coolant start (high pressure coolant) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M09 Coolant stop (low/high pressure coolant) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M10 Chuck close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M11 Chuck open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M12 Tailstock body advance
M13 Tailstock body retract
Tailstock quill advance
M14
Internal spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M00
to Tailstock quill retract
M99 M15
Internal spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M18 Spindle orientation cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M19 Spindle orientation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M20 Fixed air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M21 Fixed air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M22 Spindle speed arrival signal ignore ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M23 Chamfering ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M24 Chamfering OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M25 Error detect ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M26 Error detect OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M27 Dry run ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M28 Dry run OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M29 Rigid tapping mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M30 Memory mode operation reset&restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M31 Workpiece conveyor start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle lock ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M32
Automatic partition open ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle lock OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M33
Automatic partition close ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Internal spindle air blow ON

M36
Coolant blow for internal spindle ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Internal spindle air blow OFF

M37
Coolant blow for internal spindle OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M41 Spindle selection (C-axis OFF) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M48 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle internal spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆
M49 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle internal spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆
M50 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck close ○ ○
M51 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck open ○ ○
M53 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle start (forward direction) ○ ○ ○ ○
M54 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle start (reverse direction) ○ ○ ○ ○
M55 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○
M00
Turret or Tool spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to M56
ZEN-BEI retract for double-pushing
M99
Turret or Tool spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M57
ZEN-BEI retract
M58 FMB bar change command ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M59 HAN-BEI air blow
M60 Tool setter air blow
Auto bar advance/LNS sprint bar operation end confirmation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M61
ZEN-BEI workpiece material feed command
M62 Automatic door open ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M63 Automatic door close ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M65 Tool setter advance
M66 Tool setter retract
M67 Auto bar advance 2 (OFF) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Parts catcher advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M68
L-side turret parts catcher chute advance ☆ ☆

Parts catcher retract (work counter data increment) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M69
L-side turret parts catcher chute retract (work counter data increment) ☆ ☆

7-29
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M70 X-axis interlock ignore ON ○ ○ ○
M71 X-axis interlock ignore OFF
Synchronization position setting (Synchronization completion inter-
M72 ○ ○ ○
lock)
M73 HAI-BEI advance
M74 HAI-BEI retract
M75 R-unit automatic start (L-unit)
M76 Drill breakage detector advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M77 Drill breakage detector retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M81 IEMCA bar operation end confirmation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M82 Chuck pressure change to low pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M83 Chuck pressure change to high pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Cut-off checker advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M84
Eject checker/Forcible discharge unit advance ☆ ☆ ☆

Cut-off checker retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M85
Eject checker / Forcible discharge unit retract ☆ ☆ ☆
M00 Spindle lock ON
M86 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M99 Spindle lock OFF
M87 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M88 Rotary tool spindle start (forward direction) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M89 Rotary tool spindle start (reverse direction) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M90 Rotary tool spindle stop ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M91 C-axis selection (C-axis connection) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Quill pressure change to low pressure

M92
Spindle phase synchronization control ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quill pressure change to normal pressure

M93
Spindle phase synchronization control OFF ○ ○ ○
M94 Side tapping cycle ON (rotary tool reverse rotation) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

OT interlock ignore (-Z direction) (when the chuck is closed) ○ ○ ○

M95
Side tapping cycle OFF (rotary tool reverse rotation)
M96 Spindle speed synchronization control ON (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M97 Spindle speed synchronization control cancel (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M98 Sub-program call ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M99 End of sub program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7-30
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M100 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
to to
M100
to M111 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M199
to to
M199 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
DNC
M200
DNC control by memory card
control Sub program call
M205 Spindle/rotary tool spindle stop (no confirmation of spindle stop) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M255 MATA-BEI spindle stop (no confirmation of spindle stop) ☆ ☆
M256 ZEN-BEI retract for second pushing (no confirmation of spindle stop)
M257 ZEN-BEI retract (no confirmation of spindle stop)
M262 Automatic door open (no confirmation of door open end completion) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M201
to M263 Automatic door close (no confirmation of door close end completion) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M299
M268 Parts catcher advance (no confirmation in the most advanced position) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M269 Parts catcher retract (no confirmation in the most retracted position) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Forcible ejector advance (no confirmation of the advanced end posi-
M284 ☆ ☆ ☆
tion)
M290 Rotary tool spindle stop (no confirmation of spindle stop) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M291 C-axis selection (no confirmation of C-axis connection) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-31
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M300 Motor load detection valid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M301 Motor load detection invalid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M302 Tool counter invalid (one-shot) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M303 Tool counter valid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M304 Tool counter invalid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M310 In-position check valid at rapid feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M311 In-position check invalid at rapid feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Confirmation of parts catcher type G ejection cycle completion (For

M312 ☆ ☆
30/31/32i series)
M313 Confirmation of PCD ejection cycle completion (For 30/31/32i series)
M358 M code for GR start/Parts catcher type C ☆
M300
M359 HAN-BEI air blow ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M365 Chatter Canceller function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M399
M366 Chatter Canceller function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M368 Parts catcher “B”/”G” cycle ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M369 Parts catcher “D” cycle

M code for Y-axis machining mode cancel (LUCK-BEI), including
M370 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Y-axis reference point return
M code for Y-axis machining mode (LUCK-BEI), including Y-axis
M371 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
reference point return
M372 Travel command of B2-axis (for parts catcher type G) ☆ ☆

M376 Magazine index command for drill breakage detection

M377 Drill breakage detection (Transmission sensor type)
M397 MATA-BEI spindle ON (LUCK-BEI)
M398 MATA-BEI spindle OFF (LUCK-BEI)

7-32
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M400 Tool life count resume
M401 Cycle stop detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M402 Auto door unlock ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M403 MATA-BEI C-axis brake off mode ON ☆ ☆

M404 MATA-BEI C-axis brake off mode OFF ☆ ☆

M405 Cut-off machining completion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Feed per minute enable mode ON during a milling stop (C-axis con-
M408 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
nection)
Feed per minute enable mode OFF during a milling stop (C-axis con-
M409 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
nection)
M410 Z-axis load monitoring function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M411 Z-axis load monitoring function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M414 Spindle position coder selection in opposite side ○ ○

M415 Waiting with RZ intermediate position passage confirmation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M416 Constant surface speed control mode monitoring function ON

M417 Constant surface speed control mode monitoring function OFF
M418 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle orientation OFF ○ ○

M419 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle orientation ON ○ ○

M400
M420 MATA-BEI air blow ON ☆ ☆
to
M421 MATA-BEI air blow OFF ☆ ☆
M499
M422 ECOREG unit ON
M423 ECOREG unit OFF
M427 R-spindle machining mode selection ○ ○

M428 L-spindle machining mode selection ○ ○

M429 Work counter data increment ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Work conveyor start (sub) / Work conveyor start for Parts catcher
M431 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
“C”/”G”
M432 Back milling mode (C-axis mixture control) ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M433 Back milling mode (C-axis mixture control) OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M436 Turret or Tool spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M437 Turret or Tool spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M440 Confirmation of machine status ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M441 MATA-BEI spindle selection ○ ○ ○ ○

M442 Back milling machining function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M443 Back milling machining function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M444 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 1

M445 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 2

7-33
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M446 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 3
M447 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 4
M448 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 5
M449 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 6
M450 High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 7
M454 Start of 1/2 deceleration holder use ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M455 Stop of 1/2 deceleration holder use ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M456 Air blow for HAN-BEI transmitter ON

M457 Air blow for HAN-BEI transmitter OFF
M458 HAI-BEI advance
M400 M459 HAI-BEI retract
to M460 MATA-BEI correct chucking check, SOL. ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M499 M461 MATA-BEI correct chucking check, SOL. OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M462 MATA-BEI correct chucking check judgement ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M465 MATA-BEI correct chucking check NG judgement, feed hold ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “B” /“G” advance ☆ ☆ ☆

HAI-BEI advance ☆ ☆
M468
R side turret parts catcher chute advance ☆

R side parts catcher advance

Parts catcher “B” /“G” retract ☆ ☆ ☆

HAI-BEI retract ☆ ☆
M469
R side turret parts catcher chute retract ☆

R side parts catcher retract

7-34
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M470 Y-axis feed enabling mode OFF/Y-axis knock advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M471 Y-axis feed enabling mode ON/Y-axis knock retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M472 B-axis interlock ignore ON ○ ○ ○

M473 B-axis interlock ignore OFF ○ ○ ○

M475 Spindle encoder selection clear ○ ○

M476 M code for R unit robot 1

M477 M code for R unit robot 2

M478 M code for R unit robot 3

M479 M code for R unit robot 4

M code for waiting between L- and R-units for long workpieces with
M480
NCGR203
M482 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck pressure change to low pressure ☆ ☆

M483 MATA-BEI chuck pressure return to normal pressure ☆ ☆

Ejector advance (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆

M484
Ejector checker ☆ ☆

M400 Ejector retract (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆

M485
Ejector checker ☆ ☆
to
Ejector advance (MATA-BEI) (no confirmation of ejector advance
M499 M486
completion)
M488 Rotary tool spindle start (forward direction) (lower turret) ☆ ☆ ☆

M489 Rotary tool spindle start (reverse direction) (lower turret) ☆ ☆ ☆

M490 Rotary tool spindle stop (lower turret) ☆ ☆ ☆

M491 MATA-BEI C-axis selection ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Stroke area limit OFF

M492 ○ ○
(Parts catcher A and turret type)
Stroke area limit ON
M493 ○ ○
(Parts catcher A and turret type)
M494 Side tapping cycle (rotary tool reverse rotation) (lower turret) ☆ ☆

M495 Swing B-axis curvic clamp

M496 Swing B-axis curvic unclamp/disk brake OFF
M497 Swing B-axis disk brake ON
Turret index restriction OFF
M498 ○ ○
(turret parts catcher)
Turret index restriction ON
M499 ○ ○
(turret parts catcher)

7-35
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M500
to M code for GANTRY ROBOT or Parts catcher “C”
M599
M600
to M code for waiting GANTRY ROBOT
M699

M700 Z-axis mirror image ON ○ ○

M701 Z-axis mirror image OFF ○ ○

M702 M code for turret unclamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M703 C-axis brake off mode ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M704 C-axis brake off mode OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M705 Completion of executing bar stopper operation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M706 Coolant for chip removing ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M707 Coolant for chip removing OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M708 Coolant 3 start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M709 Special setting (coolant 3 stop) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M700 M710 Tool unclamp (Tool spindle)

to M711 Tool clamp (Tool spindle)
M799
M712 Validating HAN-BEI probe
M713 Invalidating HAN-BEI probe
M714 Setting laser in tool length measurement mode
M715 Setting laser in tool breakage detection mode
Parts catcher “G”
M718 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Hand open
Parts catcher “G”
M719 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Hand close
M720 Change to coolant blow for internal upper tool spindle
M721 Change to coolant blow for external upper tool spindle
Parts catcher “G”
M722 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
No-load operation mode ON

7-36
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
Parts catcher “G”
M723 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
No-load operation mode OFF
Parts catcher “G”
M724
Z1-axis swing interlock ignore ON
Parts catcher “G”
M725
Z1-axis swing interlock ignore OFF
M726 Laser type tool breakage detector advance
M727 Laser type tool breakage detector retract
M728 Stabilizer (steady rest) knock advance
M729 Stabilizer (steady rest) knock retract
M730 MATA-BEI or R side spindle / Low speed winding fix ○ ○
M700
M731 MATA-BEI or R side spindle / High speed winding fix
to
M732 MATA-BEI or R side spindle / winding fix release ○ ○
M799
M733 Parts catcher type G rotation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M734 Parts catcher type G hand down ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M735 Confirmation of parts catcher type G ejection cycle completion ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M736 Stabilizer or R side stabilizer close

M737 Stabilizer or R side stabilizer open
M738 L side stabilizer close
M739 L side stabilizer open
M740 Spindle-through coolant blow ON
M741 Spindle-through coolant blow OFF

7-37
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M742 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle coolant blow ON ☆ ☆

M743 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆

M744 ATC magazine low speed

M745 ATC magazine low speed cancel
M748 High pressure coolant blow ON
M749 High pressure coolant blow OFF
M750 Tool spindle low pressure unclamp
Decode output
M751 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M51 spare)
Decode output
M752 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M52 spare)
Decode output
M753 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M53 spare)
Decode output
M754 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M700
(M54 spare)
to
Decode output
M799 M755 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M55 spare)
Decode output
M756 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M56 spare)
Decode output
M757 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M57 spare)
Decode output
M758 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(M58 spare)
Decode output
M760
(M60 spare)
Decode output
M761
(M61 spare)
M762 Upper turret coolant valves on right and left sides ON
M763 Upper turret coolant valves on right and left sides OFF
M764 Turret left side selection
M765 Turret right side selection

7-38
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M766 Turret coolant blow ON
M767 Turret coolant blow OFF
Parts catcher “B” / “G” advance (no confirmation of advance comple-
M768 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion)
Parts catcher “B” / “G” retract (no confirmation of advance comple-
M769 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion)
M770 Spindle winding fix (low speed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M771 Spindle winding fix (high speed)

M772 Spindle winding fix release ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M773 Stabilizer interlock ignore ON

M774 Stabilizer interlock ignore OFF
M775 Rotary tool spindle position control mode ON ☆ ☆ ☆

M776 M code for L unit robot 1

M777 M code for L unit robot 2

M778 M code for L unit robot 3

M700 M779 M code for L unit robot 4

to M784 Tool spindle orientation #5 position
M799
M785 Tool spindle orientation #1 position
M786 Tool spindle orientation #2 position
M787 Tool spindle orientation #3 position
M788 Tool spindle orientation #4 position
M789 R-unit spindle rotates/lower-milling spindle rotates ○ ○

M790 L-unit spindle rotates/lower-milling spindle rotates ○ ○

M791 Milling simultaneous rotation with spindle rotation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M792 MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode ON

M793 MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode OFF
M794 Spindle rigid tapping mode (reverse rotation) ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M795 Spindle rigid tapping mode (reverse rotation) OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M796 L (main spindle) unit machining start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M797 L (main spindle) unit machining completion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M798 R (sub spindle) unit machining start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M799 R (sub spindle) unit machining completion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M800 M800
to to M code for waiting ○ ○
M849 M849

7-39
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
HAI-BEI advance
M858
(no confirmation of advance completion)
HAI-BEI retract
M859
M850 (no confirmation of retract completion)
to M860 Correct chucking check, SOL. ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M899 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M861 Correct chucking check, SOL. OFF
M862 Correct chucking check judgement ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M codes to
M865 Correct chucking check NG judgement, feed hold ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ignore comple-
tions of M400 Parts catcher “B”/”G” cycle (no confirmation of advance completion) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to M868 Parts catcher advance (no confirmation of advance completion)
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M499, and (R-unit)
M700
M869 Parts catcher retract (no confirmation of advance completion) (R-unit) ☆ ☆
to
Workpiece forcible discharge unit advance (no confirmation of the
M799 M884 ☆ ☆
(Except M860, front end)
861,863,865) M890 Lower rotary tool spindle stop (no confirmation of spindle stop) ☆ ☆

M891 MATA-BEI C-axis selection (no confirmation of C-axis connection) ☆ ☆

HAN-BEI probe valid

M898
(no confirmation of the completion)
M899 HAN-BEI probe invalid (no confirmation of the completion)
M900
to
M900 ATC tool check function OFF mode
M901
For ATC M901

7-40
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M902
to
M951
Special
M code

M952 ATC shutter 2 open

M953 ATC shutter 2 close
M954 ATC change arm air blow ON
M955 ATC tool change (arm rotating)
M952 M956 ATC shifter advance
to
M957 ATC shifter retract
M974
M958 ATC clipper advance
For ATC M959 ATC clipper retract
M960 ATC holder advance
M961 ATC holder retract
M962 ATC arm forward rotation
M963 ATC arm reverse rotation
M964 ATC traverse axis point P0 move
M965 ATC traverse axis point P1 move
M966 ATC traverse axis point P2 move
M967 ATC traverse axis point P3 move
M968 ATC side shutter open
M952 M969 ATC side shutter close (no confirmatin)
to M970 ATC tool ready command
M974 M971 ATC tool change command
ATC rear shutter open
M972
For ATC
ATC shutter 1
ATC rear shutter close (no confirmatin)
M973 ATC shutter 1 close
(no confirmatin)
ATC side shutter open (no confirmatin)
M974 ATC shutter 1 open
(no confirmatin)

7-41
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M975, M976, M978 are special M-code.
M975 GR203 entry into machine.

M975 M976 GR203 exit into machine.

to M978 GR203 hand open.

M982 M980 System optional stop
M981 Operation pattern change 1
M982 Operation pattern change 2
M983 See M-code list for Gantry ROBOT or Parts Catcher type C.
to NOTE) Commandable only from the lathe side
M999

Gantry M991 Counter head status confirmation (for G441) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M code

7-42
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M1000 Parts catcher “D” hand open

M1001 Parts catcher “D” hand close

M1002 Work conveyor start for parts catcher “D”

M1003 Work conveyor advance

M1004 Work conveyor retract

M1005 Parts catcher “D” shutter open

M1006 Parts catcher “D” shutter close

M1007 Parts catcher “D” arm swing-in

M1008 Parts catcher “D” arm swing-out

M1009 Parts catcher “D” hand up

M1010 Parts catcher “D” hand down

M1011 Confirmation for PCD eject cycle

M1012 Parts catcher “D” no-load operation mode ON

M1013 Parts catcher “D” no-load operation mode OFF

M1021 High pressure coolant interlock ignore ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1000 to M1022 High pressure coolant interlock ignore OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1099 M1023 Chip air blow ON

M1024 Chip air blow OFF

M1025 Turret hand parts catcher no-load operation mode ON

General
M1026 Turret hand parts catcher no-load operation mode OFF
M code
M1027 Turret hand open

M1028 Turret hand close

M1029 Turret hand parts catcher shutter open

M1030 Turret hand parts catcher shutter close

M1031 Turret hand parts catcher work conveyor start

M1045 Ignoring interference interlock between X/Z turret and chuck ON

M1046 Ignoring interference interlock between X/Z turret and chuck OFF

M1057 Peripheral equipment stop mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M1058 B2-axis zero position interlock cancel ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M1059 B2-axis zero position interlock cancel OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M1072 Status display lamp: Red ☆ ☆ ☆

M1073 Status display lamp: Yellow ☆ ☆ ☆

M1074 Status display lamp: Green ☆ ☆ ☆

M1075 Status display lamp: Cyan ☆ ☆ ☆

M1076 Status display lamp: Blue ☆ ☆ ☆

7-43
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

WTS150
NTY3
NTM3
NTY3-100 WTW150
NTY3 Jumbo
NTY3-150
NTY3-250
STAN
CONTENTS Upper L Upper L Upper Lower
DARD
o o
w w
L R L R L R L R
e e
r r
M1077 Status display lamp: Purple ☆ ☆ ☆

M1078 Status display lamp: White ☆ ☆ ☆

M1000 to

M1099 M1079 Status display lamp: OFF ☆ ☆ ☆

M1080 Status display lamp: Blink Mode ON ☆ ☆ ☆

General M1081 Status display lamp: Blink Mode OFF ☆ ☆ ☆

M code M1084 Mist collector ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1085 Mist collector OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “D” cycle

M1100
(No confirmation of advance completion)

M1101 Ignoring X1Z1 axis interlock at PCD swing-in ON

M1100 to
M1199 M1102 Ignoring X1Z1 axis interlock at PCD swing-in OFF

M1128 Turret hand close torque limit

M code without
Turret hand parts catcher
confirmation of M1129
shutter open command
completion
Turret hand parts catcher
M1130
shutter close command

M1134 Confirmation for 1 cycle completion

M1751 Decode output off (M751 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1752 Decode output off (M752 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1700 to
M1753 Decode output off (M753 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1799 M1754 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Decode output off (M754 output off)
M1755 Decode output off (M755 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
General
M code M1756 Decode output off (M756 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1757 Decode output off (M757 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1758 Decode output off (M758 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-44
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

7-3 M-code List

(New TW series, STS40, STW40, Super NTJ, NTX(S), NTX(W), NTXL)
☆ mark indicates option.
New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M00 Program stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M01 Optional stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M02 End of program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Spindle start
M03 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(forward direction)

Spindle start
M04 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(reverse direction)

M05 Spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Coolant start
M07 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(low pressure coolant)

Coolant start
M08 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(high pressure coolant)

Coolant stop
M09 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(low/high pressure coolant)

M10 Chuck close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M11 Chuck open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M12 Tailstock body advance ☆ ☆ *M21

M00 M13 Tailstock body retract ☆ ☆ *M22

to
Tailstock quill advance ☆ ☆ *M12
M99 M14
Internal spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆

Tailstock quill retract ☆ ☆ *M13

M15
Internal spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆

M18 Spindle orientation cancel ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M19 Spindle orientation ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M20 Fixed air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M21 Fixed air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M22 Spindle speed arrival signal ignore ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ M17

M23 Chamfering ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M24 Chamfering OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M25 Error detect ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M26 Error detect OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M27 Dry run ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M28 Dry run OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M29 Rigid tapping mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7-45
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M30 Memory mode operation reset&restart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M31 Workpiece conveyor start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle lock ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M32
Automatic partition open ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle lock OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M33
Automatic partition close ☆ ☆

Internal spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M36
Coolant blow for internal spindle ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Internal spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M37
Coolant blow for internal spindle OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M41 Spindle selection (C-axis OFF) ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle internal spindle air

M48 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
blow ON

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle internal spindle air

M49 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
blow OFF

M50 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck close ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ M51

M51 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck open ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ M50

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle start (forward direc-

M00 M53 ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion)
to
MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle start
M99 M54 ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○
(reverse direction)

M55 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

Turret or Tool spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆

M56
ZEN-BEI retract for double-pushing ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Turret or Tool spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆

M57
ZEN-BEI retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M58 FMB bar change command ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M59 HAN-BEI air blow

M60 Tool setter air blow ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ M64

Auto bar advance/LNS sprint bar operation end

☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M78
M61 confirmation

ZEN-BEI workpiece material feed command ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M62 Automatic door open ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M63 Automatic door close ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M65 Tool setter advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M66 Tool setter retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M67 Auto bar advance 2 (OFF) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M79

7-46
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

Parts catcher advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M73

M68
L-side turret parts catcher chute advane ☆ *M73

Parts catcher retract (work counter data increment) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M74

M69 L-side turret parts catcher chute retract (work coun-

☆ *M74
ter data increment)

M70 X-axis interlock ignore ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M71 X-axis interlock ignore OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Synchronization position set

M72 ○ ☆
(Synchronization completion interlock)

M73 HAI-BEI advance ☆

M74 HAI-BEI retract ☆ ☆

M75 R-unit automatic start (L-unit) ○

M76 Drill breakage detector advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M77 Drill breakage detector retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M81 IEMCA bar operation end confirmation ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M80

M00 M82 Chuck pressure change to low pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

to
M83 Chuck pressure change to high pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M99
Cut-off checker advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M84
Eject checker/Forcible discharge unit advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Cut-off checker retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M85
Eject checker/Forcible discharge unit retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M86 Spindle lock ON ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M87 Spindle lock OFF ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M88 Rotary tool spindle start (forward direction) ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○

Rotary tool spindle start ☆

M89 ☆ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○
(retract direction)

M90 Rotary tool spindle stop ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○

M91 C-axis selection (C-axis connection) ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quill pressure change to low pressure ☆ ☆

M92
Spindle phase synchronization control ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quill pressure change to normal pressure ☆ ☆

M93
Spindle phase synchronization control OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

7-47
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

Side tapping cycle ON

M94 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(rotary tool reverse rotation)

OT interlock ignore (-Z direction)

○
(when the chuck is closed)
M95
Side tapping cycle OFF
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M00 (rotary tool reverse rotation)

to Spindle speed synchronization control ON (MA-

M96 ○ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M99 TA-BEI)

Spindle speed synchronization control cancel

M97 ○ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(MATA-BEI)

M98 Sub-program call ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M99 End of sub program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M100 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

to to
M100
to M111 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M199
to to

M199 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

DNC DNC control by memory card

M200 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
control Sub program call

Spindle/rotary tool spindle stop (no confirmation of

M205 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
spindle stop)

MATA-BEI spindle stop (no confirmation of spindle

M255 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
stop)

ZEN-BEI retract for second pushing (no confirma-

M256 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
tion of spindle stop)

M257 ZEN-BEI retract (no confirmation of spindle stop) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Automatic door open (no confirmation of door open

M262 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
end completion)
M201 Automatic door close (no confirmation of door close
M263 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to end completion)
M299 Parts catcher advance (no confirmation in the most
M268 ☆ ☆ *M273
advanced position)

Parts catcher retract (no confirmation in the most

M269 ☆ ☆ *M274
retracted position)

Forcible ejector advance ( no confirmation of the

M284
advanced end position)

Rotary tool spindle stop (no confirmation of spindle

M290 ☆ ○ ○
stop)

C-axis selection (no confirmation of C-axis connec-

M291 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion)

7-48
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M300 Motor load detection valid ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M301 Motor load detection invalid ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M302 Tool counter invalid (one-shot) ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M303 Tool counter valid ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M304 Tool counter invalid ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M310 In-position check valid at rapid feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M311 In-position check invalid at rapid feed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Confirmation of parts catcher “G” ejection cycle

M312
completion ( for 30/31/32i series)

Confirmation of PCD ejection cycle completion (For

M313
30/31/32i series)

M358 M code for GR start/Parts catcher type C ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M359 HAN-BEI air blow ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M300
M365 Chatter Canceller function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to

M399 M366 Chatter Canceller function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M368 Parts catcher “B”/”G” cycle ☆ ☆

M369 Parts catcher “D” cycle

M code for Y-axis machining mode cancel

M370 (LUCK-BEI), including Y-axis reference point ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

return

M code for Y-axis machining mode (LUCK-BEI),

M371 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
including Y-axis reference point return

Travel command of B2-axis

M372 ☆
(for parts catcher type G)

Magazine index command for drill breakage detec-

M376 ☆ ☆
tion

M377 Drill breakage detection (Transmission sensor type) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M397 MATA-BEI spindle ON (LUCK-BEI)

M398 MATA-BEI spindle OFF (LUCK-BEI)

M400 Tool life count resume

M401 Cycle stop detection

M402 Auto door unlock ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M400
M403 MATA-BEI C-axis brake off mode ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M404 MATA-BEI C-axis brake off mode OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M499

M405 Cut-off machining completion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M406 Chip conveyor ON (intermittent type)

M407 Chip conveyor OFF(intermittent type)

7-49
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

Feed per minute enable mode ON during a milling

M408 ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
stop (C-axis connection)

Feed per minute enable mode OFF during a milling

M409 ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
stop (C-axis connection)

M410 Z-axis load monitoring function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M411 Z-axis load monitoring function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M414 Spindle position coder selection in opposite side ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

Waiting with RZ intermediate position passage

M415 ○ ○
confirmation

Constant surface speed control mode

M416 ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
monitoring function ON

Constant surface speed control mode

M417 monitoring function ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○

OFF

M418 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle orientation OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M419 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle orientation ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M400 M420 MATA-BEI air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

to M421 MATA-BEI air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M499
M422 ECOREG unit ON

M423 ECOREG unit OFF

M424 Upper tool spindle chip flow air blow ON

M425 Upper tool spindle chip flow coolant blow ON

Upper tool spindle chip flow air & coolant blow

M426
OFF

M427 R-spindle machining mode selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M428 L-spindle machining mode selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Work conveyor start (sub) / Work conveyor start for

M431 ☆ ☆
Parts catcher “C”/”G”

M432 Back milling mode (C-axis mixture control) ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M433 Back milling mode (C-axis mixture control) OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

(R) ATC tool ready command

M434
(For M code in G341)

(R) ATC tool change command

M435
(For M code in G340)

7-50
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M436 Turret or Tool spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆

M437 Turret or Tool spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ☆

M438 (R) ATC shifter advance

M439 (R) ATC shifter retract

M440 Confirmation of machine status

M441 MATA-BEI spindle selection ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○

M442 Back milling machining function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M443 Back milling machining function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

High-pressure coolant system pressure

M444 ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 1

High-pressure coolant system pressure

M445 ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 2

High-pressure coolant system pressure

M446 ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 3

High-pressure coolant system pressure

M447 ☆ ☆ ☆
M400 changeover 4

to High-pressure coolant system pressure

M448 ☆ ☆ ☆
M499 changeover 5

High-pressure coolant system pressure

M449 ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 6

High-pressure coolant system pressure

M450 ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 7

M454 Start of 1/2 deceleration holder use

M455 Stop of 1/2 deceleration holder use

M456 Air blow for HAN-BEI transmitter ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M457 Air blow for HAN-BEI transmitter OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M458 HAI-BEI advance ☆ ☆

M459 HAI-BEI retract ☆ ☆

M460 MATA-BEI correct chucking check, SOL. ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M461 MATA-BEI correct chucking check, SOL. OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M462 MATA-BEI correct chucking check judgement ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI correct chucking check NG judgement,

M465 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
feed hold

7-51
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

Parts catcher “B” /“G”

☆ ☆
advance

HAI-BEI advance ☆
M468
R side turret parts catcher chute advance ☆

R side parts catcher advance

Parts catcher “B” /“G”

☆ ☆
retract

HAI-BEI retract ☆

R side turret parts catcher chute retract ☆

M469
R side parts catcher

retract

(Work counter data

increment)

Y-axis feed enabling mode OFF/Y-axis knock

M470 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
advance

M471 Y-axis feed enabling mode ON/Y-axis knock retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M472 B-axis interlock ignore ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M473 B-axis interlock ignore OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M400

to (R)ATC shutter open

M474
M499 (no confirmation)

M475 Spindle encoder selection clear ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M476 M code for R unit robot 1

M477 M code for R unit robot 2

M478 M code for R unit robot 3

M479 M code for R unit robot 4

M code for waiting between L- and R-units for long

M480 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
workpieces with NCGR203

MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck pressure change to low

M482 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
pressure

MATA-BEI chuck pressure return to normal pres-

M483 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
sure

Ejector advance (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M484
Ejector checker ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Ejector retract (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M485
Ejector checker ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Ejector advance (MATA-BEI) (no confirmation of

M486 ☆ ☆
ejector advance completion)

7-52
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M487 (R) ATC magazine air blow ON

Rotary tool spindle start (forward direction) (lower

M488 ○ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ○
turret)

Rotary tool spindle start (reverse direction) (lower

M489 ○ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ○
turret)

M490 Rotary tool spindle stop (lower turret) ○ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ○

M400 M491 MATA-BEI C-axis selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

to Stroke area limit OFF

M492 ○
M499 (Parts catcher A and turret type)

Stroke area limit ON

M493 ○
(Parts catcher A and turret type)

Side tapping cycle (rotary tool reverse rotation)

M494 ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○
(lower turret)

M495 Swing B-axis curvic clamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M496 Swing B-axis curvic unclamp/disk brake OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M497 Swing B-axis disk brake ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M400 Turret index restriction OFF

M498 ○
to (turret parts catcher)
M499 Turret index restriction ON
M499 ○
(turret parts catcher)

M500
M code for GANTRY ROBOT or Parts catcher “C”
to M599

M600
M code for waiting GANTRY ROBOT
to M699

7-53
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M700 Z-axis mirror image ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M701 Z-axis mirror image OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M702 M code for turret unclamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M703 C-axis brake off mode ON ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M704 C-axis brake off mode OFF ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○

M705 Completion of executing bar stopper operation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M706 Coolant for chip removing ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M707 Coolant for chip removing OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M708 Coolant 3 start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M709 Special setting (coolant 3 stop) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M710 Tool unclamp (Tool spindle) ○ ○ ○ ○

M711 Tool clamp (Tool spindle) ○ ○ ○ ○

M700

to M712 Validating HAN-BEI probe ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M799
M713 Invalidating HAN-BEI probe ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M714 Setting laser in tool length measurement mode ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M715 Setting laser in tool breakage detection mode ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “G”

M718 ☆ ☆
Hand open

Parts catcher “G”

M719 ☆ ☆
Hand close

Change to coolant blow for internal upper tool

M720 ○ ○ ○ ○
spindle

Change to coolant blow for external upper tool

M721 ○ ○ ○ ○
spindle

Parts catcher “G”

M722 ☆ ☆
No-load operation mode ON

Parts catcher “G”

M723 ☆ ☆
No-load operation mode OFF

7-54
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

Parts catcher “G”

M724
Z1-axis swing interlock ignore ON

Parts catcher “G”

M725
Z1-axis swing interlock ignore OFF

M726 Laser type tool breakage detector advance ☆ ☆

M727 Laser type tool breakage detector retract ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI or R side spindle / Low speed winding

M730 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
fix

MATA-BEI or R side spindle / High speed winding

M731
fix

M732 MATA-BEI or R side spindle / winding fix release ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M733 Parts catcher type G swing ☆ ☆

M734 Parts catcher type G hand down ☆ ☆

Confirmation of parts catcher type G ejection cycle

M735 ☆ ☆
completion

M736 Stabilizer or R side stabilizer close ☆ ☆ ☆

M737 Stabilizer or R side stabilizer open ☆ ☆ ☆

M700 ☆ ☆ ☆
M738 L side stabilizer close
to
M739 L side stabilizer open ☆ ☆ ☆
M799

M740 Spindle-through coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M741 Spindle-through coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M742 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M743 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M744 ATC magazine low speed

M745 ATC magazine low speed cancel

M746 ATC tool alignment

M748 High pressure coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆

M749 High pressure coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆

M750 Tool spindle low pressure unclamp

M751 Decode output (M51 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M752 Decode output (M52 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M753 Decode output (M53 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M754 Decode output (M54 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M755 Decode output (M55 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M756 Decode output (M56 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-55
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M757 Decode output (M57 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M758 Decode output (M58 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M760 Decode output (M60 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M761 Decode output (M61 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Upper turret coolant valves on right and left sides

M762 ○
ON

Upper turret coolant valves on right and left sides

M763 ○
OFF

M764 Turret left side selection ○

M765 Turret right side selection ○

M766 Turret coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆

M767 Turret coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “B” / “G” advance (no confirmation of

M768 ☆ ☆
advance completion)

Parts catcher “B” / “G” retract (no confirmation of

M769 ☆ ☆
advance completion)

M700 M770 Spindle winding fix (low speed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

to
M771 Spindle winding fix (high speed) ○ ○
M799
M772 Spindle winding fix release ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M773 Stabilizer interlock ignore ON ☆ ☆

M774 Stabilizer interlock ignore OFF ☆ ☆

M775 Rotary tool spindle position control mode ON ☆ ☆

M776 M code for L unit robot 1 ☆ ☆

M777 M code for L unit robot 2 ☆ ☆

M778 M code for L unit robot 3 ☆ ☆

M779 M code for L unit robot 4 ☆ ☆

M782 Tool spindle orientation #6 position

Tool spindle orientation Extra

M783
(For M code in G419)

M784 Tool spindle orientation #5 position ○ ○

M785 Tool spindle orientation #1 position ○ ○ ○ ○

M786 Tool spindle orientation #2 position ○ ○ ○ ○

M787 Tool spindle orientation #3 position ○ ○ ○ ○

M788 Tool spindle orientation #4 position ○ ○ ○ ○

M789 R-unit spindle rotates/lower-milling spindle rotates

7-56
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M790 L-unit spindle rotates/lower-milling spindle rotates

M791 Milling simultaneous rotation with spindle rotation ☆ ☆

M792 MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode ON

M793 MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode OFF

M700
M794 Spindle rigid tapping mode (reverse rotation) ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M795 Spindle rigid tapping mode (reverse rotation) OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M799

M796 L (main spindle) unit machining start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M797 L (main spindle) unit machining completion ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M798 R (sub spindle) unit machining start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M799 R (sub spindle) unit machining completion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M800 M800
to to M code for waiting

M849 M849

HAI-BEI advance (no confirmation of advance

M858 ☆ ☆
completion)

HAI-BEI retract (no confirmation of retract comple-

M859 ☆ ☆
tion)

M860 Correct chucking check, SOL. ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M850
M861 Correct chucking check, SOL. OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to

M899 M862 Correct chucking check judgement ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M codes to M865 Correct chucking check NG judgement, feed hold ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

ignore
Parts catcher “B”/”G” cycle (no confirmation of
completion ☆ ☆
advance completion)
of M400 M868
Parts catcher advance (no confirmation of advance
to
completion) (R-unit)
M499, and
Parts catcher retract (no confirmation of advance
M700 to M869
completion) (R-unit)
M799
Workpiece forcible discharge unit advance (no
(Except M884
confirmation of the front end)
M860,
Lower rotary tool spindle stop (no confirmation of
861,863, M890 ☆ ○ ○ ○
spindle stop)
865)
M893 Steady rest open (no confirmation of the completion)

HAN-BEI probe valid

M898 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(no confirmation of the completion)

HAN-BEI probe invalid (no confirmation of the

M899 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
completion)

7-57
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M900 to

M901 For M900 ATC tool check function OFF mode

ATC M901

M902

to M951

Special

M code

M950 (L) ATC ready (No confirmation)

M951 (R) ATC ready (No confirmation)

ATC shutter 2 open

M952
(R) ATC shutter open

ATC shutter 2 close

M953
(R) ATC shutter close (no confirmation)

ATC change arm air blow ON

M954
(L) ATC magazine air blow ON

M955 ATC tool change (arm rotating) ○ ○ ○ ○

ATC shifter advance ○ ○

M956
(L) ATC shifter advance

ATC shifter retract ○ ○

M957
(L) ATC shifter retract

ATC clipper advance ○ ○

M950
M958 ATC shifter hand open
to

M974 ATC magazine chain lock ON

For ATC ATC clipper retract ○ ○

M959 ATC shifter hand close

ATC magazine chain lock OFF

ATC holder advance ○ ○

M960
ATC magazine 1 pot unclamp

ATC holder retract ○ ○

M961
ATC magazine 1 pot clamp

ATC arm forward rotation ○ ○

M962
ATC magazine 2 pot unclamp

ATC arm reverse rotation ○ ○

M963
ATC magazine 2 pot clamp

M964 ATC traverse axis point P0 move ○ ○ ○ ○

M965 ATC traverse axis point P1 move ○ ○ ○ ○

ATC traverse axis point P2 move ○ ○ ○ ○

M966
(L)ATC tool change command 2

7-58
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

ATC traverse axis point

M967 ○ ○ ○ ○
M950 P3 move

to ATC side
M968 ○ ○ ○ ○
M974 shutter open

For ATC ATC side shutter close

M969 ○ ○ ○ ○
(no confirmatin)

ATC tool ready command ○ ○

M970 (L) ATC tool ready command

(For M code in G341)

ATC tool change command ○ ○

M971 (L) ATC tool change command

(For M code in G340)

ATC rear shutter open ○ ○

M972 ATC shutter 1 open

M952
(L) ATC shutter open
to

M974 ATC rear shutter close (no confirmatin) ○ ○

ATC shutter 1 close

For ATC M973 (no confirmatin)

(L) ATC shutter close

(no confirmatin)

ATC side shutter open

○ ○
(no confirmatin)

ATC shutter 1 open

M974
(no confirmatin)

(L) ATC shutter open

(no confirmatin)

M975, M976, M978 are special M-code.

M975 GR203 entry into machine. ○ ○

M976 GR203 exit into machine. ○ ○

M975
M978 GR203 hand open. ○ ○
to
M980 System optional stop
M982
Operation pattern
M981
change 1

Operation pattern
M982
change 2

M983 to See M-code list for Gantry Robot or Parts Catcher

M999 type C.

For Gantry NOTE) Commandable only from the lathe side

M code
M991 Counter head status confirmation (for G441) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7-59
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M1000 Parts catcher “D” hand open

M1001 Parts catcher “D” hand close

M1002 Work conveyor start for parts catcher “D”

M1003 Work conveyor advance

M1004 Work conveyor retract

M1005 Parts catcher “D”shutter open

M1006 Parts catcher “D”shutter close

M1007 Parts catcher “D”arm swing-in

M1008 Parts catcher “D”arm swing-out

M1009 Parts catcher “D”hand up

M1010 Parts catcher “D”hand down

M1011 Confirmation for PCD eject cycle

Parts catcher “D” no-load operation mode

M1012
ON

M1013 Parts catcher “D” no-load operation mode OFF

M1000 C-axis synchronization mode ON

M1014
to (LC axis master)

M1099 M1016 C-axis synchronization mode OFF

General M
High pressure coolant interlock ignore
code M1021 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ON

High pressure coolant interlock ignore

M1022 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF

M1047 Coolant blow above spindle ON

M1048 Coolant blow above spindle OFF

M1057 Peripheral equipment stop mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2-axis zero position interlock cancel

M1058 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ON

M1059 B2-axis zero position interlock cancel OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M1072 Status display lamp: Red

M1073 Status display lamp: Yellow

M1074 Status display lamp: Green

M1075 Status display lamp: Cyan

M1076 Status display lamp: Blue

M1077 Status display lamp: Purple

M1078 Status display lamp: White

7-60
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M1079 Status display lamp: OFF

M1080 Status display lamp: Blink Mode ON

M1000
M1081 Status display lamp: Blink Mode OFF
to

M1099 M1082 Rotation area collision check invalid mode ON

General M
M1083 Rotation area collision check invalid mode OFF
code
M1084 Mist collector ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1085 Mist collector OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1100 to Parts catcher “D” cycle

M1100
M1199 (No confirmation of advance completion)

M code M1101 Ignoring X1Z1 axis interlock at PCD swing-in ON

without

confirma-
M1102 Ignoring X1Z1 axis interlock at PCD swing-in OFF
tion of

completion

M1751 Decode output off (M751 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1752 Decode output off (M752 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1700 M1753 Decode output off (M753 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M1754 Decode output off (M754 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M1799
M1755 Decode output off (M755 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
General M
code M1756 Decode output off (M756 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1757 Decode output off (M757 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1758 Decode output off (M758 output off) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1950 Long Tool Station (1) advance.

M1951 Long Tool Station (1) retract.

M1952 Long Tool Station (2) advance.

M1953 Long Tool Station (2) retract.

M1954 Long Tool Station (3) advance.

M1955 Long Tool Station (3) retract.

M1956 Long Tool Station (1) advance

M1950 (no confirmation)
to
Long Tool Station (1) retract
M1957
M1999 M
(no confirmation)
code for
Long Tool Station (2) advance
ATC M1958
(no confirmation)

Long Tool Station (2) retract

M1959
(no confirmation)

Long Tool Station (3) advance

M1960
(no confirmation)

Long Tool Station (3) retract

M1961
(no confirmation)

M1962 Long Tool Station (1) Tool confirmation

7-61
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

New
Super NTX (W)
TW STS40 STW40 NTX (S) M
STAN NTJ NTXL
CONTENTS series com-
DARD
U L L U L U L U L L U L pany
L R
L R L U R U L U R L U R

M1963 Long Tool Station (2) Tool confirmation

M1950

to M1964 Long Tool Station (3) Tool confirmation

M1999 M M1965 Long Tool Station (1) air blow

code for M1966 Long Tool Station (2) air blow
ATC
M1967 Long Tool Station (3) air blow

7-62
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

7-4 M-code List

(NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, NTX(II), NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, JX-250)
☆ mark indicates option.
NTMX
NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250
STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M00 Program stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M01 Optional stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M02 End of program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Spindle start
M03 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(forward direction)

Spindle start
M04 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(reverse direction)

M05 Spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Coolant start
M07 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(low pressure coolant)

Coolant start
M08 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(high pressure coolant)

Coolant stop
M09 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(low/high pressure coolant)

M10 Chuck close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M11 Chuck open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M12 Tailstock body advance *M21

M00 M13 Tailstock body retract *M22

to
Tailstock quill advance *M12
M99 M14
Internal spindle air blow ON

Tailstock quill retract *M13

M15
Internal spindle air blow OFF

M18 Spindle orientation cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M19 Spindle orientation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M20 Fixed air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M21 Fixed air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M22 Spindle speed arrival signal ignore ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ M17

M23 Chamfering ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M24 Chamfering OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M25 Error detect ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M26 Error detect OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M27 Dry run ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M28 Dry run OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M29 Rigid tapping mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7-63
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

Memory mode operation re-

M30 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
set&restart

M31 Workpiece conveyor start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle lock

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M32 ON

Automatic partition open

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle lock

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M33 OFF

Automatic partition close

Internal spindle air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M36 Coolant blow for internal spindle

ON

Internal spindle air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M37 Coolant blow for internal spindle

OFF

M41 Spindle selection (C-axis OFF) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle

M48 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
internal spindle air blow ON

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle

M49 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
internal spindle air blow OFF
M00
M50 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ M51
to

M99 M51 MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ M50

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle start

M53 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(forward direction)

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle start

M54 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(reverse direction)

M55 MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Turret or Tool spindle air blow ON ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ☆

M56 ZEN-BEI retract for dou-

ble-pushing

Turret or Tool spindle air blow ○

○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ☆
M57 OFF

ZEN-BEI retract

M58 FMB bar change command ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M59 HAN-BEI air blow

M60 Tool setter air blow M64

Auto bar advance/LNS sprint bar

☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M78
operation end confirmation
M61
ZEN-BEI workpiece material feed
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
command

M62 Automatic door open ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-64
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M63 Automatic door close ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M65 Tool setter advance

M66 Tool setter retract

M67 Auto bar advance 2 (OFF) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M79

Parts catcher advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M73

M68 L-side turret parts catcher chute

☆ ☆ ☆ *M73
advane

Parts catcher retract (work counter

☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M74
data increment)

M69 L-side turret parts catcher chute

retract (work counter data incre- ☆ ☆ ☆ *M74

ment)

M70 X-axis interlock ignore ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M71 X-axis interlock ignore OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Synchronization position set

M72 (Synchronization completion ○ ○ ○

interlock)

M73 HAI-BEI advance

M74 HAI-BEI retract

M00

to
M75 R-unit automatic start (L-unit)

M99 M76 Drill breakage detector advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M77 Drill breakage detector retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

IEMCA bar operation end confir-

M81 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M80
mation

Chuck pressure change to low

M82 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
pressure

Chuck pressure change to high

M83 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
pressure

Cut-off checker advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M84 Eject checker/Forcible discharge

☆ ☆
unit advance

Cut-off checker retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M85 Eject checker/Forcible discharge

☆ ☆
unit retract

M86 Spindle lock ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M87 Spindle lock OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Rotary tool spindle start (forward

M88 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
direction)

Rotary tool spindle start

M89 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(retract direction)

7-65
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M90 Rotary tool spindle stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C-axis selection (C-axis connec-

M91 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion)

Quill pressure change to low

pressure
M92
Spindle phase synchronization
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
control ON

Quill pressure change to normal

pressure
M93
Spindle phase synchronization
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
control OFF
M00
Side tapping cycle ON
to M94 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆
(rotary tool reverse rotation)
M99
OT interlock ignore (-Z direction)
(when the chuck is closed)
M95
Side tapping cycle OFF
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆
(rotary tool reverse rotation)

Spindle speed synchronization

M96 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
control ON (MATA-BEI)

Spindle speed synchronization

M97 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
control cancel (MATA-BEI)

M98 Sub-program call ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M99 End of sub program ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M100 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

to to
M100

to M111 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M199
to to

M199 M code for waiting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

DNC DNC control by memory card

M200 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
control Sub program call

Spindle/rotary tool spindle stop (no

M205 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
confirmation of spindle stop)

MATA-BEI spindle stop (no

M255 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
confirmation of spindle stop)

ZEN-BEI retract for second push-

M201
M256 ing (no confirmation of spindle
to
stop)
M299
ZEN-BEI retract (no confirmation
M257
of spindle stop)

Automatic door open (no confir-

M262 mation of door open end comple- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

tion)

7-66
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

Automatic door close (no confir-

M263 mation of door close end comple- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

tion)

Parts catcher advance (no confir-

M268 mation in the most advanced ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M273

position)

M201 Parts catcher retract (no confirma-

M269 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *M274
to tion in the most retracted position)

M299 Forcible ejector advance ( no

M284 confirmation of the advanced end

position)

Rotary tool spindle stop (no con-

M290 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
firmation of spindle stop)

C-axis selection (no confirmation

M291 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
of C-axis connection)

M300 Motor load detection valid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M301 Motor load detection invalid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M302 Tool counter invalid (one-shot) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M303 Tool counter valid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M304 Tool counter invalid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

In-position check valid at rapid

M310 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
feed

In-position check invalid at rapid

M311 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
feed

Confirmation of parts catcher “G”

M312 ejection cycle completion ( for ☆ ☆

30/31/32i series)

Confirmation of PCD ejection

M313 cycle completion (For 30/31/32i ☆ ☆

M300
series)
to
M code for GR start/Parts catcher
M399 M358 ☆ ☆ ☆
type C

M359 HAN-BEI air blow ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M365 Chatter Canceller function ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M366 Chatter Canceller function OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M368 Parts catcher “B”/”G” cycle ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M369 Parts catcher “D” cycle ☆ ☆

M code for Y-axis machining mode

M370 cancel (LUCK-BEI), including ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Y-axis reference point return

M code for Y-axis machining mode

M371 (LUCK-BEI), including Y-axis ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

reference point return

Travel command of B2-axis

M372 ☆ ☆ ☆
(for parts catcher type G)

7-67
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

Magazine index command for drill

M376
breakage detection

Drill breakage detection (Trans-

M300 M377 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
mission sensor type)
to
MATA-BEI spindle ON
M399 M397
(LUCK-BEI)

MATA-BEI spindle OFF

M398
(LUCK-BEI)

M400 Tool life count resume

M401 Cycle stop detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M402 Auto door unlock ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

MATA-BEI C-axis brake off mode

M403 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
ON

MATA-BEI C-axis brake off mode

M404 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
OFF

M405 Cut-off machining completion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Chip conveyor ON (intermittent ☆ ☆

M406
type)

Chip conveyor OFF(intermittent ☆ ☆

M407
type)

Feed per minute enable mode ON

M408 during a milling stop (C-axis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

connection)

Feed per minute enable mode OFF

M409 during a milling stop (C-axis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M400
connection)
to
Z-axis load monitoring function
M499 M410 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ON

Z-axis load monitoring function

M411 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF

Spindle position coder selection in

M414 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
opposite side

Waiting with RZ intermediate

M415
position passage confirmation

Constant surface speed control

M416 mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

monitoring function ON

Constant surface speed control

mode
M417 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
monitoring function

OFF

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle

M418 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
orientation OFF

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle

M419 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
orientation ON

7-68
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M420 MATA-BEI air blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M421 MATA-BEI air blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M422 ECOREG unit ON

M423 ECOREG unit OFF

Upper tool spindle chip flow air

M424 ○
blow ON

Upper tool spindle chip flow

M425 ○
coolant blow ON

Upper tool spindle chip flow air &

M426 ○
coolant blow OFF

R-spindle machining mode selec-

M427 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion

L-spindle machining mode selec-

M428 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
tion

Work conveyor start (sub) / Work

M431 conveyor start for Parts catcher ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

“C”/”G”

Back milling mode (C-axis mixture

M432 ☆ ☆
control) ON

Back milling mode (C-axis mixture

M400 M433 ☆ ☆
control) OFF
to
(R) ATC tool ready command
M499 M434 ○
(For M code in G341)

(R) ATC tool change command

M435 ○
(For M code in G340)

M436 Turret or Tool spindle air blow ON ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ☆

Turret or Tool spindle air blow

M437 ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ☆ ○ ○ ☆ ○ ☆
OFF

M438 (R) ATC shifter advance ○

M439 (R) ATC shifter retract ○

M440 Confirmation of machine status ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M441 MATA-BEI spindle selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Back milling machining function

M442 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆
ON

Back milling machining function

M443 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆
OFF

High-pressure coolant system

M444 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 1

High-pressure coolant system

M445 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

changeover 2

7-69
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

High-pressure coolant system

M446 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

changeover 3

High-pressure coolant system

M447 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

changeover 4

High-pressure coolant system

M448 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

changeover 5

High-pressure coolant system

M449 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

changeover 6

High-pressure coolant system

M450 pressure ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
changeover 7
M400
M454 Start of 1/2 deceleration holder use ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M499 M455 Stop of 1/2 deceleration holder use ☆ ☆ ☆

Air blow for HAN-BEI transmitter

M456 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ON

Air blow for HAN-BEI transmitter

M457 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF

M458 HAI-BEI advance

M459 HAI-BEI retract

MATA-BEI correct chucking

M460 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check, SOL. ON

MATA-BEI correct chucking

M461 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check, SOL. OFF

MATA-BEI correct chucking

M462 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check judgement

MATA-BEI correct chucking

M465 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
check NG judgement, feed hold

7-70
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

Parts catcher “B” /“G”

☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
advance

HAI-BEI advance
M468
R side turret parts catcher chute
☆ ☆
advance

R side parts catcher advance ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “B” /“G”

☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
retract

HAI-BEI retract

R side turret parts catcher chute

☆ ☆
M469 retract

R side parts catcher

retract
☆ ☆
(Work counter data

increment)

Y-axis feed enabling mode

M470
OFF/Y-axis knock advance

Y-axis feed enabling mode

M471
ON/Y-axis knock retract

M472 B-axis interlock ignore ON ○ ○ ○ ○

M473 B-axis interlock ignore OFF ○ ○ ○ ○

M400
(R)ATC shutter open
to M474 ○ ○ ☆
(no confirmation)
M499
M475 Spindle encoder selection clear ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M476 M code for R unit robot 1

M477 M code for R unit robot 2

M478 M code for R unit robot 3

M479 M code for R unit robot 4

M code for waiting between L- and

M480 R-units for long workpieces with

NCGR203

MATA-BEI or R-unit chuck

M482 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
pressure change to low pressure

MATA-BEI chuck pressure return

M483 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to normal pressure

Ejector advance (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M484
Ejector checker ☆ ☆

Ejector retract (MATA-BEI) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M485
Ejector checker ☆ ☆

Ejector advance (MATA-BEI) (no

M486 confirmation of ejector advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

completion)

7-71
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M487 (R) ATC magazine air blow ON ○

Rotary tool spindle start (forward

M488 ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○
direction) (lower turret)

Rotary tool spindle start (reverse

M489 ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○
direction) (lower turret)

Rotary tool spindle stop (lower

M490 ○ ☆ ☆ ○ ○
turret)

M491 MATA-BEI C-axis selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Stroke area limit OFF

M492
(Parts catcher A and turret type)
M400
Stroke area limit ON
to M493
(Parts catcher A and turret type)
M499
Side tapping cycle (rotary tool
M494 ○ ○ ○
reverse rotation) (lower turret)

M495 Swing B-axis curvic clamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Swing B-axis curvic unclamp/disk

M496 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
brake OFF

M497 Swing B-axis disk brake ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Turret index restriction OFF

M498 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(turret parts catcher)

Turret index restriction ON

M499 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(turret parts catcher)

M500 M code for GANTRY ROBOT or

to M599 Parts catcher “C”

M600 M code for waiting GANTRY

to M699 ROBOT

M700 Z-axis mirror image ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M701 Z-axis mirror image OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M702 M code for turret unclamp ○ ○ ○ ○

M703 C-axis brake off mode ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M704 C-axis brake off mode OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Completion of executing bar

M705 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M700 stopper operation
to
M706 Coolant for chip removing ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M799
M707 Coolant for chip removing OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M708 Coolant 3 start ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M709 Special setting (coolant 3 stop) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M710 Tool unclamp (Tool spindle) ○

M711 Tool clamp (Tool spindle) ○

M712 Validating HAN-BEI probe ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-72
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M713 Invalidating HAN-BEI probe ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Setting laser in tool length meas-

M714 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
urement mode

Setting laser in tool breakage

M715 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
detection mode

Parts catcher “G”

M718 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Hand open

Parts catcher “G”

M719 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Hand close

Change to coolant blow for internal

M720 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
upper tool spindle

Change to coolant blow for exter-

M721 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
nal upper tool spindle

Parts catcher “G”

M722 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
No-load operation mode ON

Parts catcher “G”

M723 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
No-load operation mode OFF

Parts catcher “G”

M724 ☆ ☆
Z1-axis swing interlock ignore ON

Parts catcher “G”

M700 M725 Z1-axis swing interlock ignore ☆ ☆
to OFF
M799
Laser type tool breakage detector
M726 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
advance

Laser type tool breakage detector

M727 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
retract

MATA-BEI or R side spindle /

M730 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Low speed winding fix

MATA-BEI or R side spindle /

M731 ○ ○ ○ ○
High speed winding fix

MATA-BEI or R side spindle /

M732 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
winding fix release

M733 Parts catcher type G swing ☆ ☆

M734 Parts catcher type G hand down ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Confirmation of parts catcher type

M735 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
G ejection cycle completion

M736 Stabilizer or R side stabilizer close ☆ ☆ ☆

M737 Stabilizer or R side stabilizer open ☆ ☆ ☆

M738 L side stabilizer close ☆ ☆ ☆

M739 L side stabilizer open ☆ ☆ ☆

M740 Spindle-through coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M741 Spindle-through coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

7-73
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle

M742 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
coolant blow ON

MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle

M743 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
coolant blow OFF

M744 ATC magazine low speed ○ ○

M745 ATC magazine low speed cancel ○ ○

M746 ATC tool alignment ☆ ○ ○ ○

M748 High pressure coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆

M749 High pressure coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆

M750 Tool spindle low pressure unclamp ○

M751 Decode output (M51 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M752 Decode output (M52 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M753 Decode output (M53 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M754 Decode output (M54 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M755 Decode output (M55 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M756 Decode output (M56 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M757 Decode output (M57 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M700
M758 Decode output (M58 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to
M799 M760 Decode output (M60 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M761 Decode output (M61 spare) ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Upper turret coolant valves on right

M762
and left sides ON

Upper turret coolant valves on right

M763
and left sides OFF

M764 Turret left side selection

M765 Turret right side selection

M766 Turret coolant blow ON ☆ ☆ ☆

M767 Turret coolant blow OFF ☆ ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “B” / “G” advance

M768 (no confirmation of advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

completion)

Parts catcher “B” / “G” retract (no

M769 confirmation of advance comple- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

tion)

M770 Spindle winding fix (low speed) ○ ○ ○ ○

M771 Spindle winding fix (high speed) ○ ○

M772 Spindle winding fix release ○ ○ ○ ○

M773 Stabilizer interlock ignore ON ☆ ☆

7-74
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M774 Stabilizer interlock ignore OFF ☆ ☆

Rotary tool spindle position control

M775
mode ON

M776 M code for L unit robot 1

M777 M code for L unit robot 2

M778 M code for L unit robot 3

M779 M code for L unit robot 4

M782 Tool spindle orientation #6 position ○ ○ ○ ○

Tool spindle orientation Extra

M783 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(For M code in G419)

M784 Tool spindle orientation #5 position ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M785 Tool spindle orientation #1 position ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M786 Tool spindle orientation #2 position ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M787 Tool spindle orientation #3 position ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M788 Tool spindle orientation #4 position ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M700
R-unit spindle ro-
to M789
tates/lower-milling spindle rotates
M799
L-unit spindle rotates/lower-milling
M790
spindle rotates

Milling simultaneous rotation with

M791
spindle rotation

MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode

M792
ON

MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode

M793
OFF

Spindle rigid tapping mode (re-

M794 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
verse rotation) ON

Spindle rigid tapping mode (re-

M795 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ☆ ☆
verse rotation) OFF

L (main spindle) unit machining

M796 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
start

L (main spindle) unit machining

M797 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
completion

R (sub spindle) unit machining

M798 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
start

R (sub spindle) unit machining

M799 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
completion

M800 M800
to to M code for waiting
M849 M849

7-75
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

HAI-BEI advance (no confirmation

M858
of advance completion)

HAI-BEI retract (no confirmation

M859
of retract completion)

M860 Correct chucking check, SOL. ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M861 Correct chucking check, SOL. OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M862 Correct chucking check judgement ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M850 Correct chucking check NG
M865 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
to judgement, feed hold
M899
Parts catcher “B”/”G” cycle (no
M codes to
confirmation of advance comple- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ignore
tion)
completion M868
Parts catcher advance (no confir-
of M400
mation of advance completion) ☆ ☆
to
(R-unit)
M499, and
Parts catcher retract (no confirma-
M700 to
M869 tion of advance completion) ☆ ☆
M799
(R-unit)
(Except
Workpiece forcible discharge unit
M860,
M884 advance (no confirmation of the
861,863,
front end)
865)
Lower rotary tool spindle stop (no
M890 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
confirmation of spindle stop)

M891 MATA-BEI C-axis selection ☆ ☆

HAN-BEI probe valid

M898 (no confirmation of the comple- ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

tion)

HAN-BEI probe invalid (no con-

M899 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
firmation of the completion)

M900 to
ATC tool check function OFF
M901 M900 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mode
For ATC
M901

M902

to M951

Special

M code

M950 (L) ATC ready (No confirmation) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M951 (R) ATC ready (No confirmation) ○

M950 ATC shutter 2 open ○

to M952
(R) ATC shutter open ○ ☆ ☆
M974

For ATC ATC shutter 2 close ○

M953 (R) ATC shutter close (no confir-

○ ☆ ☆
mation)

7-76
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

ATC change arm air blow ON ○

M954
(L) ATC magazine air blow ON ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

M955 ATC tool change (arm rotating)

ATC shifter advance ○

M956
(L) ATC shifter advance ○ ○ ○ ○

ATC shifter retract ○

M957
(L) ATC shifter retract ○ ○ ○ ○

ATC clipper advance

M958 ATC shifter hand open ○ ○

ATC magazine chain lock ON ☆

ATC clipper retract

M959 ATC shifter hand close ○ ○

ATC magazine chain lock OFF ☆

M950 ATC holder advance

M960
to ATC magazine 1 pot unclamp ○ ○

M974
ATC holder retract
For ATC M961
ATC magazine 1 pot clamp ○ ○

ATC arm forward rotation

M962
ATC magazine 2 pot unclamp ☆ ☆

ATC arm reverse rotation

M963
ATC magazine 2 pot clamp ☆ ☆

M964 ATC traverse axis point P0 move ☆ ☆

M965 ATC traverse axis point P1 move ☆ ☆

ATC traverse axis point P2 move

M966
(L)ATC tool change command 2 ○ ○

ATC traverse axis point

M967
P3 move

ATC side
M968
shutter open

ATC side shutter close

M969
(no confirmatin)

ATC tool ready command ○

M952
M970 (L) ATC tool ready command
to ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(For M code in G341)
M974
ATC tool change command ○

M971 (L) ATC tool change command

For ATC
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(For M code in G340)

7-77
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

ATC rear shutter open

M972 ATC shutter 1 open ○

(L) ATC shutter open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ATC rear shutter close (no con-

firmatin)
M952 ATC shutter 1 close
M973 ○
to (no confirmatin)
M974
(L) ATC shutter close
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(no confirmatin)
For ATC
ATC side shutter open

(no confirmatin)

ATC shutter 1 open

M974 ○
(no confirmatin)

(L) ATC shutter open

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(no confirmatin)

M975, M976, M978 are special

M-code.

M975 GR203 entry into machine.

M976 GR203 exit into machine.

M975
M978 GR203 hand open.
to

M982 M980 System optional stop

Operation pattern
M981
change 1

Operation pattern
M982
change 2

See M-code list for Gantry Robot

M983 to or Parts Catcher type C.

M999 NOTE) Commandable only from

For Gantry the lathe side

M code Counter head status confirmation

M991 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(for G441)

M1000 Parts catcher “D” hand open ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1001 Parts catcher “D” hand close ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

Work conveyor start for parts

M1002 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M1000 catcher “D”

to M1003 Work conveyor advance ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

M1099
M1004 Work conveyor retract ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
General M
M1005 Parts catcher “D”shutter open ☆ ☆
code

M1006 Parts catcher “D”shutter close ☆ ☆

M1007 Parts catcher “D”arm swing-in ☆ ☆

M1008 Parts catcher “D”arm swing-out ☆ ☆

7-78
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M1009 Parts catcher “D”hand up ☆ ☆

M1010 Parts catcher “D”hand down ☆ ☆

M1011 Confirmation for PCD eject cycle ☆ ☆

Parts catcher “D” no-load operation

M1012 mode ☆ ☆

ON

Parts catcher “D” no-load operation

M1013 ☆ ☆
mode OFF

C-axis synchronization mode ON

M1014 ○
(LC axis master)

M1016 C-axis synchronization mode OFF ○

High pressure coolant interlock

M1021 ignore ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

ON

High pressure coolant interlock

M1022 ignore ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFF

M1047 Coolant blow above spindle ON ☆

M1048 Coolant blow above spindle OFF ☆

M1000
M1057 Peripheral equipment stop mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
to
B2-axis zero position interlock
M1099
M1058 cancel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
General M
ON
code
B2-axis zero position interlock
M1059 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
cancel OFF

M1072 Status display lamp: Red ☆

M1073 Status display lamp: Yellow ☆

M1074 Status display lamp: Green ☆

M1075 Status display lamp: Cyan ☆

M1076 Status display lamp: Blue ☆

M1077 Status display lamp: Purple ☆

M1078 Status display lamp: White ☆

M1079 Status display lamp: OFF ☆

Status display lamp: Blink Mode ☆

M1080
ON
Status display lamp: Blink Mode ☆
M1081
OFF
Rotation area collision check
M1082
invalid mode ON
Rotation area collision check
M1083
invalid mode OFF

7-79
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M1000 M1084 Mist collector ON ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

to

M1099
M1085 Mist collector OFF ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
General M

code

Parts catcher “D” cycle

M1100 (No confirmation of advance ☆ ☆

M1100 to completion)

M1199 Ignoring X1Z1 axis interlock at

M1101 ☆ ☆
M code PCD swing-in ON

without Tool spindle hand parts catcher

M1132 ☆
confirma- workpiece ejection chute up
tion of Tool spindle hand parts catcher
M1133 ☆
completion workpiece ejection chute down

Ignoring X1Z1 axis interlock at

M1102 ☆ ☆
PCD swing-in OFF

M1744 Turning tool speed limit release ○ ○ ○ ○

M1745 Turning tool speed limit valid ○ ○ ○ ○
Chip flow air blow for ejecting
M1746 ☆ ☆
remaining material ON

Chip flow air blow for ejecting

M1747 ☆ ☆
remaining material OFF

Tool spindle hand parts catcher

M1750 ☆
workpiece ejection chute up

Decode output off (M751 output

M1751 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)

Decode output off (M752 output

M1700 M1752 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)
to

M1799 Decode output off (M753 output

M1753 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
General M off)

code Decode output off (M754 output

M1754 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)

Decode output off (M755 output

M1755 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)

Decode output off (M756 output

M1756 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)

Decode output off (M757 output

M1757 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)

Decode output off (M758 output

M1758 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
off)

Tool spindle hand parts catcher

M1759 ☆
workpiece ejection chute down

7-80
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NTMX

NTJX NTMXL MX-100 JX-250

STAN NTRX-300 NTX
CONTENTS MX5 M company
DARD /NTRX-300L (II)
U L U L U L L U L

U L U L U L L U R

M1950 Long Tool Station (1) advance. ☆

M1950 M1951 Long Tool Station (1) retract. ☆

to
M1952 Long Tool Station (2) advance. ☆
M1999 M
M1953 Long Tool Station (2) retract. ☆
code for
M1954 Long Tool Station (3) advance. ☆
ATC
M1955 Long Tool Station (3) retract. ☆

M1956 Long Tool Station (1) advance ☆

(no confirmation)

Long Tool Station (1) retract

M1957 ☆
(no confirmation)

Long Tool Station (2) advance

M1958 ☆
(no confirmation)

Long Tool Station (2) retract

M1959 ☆
M1950 (no confirmation)
to
Long Tool Station (3) advance
M1999 M M1960 ☆
(no confirmation)
code for
Long Tool Station (3) retract
ATC M1961 ☆
(no confirmation)

M1962 Long Tool Station (1) Tool ☆

M1963 Long Tool Station (2) Tool ☆

M1964 Long Tool Station (3) Tool ☆

M1965 Long Tool Station (1) air blow ☆

M1966 Long Tool Station (2) air blow ☆

M1967 Long Tool Station (3) air blow ☆

7-81
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

7-5 Description of M Codes

(1) M00 (program stop)
When this M code is read, the machine stops automatic operation with the
program retained in the memory.
The spindle, coolant, and axis motion are all stopped.
The operation restarts when the cycle start switch is pressed.
This program stop function is used to suspend machine operation to check
workpiece dimensions, remove chips or carry out manual operation.
• Program example
T0101 S2500 M03;
G00 X120. Z10. M08;
:
M00; Suspends machine operation to
check the conditions of the insert.
S2700 M03; Designates spindle start at a new
spindle speed.
G01 Z-50. F0.3 M08; Designates coolant supply.

G00 X200. Z150.;

M00; Suspends machine operation to
remove chips.
NOTE: Designate the M00 command in a block independently.
NOTE: When the RESET switch is pressed while the machine stops in the M00
mode, the memory is cleared.
(2) M01 (optional stop)
When the M01 command is read, the machine stops immediately. Whether
this command is executed or not is optionally decided by an operator; the
M01 command is valid only when the OPTIONAL STOP switch on the ma-
chine operation panel is ON. If the M01 command is read while the OP-
TIONAL STOP switch is set in the OFF position, the M01 command is ig-
nored and the program advances to the next block.
To restart the operation suspended by the execution of the M01 command,
press the CYCLE START switch.
This optional stop function is usually used to suspend machine operation to
check workpiece dimensions.

7-82
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

• Program example
T0202 S2500 M03;
G00 X120. Z10. M08;
G01 X50. F0.3;
:
G00 X200. Z150.;
M01; Designates the M01 command at
the end of each machining process.
Machine operation is suspended;
the operator can check the
machine dimensions.

NOTE: Designate the M01 command in a block independently.

(3) M02 (end of program)
The M02 command is usually written at the end of a program. When this
command is read, all automatic operation stops and the NC is reset.
• Program example
T0303 S2500 M03;
G00 X120. Z10. M08;
G01 Z−50. F0.3;
:
G00 X200. Z150.;
M02; Designates the M02 command at the
end of a program.
NOTE: Designate the M02 command in a block independently.
NOTE: Use the M30 command instead of M02 command when the machine is
operated in the memory restart mode.
(4) M03 (spindle start - forward direction)
Use the M03 command to start the spindle in the forward direction.

With the TW series, the rotating direction on the R-unit is as shown below.

7-83
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(5) M04 (spindle start - reverse direction)

Use the M04 command to start the spindle in the reverse direction.

With the TW series, the rotating direction on the R-unit is as shown below.

(6) M05 (spindle stop)

Use the M05 command to stop the spindle.

7-84
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

*As for the descriptions (7) to (12), standard settings are as follows.
(7) M06 (unused)
(8) M07 (coolant supply at low pressure)
Coolant is supplied at low pressure when the supply pressure can be changed
over between HIGH and LOW.
(9) M08 (coolant supply at high pressure)
Designate the M08 command to supply coolant.
The coolant switch on the machine operation panel must be set in the auto-
matic position.
Coolant is supplied at high pressure when the supply pressure can be
changed over between HIGH and LOW.
NOTE: When the chip flow coolant pump is optionally employed, the pump is
activated together with coolant.
Be careful to program this command if there is no oil supplied in the
stand-alone type tank.
(10) M09 (coolant stop)
Designate the M09 command to stop coolant supply.
When the coolant supply pressure can be changed over between HIGH and
LOW, coolant at high and low pressures is stopped.
• Program example
T0101 S2500 M03;
G00 X120. Z1. M08; Starts coolant supply
G01 X50. F0.2;
:
G00 X200. Z150. M09; Stops coolant supply
M01;
NOTE: Coolant stops also when machine operation is suspended by the execu-
tion of the M00, M01, or M02 command.
NOTE: If the coolantl pump is stopped and started more than necessary, the life
of the pump and related equipment may be shortened.
It is not necessary to stop the coolant pump when the turret rotates be-
tween processes.
Minimize the coolant stop command.
(11) M10 (chuck close)
The chuck closes automatically when the M10 command is executed.
(12) M11 (chuck open)
The chuck opens automatically when the M11 command is executed. Desig-
nate the M11 command for the machine equipped with a bar feeder or auto
loader.
Changing the PMC parameter D200 No.255 into 85, and re-switching the power
supply enable it to change the NC command before i series model B.

7-85
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

[NC command before i series model B]

(13) M06 (coolant supply at low pressure)
Coolant is supplied at low pressure when the supply pressure can be changed
over between HIGH and LOW.
(14) M07 (coolant stop at low pressure)
Coolant supply at low pressure is stopped.
(15) M08 (coolant on)
Designate the M08 command to supply coolant.
The coolant switch on the machine operation panel must be set in the auto-
matic position.
Coolant is supplied at high pressure when the supply pressure can be
changed over between HIGH and LOW.
(16) M09 (coolant stop)
Designate the M09 command to stop coolant supply.
When the coolant supply pressure can be changed over between HIGH and
LOW, coolant at high pressure is stopped.
• Program example
T0101 S2500 M03;
G00 X120. Z1. M08; Starts coolant supply
G01 X50. F0.2;
:
G00 X200. Z150. M09; Stops coolant supply
M01;
NOTE: Coolant stops also when machine operation is suspended by the execu-
tion of the M00, M01, or M02 command.
(17) M10 (chuck open: other than U.S.A.)
M11 (chuck open: for U.S.A.)
The chuck opens automatically when the M10 command is executed.
Designate the M10 command for the machine equipped with a bar feeder or
auto loader.
(18) M11 (chuck close)
M10 (chuck close: for U.S.A.)
The chuck closes automatically when the M11 command is executed.

7-86
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(19) M12 (tailstock body advance or knock pin IN)

M21 (tailstock body advance: for U.S.A.)
For the machine equipped with an automatic tailstock, the tailstock body
moves forward when the M12 (M21) command is executed.
If the machine is equipped with a knock-pin type tailstock, the knock pin ex-
tends and is inserted in the slide automatically.
(20) M13 (tailstock body retract or knock pin OUT)
M22 (tailstock body retract: for U.S.A.)
For the machine equipped with an automatic tailstock, the tailstock body
moves backward when the M13 (M22) command is executed.
If the machine is equipped with a knock-pin type tailstock, the knock pin re-
tracts and is moved out of the slide automatically.
(21) M14 (tailstock quill advance)
M12 (tailstock quill advance: for U.S.A.)
When the M14 (M12) command is executed, the tailstock quill moves for-
ward automatically.
M14 (internal spindle air blow on — TW series, WTW, WTS, STW, STS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M14 command is executed, internal spindle air blow is started.
(22) M15 (tailstock quill retract or spindle air blow off)
M13 (tailstock quill retract: for U.S.A.)
When the M15 (M13) command is executed, the tailstock quill moves back-
ward automatically.
M15 (internal spindle air blow off — TW series, WTW, WTS, STW, STS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M15 command is executed, internal spindle air blow is stopped.
(23) M18 (spindle orientation cancel)
The spindle orientation mode is canceled when this M command is executed.
(24) M19 (spindle orientation)
When the M19 command is executed, the spindle is indexed to the predeter-
mined position in reference to the one-turn signal output from the encoder.
The spindle is held in the orient stop position (clamped by the spindle drive
motor) until the M19 mode is canceled by the designation of the M18 com-
mand.
(25) M20 (air blow on)
When the M20 command is executed, the compressed air is supplied.
Air blow is stopped by the timer or the M21 command.
(26) M21 (air blow off)
When the M21 command is executed, air blow is stopped.

7-87
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(27) M22 (spindle speed arrived signal ignore) (For U.S.A. market: M17)
If a parameter is set for “to check the spindle speed arrived signal”, it is nec-
essary to designate the M22 command to feed an axis in the asynchronous
mode (G98; feed per minute mode) while the spindle is not rotating. The
M22 command must be designated in all the blocks that call for synchronous
mode feed because it is a one-shot command.
• Program example
G98 G01 Z−80. F100. M22;
When the M22 command is designated, the NC executes the commands
without checking the spindle speed arrived state.
(28) M23 (chamfering on)
In the M23 mode, chamfering is executed in the thread cutting cycle.
Chamfering distance is set for system parameter No. 5130.
Generally, chamfering angle is smaller than 45 degrees due to servo lag.
(29) M24 (chamfering off)
The chamfering on state is canceled by executing the M24 command.
When the power is turned on or the NC is reset, the NC is in the chamfering
off state.
(30) M25 (error detect on)
The M25 command is used to obtain sharp edge at the corner. That is, in
the M25 mode, program execution does not advance to the next block until
motion commands in the current block have been completed.
If machining is carried out in this mode, total machining time is elongated
and therefore the dwell (G04) function is usually used to cut a sharp corner.
(31) M26 (error detect off)
The error detect on mode is canceled by executing the M26 command.
When the power is turned on or the NC is reset, the NC is in the error detect
off state.
(32) M27 (dry run on)
When the M27 command is executed, feedrates in a program are all replaced
with the feedrate set by the feed override switch on the machine operation
panel. In this case, the feedrate is set in units of “mm (inch)/min”.
NOTE: The dry run function cannot be used for thread cutting.
(33) M28 (dry run off)
This command cancels the M27 mode.
When the dry run mode is canceled, the axes are moved at the programmed
feedrate.
(34) M29 (work counter data increment or rigid tapping mode on)
A value on the hardware work counter increases one by one.
Refer to Section 16 for the rigid tapping type.

7-88
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(35) M30 (reset and restart of memory operation)

The M30 command is used as the end of program command for memory
mode operation.
In the memory mode:
When the M30 command is executed, the automatic operation stops and
the program stored in memory is rewound to the beginning.
In the memory mode operation reset & restart mode:
When the M30 command is executed, the program stored in the
memory is rewound to the beginning and the next cycle starts automat-
ically.
Command M30 in a block independently.
(Words following after a commanded are ignored.)
(36) M31 (workpiece conveyor start)
When the M31 command is executed, the workpiece conveyor operates for a
few seconds (as set by the timer).
When the workpiece passage confirmation sensor is used, the conveyor op-
erates for a certain period of time (as set by the timer).
(37) M32 (automatic partition open — R-unit with the TW series and WTW)
When the M32 command is executed, the automatic partition opens.
M32 (R unit spindle lock on — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 se-
ries)
When the M32 command is executed, the spindle of the right unit is locked.
(38) M33 (automatic partition close — R-unit with the TW series and WTW)
When the M33 command is executed, the automatic partition closes.
M33 (R unit spindle lock off — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 se-
ries)
When the M33 command is executed, the spindle lock of the right unit is re-
leased.
(39) M35 (simple C-axis incremental indexing)
Refer to Section 17.
(40) M36 (spindle air blow on — SC/TMC/WT/WY series)
When the M36 command is executed, the spindle air blow is turned on.
M36 (internal spindle coolant blow on — TW series, WTW, WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M36 command is executed, internal spindle air blow starts.
In order to turn ON the L-side internal spindle coolant blow of NTY3, start
the pump for removing chip (M706: coolant for removing chip ON, M707:
coolant for removing chip OFF).
For TW series, WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, and the R-side internal
spindle coolant blow of NTY3, start the coolant pump (M8: high pressure
coolant ON, M7: low pressure coolant ON, M9: coolant stop).

7-89
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(41) M37 (spindle air blow off — SC/TMC/WT/WY series)

When the M37 command is executed, the spindle air blow is turned off.
M37 (internal spindle coolant blow off — TW series, WTW, WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M37 command is executed, internal spindle coolant blow stops.
(42) M41 (Spindle selection for machine with C-axis)
NOTE: If the M41 command is executed for the machine not equipped with
C-axis, the program stops.
(43) M48 (R unit intrenal spindle air blow on— lower unit with WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M48 command is executed, internal spindle air blow of the right
unit starts.
(44) M49 (R unit internal spindle air blow off — lower unit with WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M49 command is executed, internal spindle air blow of the right
unit stops.
*The following descriptions (43) to (44) are differnt from machine models.
[Machines except WT-150]
(45) M50 (MATA-BEI chuck open)
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
M50 (R unit chuck open — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M50 command is executed, the chuck of the right unit opens au-
tomatically.
(46) M51 (MATA-BEI chuck close)
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
M51 (R unit chuck close — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M51 command is executed, the chuck of the right unit closes au-
tomatically.
[WT-150]
(47) M50 (MATA-BEI chuck close)
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
(48) M51 (MATA-BEI chuck open)
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
(49) M53 (MATA-BEI spindle normal rotation)
MATA-BEI spindle rotates clockwise when viewing the spindle from oppo-
site side to chuck.
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
M53 (R unit spindle forward rotation — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M53 command is executed, the spindle forward rotation of the
right unit is commanded.
R-unit spindle rotates counterclockwise when viewing the spindle from op-
posite side to chuck.
(50) M54 (MATA-BEI spindle reverse rotation)
MATA-BEI spindle rotates counterclockwise when viewing the spindle from
opposite side to chuck.
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
M54 (R unit spindle reverse rotation — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M54 command is executed, the spindle reverse rotation of the right
unit is commanded.

7-90
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

R unit spindle spindle rotates clockwise when viewing the spindle from op-
posite side to chuck.
(51) M55 (MATA-BEI spindle stop)
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI.
M55 (R unit spindle stop — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M55 command is executed, the spindle of the right unit stops ro-
tating.
(52) M56 (turret air blow on or ZEN-BEI retract for double-pushing)
When the M56 command is executed, turret air blow is turned on. For the
tool spindle swing type with swing B-axis, tool spindle airblow is turned on.
If both the turret air blow and ZEN-BEI are equipped, this M code (M56)
cannot be used to turn on the turret air blow. Instead, use M436 to turn on the
turret air blow. Refer to the instruction manual for ZEN-BEI for details.
NOTE: Performing the tool spindle air blow during the tool spindle rota-
tion without using coolant may cause the machine breakdown. Use
the air blow after stopping the tool spindle rotation.
If you use the tool spindle air blow during the tool spindle rotation,
the lubricating device such as a lubricator should be ordered and
added separately.
(53) M57 (turret air blow off or ZEN-BEI retract)
When the M57 command is executed, turret air blow is turned off. For the
tool spindle swing type with swing B-axis, tool spindle airblow is turned off.
If both the turret air blow and ZEN-BEI are equipped, this M code (M57)
cannot be used to turn off the turret air blow. Instead, use M437 to turn off
the turret air blow. Refer to the instruction manual for ZEN-BEI for details.
(54) M58 (loader start or bar change command)
A bar change command is issued when the FMB interface is provided.
Refer to the instruction manual for MON-BEI when it is mounted.
(55) M59 (HAN-BEI air blow)
When the M59 command is executed, the HAN-BEI probe is air blown.
(56) M60 (tool setter air blow)
When the M60 command is executed, the tool setter touch sensor is air
blown.
(57) M61 (bar advance)
When the M61 command is executed, the AUTO CHO-BEI II or ZEN-BEI
pushes out the bar.
When the LNS SPRINT interface is mounted, a bar change is executed.
(58) M62 (automatic door open)
When the M62 command is executed, the automatic door opens.
(59) M63 (automatic door close)
When the M63 command is executed, the automatic door closes.
(60) M65 (tool setter advance)
Refer to the instruction manual for the tool setter.
(61) M66 (tool setter retract)
Refer to the instruction manual for the tool setter.
(62) M68
(Parts catcher advance)
When the M68 command is executed, the parts catcher advances.
(L side turret parts catcher chute open)
When the M68 command is executed, the chute opens.

7-91
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(63) M69
(Parts catcher retract)
When the M69 command is executed, the parts catcher retracts.
(L side turret parts catcher chute close)
When the M69 command is executed, the chute closes.

When NT NURSE or LUCK-BEI is mounted, M69 should be commanded in

individual blocks. For machines equipped with a work counter, the work
counter increases one by one.
(64) M70 (interlock ignore at R-unit (Z-axis advance) — R-unit with the TW se-
ries)
If the Z-axis on the R-unit (TW series) advances beyond a certain area in any
other case except for transfer, each axis is interlocked in order to prevent the
turret on the L-unit and workpiece on the R-unit from interfering with each
other. Therefore, issue this M command to invalidate the interlock function
particularly when handling short workpieces.
M70 (X-axis interlock ignore on — R-unit with the WTW/WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the B-axis advances in trasfer, the X-axis on the right unit is inter-
locked in order to prevent the X-axis from interfering. Therefore, issue this
M command to invalidate the interlock function.
Be careful with this M code not to cause a mechanical interference.
Depending on the case, parameter change will be required.
(65) M71 (interlock valid)
The above interlock is validated again.
M71 (X-axis interlock off — R-unit with the WTW/WTS, NTM3, NTY3 se-
ries)
The above interlock is validated again.
(66) M72 (phase synchronization completion check)
Refer to Section 15.
(67) M75 (steady rest hand open or R-unit start (TW series))
When the M75 command is executed, the steady rest hand opens. For the
double-hand steady rest, the #1 hand of the steady rest opens.
With the TW series, automatic start of the R-unit can be commanded from
the L-unit. If the R-unit is already started at this time, it is re-started after a
program on the R-unit is finished once up to the final M30 command.
(68) M76 (steady rest hand close, drill breakage detector advance, or fine drill
breakage detector start)
When the M76 command is executed, the steady rest hand closes. For the
double-hand steady rest, the #1 hand of the steady rest closes.
The detector bar advances when the drill breakage detector unit is mounted.
If the bar advances to its end, the drill is considered broken and an alarm oc-
curs.
For the fine drill breakage detector, refer to Section 35.
(69) M77 (drill breakage detector retract or MATA-BEI intermediate stop)
When the M77 command is executed, the drill breakage detector retracts.
Refer to the instruction manual for MATA-BEI (hydraulic type) when it is
mounted.
(70) M79 (steady rest #2 hand open)
For the double-hand steady rest, the #2 hand of the steady rest opens when
the M79 command is executed.

7-92
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(71) M80 (steady rest #2 hand close)

For the double-hand steady rest, the #2 hand of the steady rest closes when
the M80 command is executed.
(72) M81 (auto bar operation end confirmation)
The completion of a bar change is checked when the IEMCA interface is
provided.
(73) M82 (chuck pressure change to low)
When the M82 command is executed, the chucking pressure is changed from
normal pressure to low pressure.
NOTE: The normal/low pressure state remains valid when the power is turned
off. Therefore, the chucking pressure state (normal or low) is the same
as that selected when the power was turned off.
(74) M83 (chuck pressure return to normal)
When the M83 command is executed, the chucking pressure is restored from
the low state to the normal state.
NOTE: The normal/low pressure state remains valid when the power is turned
off. Therefore, the chucking pressure state (normal or low) is the same
as that selected when the power was turned off.
(75) M84 (cut-off checker advance — L-unit with the SC/TMC/TW series and
WTW and L-unit/lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, eject
checker advance — R-unit with the TW series, WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3
series, or work forcible discharge unit advance — R-unit with the TW series,
WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M84 command is executed, the respective units advance. If they
do not advance to their respective ends, an alarm occurs.
(76) M85 (cut-off check unit retract — L-unit with the SC/TMC/TW series
and WTW and L-unit/lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, eject
checker retract — R-unit with the TW series, WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3
series or work forcible discharge unit retract — R-unit with the TW series,
WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M85 command is executed, the respective units retract.
(77) M86 (spindle lock on)
When the M86 command is executed, the spindle is locked.
(78) M87 (spindle lock off)
When the M87 command is executed, the spindle is not locked.
(79) M88 (rotary tool normal rotation start)
Refer to Section 14.
(80) M89 (rotary tool reverse rotation start)
Refer to Section 14.
(81) M90 (rotary tool stop)
Refer to Section 14.
(82) M91 (C-axis selection)
Refer to Section 14.
(83) M92 (quill pressure change to low or spindle phase synchronization control
on)
When the M92 command is executed, the tailstock quill pressure is changed
from normal pressure to low pressure.
NOTE: The normal/low pressure state remains valid when the power is turned
off. Therefore, the quill pressure state (normal or low) is the same as
that selected when the power was turned off.

7-93
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

For a twin-spindle machine or a machine equipped with MATA-BEI

spindle, the M92 command has a different function (spindle phase syn-
chronization control on for R-unit).
Refer to Section 15.
(84) M93 (quill pressure return to normal, or spindle synchronization position set)
When the M93 command is executed, the tailstock quill pressure is restored
from the low state to the normal state.
NOTE: The normal/low pressure state remains valid when the power is turned
off. Therefore, the quill pressure state (normal or low) is the same as
that selected when the power was turned off.
For twin-spindle machines or machines equipped with sub spindle, this
command specify the synchronous position in spindle phase synchroni-
zation.
Refer to Section 15.
(85) M94 (side tapping cycle in the reverse direction of tool rotation)
Refer to Section 14.
(86) M95 (R-unit Z-axis overtravel interlock ignore — R-unit with TW series)
With TW series machines, the Z-axis on the R-unit cannot exceed the inter-
mediate point and move to the L-unit while the chuck is closed.
However, this command ignores the above interlock and allows movement to
the L-unit.
This function is used for supporting long workpieces including shafts on
both units, but not for machining short workpieces by advancing the Z-axis
on the R-unit.
M95 (B-axis interlock ignore on— lower part on the R-unit with the WTW
and lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
With WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series machines, the B-axis cannot exceed
the intermediate point and move to the L-unit while both the chuck on the
R-unit and the chuck on the L-unit are closed.
However, this command ignores the above interlock and allows movement to
the L-unit.
(87) M96 (spindle speed synchronization control on for R-unit)
For a twin-spindle machine or a machine equipped with MATA-BEI spindle,
rotation of the two spindles can be synchronized.
Refer to Section 15.
(88) M97 (spindle synchronization control cancel for R-unit)
When the M97 command is executed, the above synchronization control is
reset.
Refer to Section 15.
(89) M98 (sub-program call)
(90) M99 (return to main program)

7-94
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(91) M100 — M199 (synchronization of some unit programs)

1. Waiting M code for 2-path
(TW series, WT series, WY series, NTJ, NTJ100, NTJX, WTW, STS, NTX(S),
SC-100X2)
For a TW or WT series machine, programs are prepared independently for the L-
and R-units (or the upper and lower turrets). If it becomes necessary to synchro-
nize the execution of certain program blocks between the L-unit program and the
R-unit program, enter the 3-digit M code in these programs.
If a 3-digit M code is read in a program of either of the units, the program execu-
tion suspends for this unit until the same 3-digit M code in the other unit program
is executed. The blocks having the same 3-digit M code are executed in syn-
chronization.
An Program Example of Workpiece Transfer from L-unit to R-unit
(TW series)

If program execution of one unit is suspended due to the execution of a syn-

chronization M code, an alarm is generated when a different 3-digit M code
is executed in the other unit program. In this case, operation of both units
stop.
NOTE: If the R-unit is automatically started while the L-unit is in the manual
mode, the synchronization M code is ignored and the operation mode
enters the single block mode, or vice versa.
NOTE: For WTW, M100 to M199 are used as waiting M codes between the up-
per unit and lower unit. M800 to M849 are used as waiting M codes
between the R-unit and L-unit. (Refer to the explanation of M800 to
M849.)

7-95
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

2. Waiting code for 3-path

(WTS, STW, STS, NTM3, NTY3 series, NTX (W), NTXL, JX-250)
For a machine composed of three units, specify P codes following after the M
code. (For the machines, see [Path number figures by machine type] shown be-
low.)
P codes can be specified in two ways, that is, (1) P1/2/3 and (2) P3/5/6/7. These
specifications can be changed over by NC parameters. The standard factory set-
ting is (1) P1/2/3.
Path number figures by machine type
STW, NTX (W), NTXL, JX-250

No. Turret
(1) Upper unit
(2) Lower R-unit
(3) Lower L-unit

WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series

No. Turret
(1) Upper L-unit
(2) Upper R-unit
(3) Lower unit

7-96
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

① Specifying P1/2/3 (standard setting) [Parameter NO.8103#1=1]

An Program Example of Workpiece Transfer (WTS series)

L-unit R-unit Lower unit
(1-path) (2-path) (3-path)
O8864 O8864 O8864
• • •
• • •
• • •
M100P12; M100P12; •
• • •
• • •
• • •
M100P13; • M100P13;
• • •
• • •
• • •
• M102P23; M102P23;
• • •
• • •
• • •
M103P123; M103P123; M103P123;
• • •
• • •

Specicy P code in the following 4 ways.

Specifying numbers inside ( ) does not matter.
[Order of number after P has no restriction.]
P12(P21): Synchronization of execution of L-unit (1-path) and R-unit pro-
grams (2-path)
P13(P31): Synchronization of execution of L-unit (1-path) and lower unit
programs (3-path)
P23(P32): Synchronization of execution of R-unit (2-path) and lower unit
programs (3-path)
P123(P132, P213, ••• P321): Synchronization of execution of L-unit
(1-path), R-unit unit (2-path), and
lower unit (3-path)

7-97
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

② Specifying P3/5/6/7 [Parameter NO.8103#1=0]

An Program Example of Workpiece Transfer (WTS series)

L-unit R-unit Lower unit
(1-path) (2-path) (3-path)
O8864 O8864 O8864
• • •
• • •
• • •
M100P3; M100P3; •
• • •
• • •
• • •
M100P5; • M100P5;
• • •
• • •
• • •
• M102P6; M102P6;
• • •
• • •
• • •
M103P7; M103P7; M103P7;
• • •
• • •

Specicy P code in the following 4 ways.

P3: Synchronization of execution of L-unit (1-path) and R-unit
programs (2-path)
P5: Synchronization of execution of L-unit (1-path) and lower unit
programs (3-path)
P6: Synchronization of execution of R-unit (2-path) and lower unit
programs (3-path)
P7(P132, P213, •••P321): Synchronization of execution of L-unit
(1-path), R-unit unit (2-path), and lower unit (3-path)
NOTE: For the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, automatic operation by one unit ig-
nores waiting M codes in the program and proceeds to the next block.
NOTE: If incorrect waiting M code or P specification is commanded, an alarm
is occurred. When the alarm for waiting M code is occurred, see and
understand the following description, correct the waiting M code or p
specification.
NOTE: For WTW (NC:FS31i-B)
• When P value is omitted, it is synchronization of upper unit and lower
unit.
• It is possible to command the number of the path by P value command.
(P12, P34, P1234, etc)
• It is also possible to command the waiting M codes (M800 to M839,
M840 to M849).

7-98
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents

160 Waiting M code is not cor- (1) When different M codes are
rect. specified between 1-path and
2-path as the waiting M code
without P command.
(2) Although the same P com-
mand, the waiting M codes are
not corresponded.
(3) Although the waiting M
codes are corresponded, the P
commands are not corresponded.
(When P command is binary
value, this alarm is occurred.)
(4) Although the waiting M
codes are corresponded, there are
different numbers in arrange-
ments of numbers for each P
commands. (When P command
is specified by the arrangement
of the path number, this alarm is
occurred.)
(5) When the waiting M code
without P command (2-path) and
the waiting M code with P com-
mand (3-path) are commanded
simultaneously.
(6) When the waiting M code is
commanded without P command
in 3-path.
161 P for waiting M code is (1) Value of P address is negative
wrong. value.
(2) When contradictory P value
against the system composition
is commanded.

The alarm is occurred on all path which the waiting M code related to the alarm is
executed, the cycle in the single block stop and automatic operation stop state.
At that time, other path not related to the alarm stop immediately, the cycle is in
the automatic operation stop state.

7-99
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(92) M205 (spindle stop)

When the M205 command is executed, the spindle stops. This M code is
completed before the spindle comes to a complete stop. Therefore, pro-
gram the M05 command in the following block in order to check that the
spindle is stopped completely.
(93) M255 (R-unit spindle stop command — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M255 command is executed, the spindle of the R-unit stops. This
M code is completed before the spindle comes to a complete stop. Therefore,
program the M55 command in the following block in order to check that the
spindle is stopped completely.
(94) M262 (automatic door open)
When the M262 command is executed, the automatic door opens. This M
code is completed before the door is opened completely. Therefore, pro-
gram the M62 command in the following block in order to check that the
door is opened completely.
(95) M263 (automatic door close)
When the M263 command is executed, the automatic door closes. This M
code is completed before the door is closed completely. Therefore, program
the M63 command in the following block in order to check that the door is
closed completely.
(96) M268 (parts catcher advance)
When the M268 command is executed, the parts catcher advances. This M
code is completed before the parts catcher is advanced completely. There-
fore, program the M68 command in the following block in order to check
that the parts catcher is advanced completely.
(97) M269 (parts catcher retracts)
When the M269 command is executed, the parts catcher retracts. This M
code is completed before the parts catcher is retracted completely. There-
fore, program the M69 command in the following block in order to check
that the parts catcher is retracted completely.
(98) M284 (workpiece forcible discharge unit advance — R-unit with the WTW,
WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M284 command is executed, the workpiece forcible discharge unit
advances. This M code is completed before the workpiece forcible discharge
is advanced completely. Therefore, program the M84 command in the fol-
lowing block in order to check that the workpiece forcible discharge is ad-
vanced completely.
(99) M290 (rotary tool spindle stop)
When the M290 command is executed, the rotary tool spindle stops. This
M code is completed before the rotary tool spindle comes to a complete stop.
Therefore, program the M90 command in the following block in order to
check that the rotary tool spindle is stopped completely.

7-100
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(100) M291 (C-axis selection)

When the M291 command is executed, the spindle mode changes to the
C-axis mode. This M code is completed before the mode is changed
over completely. Therefore, program the M91 command in the follow-
ing block in order to check that the mode is changed over completely.
(101) M300/M301 (motor load valid/invalid)
Refer to the instruction manual for NT NURSE.
(102) M302 (tool counter invalid — one shot)
Refer to the instruction manual for NT NURSE.
(103) M303/M304 (tool counter valid/invalid)
Refer to the instruction manual for NT NURSE.
(104) M310/M311 (in-position check at rapid feed valid/invalid)
Refer to the instruction manual for NT NURSE.
(105) M358 (for NC-GR/parts catcher type C start)
Refer to the operation manual for NC-GR/parts catcher type C.
(106) M359 (HAN-BEI air blow)
When the M359 command is executed, air blow is performed to the
probe of HAN-BEI.
(107) M365/M366 (Chatter Canceller function ON/OFF)
Refer to the instruction manual for NT NURSE.
(108) M368 (parts catcher type B cycle)
Refer to the chapter 13.
(109) M370/M371
(Y-axis machining mode cancel/valid — only for LUCK-BEI)
Refer to the instruction manual for LUCK-BEI.
(110) M372 (Travel command of B2-axis)
Travel command of B2-axis is commanded from the upper side when
using parts catcher type G. Refer to the operation manual for parts
catcher type G.
(111) M376 (magazine index command for drill breakage detection)
(112) M377 (drill breakage detection (transmission sensor type))
Refer to the chapter 29.
(113) M397/M398 (sub-spindle valid/invalid — only for LUCK-BEI)
Refer to the instruction manual for LUCK-BEI.
(114) M402 (automatic unlock)
When the M402 command is executed, doors are unlocked automati-
cally with the electromagnetic door lock specification. After the M402
command is executed and the automatic operation stops with
M00/M02/M30, doors are unlocked.
NOTE: For the TW series, when the above conditions are met on the L and R
units, doos are unlocked. However, when partition is available and
close, only one door is unlocked with the condtion of one unit (L or R).
(115) M403
(R-uni C-axis brake off mode ON — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M403 command is executed, R-unit C-axis brake is invali-
dated during cutting.

7-101
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(116) M404
(C-axis on the R-unit brake off mode OFF — lower unit with the WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M404 command is executed, R-unit C-axis brake being in-
validated by M403 is validated again.
(117) M408/M409
(feed per minute mode on/off at milling stop during C-axis connection)
The NT Work Navigator, when provided, can be used for the C-axis.
Refer to the instruction manual for NT NURSE/NT Work Navigator.
(118) M410/M411 (Z-axis abnormal load monitor on/off)
Refer to the instruction manual for the Z-axis abnormal load monitor
function.
NOTE: M410 and M411 cannot be used for the NT NURSE or LUCK-BEI.
(119) M414 (spindle position coder selection : WT series, WY series,
Super NTJ, NTJ-100, SC-100X2)
This is the command for selecting the other spindle position coder. For
example, this M code is used when moving the lower turret in the feed
per main spindle revolution while the main spindle rotation is being
commanded by the upper turret program.
M414 (R-unit spindle position coder selection — lower unit with the
WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
This is the command for selecting the R-unit spindle position coder. For
example, this M code is used when moving the lower turret in the feed
per R-unit spindle revolution while the R-unit spindle rotation is being
commanded by the right turret program.
(120) M415 (R-unit Z-axis intermediate point passage check waiting)
Refer to the Most Suitable Transfer Programming Manual.
M415 (Waiting M code with B-axis intermediate point passage check—
L-unit and lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
This is a waiting M code used between the L-unit and the lower unit, in
which the B-axis intermediate point passage check is included. For
workpiece transfer, specify M415 and B-axis zero return command in
the same block, and the completion signal will be output to L-unit as
B-axis passes the intermediate point. Therefore L-unit can enter the next
cycle before B-axis returns to the zero position, which shortens the
maching time.
(121) M418 (R-unit spindle orientaion off — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M418 command is executed, the R-unit spindle orientation is
cancelled.
(122) M419 (R-unit spindle orientaion on — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M419 command is executed, R-unit spindle is indexed tothe
fixed position based on one rotation signal of spindle encoder. The
spindle is clamped at the position by the spindle motor until this com-
mand is cancelled by M418 command.
(123) M420 (R-unit fixed air blow on — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When M420 command is executed, R-unit fixed air starts blowing. The
air blow is stopped by a timer or M421 command.
(124) M421 (R-unit fixed air blow off — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When M421 command is executed, R-unit fixed air blow is stopped.

7-102
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(125) M424 (Upper tool spindle chip flow air blow ON — Upper unit with
the NTJX)
When M424 command is executed, the air blow is discharged from the
upper tool spindle to remove chips adhered to the tool.
(126) M425 (Upper tool spindle chip flow coolant blow ON
— Upper unit with the NTJX)
When M425 command is executed, the coolant blow is discharged from
the upper tool spindle to remove chips adhered to the tool.
(127) M426 (Upper tool spindle chip flow air & coolant blow OFF)
When M426 command is executed, the chip flow air blow or coolant
blow stops.
(128) M427/M428 (R-spindle machining mode selection/L-spindle machining
mode selection) (Super NTJ, NTJ-100, WT series, WY series, WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series, SC-100X2)
Specify M427/M428 command at the beginning of the program when
performing machining on R-unit spindle/L-unit spindle.
Chuck interlock for milling is validated only for either R-unit chuck or
L-unit chuck according to the specified command.
Selecting the counter spindle machining mode by specifying this M
code can give a counter spinlde rotation command without stopping the
current spindle.
M427 and M428 are modal commands, and either spindle is not select-
ed at turning on the power.
For Super NTJ, NTJ-100, WT series, WY series, and SC-100X2, M428
command is automatically issued whenM41/M91 is commanded, and
M427 command, M441/M491.
(129) M429 (work counter data increment)
A value on the hardware work counter increases one by one. Set the pa-
rameter D109 to 2, and this M code will be available. If the PMC pa-
rameter D109 is set to 2, the M code to count out the work counter is
limited to M429 only.
(130) M432 (L-unit C-axis command mix on — L-unit and lower unit with the
WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M432 command is executed, C-axis move command from
lower unit can move C-axis of L-unit. In this time, the C-axis move
command from L-unit is disabled.
(131) M433 (R-unit C-axis command mix off — L-unit and lower unit with
the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When M433 command is executed, C-axis command mix by M432 is
cancelled. C-axis move command from L-unit is valid and L-unit C-axis
cannot be operated by lower unit program.
(132) M436 (turret air blow on)
When the M436 command is executed, turret air blow is turned on.
For the tool spindle swing type with swing B-axis, tool spindle air blow
is turned on.
(133) M437 (turret air blow off)
When the M437 command is executed, turret air blow is turned off. For
the tool spindle swing type with swing B-axis, tool spindle air blow is
turned off.
(134) M441 (R-unit spindle selection — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M441 command is executed, C-axis mode is cancelled, and
spindle mode is selected on R-unit.

7-103
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(135) M442(C-axis command mix on — WTW)

When M442 command is executed, C-axis move command from lower
unit can move C-axis of R-unit. In this time, C-axis move command
from R-unit is disabled.
(R-unit C-axis command mix on — R-unit and lower unit with the WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When M442 command is executed, C-axis move command from lower
unit can move C-axis. In this time, C-axis move command from upper
unit is disabled.
(136) M443 (C-axis command mix off — WTW/R-unit C-axis command mix
off — R-unit and lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When M443 command is executed, C-axis command mix by M442 is
cancelled.
(137) M444 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 1)
When M444 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 1.5MPa.
(138) M445 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 2)
When M445 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 2.5MPa.
(139) M446 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 3)
When M446 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 3.5MPa.
(140) M447 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 4)
When M447 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 4.0MPa.
(141) M448 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 5)
When M448 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 5.0MPa.
(142) M449 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 6)
When M449 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 6.0MPa.
(143) M450 (High-pressure coolant system pressure changeover 7)
When M450 command is executed, the pressure of high-pressure cool-
ant system is changed to 6.9MPa.
(144) M460 (MATA-BEI correct chucking check, SOL. ON)
When M460 command is executed, the solenoid valve is “ON-mode”,
and the air blow is started.
(145) M461 (MATA-BEI correct chucking check, SOL. OFF)
When M461 command is executed, the solenoid valve is “OFF-mode”,
and the air blow is stopped.
(146) M462 (MATA-BEI correct chucking check judgment)
When M462 command is executed, the judgment of correct chucking
check is done.
(147) M465 (Feed hold by MATA-BEI correct chucking check, “NG”
judgment)
When the retry counter counts up, M465 command is executed to stop
MATA-BEI in the feed hold.
(148) M468 (HAI-BEI advance — TW/WT/WY series and NTJ, NTJ-100)
Refer to the instruction manual for HAI-BEI.
M468 (R-unit parts catcher advance — lower unit with the NTMX,
NTMXL, MX5, WTS, NTY3 series)

7-104
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

When M468 command is executed, R-unit parts catcher advances.

(R side turret parts catcher chute open)
When M468 command is executed, the chute opens.
(149) M469 (HAI-BEI retract — TW/WT/WY series and NTJ, NTJ-100)
Refer to the instruction manual for HAI-BEI.
M469 (R-unit parts catcher retract — lower unit with NTMX, NTMXL,
MX5, WTS, NTY3 series)
When M469 command is executed, R-unit parts catcher retracts.
(R side turret parts catcher chute close)
When M469 command is executed, the chute closes.
If R-unit work counter is equipped with, the value on the counter in-
creases one by one.
(150) M470 (Y-axis feed enabling mode OFF/Y-axis knock advance)
<For machines not equipped with Y-axis knock>
In the spindle mode, making a command of M470 cancels the Y-axis
feed enabling mode ON (M471).
NOTE: The command does not work when Y-axis is not at the zero position or
when M470 is commanded in C-axis mode.
<For machines equipped with Y-axis knock>
When M470 command is executed, Y-axis knock pin advances. In the
manual mode, the knock pin is automatically inserted when Y-axis is
returned to the zero point. However, program M470 after M471 block.
The advance motion is validated only when Y-axis is returned to the ze-
ro point.
The C-axis mode cannot be changed over by the M41 command to the
spindle mode unless Y-axis knock pin is advanced.

7-105
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(151) M471 (Y-axis feed enabling mode ON/Y-axis knock retract)

<For machines not equipped with Y-axis knock>
This command enables Y-axis feed even in spindle mode. To feed Y-axis
in spindle mode, specify M471 before Y-axis feed command.
NOTE: The command does not work in C-axis mode.
<For machines equipped with Y-axis knock>
When M471 command is executed, the Y-axis knock pin retracts.
When moving Y-axis, program this command first. This command is
usually used for milling. If it is used for turning, the tool may be mis-
aligned when the Y-axis knock pin is retracted.
(152) M472 (B-axis interlock ignore on — lower unit of R unit with the WTW
and lower unit with WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
The M472 command can ignore some conditions to move B-axis.
The following interlocks are ignored:
• If X-axis of R-unit is not in the zero position, B-axis cannot
traverse.
• If the chuck of L or R-unit is closed, B-axis cannnot enter the
R-unit area.
• If X-axis of L-unit is not in the zero position, B-axis cannnot
enter the L-unit area.
Be careful with this M code not to cause a mechanical interference.
Depending on the case, parameter change will be required.
(153) M473 (B-axis interlock ignore off — lower unit of the R side with the
WTW and lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
This M code is for cutting off the signal outputted with M472 com-
mand.
(154) M475 (spindle position coder selection clear : WT series, WY series,
Super NTJ, NTJ-100, SC-100X2)
This M code is for cutting off the signal outputted with M414 command.
The signal is continued until the spindle stop command (M05, M55) or
the spindle rotation command is executed.
M475 (R-unit spindle position coder selection clear — lower unit with
the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
This M code is for cutting off the signal outputted with M414 com-
mand.
(155) M482 (R-unit chuck pressure change to low pressure — lower unit with
the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M482 command is executed, R-unit chuck pressure is
changed from normal pressure to low pressure.
NOTE: The chuck pressure condition is saved even after the power is turned off.
Therefore, chuck pressure (normal or low) at power on is the same as
before.
(156) M483 (R-unit chuck pressure change to normal pressure — lower unit
with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M483 command is executed, R-unit chuck pressure is re-
stored from the low state to the normal state.
(157) M484 (forcible discharge unit advance — lower unit with the WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M484 command is executed, the forcible discharge unit ad-
vances. If not reach to the advanced end, an alarm will be generated.

7-106
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(158) M485 (forcible discharge unit retract — lower unit with the WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M485 command is executed, the forcible discharge unit re-
tracts.
(159) M488 (rotary tool spindle start (forward direction) — lower unit with
the WTW/WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
The rotary tool spidle is commanded to rotate in the forward direction.
(160) M489 (rotary tool spindle start (reverse direction) — lower unit with the
WTW/WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
The rotary tool spidle is commanded to rotate in the reverse direction.
(161) M490 (rotary tool spindle stop — lower unit with the WTW/WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
The rotary tool spidle is commanded to stop.
(162) M491 (R-unit C-axis selection — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series, NTY3-100(milling 6000min-1)
When the M491 command is executed, the spindle mode is changed to
the C-axis mode on the R-unit.
(163) M494 (side tapping cycle (rotary tool rotation reverse) — lower unit
with WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series
This M494 command reverses rotating directions commanded by
M488/M489. When use tapping in a canned cycle for drilling, specify
M488 only for forward rotation, and M489 only for reverse rotation,
otherwise the cycle cannot be operated correctly. M494 is used to cor-
rectly operate the cycle regardless of the tool type used: side type or
straght type. This command is invalidated when then next tool is in-
dexed.
(164) M700 (Z-axis mirror image on — lower unit with the WTW/WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M700 command is executed, the Z-axis traverse direction
commanded by program command or MDI command is reversed.
(165) M701 (Z-axis mirror image off — lower unit with the WTW/WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
This M code is for cutting off the signal outputted with M700 command.
However, this M code cannot be executed if Z-axis is not in the zero
position.
(166) M702 (M code for turret unclamp)
When the M702 command is executed, the turret is unclamped. Time
until the turret starts turning is shortened by commanding it at the same
block as the move command to the position of the next tool index. If the
turret indexes the next tool, the turret is clamped automatically.
(167) M703 (C-axis brake off mode on)
When the M703 command is executed, the brake by the C-axis is can-
celled while cutting.
(168) M704 (C-axis brake off mode off)
When the M704 command is executed, cancelling C-axis brake is disa-
bled while cutting, and C-axis brake is validated again.
(169) M706 (coolant for removing chip on)
When the M706 command is executed, the coolant for removing chips
starts flowing.
(170) M707 (coolant for removing chip off)
When the M707 command is executed, the coolant for removing chips
stops.

7-107
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(171) M724 (Parts catcher “G” Z1-axis swing interlock ignore ON)
Refer to the instruction manual for Parts catcher “G”.
(172) M725 (Parts catcher “G” Z1-axis swing interlock ignore OFF)
Refer to the instruction manual for Parts catcher “G”.
(173) M728 (Stabilizer (steady rest) knock advance)
When the M728 command is executed, the stabilizer knock advances.
(174) M729 (Stabilizer (steady rest) knock retract)
When the M728 command is executed, the stabilizer knock retracts.
(175) M736 (Stabilizer of R side stabilizer close)
When the M736 command is executed, the stabilizer or R side stabilizer
closes.
(176) M737 (Stabilizer of R side stabilizer open)
When the M737 command is executed, the stabilizer or R side stabilizer
opens.
(177) M738 (L side stabilizer close)
When the M738 command is executed, L side stabilizer closes.
(178) M739 (L side stabilizer open)
When the M739 command is executed, L side stabilizer opens.
(179) M740(Internal spindle coolant blow on)
(SC, TMC,WT, and WY series)
When the M740 command is executed, the solenoid valve for internal
spindle coolant blow opens.
(180) M741(Internal spindle coolant blow off)
(SC, TMC,WT, and WY series)
When the M741 command is executed, the solenoid valve for internal
spindle coolant blow closes.
(181) M742 (MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle coolant blow on — lower unit with
the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M742 command is executed, the solenoid valve for R-unit
internal spindle coolant blow opens.
(182) M743 (MATA-BEI or R-unit spindle coolant blow off — lower unit with
the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M743 command is executed, the solenpid valve for R-unit
internal spindle coolant blow closes.
(183) M748 (High pressure coolant blow on)
When the M748 command is executed, the solenoid valve of the
high-pressure coolant opens.
Also, the high-pressure coolant system starts at the same time.
(184) M749 (High pressure coolant blow off)
When the M749 command is executed, the solenoid valve of the
high-pressure coolant closes.
Also, the high-pressure coolant system stops by closing the solenoid
valves of all path high-pressure coolant systems.
(185) M762 (Upper turret coolant valves on right and left sides ON)
For machines equipped with turret head swing type B-axis, specify
M762 to turn ON the coolant valves on the left side tool and right side
tool of the turret simultaneously.

7-108
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(186) M763 (Upper turret coolant valves on right and left sides OFF)
For machines equipped with turret head swing type B-axis, specify
M763 to cancel the above M762 command, which turns ON the coolant
valves on the left side tool and the right side tool of the turret simulta-
neously.
(187) M764/M765 (Left side of turret selection/ Right side of turret selection)
For machines equipped with turret head swing type B-axis, specify
M764/M765 when performing machining with the tool mounted on the
right side of the turret/left side of the turret. Tool index commanded by
T code and coolant discharge are performed for the selected side of the
turret.
For the direction of milling spindle rotation, the milling spindle cur-
rently being selected rotates in the forward/reverse direction according
to the command issued. The selected side of the turret can be confirmed
by the indicators on the operation panel.
M764/M765 is modal command, and the condition of the selection is
saved even after turning off the power.
(188) M766 (Turret coolant blow on)
When the M766 command is executed, the solenoid valve of the turret
coolant opens.
(189) M767 (Turret coolant blow off)
When the M767 command is executed, the solenoid valve of the turret
coolant closes.
(190) M770 (spindle winding fix (low speed))
When the M770 command is executed, the spindle motor winding for
winding change specification is fixed to the low speed side.

7-109
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(191) M771 (spindle winding fix (high speed))

When the M771 command is executed, the spindle motor winding for
winding change specification is fixed to the high speed side.
This M code is available for machines employing spindle motor wind-
ing change. Specify this M code to fix the spindle winding in such a
case as heavy cutting during which spindle speed is lowered around
spindle motor winding change (in the constant surface mode).
(192) M772 (spindle winding fix release)
When the M772 command is executed, the spindle motor winding for
winding change specification fixed to the low/high speed side with
M770 or M771 is released.
(193) M773 (Stabilizer interlock ignore on)
When the M773 command is executed, the interlocks can be ignored to
operate the stabilizer temporarily. The following interlocks are ignored:
• If the turret indexes the stabilizer station and the stabilizer closes, the
axes cannot move.
Be careful with this M code not to cause a mechanical interference.
(194) M774 (Stabilizer interlock ignore off)
This M code is for cutting off the signal outputted with M773 com-
mand.
(195) M775 (rotary tool spindle position control mode ON) (WT-100,
WY-100II(milling 6000min-1), TW-8, WY-100, NTY-100 and NTY3
(except NTY3 Jumbo, NTY3-250, NTY3-150, NTY3-100 (milling
8000min-1)), SC-100X2)
When the M775 command is executed, the positioning (G00) of the ro-
tary tool spindle can be performed.
Once this command is executed, the position control mode is main-
tained until the rotation command in the M code, the rigid-tapping
command, the orientation, or changeover to manual mode will be per-
formed.
The command to the rotary tool spindle in the position control mode is
performed in address A.
(Command unit: 0.001 degrees, only absolute command is possible.)
Moreover, the command is rounded at 360 degrees and moves towards a
short cut.
(196) M789 (R-unit spindle rotate/lower milling spindle rotate (when the
L-unit spindle is rotating) — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3
series)
For giving a rotating command to R-unit spindle or lower milling spin-
dle successively from lower unit program while L-unit spindle is rotat-
ing with the lower unit program, specify M789 before the block. When
L-unit spindle is rotating with the L-unit program, commanding M789
is not required.

7-110
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(197) M790 (L-unit spindle rotate/lower milling spindle rotate (when the
R-unit spindle is rotating) — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3
series)
For giving a rotating command to L-unit spindle or lower milling spin-
dle successively from lower unit program while the R-unit spindle is
rotating with the lower unit program, specify M790 before the block.
When R-unit spindle is rotating with the R-unit program, commanding
M790 is not required.
(198) M791 (milling spindle rotate (when the spindle is rotating) — L-unit and
R-unit with the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
Specify M791 in the previous block when gives the rotating command
of the milling spindle successively while the spindle is rotating.
(199) M792 (MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode on)
Refer to chapter 17.
(200) M793 (MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode off)
Refer to chapter 17.
(201) M794 (spindle rigid tapping mode on (reverse rotation))
Refer to chapter 17.
(202) M795 (spindle rigid tapping mode off (reverse rotation))
Refer to chapter 17.
(203) M800 — M839 (synchronization 1 of execution of R-unit and L-unit
programs, WTW series)
For the WTW series, programs are prepared independently for the L-
and R-units. The M800 to M839 is used to synchronize program execu-
tion between the L-upper unit and the R-lower unit and synchronize
program execution between the L-lower unit and the R-upper unit.
(204) M840 — M849 (synchronization 2 of execution of R-unit and L-unit
programs, WTW)
For WTW, programs are prepared independently for the L- and R-units.
The M840 to M849 is used to synchronize program execution between
the L-upper unit and the R-upper unit and to synchronize program exe-
cution between the L-lower unit and the R-lower unit.

7-111
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

7-112
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

NOTE: If start automatic operation for R-unit while the L-unit is in the manual
mode, the waiting M code (M800 to M849) is ignored and the operation
mode enters the single block mode, or vice versa.
(205) M860 (Correct chucking check, SOL. ON)
When M860 command is executed, the solenoid valve is “ON-mode”,
and the air blow is started.
(206) M861 (Correct chucking check, SOL. OFF)
When M861 command is executed, the solenoid valve is “OFF-mode”,
and the air blow is stopped.
(207) M862 (Correct chucking check judgment)
When M862 command is executed, the judgment of correct chucking
check is done.
(208) M865 (Feed hold by Correct chucking check, “NG” judgment)
When the retry counter counts up, M865 command is executed to stop
machine in the feed hold.
(209) M868 (R-unit parts catcher advance — lower unit with the NTMX,
NTMXL, MX5, WTS, NTY3 series)
When the M868 command is executed, the parts catcher advances.
This M code is completed before the parts catcher is advanced com-
pletely. Therefore, program the M68 command in the following block
in order to check that the parts catcher is advanced completely.
(210) M869 (R-unit parts catcher retract — lower unit with the NTMX,
NTMXL, MX5, WTS, NTY3 series)
When the M869 command is executed, the parts catcher retracts. This
M code is completed before the parts catcher is retracted completely.
Therefore, program the M469 command in the following block in order
to check that the parts catcher is retracted completely
(211) M884 (forcible discharge unit advance — lower unit with the WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series)
When the M884 command is executed, the workpiece forcible discharge
unit advances.This M code is completed before the workpiece forcible
discharge is advanced completely. Therefore, program the M484 com-
mand in the following block in order to check that the workpiece forci-
ble discharge is advanced completely.
(212) M890 (lower rotary tool spindle stop)
When the M890 command is executed, the lower rotary tool spindle
stops. This M code is completed before the lower rotary tool spindle
comes to a complete stop. Therefore, program the M490 command in
the following block in order to check that the lower rotary tool spindle
is stopped completely.
(213) M891 (R-unit C-axis selection — lower unit with the WTS, NTM3,
NTY3 series)
When the M891 commad is executed, the spindle mode is changed to
the C-axis mode on the R-unit. However, the command is executed be-
fore the completion of the changeover. Command M491 in the follow-
ing block and check that the changeover to the C-axis selection has been
completed.

7-113
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

(214) M892
When the M892 command is executed, the steady rest is closed. How-
ever, the command is executed before the the steady rest is closed com-
petely. Command M736 in the following block and check that the steady
rest is closed completely.
(215) M893
When the M893 command is executed, the steady rest is opened. How-
ever, the command is executed before the the steady rest is opened
competely. Command M737 in the following block and check that the
steady rest is opened completely.
(216) M975 (GR203 advance — R-unit with TW series)
Refer to the instruction manual for MON-BEI.
(217) M976 (GR203 retract — R-unit with TW series)
Refer to the instruction manual for MON-BEI.
(218) M978 (GR203 hand close — R-unit with TW series)
Refer to the instruction manual for MON-BEI.
(219) M1021 (High pressure coolant interlock ignore ON)
(220) M1022 (High pressure coolant interlock ignore OFF)
(221) M1134 (Confirmation for 1 cycle completion)
This M code is for checking the completion of 1 cycle operation. When
M30 is not used in 1 cycle program, command this M code.
(222) M1045
(Ignoring interference interlock between X/Z turret and chuck ON)
(223) M1046
(Ignoring interference interlock between X/Z turret and chuck OFF)
(224) M1057 (Peripheral equipment stop mode)
This M code is commanded to stop the peripheral equipment.
NOTE: When the chip conveyor intermittent operation stops in the auto mode by
commanding this M code, a warning W1096 CHIP CONVEYOR STOP
occurs. Turn ON the NC power again to cancel the warning.
(225) M1058 (B2-axis zero position interlock cancel ON)
This M code is commanded to cancel the interlock that the cycle start
cannot be performed when B2-axis is not at zero position.
Be careful with this M code not to cause a mechanical interference.
(226) M1059 (B2-axis zero position interlock cancel OFF)
Commanding this M code releases the signal for canceling the interlock
output by M1058.
(227) M1084 (Mist collector ON)
(228) M1085 (Mist collector OFF)
(229) M1744 (Turning tool speed limit release)
Commanding this M code releases the speed limit of turning tools.The
rotation limit returns to the valid state by the following operations.
M1745 command/reset/tool change
(230) M1745 (Turning tool speed limit valid)
Commanding this M code revalidates the speed limit of turning tools.

7-114
C-NA104204-A2205
7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

For details of the following M codes, refer to relevant sections or the separately
provided instruction manual.

NOTE: For details of the M codes listed for the WT series and NTJ, refer to the
instruction manuals of the WT series and of MATA-BEI for the WT se-
ries.

7-115
C-NA104204-A2205
 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

MEMO

7-116
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
8-1 Program Number and Program Name
The NC memory can store several programs. To distinguish a program from
others, each program is assigned with a program number, which begins with ad-
dress O.
The program numbers are also used as the key to search a specific program, thus
making sub-program call possible and faciliating program editing.
A program name can also be assigned following a program number. The program
name may consist of up to 31 characters.
(1) Command format
O____
Up to 4 digits of a number is used following address O to indicate a program
name.
• Program example
O1000; (TEST-1)
N1 M42;
:
M30;
O1001; (TEST-2)
N100 M42;
:
M30;
NOTE: If no program number is designated at the beginning of a program, the
sequence number (N ) designated at the beginning of the program
is used for the program number.
NOTE: The M commands, usually specified at the end of a program, such as
M02, M30 and M99 are not interpreted as the end of program com-
mands if they are preceded by a block delete code (/). That is, if desig-
nation of them is “/M02;”, “/M30;”, or “/M99;”, the designation is not
used as the end of program code.

8-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8-2 Sequence Number (N )

A sequence number may be assigned to a block using address N. Although the
sequence numbers have no function with the machine, they can be used effective-
ly when calling a specific block in a program, monitoring the progress of machin-
ing, or restarting the program from a required block, etc.
(1) Command format
N____
Up to 5 digits (1 - 99999) of a number is used following address N to indi-
cate a sequence number.
• Program examples
(1) O1000; (2) O1001;
N10 M41; N10 M41;
: N20 T_____S_____M;
M01; N30 G00 X_____Z_____;
N40 G01 X_____Z_____F_____;
N20 M41;
:
M30;

NOTE: Do not use “N0” to keep interchangeability of a program with other NC

systems.

8-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8-3 Block Delete (/)

A block delete code (/) is used to define blocks that should be skipped optionally.
When the block delete switch on the machine operation panel is set to ON, the
blocks preceded by the block delete code are ignored and the program advances to
the next block. These blocks are executed as programmed if the block delete
switch is set to OFF.
(1) Command format
<Example> /G01 X_____Z_____F_____;
<Example> /N100 G00 X_____Z_____;
• Program example
N10 T_____S_____M_____;
N20 G00 X54. Z−10.;
N30 G01 X46. F0.08;
N40 G04 U0.5;
N50 G01 X54. F1.0;
/ N60 G00 Z−20.;
/ N70 G01 X46. F0.08;
/ N80 G04 U0.5;
/ N90 G01 X54. F1.0;
N100 G00 X_____Z_____;
N110 M_____;

Fig. 8-1 Program Example - Block Delete

NOTE: The block delete code (/) must always be placed at the beginning of the
block to skip entire commands in a block. If it is placed at a middle of
the block, the commands from the block delete code to the end of block
code are skipped.
NOTE: The block delete function is processed at the time the program is read
from the program memory to buffer. Therefore, if the block delete switch
setting is changed during program execution, the new setting is not val-
id for the blocks that have been read into the buffer.
NOTE: The block delete function is valid for the sequence number search oper-
ation.

8-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8-4 Subprograms
When fixed sequences and patterns are repeatedly used in programs, they can be
registered in advance in memory as subprograms and called from a main program
as needed. This subprogram call capability makes programming significantly
simple.
Call of a subprogram is possible in either the memory operation mode or memory
operation reset and restart mode. It is also possible to call a subprogram from the
called subprogram; this is called nesting. The allowable nesting level is four.

Main program Subprogram A Subprogram B

(in tape or memory) (in memory) (in memory)

Fig. 8-2 Nesting of Subprogram Call

In a single subprogram call operation, the called subprogram can be repeated up
to 999 times as necessary.

8-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8-4-1 Making a subprogram

(1) Subprogram format
Write a subprogram in the following format:
O Program number

Program data

M99 Return command

(a) Designate a program number at the beginning of a subprogram.
(b) At the end of the program data, designate the M99 command.
If a subprogram is not preceded by a program number, the sequence
number assigned to the first block of the subprogram is treated as a pro-
gram number.

8-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

(2) Subprogram call format

M98 P○○○○ ○○○○
Subprogram number to be called
Frequency of repeat call

Designation of “P51002” for example will call subprogram O1002 five

times.
(a) If the frequency of subprogram call is omitted, the specified subprogram
is called once.
(b) When the subprogram call command is designated in a block with an
axis motion command, the subprogram is called after the completion of
programmed axis motion.
(c) Call of a subprogram from the called subprogram is made in the same
format as calling a subprogram from a main program.
(d) If a sequence number is designated with address P at the end of the
called subprogram, the program flow returns not to the block following
the one where the subprogram was called but to the block of the desig-
nated sequence number.
The P word is ignored if the main program is not run in the memory
mode.
Execution sequence
Main program Sub program

(e) If the M99 command is executed in a main program, the program jumps
to the first block of the main program.
Run a main program with “/M99” written in a proper block in the main
program with the block delete switch set to ON, then the M99 is exe-
cuted and the program jumps to the first block of the main program.
The required sequence can thus be repeated by designating the /M99
command in a program. Set the block delete switch to OFF to cease
repeating of the sequence; the /M99 command is ignored and the pro-
gram advances to the next block.

8-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

• Program example
Execution sequence

Main program Subprogram

1 2 3 4
O0100; O0200;
N1 T0606 S500 M03; G01 U−15. F0.08;
G00 X55. Z−30.; U15. F0.5;
M98 P40200; G00 W−20.;
G00 X150. Z100.; M99;
M01;

Fig. 8-3 Program Example - Repeated Call of a Subprogram

NOTE: An alarm (alarm number 78) is generated if the sequence number des-
ignated using address S is not found.

8-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8-5 Calling Out Subprograms from the Memory Card

NC program is equipped the function to call out programs from the memory card.
Using this function, large-sized programs, which exceeds NC program storage
capacity, can be performed through registering in and calling out from the
memory card.
(1) Procedure
(a) Confirm the following NC parameter.
Make sure to confirm all parameters of each turret head.
Change the following parameter data when the machine parameters are
disagreed with.
No.0020 4
No.0138.7 bit “1”
No.3404.2 bit “1”
No.6030 200
(b) Register the sub program into the memory card
Make the registered program file name in accord with its program
number (O△△△△). File names are determined depending on the
machine type and corresponding turret head. (See the following list.)
ex) TW series
• File name for L unit turret
O1234
• File name for R unit
O1234.P-2
(c) Command “M200 P○○○○ △△△△” in the main NC program to
call sub programs.
(2) Command to call out the sub program
M200 P○○○○ △△△△

○○○○:Number to repeat the program

△△△△:Program number
(a) To omit the call-out number, the program is performed once.
Program example: (R unit turret head with TW series)

Main program in NC Program in the memory card (file

name:O1000.P-2)
O0001 O1000
N1 T0606 S500 M03 G01 U−15. F0.08
G00 X55. Z−30 U15.F0.5
M200 P1000 G00 W−20
G00 X150. Z100. M99
M30

8-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

LIST Program File Name in the Memory Card

Machine Turret head File name
SC(other than
SC-100X2),
AS200, TMC,
− O△△△△
NTX(II),
NTRX-300,
NTRX-300L
L O△△△△
TW
R O△△△△.P-2
WT, STS, NTJ, Upper O△△△△
NTX(S), NTJX,
NTMX,NTMXL,
MX5, MX-100, Lower O△△△△.P-2
SC-100X2
Upper L O△△△△
WTS, NTM3,
Upper R O△△△△.P-2
NTY3
Lower O△△△△.P-3
Upper O△△△△
STW, NTX(W),
Lower R O△△△△.P-2
NTXL, JX-250
Lower L O△△△△.P-3
Upper L O△△△△
Lower L O△△△△.P-2
WTW
Upper R O△△△△.P-3
Lower R O△△△△.P-4

△△△△:Program number
Restrictions (DNC operation has the same restrictions.)
• Calling out sub programs from plural turret heads cannot be performed simul-
taneously.
• In the program registered in memory card, calling out sub programs in the
memory card cannot be functioned.
• Recommended memory card;
FLASH-ATA
S-RAM
• In the program registered in memory card, G/M code of NT NURSE, loop of
custum macro B, branch processing (WHILE, IF), multiple repeatitive cycle,
and so on, are disabled.

8-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

8-6 End of Program

To make a program, be sure to input M30 or M02 at the last of the program.
(Example)
O1000

―
N1

M30 (or M02) ←Be sure to input.

NOTE: When M30 is not inputted, following problems are generated.

(1) Cycle stop is not performed by the lubrication alarm.
(2) Cycle stop is not performed even if work counter counts
up.
(3) Cycle stop is not performed by the coolant alarm.
(4) Cycle stop is not performed by the HAN-BEI NG
judgment.
(5) Cycle stop is not performed at the time of the tool counter
count up.
(Count is not performed when the tool counter count is set
with M30.)
(6) Cycle stop is not performed even if the NT NURSE
counter counts up.
(7) Cycle stop is not performed at the time of no workpice
with ZEN-BEI.
(8) Cycle stop is not performed by memory restart mode OFF
or memory mode.
(9) Thermal displacement offset is not reflected.
(10) Cycle stop is not performed at the time of the chip
conveyor alarm.
(11) Cycle stop is not performed at the time of the inside
conveyor breaker trip for parts catcher type G.

8-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

This section explains the fixed cycle functions that simplify programming.
9-1 Simple Fixed Cycle (G90, G92, G94)
Machining operation that requires a simple stock removal pattern cycle to be re-
peated is usually programmed using several blocks of commands. However, if a
fixed cycle function is used, such an operation can be programmed in a single
block.
Three types of simple fixed cycle patterns are provided.
9-1-1 O.D. and I.D. turning cycle (G90)
Straight or taper cutting cycle to be executed in the longitudinal direction (Z-axis
direction) can be programmed using a single block of commands.
If the same pattern is repeated to generate multiple tool paths, simply specify the
coordinate values that change according to the progress of the cutting.
(1) Command format
(a) G90 X Z F ;

(b) G90 X Z R F ;

NOTE: The G90 command is modal. Dimension words (X, Z, R) and feed-rate
(F) command are also modal.
NOTE: Designate the taper size (R) in radius.
NOTE: If the simple fixed cycle is executed in the single block mode, one cycle is
completed by pressing the cycle start switch once.

9-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

(2) Taper direction

Taper is generated as illustrated below according to the sign of an R word.
(a) R<O (b) R>O

• Program examples
<Example 1>
G50 S2000;
G96 T S170 M03;
G00 X75. Z5. M08;
G90 X60. Z−70. F0.3;
X50.;
G00 X60.;
G90 X50. Z−30. R−7.5 F0.25;
Z−40. R−12.5;
G00 X_____Z_____;
M01;

9-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

<Example 2>
G50 S2700;
G96 T_____S150 M03;
G00 X15. Z2. M08;
G90 X28. Z−65. F0.25;
X36.;
X44.;
G00 X40.;
G90 Z−27. R8.1;
Z−41.67 R13.1;
G00 X_____Z_____;
M01;

9-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-1-2 Thread cutting cycle (G92)

Straight thread cutting cycle can be programmed using a single block of com-
mands.
(1) Command format
(a) G92 X Z F ;
X, Z: Designate the coordinate values of the end point of threading
F: Designate the thread lead directly.

(b) G92 X Z R F ;
Tapered thread cutting is possible by designating the taper size using an
R word.

9-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

(2) Taper direction

Taper is generated as illustrated below according to the sign of an R word.
(a) R<O (b) R>O

(3) When designating thread lead, the following restrictions apply. The re-
strictions are common to the G32 and G92 modes.
(a) Condition 1
Programmable Range Lead
0.0001 - 500.0000 0.0001 - 500.0000mm
F
0.000001-9.999999 0.000001-9.999999 inch

(b) Condition 2
For the thread lead and the spindle speed, the following restrictions ap-
ply.
• F x S≦4800
(4) Chamfering
Chamfering is possible at the end of the thread cutting.
Chamfering width “r” is set for NC system parameter No. 5130. Setting
range is 0 to 127. With this setting, chamfering width is determined in the
range of 0.1 L to 12.7 L in increments of 0.1 L (L: thread lead).

9-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

• Program examples
<Example 1> Metric external thread

G97 T0707 S1500 M03;

G00 X36. Z10. M08;
G92 X29.3 Z−32. F2.0;
X28.8;
X28.36;
X28.06;
X27.86;
X27.7;
X27.6;
X27.5;
G00 X100. Z70.;
M01;

<Example 2> Metric internal thread

T0808 S1200 M03;

G00 X35. Z10. M08;
G92 X39.04 Z−24. F1.5;
X39.44;
X39.72;
X39.92;
X40.02;
X40.12;
G00 X120. Z50.;
M01;

9-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

<Example 3> Tapered external thread

T0909 S1800 M03;

G00 X25. Z12. M08;
G92 X20.68 Z−15. R-0.84 F1.8143
X20.18;
X19.78;
X19.54;
X19.38;
X19.22;
X19.12;
X19.06;
G00 X150. Z100.;
M01;

<Example 4> Tapered internal thread

T1010 S1200 M03

G00 X25. Z14. M08
G92 X29.83 Z−18.6. R1.02 F2.3091
X30.43
X30.83
X31.19
X31.49
X31.73
X31.89
X31.99
X32.05
X32.09
G00 X180. Z50.
M01

9-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

NOTE 1: To cut the thread by repeating the thread cutting pattern,

never change the spindle speed during thread cutting. Do
not use the constant surface speed control mode.
NOTE 2: The feedrate override function is invalid during thread cut-
ting cycle.
NOTE 3: The dry run function is valid during thread cutting. How-
ever, in the dry run mode, feedrate is not synchronized with
the spindle speed.
NOTE 4: At the portions near the start and end point of the thread,
incomplete threads are cut due to automatic decelera-
tion/acceleration. Therefore, allow margin in these portions
so that required length of thread can be cut correctly.
NOTE 5: If the feed hold switch on the machine operation panel is
pressed during thread cutting, the operation is suspended
at the end of the path that follows the thread cutting pass.
See the illustration below.
When the thread cutting retract function is provided,
pressing the feed hold switch brings thread cutting to
chamfering, and returns the tool to the start position (stop
after the completion of cycle (4)).
NOTE 6: If thread cutting is executed in the single block mode, using
the G32 command, the operation stops at the same point as
in the note above.

If the feed hold switch is pressed during cycle (2), operation stops after the com-
pletion of cycle (3).

9-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-1-3 Facing cycle (G94)

Straight or taper cutting cycle to be executed along the face (X-axis direction) can
be programmed using a single block of commands.
If the same pattern is repeated to generate multiple tool paths, simply specify the
coordinate values that change according to the progress of the cutting.
(1) Command format
(a) G94 X Z F ;

(b) G94 X Z R F ;

9-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

(2) Taper direction

Taper is generated as illustrated below according to the sign of an R word.
(a) R<O (b) R>O

• Program examples
<Example 1>
S1500;
G96 T S180 M03;
G00 X126. Z3. M08;
G94 X40. Z−5. F0.3;
Z−10.;
G00 Z−10.;
G94 X82.8 R−5.4;
X40. R−10.75;
G00 X_____Z_____;
M01;

9-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

<Example 2>
S1000;
G96 T_____S150 M03;
G00 X45. Z2. M08;
G94 X100. Z−5. F0.25;
Z−10.;
Z−10. R−5.;
G00 X_____Z_____;
M01;

NOTE: The G90 command is modal. Dimension words (X, Z, R) and feed-rate
(F) command are also modal.
NOTE: Designate the taper size (R) in radius.
NOTE: If the simple fixed cycle is executed in the single block mode, one cycle
is completed by pressing the cycle start switch once.

9-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2 Multiple Repetitive Cycles (G70 - G76)

The multiple repetitive cycle option makes programming simple by making the
most of the fixed cycle capability. For example, by defining the finish shape, nec-
essary tool paths to carry out roughing cycle are automatically generated. The
function also provides fixed threading cycles.
(This function is not available for NC, 21-TA.)
9-2-1 Rough O.D. turning cycle (G71)
When the finish shape is defined (A → A’ → B), rough turning paths to remove
stock with depth of cut of ∆d are automatically generated. In the rough turning
cycle, finishing stock of ∆u/2 and ∆w/2 are left on the defined finish shape.

Fig. 9-1 G71 Cycle Pattern

(1) Command format
G71 U(∆d) R(e);
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) ;
(ns)
N --------
:
F____
S_____ The program to carry out the finish cycle
: for A→A’→B is written in blocks “ns” to
(nf)
“nf”.
N --------

9-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

∆d: Depth of cut, to be designated without a sign. The direction of

infeed is determined according to AA’ direction.
NC parameter No. 5132 can be used to set this value.
e: Retraction distance.
NC parameter No. 5133 can be used to set this value.
ns: The sequence number of the first block of the blocks used to
program the finishing shape.
nf: The sequence number of the last block of the blocks used to
program the finishing shape.
∆u: Distance and direction of finishing stock in the X-axis direction
∆w: Distance and direction of finishing stock in the Z-axis direction
f, s, t: These designate the feedrate, spindle speed, and tool number to
be applied to the finishing cycle. If F, S, and/or T is designated
in the program defining the finishing shape, it is ignored.

1. F, S, and T commands, if designated in the blocks defining the finishing

shape, are all ignored and those designated in the G71 block or preceding
one are valid. If the optional constant surface speed control function is
selected, the G96 or the G97 command, if designated in the blocks defin-
ing the finishing shape, is ignored and the G code designated in the G71
block or preceding one is valid.
2. The following illustration gives possible four patterns of finishing shape to
be cut in the G71 cycle. Cutting is always carried out by the tool motion
controlled along the Z-axis. The sign to be used for ∆u and ∆w is deter-
mined as indicated in the illustration according to the pattern.

3. The shape A-A’ is defined in the block assigned with sequence number
“ns”. In this area, tool motion is controlled in either the G00 or G01 mode
and no Z-axis command is allowed.
4. The shape A’-B must be monotonously increasing or decreasing both in
the X-axis and Z-axis direction.
NOTE: For the multiple repetitive canned cycle II, the X-axis does not need to
be monotonously increasing or decreasing. For details, refer to the in-
struction manual for the NC unit.
If A-A’ is defined in the G00 mode, infeed along the A-A’ direction is also
carried out in the G00 mode. Similarly, if A-A’ is defined in the G01 mode,
infeed along the A-A’ direction is also carried out in the G01 mode.
NOTE: Subprogram call from a block, within “ns” and “nf” blocks, is not pos-
sible.

9-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

• Program examples
<Example 1>
G50 S2400;
G96 T0707 S160 M03;
G00 X96. Z3. M08;
G71 U5000 R200 (U5. R0.2);
G71 P101 Q109 U0.5 W0.3 F0.3;
N101 G00 X18.75;
N102 G01 X35. Z−12. F0.15;
N103 Z−25.;
N104 G02 X45. Z−30. R5.;
N105 G01 X60.;
N106 X70. Z−45. T0715 F0.2;
N107 Z−55.;
N108 X86.;
N109 X94. Z−59.;
G00 X150. Z100.;
M01;

<Example 2>
G50 S2000;
G96 T0909 S150 M03;
G00 X34. Z3. M08;
G71 U4000 R200 (U4. R0.2);
G71 P110 Q117 U−0.3 W0.1 F0.27;
N110 G00 X100. ;
N111 G01 X90. Z−2. F0.2;
N112 Z−17.;
N113 G03 X84. Z−20. R3.;
N114 G01 X70.;
N115 Z−35.;
N116 X50. Z−45.;
N117 X34.;
G00 Z5.;
X150. Z100.;
M01;

9-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2-2 Rough facing cycle (G72)

The cycle is programmed and executed in the same manner as for the G71 cycle.
In this cycle, however, cutting is carried out by the tool motion along the X-axis.

Fig. 9-2 G72 Cycle Pattern

(1) Command format
G72 W(∆d)R(e);
G72 P(ns)Q(nf)U(∆u)W(∆w) F(f);
(ns)
N--------
:
F_____
S_____ The program to carry out the finish cycle
: for A→A’→B is written in blocks “ns” to
(nf) “nf”.
N--------

9-15
C-NA104204-A2205
9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

∆d: Depth of cut, to be designated without a sign. The direction of

infeed is determined according to AA’ direction.
NC parameter No. 5132 can be used to set this value.
e: Retraction distance.
NC parameter No. 5133 can be used to set this value.
ns: The sequence number of the first block of the blocks used to
program the finishing shape.
nf: The sequence number of the last block of the blocks used to
program the finishing shape.
∆u: Distance and direction of finishing stock in the X-axis direction
∆w: Distance and direction of finishing stock in the Z-axis direction
f, s, t: These designate the feedrate, spindle speed, and tool number to
be applied to the finishing cycle. If F, S, and/or T is designated
in the program defining the finishing shape, it is ignored.

The following illustration gives possible four patterns of finishing shape to

be cut in the G72 cycle. Cutting is always carried out by the tool motion
controlled along the X-axis. The sign to be used for ∆u and ∆w is determined
as indicated in the illustration according the pattern.

The shape A-A’ is defined in the block assigned with sequence number “ns”.
In this area, tool motion is controlled in either G00 or G01 mode and no
Z-axis command is allowed.
The shape A’-B must be monotonously increasing or decreasing both in the
X-axis and Z-axis direction.
The infeed mode along A-A’ conforms to the mode used to designate the tool
motion A-A’ as in the G71 cycle.

9-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

• Program example

G50 S1600;
G96 T0606 S160 M03;
G00 X126. Z3. M08;
G72 W5000 R200;
G72 P120 Q128 U0.3 W0.2 F0.3;
N120 G00 Z−63.4;
N121 G01 X110. Z−41.;
N122 X85.;
N123 Z−35.;
N124 X60. Z−17.;
N125 X38.;
N126 G03 X30. Z−13. R4.;
N127 G01 Z−2.;
N128 X22. Z2.;
G00 X200. Z100.;
M01;

9-2-3 Pattern repeating cycle (G73)

A designated cutting pattern can be executed repeatedly by shifting the position.
This cycle is used to effectively cut a forged or cast workpiece on which rough
shape is already formed.

Fig. 9-3 G73 Cycle Pattern

9-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

(1) Command format

G73 U(∆d)W(∆k)R(d);
G73 P(ns)Q(nf)U(∆u)W(∆w)F(f);
(ns)
N -----
:
F_____
S_____ The program to carry out the finish cycle
: for A→A’→B is written in blocks “ns” to
(nf) “nf”.
N -----

∆i: Distance and direction of retraction from the workpiece

(X-axis direction); to be designated in radius.
This command is modal and valid until another com-
mand is designated.
NC parameter No. 5135 can be used to set this value.
∆k: Distance and direction of retraction from the workpiece
(Z-axis direction); to be designated in radius.
This command is modal and valid until another com-
mand is designated.
NC parameter No. 5136 can be used to set this value.
d: Number of divisions
The roughing cycle is repeated by the number of times
set for “d”.
This command is modal and valid until another com-
mand is designated.
NC parameter No. 5137 can be used to set this value.
ns: The sequence number of the first block of the blocks
used to program the finishing shape.
nf: The sequence number of the last block of the blocks used
to program the finishing shape.
∆u: Finishing stock in the X-axis direction (in diameter).
∆w: Finishing stock in the Z-axis direction.
f, s, t: These designate the feedrate, spindle speed, and tool
number to be applied to the finishing cycle. If F, S,
and/or T is designated in the program defining the fin-
ishing shape, it is ignored.

In the G73 mode, there are four possible patterns and, therefore, the sign of
∆u, ∆w, ∆i, and ∆k must be determined carefully.
After the completion of the cycle, the cutting tool returns to point A.

9-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

• Program example

G50 S1000;
G96 T0808 S180 M03;
G00 X200. Z40. M08;
G73 U16. W16. R3;
G73 P140 Q145 U0.5 W0.5 F0.35;
N140 G00 X60. Z2.;
N141 G01 Z−20. F0.2 ;
N142 X100. Z−30.;
N143 Z−50.;
N144 G02 X140. Z−70. I20. K0 F0.17;
N145 G01 X164. Z−82. F0.2;
G00 X250. Z100.;
M01;

9-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2-4 Finishing cycle (G70)

After carrying out a rough cutting cycle, using the G71, G72, or G73 cycle, the
finishing cycle can be executed using the G70 cycle.
(1) Command format
G70 P (ns) Q (nf) ;
ns: The sequence number of the first block of the blocks used to
program the finishing shape.
nf: The sequence number of the last block of the blocks used to
program the finishing shape.
• Program example
G50 S2400;
G96 T0707 S160 M03;
G00 X96. Z3. M08;
G71 U5000 R200 (U5. R0.2);
G71 P101 Q109 U0.5 W0.3 F0.3;
N101 G00 X18.75;
N102 G01 X35. Z−12. F0.15;
N103 Z−25.;
N104 G02 X45. Z−30. R5.;
N105 G01 X60. ;
N106 X70. Z−45. F0.2;
N107 Z−55.;
N108 X86.;
N109 X94. Z−59.;
G00 X150. Z100.;
M01;
G96 T1010 S180 M03;
G00 X96. Z3. M08;
G70 P101 Q109;
G00 X150. Z100.;
M01;
NOTE: In the G70 mode, F, S, and T functions designated in the G71, G72, or
G73 block are all ignored and those designated in the blocks between
“ns” block and “nf” block are used.
NOTE: After the completion of the G70 cycle, the cutting tool returns to the
start point at a rapid traverse. Then, the block that follows the G70
block is continuously executed.
NOTE: Subprogram call from a block, within “ns” and “nf” blocks, is not
available.

9-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2-5 Face cutting-off cycle (G74)

The illustrated cycle is programmed using the command format indicated in (1).
This cycle permits chip disposal for O.D. turning operation. If X (U) and P words
are omitted, the program calls for only Z-axis motion, thereby designating
peck-drilling cycle.

Fig. 9-4 G74 Cycle Pattern

(1) Command format
G74 R(e);
G74 X(U) Z(W) P(∆i)Q(∆k)R(∆d)F(f);
e: Retraction amount
NC parameter No. 5139 can be used to set this value.
X: X-coordinate of point B
U: Distance between point A and point B; designated in in-
cremental value
Z: Z-coordinate of point C
W: Distance between point A and point C; designated in in-
cremental value
∆i: X-axis motion distance; unsigned value
∆k: Z-axis infeed amount; unsigned value
∆d: Shift amount at the bottom. The value is usually des-
ignated in a positive value. If X (U) and ∆i are omitted,
designate the shift direction by a sign.
f: Feedrate

NOTE: Both “e” and “∆i” are designated using address R. The NC recognizes
whether the R value indicates “e” or “∆i” depending on whether “X
(U)” is designated or not on the G74 block.
NOTE: Cycle operation is carried out according to the commands in the G74
block containing X (U) word.

9-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2-6 Outer diameter grooving cycle (G75)

The illustrated cycle is programmed using the command format indicated in (1).
The cycle called by the G75 command is the same pattern as that called by the
G74 command; the difference between these patterns is the pattern execution di-
rection. In the G75 cycle, infeed is made in the X-axis direction while in the
G74 cycle, infeed is made in the Z-axis direction.

Fig. 9-5 G75 Cycle Pattern

(1) Command format
G75 R(e);
G75 X(U) Z(W) P(∆i)Q(∆k)R(∆d)F(f);
The G74 and G75 cycles are both used for cutting, grooving, or drilling and
tool shift and pecking operations are executed automatically. The four mo-
tion patterns are also available as other fixed cycles.
The format used to designate the cutting-off cycle is indicated below:
G75 X_____P(∆i)F(f);

9-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2-7 Compound thread cutting cycle (G76)

Using the G76 command, the thread cutting cycle as illustrated below is executed.

[Details of infeed mode]

Fig. 9-6 G76 Cycle Pattern

(1) Command format
G76 P (m)(r)(a) Q (∆dim) R (d) :
G76 X(U) _____Z(W)_____R(i)P(k)Q(∆d)F(L);

9-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

m: The number of frequencies the final finishing cycle is re-

peated. Designation is possible in the range of 1 to 99.
NC parameter No. 5142 can be used to set this value; the
parameter set value changes according to the programmed
“m” value.
r: Chamfering distance
Chamfering distance is designated in the range of 0.1 L to
9.9 L in increments of 0.1 L, where “L” represents the thread
lead. Designation should be made using a number (00 to
99). The designation is modal. NC parameter No. 5130
can be used to set this value; the parameter set value
changes according to the programmed “r” value.
a: Angle of tool tip (angle of thread)
Selection of the angle is possible from 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°,
29°, and 0°. Directly designate the required angle in a
2-digit number. The designation is modal.
NC parameter No. 5143 can be used to set this value; the
parameter set value changes according to the programmed
“r” value. Values “m”, “r”, and “a” are designated at a time
following address P.
∆dmin: The minimum depth of cut
If the depth of cut, calculated for each thread cutting pass,
becomes smaller than this value, the depth of cut is clamped
at this value. The designation is modal.
NC parameter No. 5140 can be used to set this value; the
parameter set value changes according to the programmed
“r” value.
d: Finishing allowance
The designation is modal.
NC parameter No. 5141 can be used to set this value; the
parameter set value changes according to the programmed
“r” value.
i: Radial difference between the start and end of thread cut-
ting.
If “i=0” is designated, a straight thread is cut.
k: Thread height
Designate the thread height in the X-axis direction. Des-
ignation should be made in radius.
∆d: Depth of cut for the first thread cutting cycle
Designation should be made in radius.
L: Thread lead
Designation is the same as in the G32 threading cycle.
The G76 thread cutting cycle cuts the thread on one side of the cutting edge
to reduce load during thread cutting. Metal removal amount per pass is set
constant by changing the depth of cut for each pass.
Female thread can be cut in the same format, by simply changing the signs
assigned to each word.
In the thread cutting cycle illustrated, the cutting tool is moved at the desig-
nated feedrate and other cycle motions are all executed at a rapid traverse.
For the illustrated cycle, the sign of incremental values is determined as in-
dicated below.

9-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

U, W : Negative (to be determined according to pass A→C

and C→D)
R : Negative (to be determined according to pass A→C)
P : Positive (always positive) (decimal point unavailable)
Q : Positive (always positive) (decimal point unavailable)
NOTE: Cautions to be taken into consideration are the same as those when
programming thread cutting in the G32 or G92 mode.
NOTE: Chamfering distance designation is also valid for the G92 cycle.

9-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

• Program examples
<Example 1>

G76 P011060 Q10 R10;

G76 X60640 Z25000 P3680 Q1800 F6.0;
(X60.64 Z25.)
<Example 2>

G97 T0909 S1100 M03;

G00 X52. Z20. M08;
G76 P011060 Q10 R10;
G76 X37.2 Z−52. R0 P1100 Q450 F2.0;
G00 X_____Z_____;
M01;

<Example 3>

G97 T1010 S800 M03;

G00 X50. Z14.16 M08;
G76 P011060 Q10 R10;
G76 X58.04 Z−25.2 R1230 P1479 Q450 F2.3091;
G00 X_____Z_____;
M01;

9-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

9-2-8 Precautions on programming multiple repetitive cycles (G70 - G76)

(1) In the blocks designating a multiple repetitive cycle, all address words like P,
Q, X, Z, U, W, and R that are necessary to define the cycle must be desig-
nated for each block correctly.
(2) In the block that will be called by a P command, designated in a G71, G72,
or G73 block, axis motion mode designating G code (group 00) must be
designated; either G00 or G01.
(3) In the MDI mode, execution of G70, G71, G72, or G73 commands is impos-
sible. If an attempt is made to execute them, an alarm (P/S alarm No. 67) is
generated.
Note that execution of G74, G75, and G76 commands is possible in the MDI
mode.
(4) Designation of M98 and M99 is not allowed in the following blocks:
• The block containing the G70, G71, G72, or G73 command.
• The blocks used for defining the finishing shape.
(5) In the blocks used for defining the finishing shape, the following designation
is not allowed:
• One-shot G code; designation of G04 is possible.
• G codes in group 01, designation of G00, G01, G02, and G03 is possible.
• G codes in group 06.
• M98/M99
(6) Manual operation may be inserted during the execution of a multiple repeti-
tive cycle. However, to restart the interrupted cycle, it is necessary to return
the axes to the position where manual operation was inserted.
If the cycle is continued without returning the axes to the above indicated
position, the tool paths generated after the restart are offset from the pro-
grammed paths by the manually shifted distance.
(7) When executing the G70, G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the sequence number
designated by a P and a Q word must exist only one time.
(8) The last axis motion command designated in the finishing shape definition
blocks, must not be chamfering or corner rounding. If such a designation is
given, an alarm (P/S alarm No. 69) is generated.
(9) No decimal point can be used for a P or a Q word in the G74, G75 and G76
commands. The least command increment is used for the measurement units
of movement and depth of cut.
(10) When “#1 = 2500” is executed in custom macro, “2500.000” is input for #1;
this is equal to P#1 P2500.
(11) Nose radius compensation is not valid for the G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, and
G76 cycles.
(12) The same line as G code (G70 to G76)of multiple repetitive cycle command
It is impossible to designate T and S commands. These commands sould be
designated before performing the multiple repetitive cycle command.

9-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 9 FIXED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

MEMO

9-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

Although a cutting tool has rounded nose, a program is written assuming an im-
aginary tool nose. This causes an error between the programmed tool paths and
the actual tool paths when the programmed shape includes a circular arc or ta-
pered portions.
The nose R compensation function automtically calculates the error and corrects
the tool paths so that they are generated as programmed.

Fig. 10-1 Imaginary Tool Nose and Error in Generated Tool Paths due to Nose R

10-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-1 Imaginary Tool Nose

The imaginary tool nose, as the term implies, does not exist actually. However,
since a nose of a cutting tool is rounded and has a variety of shapes and dimen-
sions, programming is made assuming that a cutting tool has a sharp point that
comes into contact with the workpiece. This assumed sharp point in a cutting
tool is called the imaginary tool nose. In actual programming, set the imaginary
tool nose orientation code number to “OFT” (TIP) in the offset memory, corre-
sponding to the offset number.

Fig. 10-2 Imaginary Tool Nose Orientation

The offset data is the sum of geometry offset and wear offset.
OFR = OFGR + OFWR
The orientation of a cutting edge may be set for either geometry offset or wear
offset; the one set later becomes valid.
NOTE: After specifying a geometry offset number with a tool number using a
parameter, if a T code that has different numbers for geometry offset
and wear offset is designated, the imaginary tool nose orientation des-
ignated for the geometry offset number is valid.
<Example> T0102
OFR=OFGR01+OFWR02
OFT=OFT01

10-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-2 Workpiece Position in Reference to Tool Motion Direction

To execute the tool nose R compensation function, it is necessary to designate on
which side the workpiece is positioned in reference to the tool motion direction.

Table 10-1 Offset Direction

G Code Workpiece Position Tool Paths

Tool nose R compen-
G40 On the programmed path
sation cancel
To the right side
Offset to the left side of the
G41 viewing in the tool
programmed paths
moving direction
To the left side view-
Offset to the right side of the
G42 ing in the tool moving
programmed paths
direction

The cutting tool is offset to the side opposite to the workpiece.

The G40, G41, and G42 commands are all modal.

TW series

Fig. 10-3 Offset Direction

10-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

To make the program for R-unit is exactly the same as the program for L-unit. See
the turret from “A”, indicated below, and make a program of G41 and G42.

Fig. 10-4 Offset Direction for R-unit

NOTE: The above illustration is for TW series R-unit. For MATA-BEI spindle,
the spindle rotates in the opposite direction.
<WTW series>

Fig. 10-5 Offset Direction for WT series

10-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-3 Setting the Nose R Compensation Data and Imaginary Tool Nose Code
Number
The memory area used to store the nose R compensation data and imaginary tool
nose code number corresponds to a tool offset number designated in a T code.
Geometry Offset (OFFSET/GEOMETRY)
X AXIS Z AXIS RADIUS TIP
No.
(X-axis (Z-axis (nose R (imaginary
(Geometry
geometry geometry geometry cutting edge
offset No.)
offset data) offset data) offset data) code No.)
G01 10.040 50.020 0.400 3
G02 20.060 30.030 0.800 2
G03 00.000 00.000 0.000 0
G04 : : : :
G05 : : : :
: : : : :

Wear Offset (OFFSET/WEAR)

TIP
No. X AXIS Z AXIS RADIUS
(imaginary
(Wear offset (X-axis wear (Z-axis wear (nose R wear
cutting edge
No.) offset data) offset data) offset data)
code No.)
W 01 0.040 0.020 0.000 3
W 02 0.060 0.030 0.000 2
W 03 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
W 04 : : : :
W 05 : : : :
: : : : :

16 pairs in standard (optional: 32 pairs)

NOTE: Offset No. “00” indicates the cancel of offset data, i.e., offset amount of
“0”. Therefore, it is not possible to set the offset data for offset No.
“00”.
NOTE: Allowable setting range of wear offset data is:
0 to ”1 mm
This range can be expanded to ”999.999 mm (”99.99999 in) by chang-
ing the setting for NC parameter No. 5013.

10-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-3-1 Cutting direction in the G42 mode

Fig. 10-6 Cutting Direction In the G42 Mode

10-3-2 Cutting direction in the G41 mode

Fig. 10-7 Cutting Direction in the G41 Mode

• Facing • Grooving

Fig. 10-8 Facing and Grooving in the G41 and G42 Mode
NOTE: In the G41 mode, never designate another G41 command, or in the G42
mode, never designate another G42 command. Such designation will
call special offset mode.

10-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-4 Start-up
The term start-up indicates the start of the nose R compensation mode and the
block from which the G41 or G42 mode starts is called the start-up block. In a
start-up block, a cutting tool shows transient motion, different from the motion as
directly recognized from the program.
10-4-1 Simultaneous designation of G41/G42 with motion command
When the G41 or G42 command is designated in a block with axis motion com-
mands, positioning of the cutting tool at the start point of the block next to the
start-up block is made at the position right angle to the programmed tool motion.
• Program examples
<Example 1>
Imaginary tool nose orientation code No.: 3
N100 M____;
N101 G50 S____;
N102 T____S____M____;
N103 G42 G01 X50. Z0 F___;
N104 Z____;

<Example 2>
Imaginary tool nose orientation code No.: 2
N200 M____;
N201 G50 S_____;
N202 T____S____M____;
N203 G41 G01 X50. Z0.F____;
N204 Z____;

Fig. 10-9 Example of Program Designating G41/G42 with Motion Commands

10-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-4-2 Independent designation of G41/G42

When the G41 or G42 command is designated in a block without other commands,
the present position is assumed the center of the nose R and the imaginary tool
nose point is defined. Then, positioning is made to the defined imaginary tool
nose point.
• Program examples
<Example 1>
Imaginary tool nose orientation code No.: 3
N300 M____;
N301 G50 S____;
N302 T____S____M____;
N303 G42;
N304 G01 X50. Z0 F_____;
N305 Z_____;

<Example 2>
Imaginary tool nose orientation code No.: 2
N400 M____;
N401 G50 S____;
N402 T____S____M____;
N403 G41 ;
N404 G01 X50. Z0. F ;
N405 Z____;

Fig. 10-10 Example of Programs Designating G41/G42 Independently

NOTE: Positioning in the start-up block is made at a rapid traverse if the
G41/G42 command is designated in the G00 mode. If it is designated in
the G01 mode, positioning is made at a cutting feedrate.

10-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-5 Cancelling Nose R Compensation Mode (G40)

The block containing the G40 command is called the offset cancel block.
G41 ;
;
G40 ; ← Offset cancel block
In the block preceding the offset cancel block, positioning is made so that the nose
R center lies right angle to the end point of the block. In the G40 offset cancel
block, tool path is generated so that the imaginary tool nose is positioned at the
programmed end point.

Fig. 10-11 Offset Cancel Mode

10-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-5-1 Workpiece located in direction not related to motion command in G40 block
To ensure correct offset cancel motion, it is necessary to designate the workpiece
shape using I and K commands.
(1) When workpiece shape is designated using I and K commands:
N100 G42 G00 X Z ;
N101 G01 Z ;
N102 G40 G00 X Z
I K ;

10-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

(2) When I and K commands are not designated:

N150 G42 G00 X Z ;
N151 G01 Z ;
N152 G40 G00 X Z ;

As known from the illustration above, overcutting occurs if the workpiece shape
is not defined using the I and K commands.
Note that these commands are valid only when they are designated with the G40
command. If they are used in other block, they call another function or cause an
alarm, depending on how they are designated.
Commands Function
Nose R compensa-
G40 X Z I K
tion function cancel
G01 X K
Chamfering
G01 Z I
G02/G03 X Z I K
Circular arc cutting
G40 G02 X Z I K
Alarm
G00 X Z I K

• Program examples
If offset cancel is not designated correctly, the offset cancel motion causes a
workpiece to be overcut.
For the programming of I.D. turning, the G41/G42 mode should be called and
canceled in the same manner as with the O.D. turning.
<Example 1>
N ;
G50 S____;
:
G42 G00 X25. Z5.:
G01 X60. Z−30. F0.2:
Z−70.:
G40 G00 X____Z____I15.:
:

10-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

<Example 2>
N ;
G50 S____;
:
G41 G00 X115. Z−40.;
G01 X90. F0.2;
X60. Z−30.;
X25.;
G40 G00 X____Z____K10.;
:

<Example 3>
N ;
G50 S ;
:
G42 G00 X40. Z5.;
G01 Z−50. F0.15;
X70.;
X80. Z−55.;
G40 G00 X____Z____K−1.;
:

<Example 4>
N ;
G50 S____;
:
G42 G00 X50. Z5.;
G01 Z−60. F0.2;
G40 G00 X____Z____I25.
: K−20.;

10-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-5-2 Designation of G41/G42 in the G41/G42 mode

If the G41 or G42 command is designated although the G41 or G42 mode has
been established, positioning is made at the position right angle to the tool motion
direction programmed in the preceding block.

10-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-5-3 Blocks without motion commands

If two or more blocks not containing an axis motion command are programmed
continuously, positioning is made at the end point of the first block in the manner
that the center of the nose R lies right angle to the motion direction.
The following blocks are classified as the block without motion commands:
(1) M05 M code output
(2) S1000 S code output
(3) G04 U10. Dwell
(4) G01 U0 Zero axis motion distance
(5) G98 G code only
(6) G10 P01 X100 Z200 R50 Q2 Updating offset data
In the case of (4) above, resultant positioning is as explained above if such a
block exists independently.
(1) Designation in the offset mode
• Program example
N5 ;
N6 G42 ;
N7 G01 Z−50. F0.2;
N8 G96 S200;
N9 G98;
N10 G01X70.Z−60. F1.0;
N ;
N ;

As illustrated above, an overcut may occur.

(2) Designation in the start-up block
Offset motion does not occur.
• Program example
N1 ;
N2 G50 S____;
N3 ;
N4 G42 G00 X40. Z5.;
N5 Z5.;
N6 G01 X60. Z−5.;
N7 Z____;

10-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-6 Cautions on Designating Nose R Compensation Function

The following gives only major items to be taken into consideration when pro-
gramming the nose R compensation function. For details, refer to the Instruction
Manual published by NC maker.
(1) The nose R compensation function cannot be designated in the MDI mode.
(2) Cutting the inside of an arc with smaller radius than tool nose radius
If a program is written to cut an inside of the arc having smaller radius than
tool nose radius, overcutting will occur as illustrated below. Therefore, an
alarm is generated just after the start of the preceding block.

(3) Cutting the groove with smaller width than tool nose radius
If a program is written to cut the groove whose width is smaller than the tool
nose radius, the tool path in the direction opposite to the programmed tool
motion direction may be generated; in such a case, an overcut occurs.
Therefore, an alarm is generated just after the start of the preceding block.

10-15
C-NA104204-A2205
10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

(4) Cutting a step smaller than tool nose radius

If a program is written to cut a step that is smaller than the tool nose radius,
overcut does not occur if an arc is designated at the step. Tool path gener-
ated corresponding to the step is linear.

10-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-7 Imaginary Tool Nose Code Numbers and Tool Paths

The same program will generate different tool paths as illustrated below according
to the selection of an imaginary tool nose code number.
• Program examples
Tool paths generated by the selection of code number [0]
Tool paths generated by the selection of code number [1]
Tool paths generated by the selection of code number [2]
Tool paths generated by the selection of code number [3]
Tool paths generated by the selection of code number [4]
<Example 1>
N____M____;
G50 S3000;
T0101 S____M____;
G01 X0 F1.0;
G42 Z−50.;
X50. Z−80.;
Z−120.;
X120. Z−170.;
G40 Z−220.;
G00 X200.;
Z0;
M01;

<Example 2>
N____M____;
G50 S3000;
T0202 S____M____;
G01 G41 X150. Z−30. F1.0;
X120. Z−60.;
Z−100.;
G03 X50. Z−135. R35.;
G01 X30.;
G40 Z−180.;
G00 X0;
Z0;
X200.;
M01;

10-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-8 Examples of the Programs Using Tool Nose R Compensation Function

<Example 1>
G50 S3000;
G96 T0505 S200 M03;
G00 X45. Z0 M08;
G01 X0 F0.2;
G42 G00 X26. Z2.;
G01 X40. Z−5.;
Z−35. R6.;
X80. K−3.;
Z−65.;
G40 X85. I1.;
G00 X150. Z100.;
G97 T0500;
M01;

<Example 2>
G50 S3000;
G96 T0606 S150 M03;
G41 G00 X72. Z3. M08.;
G01 X60. Z−3. F0.17;
Z−30. R−5.;
X40. K−2.;
Z−72.;
G40 G00 X38. Z5.;
X180. Z70.;
G97 T0600;
M01;

<Example 3>
G50 S3000;
G96 T0808 S200 M03;
G42 G00 X20. Z5. M08;
G01 X54.14 Z−12.07 F0.15;
G03 X60. Z−17.93 R10.;
G01 Z−38.;
X50. Z−43.;
Z−55. R2.;
X74. K−4.;
G40 G00 X150. Z100. K−1.;
G97 T0800;
M01;

10-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-9 Changing the Offset Direction

To carry out O.D. turning or groove chamfering after facing, it is necessary to
change the offset direction.
10-9-1 Tool paths generated according to the offset mode change between G41 and G42
• Program examples
Programmed tool path
Tool nose R center path
<Example 1>
:
N5 G42 G01 X0 Z−60. F0.3;
N6 X170. Z−100.;
N7 Z−150.;
N8 G41 X0 Z−200.;
N9 Z−250.;
N10 X200.;
N11 G40 G00 Z0;
:

<Example 2>
:
N5 G42 G01 X0 Z−60. F0.3;
N6 X170. Z−100.;
N7 G41 Z−150.;
N8 X0 Z−200.;
N9 Z−250.;
N10 X200.;
N11 G40 G00 Z0;
:

10-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-9-2 O.D. turning after facing

• Program example
G50 S3000;
G96 T0606 S180 M03;
G41 G00 X95. Z−5. M08;
G01 X50. F0.2;
X20. Z0;
X−1.6.;
G00 Z1.;
G42 X82.;
Z−3.0.;
G01 X90. Z−7. F0.17;
Z−35. R5.;
X143.;
G40 G00 X200. Z100.;
M01;

10-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

10-9-3 Grooving and chamfering example

Fig. 10-12 Grooving and Chamfering

10-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 10 NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION FUNCTION (G40, G41, G42)

• Program example
Offset memory setting
T0707
Imaginary tool nose orientation code No.: 3
Nose R compensation data: R0.4 mm
T0715
Imaginary tool nose orientation code No.: 4
Nose R compensation data: R0.4 mm
1. T0707 G50 S3000
T0707 S400 M03
G00 X85. Z−40. M08
G01 X70. F0.07
X85. F0.3
G00 Z−43. S460
G41 G01 X82.
X76. Z−40. F0.15
G40 G00 X85. I−1.
Z−37. T0715
2. G42 G01 X82.
T0707 X76. Z−40.
G40 G00 X85. I−1.
X150. Z100.
M01

Note: A block for motion (A) is inserted.

3.
T0715

Note: Change the offset direction and imaginary tool nose.

A block for motion (B) is inserted.

10-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 11 TAILSTOCK

11 TAILSTOCK
11-1 Automatic Tailstock
The tailstock operation (tailstock body advance/retract and tailstock quill
OUT/IN) is controlled using the following M codes:
Other than U.S.A.
M Code Function
M12 Tailstock body advance (Knock pin IN)
M13 Tailstock body retract (Knock pin OUT)
M14 Tailstock quill advance
M15 Tailstock quill retract

For U.S.A.
M Code Function
M12 Tailstock quill advance
M13 Tailstock quill retract
M21 Tailstock body advance
M22 Tailstock body retract

• Program example
M05 Stops the spindle
M12 Moves the tailstock body forward
M14 Moves the tailstock quill out
: Machining program
M05 Stops the spindle
M15 Moves the tailstock body backward
M13 Moves the tailstock quill in
NOTE: Usually, tailstock quill ADVANCE/RETRACT motion is not possible
while the spindle is rotating. This interlock is made valid by parameter
setting. Therefore, it is possible to cancel the interlock by changing the
parameter setting.
NOTE: Determine the tailstock body position so that the quill is not fully moved
out when a workpiece is held by the quill. The quill must have sufficient
advance stroke while it is pressing a workpiece to hold it.
11-2 Manual Tailstock
A manual tailstock with a body that is manually advanced/retracted with a loos-
ening body lock is also available. For the manual tailstock, M-codes related to the
tailstock body motion are not supplied. Other functions are exactly the same as
the automatic tailstock.

11-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 11 TAILSTOCK

11-3 Tailstock Cycle (G348) (Manual Knock Type)

This is the function of moving a knock pin type tailstock to the specified position.
Traditionally, a series of operations -feeding Z-axis to tailstock position, advanc-
ing knock pin, moving the tailstock, and retracting the knock pin- should be pro-
grammed by users to move the tailstock.
To simplify the program, tailstock cycle is contained in NT NURSE software.

NOTE: This function is available only in the machines equipped with a Tail-
stock.
NOTE: This function is available only for knock pin type tailstocks. The knock
pin type tailstock is moved by connecting tailstock to Z-axis slide with a
nock pin.
NOTE: This function is available in the software V7.60 or higher.
NOTE: This function is available only for WT-250(II), SC-300II, and
SC-300IIL.

Program commands
Tailstock cycle includes following a series of operations:
(1) Retract the quill. (Only by M15 command) (M13 for M company)
(2) Feed Z-axis slide to the present tailstock position in rapid feed.
(3) Advance the knock pin to connect the tailstock with Z-axis slide.
(4) Move the tailstock to the specified position in the cutting feed at the specifed
feed rate.
(5) Retract the knock pin to disconnect the tailstock from the Z-axis slide.
(6) Advance the quill. (Only by M14 command) (M12 for M company)

• Tailstock cycle command

G348 Z . F . M . H .;

Z : Tailstock final position (machine coordinate)

Specify the tailstock position in machine coordinates.
When omitted, Z-axis slide is fed to the tailstock position in rapid feed,
and then knock pin advances.
Tailstock move and knock pin retract are not carried out.

F : Z-axis feed rate when moving the tailstock (mm/min)

When omitted, 3000 (mm/min) is automatically set up.

11-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 11 TAILSTOCK

M : Quill advance/retract
Advance or retract the quill.
Quill advance is carried out after the tailstock movement is completed
and the knock pin is retracted.
Quill retract is carried out at the beginning of the cycle.

M14: Quill advance (M12 for M company)

M15: Quill retract (M13 for M company)
When omitted, quill advance/retract is not carried out.

H : Dwell time for Z-axis move after knock-pin advance command

When omitted, “0 (sec.)” is set automatically.
H-command is available from NT NURSE version V8.58 or higher.

NOTE: Be sure to specify a decimal point for the command value of each ar-
gument.

Program example:

O0001 ;
•
G348 Z−100. M14. ; Move the tailstock and advance the quill.
•
Machining
•
G348 Z−35. M15. ; Retract the quill and return the tailstock to the
original position.
•
M30 ;

11-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 11 TAILSTOCK

11-4 NC Tailstock Screen

For details of NC tailstock for SC-450L, SC-300II, SC-300IIL, and SC-100, refer to the separately at-
tached operation manual.
11-4-1 NC tailstock screen
This is the screen for setting up the thrust of NC tailstock quill and for confirmation of quill pushing a
workpiece when employing a NC tailstock.

• Screen Description
(1) SETTING THRUST
Displays the present thrust setting of NC tailstock. The tailstock pushes a workpiece with this
thrust. It is enabled to change the setting by entering a numeric value with MDI keys on operation
panel, and pressing [INPUT] key when the quill is not pushing a workpiece. The setting range is
0.6 to 4.0 kN.
NOTE: The thrust is based on the force when pushing a workpiece at a feedrate of 320mm/min
(12.5984 inch/min).
(2) ACTUAL THRUST
Displays the actual quill thrust when NC tailstock is pushing against a workpiece. While a work-
piece is pushed, the value displayed at “ACTUAL THRUST” on the screen flickers to indicate
the pushing status.
(3) ACTUAL LOAD
Displays the motor load of the B-axis that is the control axis of NC tailstock.
(4) B AXIS MACHINE POSITION
Displays B-axis machine coordinate.
The servo control axis of NC tailstock is the B-axis of lower turret.
(5) AUTO DSPLY
When AUTO DSPLY is set to “ON”, the screen is changed automatically when performing the
following specified operations (See the section “Method of calling the screen”). When AUTO
DSPLY is set to “OFF”, the screen cannot be changed by the specified operation. The setting for
AUTO DSPLY can be changed by the soft-key [CHANGE] on the bottom of the screen.

11-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 11 TAILSTOCK

• Method of calling the screen

(1) Key in “13” on the NT NURSE MENU screen, and then press [INPUT] key.
(2) Press > key several times on the MENU screen until the soft-key [NC TAIL] appears. Then
press the soft-key [NC TAIL].
(3) When AUTO DSPLY is set to “ON” on NC TAILSTOCK screen, the screen is changed by the
following operations:
(a) To select “LOWER TURRET” with turret selection switch, a “HANDLE” mode with
MODE switch, and “B-axis” with axis selection switch
(b) To select “LOWER TURRET” with turret selection switch, “JOG”/”RAPID”/”ZERO RE-
TURN” mode with MODE switch, and press “+B”/”−B” JOG switch

11-4-2 Manual operation

(1) HANDLE mode
Selecting “LOWER TURRET” with turret selection switch, a “HANDLE” mode (“x1”, “x10” or
“x100”) with MODE switch, and “B-axis” with axis selection switch enable HANDLE (manual
pulse generator) operation.
Turning the HANDLE feeds NC tailstock in the positive (+) or negative (−) direction (NOTE 1).
When pushing a workpiece with tailstock in manual operation, the torque limit set at “SETTING
THRUST” on NC TAILSTOCK screen is applied to (NOTE 2).
(2) JOG mode
Selecting “LOWER TURRET” with turret selection switch, “JOG” mode with MODE switch,
and then pressing “+B”/”−B” JOG switch feed NC tailstock in the positive (+) or negative (−) di-
rection (NOTE 2).
The jog feed rate is fixed at 320mm/min (12.5984 inch/min).
(Feedrate override is ineffective. To set feedrate override to “effective”, parameter setting is re-
quired. See the step (1) in section “4. PARAMETERS”.
(3) RAPID mode
Selecting “LOWER TURRET” with turret selection switch, “RAPID” mode with MODE switch,
and then pressing “+B”/”− B” JOG switch feed NC tailstock in the positive (+) or negative (−)
direction (NOTE 2).
Feedrate override is effective. Since the interlock is ineffective, be very careful not to interfere.
To validate the interlock, see the step (2) in section “4. PARAMETERS”.
(4) ZERO RETURN mode
Selecting “LOWER TURRET” with turret selection switch, “ZERO RETURN” mode with
MODE switch, and then pressing “+B”/”−B” JOG switch feed NC tailstock in the positive (+)
direction (to zero position).
NOTE: 1. When operating the manual pulse handle in handle mode “×100” , the feed rate is
increased as the handle is turned fast. Therefore feeding the tailstock at such a high
speed to push a workpiece may generate a servo alarm. Be careful when feeding
tailstock in the handle mode “x100”.
NOTE: 2. When setting a small thrust for tailstock quill, there are cases that B-axis cannot be
fed since too much torque limit is applied to NC tailstock. In that case, it is required
to increase the thrust. Use the tailstock after confirming that the axis is fed normally.
(An alarm “A132 NC TAIL STOCK DO NOT MOVE” may be issued.)

11-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 11 TAILSTOCK

11-4-3 Automatic operation

In automatic operation, workpiece is pushed with “QUILL PUSHER FUNCTION WITH SOFT-
WARE”. See the section “22. QUILL PUSHER FUNCTION WITH SOFTWARE (G376/G377)” in
NT NURSE operation manual.
NOTE: Changed part of quill pusher function with software:
(1) If “F” command is omitted for the tailstock feedrate at workpiece push, the feedrate set PMC pa-
rameter D8740 is set as the feedrate.
Standard setting of D8740: 320
(320mm/min (12.5984 inch/min) is the standard feedrate.)
(2) When specifying a feedrate, set up less than 320mm/min (12.5984 inch/min).

11-4-4 Related parameters

• NC parameters (Lower turret)
NO.6914 Setting:4 B-axis selection
NO.6934 Example of setting:5000 B-axis move area in (+) side
(Arbitrary setting)
NO.6954 Example of setting:−200000 B-axis move area in (−) side
(Arbitrary setting)
NOTE: For NC parameters No. 6934 and No.6954, determine the B-axis move area according to
the workpiece.
• PMC parameters
(1) Parameters for setting up feedrate override in jog mode in manual operation
The feed rate override of NC tailstock in jog operation
D4052 0: Ineffective (Override 120%<320mm/min>Fixed)
1: Effective (Depending on the setting of override switch)
(2) Parameter for setting up interlock in rapid feed in manual operation (Position switch)
Interlock for NC tailstock feeding area in manual rapid feed
D4018 0: Ineffective
1: Effective

11-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 12 BAR FEEDER

12 BAR FEEDER
12-1 Bar Stopper Method
To supply bar material to the machine from the bar feeder while controlling the
bar material feed stroke with the bar stopper mounted in the turret, the following
M codes are used.
M Code Function
M11 Chuck open (starting bar material feed)
M10 Chuck close (stopping bar material feed)
• Program example
N
T_____; Indexes the turret to bring the
bar stopper in position
G00 X0 Z_____; Positions the turret so that sup-
plied bar material stops at the
required length
M10; (M11) Opens the chuck, starting bar
material supply
G04 U_____; Dwell to ensure bar mater supply
M11; (M10) Closes the chuck, stopping bar
material supply
G00 X Z_____; Moves the turret backward at a
rapid traverse
T_____; Cancels the tool offset mode
M01;

12-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 12 BAR FEEDER

12-1-1 Bar advance command and work supply command (M61)

Some bar feeders and shaft feeder units are not activated only by opening the
chuck. Therefore, it is necessary to command a special M code (M61).

M code Contents
M61 Bar advance command / work supply command

• Auto CHO-BEI
• Auto CHO-BEI II
• ZEN-BEI
• Bar feeder (ALPS)
For details of programming, refer to each instruction manual.

12-1-2 Preliminary feed command (M1061)

The ASQ type bar feeder (ALPS) has a preliminary feed command.
The preliminary feed command advances the bar material to the standby position
and shortens the work loading time.

M code Contents
M1061 Preliminary feed command

･ ASQ type bar feeder (ALPS)

12-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 12 BAR FEEDER

12-2 Bar Pulling-out Method

To supply bar material to the machine from the bar feeder while controlling the
bar material feed stroke with the bar material pulling-out operation, the following
M and G codes are used.
M Code Function
M11 Chuck open (starting bar material feed)
M10 Chuck close (stopping bar material feed)
G98 Per minute feed
G99 Per revolution feed

• Program example
N
T ;
G00 X0 Z ;
G98 G01 Z F2000 M22;
G04 U1.;
M10; (M11)
G04 U0.5;
G01 Z M22;
G04 U1.;
M11; (M10)
G04 U0.5;
G99 G00 Z ;
X Z ;
T ;
M ;

Illustration Commands Operation

N Sets the coordinate system.
T ; Indexs the pull-out finger in
position.

G00 X0 Z ; Moves the pull-out finger close

to the bar material.

G98 G01 Z F2000 M22; Clamps the bar material in the

G04 U1.; finger; finger feed is controlled
in the asynchronous mode.
Dwell for 0.5 seconds.

12-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 12 BAR FEEDER

Illustration Commands Operation

M10(M11) Opens the chuck.
G04 U0.5; Dwell for 0.5 seconds.

G01 Z M22; The finger pulls out the bar

G04 U1.; material.
Dwell for 1 seconds.

M11;(M10) Closes the chuck.

G04 U0.5; Dwell for 0.5 seconds.

G99 G00 Z ; The finger releases the bar ma-

terial and retracts.

X Z ; The finger returns to the start

T point.
M ;

[SUPPLEMENTAL REMARKS]
For the NT NURSE or LUCK-BEI, the following bar feeder functions can be used
when required. For details of each function, refer to the instruction manual of
NT NURSE.
(1) Top cut cycle (G301/G302)
When a new bar is supplied, the material end (top cut) is cut off by two lines,
G301 and G302.
(2) Bar stopper cycle (G303)
A bar material is pushed out depending on the product length by one line of
G303.
(3) HAI-BEI cycle (G306)
A bar material discharge motion by HAI-BEI is performed by one line of
G306.
(4) Software sizing check (G378)
A bar material is checked if it is fed to a designated position.

12-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 12 BAR FEEDER

12-3 Top Cut Cycle (Bar Change Cycle)

12-3-1 Operation
How to operate the top cut program (bar change program) differs depending on
the types of bar feeder units. Check the following before using this program.

• IEMCA bar feeder or LNS SPRINT/ LNS MINI SPRINT/ QUICK

LOAD/MAGAZINE bar feeder:
Set the block delete switch on the operation panel to OFF

• Bar feeders other than above bar feeders

Set the block delete switch on the operation panel to ON

NOTE: Setting the PMC parameter D4075 to “1” enables to use the top cut
program (bar change program) with jump programming function. At
this time, it is possible to operate the top cut program regardless of the
setting of block delete switch.
For the details on how to use the jump programming, refer to the chap-
ter 31.

12-4 Separate Block Delete Function from Top Cut Signal (SC Series (other than
SC-100X2), AS-200, and AS-200L)
In the standard specification, the block delete function decides whether to perform
the bar exchange / top cut operation or not. For this reason, the block delete
switch cannot be used for the original purpose.

This is the function to separate the block delete function from the bar end / top cut
signal by the parameter setting. As a result, the block delete switch can be used for
the original purpose. For the control of the bar exchange / top cut operation, create
a program using G471 as shown below.

NOTE: This function is available for SC series (other than SC-100X2), AS-200,
and AS-200L with a ladder program 40100314AL or higher.

12-4-1 G code
G471 X ___ Q0. I ____ .
If the signal of the address specified with X is 0, the lathe jumps to the se-
quence number specified with I. If the signal is 1, the lathe executes the next
program without jumping.

G471 X ___ Q1. I ____ .

If the signal of the address specified with X is 1, the lathe jumps to the se-
quence number specified with I. If the signal is 0, the lathe executes the next
program without jumping.

Insert the X address of the bar end / top cut signal in the program depending
on the specification. Refer to the wiring diagram for the details of the ad-
dress.

NOTE: Be sure to put “.” to the end of the sequence number specified with I.

12-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 12 BAR FEEDER

12-4-2 Program example

Before the change
O1234; Main program

/ M98 P5678; Bar exchange top cut program

Normal machining

M30;
%

After the change

O1234; Main program

G471 X5.7 Q0. I100.; Go to N100 if top cut signal is OFF

M98 P5678; Bar exchange top cut program

N100;
Normal machining

M30;
%

NOTE: X address is an example. Check the X address of the machine in the

wiring diagram.

12-4-3 PMC parameter

Data No. Description Setting
0: Bar end / top cut signal is controlled by the block delete
function. (Standard)
D4075 4
4: Bar end / top cut signal is NOT controlled by the block
delete function. (controlled by G471)

12-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13 PARTS CATCHER
When executing cutting-off cycle, the operation to receive the cut off product with
the parts catcher and to carry it to the chute is programmed using the following M
codes.
M Code Function
M68 Parts catcher advance (L side ejection)
M69 Parts catcher retract (L side ejection)
M468 Parts catcher advance (R side ejection)
M469 Parts catcher retract (R side ejection)

• Program example
N313 T0707 S700 M03;
N314 G00 X45. Z75.;
N315 G01 X0
F0.08
M68; Moves the parts
catcher forward
M68 (M468) when executing
cutting-off cycle

N316 G00 X50.;

N317 X150. Z100.;
N318 T0700;
N319 M69; Moves the parts
catcher backward
M69 (M469) to carry the cut-off
part to the chute
N320 M30;

The parts catcher motion must be programmed so that chips will not be accumu-
lated inside the bucket when it is moved forward to the cut-off part receiving po-
sition.
The above indicated program may be edited in the following manner to avoid chip
accumulation inside the bucket.
The Program Shown Above After Editing
N315 G01 X0 F0.08 M68; N315 G01 X10. F0.08;
N316 G00 X50.; N3151 X0 M68;
N317 X150. Z100. N316 G00 X50.;
N317 X150. Z100.;

13-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

NOTE: For the machine equipped with NT nurse System, M69 shall be com-
manded independently in a single block because of its specific function.
M69 has more than one functions apart from “Part catcher retract”.
Following examples shall NOT be commanded.
G00 X__ Z__ M69
or
T__ M69
Following examples shall be commanded.
M69
[SUPPLEMENTAL REMARKS]
For the NT NURSE or LUCK-BEI, the following parts catcher functions can be
used when required. For details of each function, refer to the instruction manual
of NT NURSE.
(1) Parts catcher cycle (G305)
A serial of work discharge motions by the parts catcher is performed by one
line of G305. (The forcible discharge unit and work conveyor unit are auto-
matically selected.)
(The parts catcher cannot be advanced during cut-off operation.)

13-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13-1 Parts Catcher “B” (WT-250, WT-150, Super NTJ and Super NTM3)
There are 2 types of M codes for operating the parts catcher in the automatic
mode. One is the M code waiting for movement completion of parts catcher. The
other is the M code which does not wait for movement completions of ejection.
“M codes”
M468 : Parts Catcher advance command
The M code is completed after the parts catcher moves to left, and turns
to chuck.
M469 : Parts Catcher retract command
The M code is completed after the Parts Catcher turns to front and
moves to right, and the shutter closes.
NOTE: For WT-250, the M code is completed after Parts Catcher moves to
right since WT-250 is not equipped with a shutter.
The above 2 M codes are M codes waiting for movement completion of parts
catcher.
M868 Parts catcher “B” cycle
This is the M code which performs ejecting movements without waiting
for each movement completion. Since the completion signal of this M
code returns immediately, the next block can be executed, and the cycle
time is shortened.

13-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

M768 : Parts catcher advance command

3
(Only for WT-150, Super NTJ and Super NTM )
When this M code is commanded, the shutter opens and the parts catch-
er advances. The parts catcher advances only, not turn.
The next block can be executed without waiting for each movement
completion.
When M468 is commanded after this M code command, the parts
catcher turns to chuck.
M769 : Parts catcher retract command
3
(Only for WT-150, Super NTJ and Super NTM )
When this M code is commanded, the parts catcher performs the same
movement as M469 command. However, the next block can be execut-
ed when the parts catcher turns upward.
M563 : Shutter close command
3
(Only for WT-150, Super NTJ and Super NTM )
When this M code is commanded, the shutter closes.
The next block can be executed after confirmation of the shutter close
end.
This M code is used for the shutter close confirmation after M 769
command.
M368 : Parts Catcher type B cycle
This is the M code to perform ejecting operation without waiting for
completion of each movement as well as M868.
It is enabled to designate sub spindle (NC MATA-BEI) advance position
and sub spindle home position return operation by specifying the fol-
lowing arguments. Be sure to specify a decimal point for argument.

Program command:
M368 B_____. A_____.

B_____. : B-axis machine coordinate of NC MATA-BEI

advance position (Not omissible)
A_____. : Determine whether NC MATA-BEI home position
return is performed or not.before Parts Catcher
type B retraction.
A0. (omissible) : NC MATA-BEI home position
return is performed.
A1. : NC MATA-BEI home position
return is not performed.

13-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

NOTE: M368 is available for NT NURSE version 5.603 or higher.

13-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

“Program example using M868 or M368”

CAUTION 1 : Never command MATA-BEI move in a program while the

MATA-BEI is operated with M868 or M368. The operation
stops with the alarm.
CAUTION 2 : Auto cycle cannot be started unless the parts catcher is at the
retract end.

13-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

“Program example using M768 and M796”

13-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13-2 Parts Catcher for Turret

When using JX-250, refer to the operation manual of parts catcher turret type for
JX-250 (4800807).

A bucket for receiving finished part is mounted on the lower turret. This parts
catcher ejects workpieces onto the chute unit by turning the turret. This operation
is programmed using the following M codes and G code.
M Code Function
Parts catcher (chute) advance
M68 By advancing the chute which can be open and close,
*(M468) the bucket mounted on the turret is open and the
workpiece in the bucktet is ejected.
M69 Parts catcher (chute) retract
*(M469) The chute which can be open and close retracts.

NOTE: *M468 and M469 are used without parts catcher type G or R-unit parts
catcher.
M68 and M69 are used with parts catcher type G or R-unit parts catch-
er.

G Code Function
In the specified optional index speed, the bucket
G367 mounted on the turret is indexed to the position to be
ejected.

When the position where the bucket receives the workpiece is de-
termined, check enough that there is no interference.
(The interlock is not applied because the position where the bucket
receives the workpiece is different depending on the chuck models.)

13-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13-2-1 Program command

G367 T .F .[A .];

F .: Turret turning speed

Setting range 20. to 28800.deg/min
When abriviated, 15000 deg/min is set.
T .: T code for bucket position
Normally, station number commanded T value
is commanded internally, and controlled the
bucket is at the eject position. (For dodecagon
turret)
(NOTE) For turrets execpt dodecagon turret,
when the bucket position is incorrect,
command A1. and command a station number
which the bucket is at the eject position for T
value directly.
(Example) G367 T0101. A1.
A .: T value setting (available to NT NURSE V5.05
or further version)
A0 (when abriviated): station number
commanded T value is commanded internally.
(Example) T0100 for T0600
(Example) T1200 for T0500
A1: T code commanded for T value is
commanded.

13-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13-2-2 Interlock
When invalidating the following interlocks, be sure to check that there
are no danger in the operation and be careful during operations.
The following parameters are set at the time of factory shipments. (It is not nec-
essary to change.)
When the operation is performed after changing the parameters, check enough
that there is no interference.
Do not change the parameters, as long as there is no necessity.
The following conditions are required to be fulfilled for parts catcher (chute) ad-
vance.
(1) Doors are closed.
(2) The slide is in the second home position. (X/Z/Y-axis)
The coordinate value for NC parameter No.1241 is set.
Parameter No.1241
(Lower side)
X-axis Z-axis Y-axis
Machine
Super NTJ 0 230000 −
WT-150 0 −15000 −
WT-300 0 220000 −
Super NTM3 0 228250 −
WTS-150 0 −267500 −
Super NTY3, NTY3-100 0 −110.000 0
Super NTJX 0 35.000 −50.000
WY-100, WY-100II
0 −110.000 0
(L-spindleϕ42)
WY-100, WY-100II
−40.000 −115.000 0
(L-spindleϕ51,65)
WY-150 0 −125.000 −5.000
3
NTY -150 0 −185.000 −5.000
This interlock can be invalidated by sequence parameters.
PMC parameter Machine
WT-150, Super NTJ, WT-300, Super
D2212
NTJX,WY-100,WY-100II,WY-150
Super NTM3, WTS-150, Super NTY3, NTY3-100,
D3212
NTY3-150
0: X-axis second home position is not included in the condition of ad-
vance.
1: X-axis second home position is included in the condition of advance.
(standard)
PMC parameter Machine
WT-150, Super NTJ, WT-300, Super
D2213
NTJX,WY-100,WY-100II,WY-150
Super NTM3, WTS-150, Super NTY3, NTY3-100,
D3213
NTY3-150
0: Z-axis second home position is not included in the condition of ad-
vance.
1: Z-axis second home position is included in the condition of advance.
(standard)

13-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

PMC parameter Machine

D2215 Super NTJX,WY-100,WY-100II,WY-150
D3215 Super NTY3, NTY3-100, NTY3-150
0: Y-axis second home position is not included in the condition of ad-
vance.
1: Y-axis second home position is included in the condition of advance.
(standard)
(3) The station which a bucket is mounted on is indexed to the part eject position
Set the station number for the sequence parameter.
PMC parameter Machine
WT-150, Super NTJ, WT-300, Super
D2214
NTJX,WY-100,WY-100II,WY-150
Super NTM3, WTS-150, Super NTY3, NTY3-100,
D3214
NTY3-150
This interlock can be invalidated by sequence parameters.
PMC parameter Machine
WT-150, Super NTJ, WT-300, Super
D2211
NTJX,WY-100,WY-100II,WY-150
Super NTM3, WTS-150, Super NTY3, NTY3-100,
D3211
NTY3-150
0: The parts catcher can advance though the station with a bucket is not
indexed to the eject position.
1: The parts catcher can advance only when the station with a bucket is
indexed to the eject position. (standard)
(4) The Z-axis slide cover is not in the interference position.
Set the interference area for the NC parameter.
Machine NC parameter (Lower side)
No.6936=240000
Super NTJ
No.6956=227000
No.6936=240000
WT-150
No.6956=−50000
No.6939=400000
WT-300
No.6959=200000
No.6939=340000
Super NTM3
No.6959=0
No.6938=−263500
WTS-150
No.6958=0
Super NTY3, NTY3-100 No.6938=−100.000
WY-100,WY-100II No.6958=−296.500
3 No.6938=−175.000
NTY -150
No.6958=−340.000
No.6938=−115.000
WY-150
No.6958=−280.000
No.6939=500.000
Super NTJX
No.6959=0
The parts catcher can advance only within the coordinate value set as the
above-mentioned parameters.

13-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13-2-3 Program example

O0001;
•
•
Machining
•
•
T1200; Index the bucket mounting station
Approach to the chuck
M10; Chuck open, workpiece ejection
•
•
G30 U0 W0; Move to 2nd home position (X, Z-axis)
G30 V0; Move to 2nd home position (Y-axis)
G367 T1200.F16000.; Index the station for work ejection
M68; (M468) Parts catcher (chute) advance
G04 U1.;
M69; (M469)
M30;

NOTE: The turret turning speed must be set so as not to fall a workpiece during
turning.
NOTE: For dwell time (M68 or M468), set enough time for workpiece to drop
onto the chute completely.
NOTE: When Y-axis is equipped, specifying a command “G30 V0” is needed.
NOTE: When the bucket approaches to chuck, check enough that there is no in-
terference.

13-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

13-2-4 Restriction matters in parts catcher for turret

Machine models: WT-150, WT-300, Super NTJ, Super NTM3,
Super NTJX
(1) In the case of the workpiece transfer by the sub spindle (B-axis) advance, if
the bucket of the parts catcher mounted on the turret is in the spindle side, it
will interfere with the sub spindle unit cover.
Therefore, when the bucket is in the spindle side and the nearby station, the
sub spindle (B-axis) cannot advance by the interlock function. (As for 12 sta-
tions, the nearby station means the station on either side, and as for 24 sta-
tions, it means the time of middle station index of right and left further. For
example, when the mounting station is set set to No.7, it will interfere if No.6,
7, 8, 18, or 19 stations are indexed.) Only manual zero return can be per-
formed.
(The sub spindle (B-axis) advances at the other stations.)
Perform the workpiece transfer after checking enough in which station the
bucket is.

Machine models: WT-150, WT-300, Super NTJ, Super NTM3,

Super NTJX
(2) When the bucket of the parts catcher mounted on the turret indexes to the
spindle and the nearby station at the time of the sub spindle (B-axis) advance,
it interferes with the sub spindle unit cover and the spindle.
Therefore, when the sub spindle (B-axis) is in any positions other than the
zero position, the lower turret cannot index by the interlock function.
* Index interlock restrictions can be cancelled with the M codes.
M498: Turret index restriction OFF
(Turret can be indexed if B2-axis is not at the zero point.)
M499: Turret index restriction ON
(Turret can be indexed if B2-axis is at the zero point.)
• When the interlock is cancelled and the operation is performed, check
enough that there is no interference.
• As long as there is no necessity, do not cancel the interlock function.
• The interlock function will be in the initial state (the state of ON) by reset
or the power supply OFF.

13-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 13 PARTS CATCHER

Machine models: Super NTJ, Super NTM3

(3) When the parts catcher type A has been mounted, in case the lower turret
performs the machining on the L-unit spindle, in order to avoid interference
with the bucket of the parts catcher mounted on the turret and the arm part of
the parts catcher type A, the interlock restrictions are prepared in stroke area.
Be fully careful in the case of operation.
Lower side NC parameter 6940: Interlock for the X-axis direction
Standard setting: −90000
Lower side NC parameter 6961: Interlock for the Z-axis direction
Standard setting: −220000
* Stroke area interlock restrictions can be cancelled with the M codes.
M492: Stroke area restriction OFF
M493: Stroke area restriction ON
• When the interlock is cancelled and the operation is performed, check
enough that there is no interference.
• As long as there is no necessity, do not cancel the interlock function.
• The interlock function will be in the initial state (the state of ON) by reset
or the power supply OFF.

Machine models: Super NTJ, Super NTM3

(4) When the parts catcher has been mounted, unless the Z-axis stroke of the
lower turret is in the position smaller than 100000 (for Super NTM3) or
70000 (for Super NTJ), the parts catcher type A cannot move forward.
Lower side NC parameter 6952: The Z-axis interlock at the time of
the parts catcher type A
advance
Standard setting:
Super NTM3=100000
Super NTJ=70000
NOTE: When the interlock function is cancelled, it is in the area in which each
unit interferes. Perform the operation by checking the interference area
enough.

13-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14 C-AXIS CONTROL
This section describes the program of C-axis operation.
14-1 C-axis Connection
When the machine operates the milling operation using a rotary tool or C-axis unit,
it is necessary to change the spindle selection to C-axis selection.
(1) Changing to the C-axis selection : M91
By the M91 command, the C-axis is selected and the C-axis indicator on the
machine operation panel lights. Milling operation using a rotary tool is en-
abled until the mode is canceled by the M41 command. M91 command
should be commanded independently.
NOTE: Do not command M91 simultaneously from upper and lower turrets. If
commanded, an error in the positioning coordinate of C-axis or in the
changeover to the C-axis selection may occur.
NOTE: Precautions when carrying out simultaneous machining with upper and
lower turret heads
For C-axis simultaneous machining on L-spindle by upper turret and lower
turret as shown below, specifying a C-axis selecting M-code “M91” for both
upper turret and lower turret cannot execute the C-axis feed command cor-
rectly since it is indefinite that which turret head possesses the right of
C-axis feed command depending on the timing of executing “M91”. As this
measure, delete the C-axis selecting M-code “M91” in the head line of the
process of the turret head that does not have the command of C-axis control.

14-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 5-5 in the LUCK-BEI Ⅱ INSTRUCTION MANUAL

(NT-MGi) when using process edit function on NT-MGi specification.

(2) Returning to the spindle selection : M41

Command M41, and the spindle is selected.
Program example:
N1 M41; Selects the spindle.
T S M ; Designates the cutting tool,
spindle speed, and spindle
rotating direction.
G00 X40. Z5. M08;
M01;
M91 Changes to C-axis selection.
T S M ; Designates the cutting tool,
rotary tool spindle speed, and rotary tool spindle rotating
direction.
G00 X40. Z5. M08;
M30;
For TW-30, to make more accurate C-axis positioning, “M98 P9000” com-
mand should be used instead of M91. Program O9000 is registered as a sub-
program.
<Subprogram>
O9000
M91;
M27;
G28 *H M28;
M99;
If the program above is executed with the single block switch on the machine
operation panel set to ON, program execution is suspended (feed hold mode)
while subprogram O9000 is executed. Press the cycle start switch to restart
the operation.
NOTE: Input the value of H as follows:
Machine TW-30
Value -0.1

14-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

(3) Changing to the C-axis selection (M291)

This motion is performed in the same way as M91. However, the following
block is executed before the completion of a motion.
This code is used when the changeover to the C-axis and execution of other
motion are to be performed at the same time.
Program example:

A C-axis program should always be inserted after the C-axis mode is

selected by the M91 command. If this program is inserted in a block
preceding (in the spindle mode) or in the same block as that of the
M91 command, normal operation cannot be achieved.
Good example) Bad Example)

: :
M91 G00H−10. X
G28H0 :
G0H−10. :
: G28H0M91 X
: :
M41 M41
: :
Insert a C-axis program between blocks of M91 and M41.

14-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-2 Rotary Tool Spindle Speed

(1) Command format
S ;
Designate the spindle speed in a 4-digit number following address S.
(2) Programmable range
S180 − S3600 (For Fuji motors)
S36 − S3600 (For FANUC motors)
The programmable range differs according to the type of machines.
14-3 Rotary Direction of the Rotary Tool
Rotary tool has two rotary directions: cross and straight. The same M codes are
used to rotate the tools, but the rotating directions are different; therefore, be
careful of the rotating directions.

Cross direction Straight direction

M-code

M88 RVS. rotation FWD. rotation

M89 FWD. rotation RVS. rotation
M90 Stop rotating.

NOTE: To use the usual drill or endmill, select the forward rotation M code.

14-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

• Use of rotating direction commands

Generally, use either M88 or M89 depending on the tool orientation (straight
or cross).
When using a tapping cycle of a fixed drilling cycle, normal rotation and re-
verse rotation should be made by the M88 and M89 commands, respectively.
M94 (side tapping cycle) can be used in such a case.
The rotating direction as specified by the M88 or M89 command can be re-
versed after the M94 command.
Program example:
Side tapping Face tapping
: :
M91; M91;
T___; T___;
* M94; M08;
M08; G00 X___Z___C___S___M88;
G00 X___Z___C___S___M88; G84 Z___F___;
G88 X___F___; :
: :
:
When the M94 command is issued, the rotating direction remains reversed
until the next tool is indexed. The initial direction is restored as soon as the
next tool is indexed. When using two or more tools for side tapping, use
the M94 command to index each tool.
NOTE: The following interlock functions are available for milling with the
Y-axis.
When changing from the C-axis to the spindle with the use of the M41
command, return the Y-axis to the zero point first with the G28 com-
mand and then advance the Y-axis knock pin with the M470 command.
This is to avoid executing turning operation without returning the Y-axis
to the zero point.
When executing turning operation while the Y-axis not in the zero posi-
tion, retract the Y-axis knock pin by the M471 command following the
M41 command and then move the Y-axis.

14-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-4 Miscellaneous Functions

The M functions that are used to carry out machining using the C-axis or a rotary
tool.
M Spindle Mode C-axis Mode
Code (C-axis indicator OFF) (C-axis indicator ON)
M41 −− Spindle selection
M86 Spindle lock on C-axis lock on
M87 Spindle lock off C-axis disk lock off
Rotary tool spindle start (upper
M88 −−
turret)- forward direction
Rotary tool spindle start (upper
M89 −−
turret)- reverse direction
Rotary tool spindle stop (up- Rotary tool spindle stop (upper
M90
per turet) (WT/WTW series) turret)
M91 C-axis selection −−
M94 −− Side tapping cycle
Rotary tool spindle start (lower
turet)- forward direction
M488 −−
(WT/WY/WTW/STW/STS/
NTJ-100)
Rotary tool spindle start (lower
turret)- reverse direction
M489 −−
(WT/WY/WTW/STW/STS/
NTJ-100)
Rotary tool spindle stop (lower
turet)
M490 −−
(WT/WY/WTW/STW/STS se-
ries)
M703 −− C-axis brake off mode on
M704 −− C-axis brake off mode off

14-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

[WTS, NTM3, NTY3 serie]

The M functions that are used to carry out machining using the C-axis or a rotary
tool are shown below:
L-unit R-unit Lower unit
M
L-unit Spindle L-unit C-axis R-unit Spindle R-unit C-axis L-unit Spindle L-unit C-axis
Code
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
−− −− −− −− R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
M32
(C-axis) lock on (C-axis) lock on
−− −− −− −− R-unit spindle L-unit spindle
M33
(C-axis) lock off (C-axis) lock off
−− L-unit spindle −− R-unit spindle −− L-unit spindle
M41
selection selection selection
−− −− −− −− R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
start - forward start - forward
M53 direction (when direction (when
R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
selection) selection)
−− −− −− −− R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
start - reverse start - reverse
M54 direction (when direction (when
R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
selection) selection)
−− −− −− −− R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
stop (when stop (when
M55
R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
selection) selection)
L-unit spindle L-unit C-axis R-unit spindle R-unit C-axis L-unit spindle L-unit C-axis
M86
lock on lock on lock on lock on lock on lock on
L-unit spindle L-unit C-axis R-unit spindle R-unit C-axis L-unit spindle L-unit C-axis
M87
lock off lock off lock off lock off lock off lock off
−− Rotary tool −− Rotary tool −− −−
spindle start - spindle start -
M88
forward direc- forward direc-
tion (L-turret) tion (R-turret)
−− Rotary tool −− Rotary tool −− −−
spindle start - spindle start -
M89
reverse direction reverse direction
(L-turret) (R-turret)
−− Rotary tool −− Rotary tool −− −−
M90 spindle stop spindle stop
(L-turret) (R-turret)
L-unit C-axis −− R-unit C-axis −− L-unit C-axis −−
M91
selection selection selection

14-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

L-unit R-unit Lower unit

M
L-unit Spindle L-unit C-axis R-unit Spindle R-unit C-axis L-unit Spindle L-unit C-axis
Code
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
−− Rotary tool −− Rotary tool −− −−
spindle side tap- spindle side tap-
M94
ping cycle ping cycle
(L-turret) (R-turret)
L-unit C-axis L-unit C-axis −− −− L-unit C-axis L-unit C-axis
M432 command mix command mix command mix command mix
on on on on
L-unit C-axis L-unit C-axis −− −− L-unit C-axis L-unit C-axis
M433 command mix command mix command mix command mix
off off off off
−− −− −− −− R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
selection (when selection (when
M441
R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis
selection) selection)
−− −− R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis
M442 command mix command mix command mix command mix
on on on on
−− −− R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis
M443 command mix command mix command mix command mix
off off off off
−− −− −− −− −− Rotary tool
spindle start
M488 (lower turet)-
forward direc-
tion
−− −− −− −− −− Rotary tool
spindle start
M489
(lower turret)-
reverse direction
−− −− −− −− −− Rotary tool
M490 spindle stop
(lower turet)
−− −− −− −− R-unit C-axis R-unit C-axis
selection (when selection (when
M491
R-unit spindle R-unit spindle
selection) selection)
−− −− −− −− Rotary tool Rotary tool
spindle side tap- spindle side tap-
ping cycle (low- ping cycle (low-
M494
er turret) (when er turret)
R-unit C-axis
selection)
NOTE: For the details of M codes, refer to section 7. MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION (M FUNCTION).

14-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-5 MATA-BEI C-axis Control

This section describes the program of Sub-C-axis operation.
14-5-1 MATA-BEI C-axis Connection
When the machine operates the milling operation using a rotary tool or MA-
TA-BEI C-axis unit, it is necessary to change the spindle selection to MATA-BEI
C-axis selection.
14-5-2 Changing to the MATA-BEI C-axis selection: M491
By the M491 command, the MATA-BEI C-axis is selected and the MATA-BEI
C-axis indicator and the MATA-BEI C-axis at the home position indicator, both
on the machine operation panel, light. Milling operation using a rotary tool is en-
abled until the mode is canceled by the M441 command. M491 command should
be commanded independently.
NOTE: Do not command M491 simultaneously from upper and lower turrets. If
commanded, an error in the positioning coordinate of C-axis or in the
changeover to the C-axis selection may occur.
NOTE: Precautions when carrying out simultaneous machining with upper and
lower turret heads
For C-axis simultaneous machining on R-spindle by upper turret and lower
turret as shown below, specifying a C-axis selecting M-code “M491” (SUB
SPINDLE FOR TURNING CENTER MODEL) for both upper turret and
lower turret cannot execute the C-axis feed command correctly since it is in-
definite that which turret head possesses the right of C-axis feed command
depending on the timing of executing “M491”. As this measure, delete the
C-axis selecting M-code “M491” (SUB SPINDLE FOR TURNING CEN-
TER MODEL) in the head line of the process of the turret head that does not
have the command of C-axis control.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 5-5 in the LUCK-BEI Ⅱ INSTRUCTION MANUAL

(NT-MGi) when using process edit function on NT-MGi specification.

14-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-5-3 Returning to the spindle selection: M441

Command M441, and the spindle is selected.
• Program example:
N1 M441; Selects the spindle.
T_____S_____M_____; Designates the cutting tool,
spindle speed, and spindle
rotating direction.
G00X40. Z5. M08;
M01;
M491 Changes to MATA-BEI C-axis
selection.
T_____S_____M_____; Designates the cutting tool,
rotary tool spindle speed, and rotary tool spindle rotating
direction.
G00 X40. Z5. M08;
M30;
14-5-4 Rotary tool spindle speed (lower turret)
(1) Command format
S_____;
Designate the spindle speed in a 4-digit number following address S.
(2) Programmable range
S180 - S3600
14-5-5 Rotary direction of the rotary tool (lower turret)
Rotary tool has two rotary directions: cross and straight, and uses the same
M-codes to rotate to those directions, but the opposite direction.
M-code Cross direction Straight directions
M488 RVS. rotation FWD. rotation
M489 FWD. rotation RVS. rotation
M490 Stop rotating.

14-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-5-6 Miscellaneous functions

The M functions that are used to carry out machining using the C-axis or a rotary
tool.
M Spindle Mode C-axis Mode
Code (C-axis indicator OFF) (C-axis indicator ON)
M441 −− Spindle selection
M32 Spindle disk brake engage C-axis disk brake engage
M33 Spindle disk brake release C-axis disk brake release
Rotary tool spindle (lower tur-
M488 −−
ret) start - forward direction
Rotary tool spindle (lower tur-
M489 −−
ret) start - reverse direction
Rotary tool spindle (lower tur-
M490 −−
ret) stop
M491 C-axis selection −−
M494 −− Side tapping cycle (lower turret)

(1) M441 (spindle selection)

The spindle is selected, making turning operation possible.
The Sub-C-axis indicator on the machine operation panel is turned off.
(2) M491 (Sub-C-axis selection)
The Sub-C-axis is selected, making milling operation possible.
The Sub-C-axis indicator on the machine operation panel is turned on.
To make more accurate Sub-C-axis positioning, “M98 P9000” command
should be used instead of M491.
(3) M494 (side tapping cycle)
To carry out side tapping cycle, designate the M494 command in a block
between the one designating a T code and the G88 block.
• Program example
:
:
M491;
N T S M88;
M494;
G00 X100. Z5. M08;
G88 Z C X ;
:
:
If side tapping cycle is carried out with multiple cutting tools, it is necessary
to designate the M494 command each time a side tapping tool is selected.

14-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-5-7 MATA-BEI C-axis specification in SC series (One-path lathe) (18i-TB)

MATA-BEI C-axis is controlled as an A-axis because the MATA-BEI C-axis
specification in SC series is one-path lathe, and the C-axis is used in the main
spindle side.
Therefore, the axial name of MATA-BEI C-axis will be A-axis.

(1) Travel command of MATA-BEI C-axis (A-axis)

Command format
Absolute travel command : A____
Incremental travel command : A[#5006+___]
(#5006 : The end position is the sixth position (A-axis))

The position of A-axis travel is decided by the command above during rapid
positioning (G00) and the cutting feed positioning (G01).

14-5-8 MATA-BEI C-axis specification in SC series (Two-path lathe)

(0i-TD/Nakamura-Tome FANUC)
MATA-BEI C-axis is controlled as a C-axis because the MATA-BEI C-axis speci-
fication in SC series is two-path lathe, and the C-axis is used in the sub spindle
side.
Therefore, the axial name of MATA-BEI C-axis will be C2-axis.

(1) Travel command of MATA-BEI C-axis (C2-axis)

Command format
Absolute travel command : C____
Incremental travel command : H____
The position of C-axis travel is decided by the command above during rapid
positioning (G00) and the cutting feed positioning (G01).

14-5-9 R-side C-axis specification in NTX(Ⅱ) (One-path lathe)

R-side C-axis is controlled as a C2-axis because the R-side C-axis specification in
NTX(Ⅱ) is one-path lathe, and the C-axis is used in the L- spindle side.
Therefore, the axial name of R-side C-axis will be C2-axis.

(1) Travel command of R-side C-axis (C2-axis)

Command format
Absolute travel command : C2=____
Incremental travel command : H2= ____

The position of C2-axis travel is decided by the command above during rapid po-
sitioning (G00) and the cutting feed positioning (G01).

14-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-6 C-axis (MATA-BEI C-axis) Feed Program

14-6-1 Positioning of C-axis at a rapid traverse (G00)
(1) Command format
G00 C or G00 H ;
As with a linear motion axis like X-axis and Z-axis, the C-axis is positioned at the desig-
nated position with the program indicated above.
Address C is used to designate the position using an absolute value while address H is
used for an incremental value.
14-6-2 Cutting feed of C-axis (G01)
(1) Command format
G98 G01 C F or G98 G01 H F ; < Feed per minute>
G99 G01 C F or G99 G01 H F ; <Feed per revolution>
The C-axis moves to the designated position at the designated feedrate.

14-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-7 Fixed Cycles for Drilling

A fixed drilling cycle defines drilling operation, usually programmed with several
blocks of commands, with a single block of commands along with a G code to
make programming simple.
The following fixed cycles are available:

Table 14-1 Fixed Drilling Cycles

Drilling
G Motion at Retraction
Cycle Drilling Mode Use
Code Hole Bottom Motion
Axis
G80 −− −− −− −− Cancel
Cutting feed * Rapid Drilling
G83 Z-axis Dwell
Peck feed traverse Deep hole drilling
Reversing rotating
Cutting
G84 Z-axis Cutting feed direction of the rotary Tapping
feed
tool
Cutting
G85 Z-axis Cutting feed Dwell Boring
feed
Cutting feed * Rapid Drilling
G87 X-axis Dwell
Peck feed traverse Deep hole drilling
Reversing rotating
Cutting
G88 X-axis Cutting feed direction of the rotary Tapping
feed
tool
Cutting
G89 X-axis Cutting feed Dwell Boring
feed

* In the G83 and G87 mode of operation, axis feed mode whether, cutting feed or
peck feed, is determined depending on whether a Q command is designated or
not.
The drilling cycles are explained below for the G83, G84, and G85 cycles since
the following pairs of G codes call the same cycle pattern with the difference only
in the cycle axis that executes the infeed operation.
G83 and G87, G84 and G88, G85 and G89
In general, a drilling cycle consists of the following six sequences:
• Sequence 1 Positioning of X (Z) and C axes
• Sequence 2 Rapid feed to level R
• Sequence 3 Drilling operation
• Sequence 4 Operation at hole bottom
• Sequence 5 Retract to level R
• Sequence 6 Rapid retraction to initial level

14-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

Fig. A. Drilling Cycle Operation Sequence

The required cycle is designated using the G80 to G89 commands. They are
modal and the G80 command is used to cancel the modal drilling cycle mode.
Designate the data necessary to define a drilling cycle with following the G code
that calls the fixed drilling cycle. The designated data is stored in the NC memory
as the modal data.
Command format:

14-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

Drilling mode G□□: G83 (G87), G84 (G88), G85 (G89)

Hole X/U Designate the hole position in either absolute
position data (Z/W): coordinate values or incremental coordinate
values.
C/H
Z (X): Designate the distance from the point R level to
the hole bottom in an incremental value or an
absolute value.
Drilling data Axis feedrate in sequence 3 is the feedrate
specified with F and that in sequence 5 may be
rapid traverse or F code feedrate depending on
the called drilling cycle pattern.
R: Designate the distance from the initial level to
the point R level in an incremental value. Ax-
is feedrate in sequence 2 is rapid traverse.
Q: For the G83 (G87) mode peck drilling cycle,
designate infeed distance for each peck cycle.
The distance should always be designated in an
incremental value in radius.
P: Designate the dwell period at the hole bottom.
The relationship between the actual dwell peri-
od and the programmed value is the same as in
the G04 mode.
F: Designate the required feedrate.
K: Designate the number of frequencies the called
Number of
drilling cycle should be repeated. If no data is
repetitions
set, it is assumed to be K1.
M86: The M86 command controls the C-axis lock.
At the start of sequence 2, the disk brake is
locked, and at the completion of sequence 5, it
is unlocked.

A drilling cycle mode is modal and remains valid until the called mode is can-
celed or another drilling cycle mode is called.
The drilling cycle mode is canceled by a G80 command or a G code in group 01.
Designation of a K word is necessary only when the called cycle must be repeated.
The value K is not modal.
If the NC is reset while the drilling cycle is executed, the hole position data and
the number of repetitions (K) are cleared while the drilling cycle mode and the
drilling data are retained. Designated feedrate is retained if the drilling cycle is
canceled. A peck stroke (Q) must be designated in each block if necessary. Once
designated, the M86 remains valid until the M86 mode is canceled by the G80
command.
NOTE: If the message “PS0010 Unavailable G code commanded” is displayed
when the fixed cycle for drilling is used on a machine with hob specifi-
cation, change the following NC parameter.
For details, refer to the parameter manual of the NC unit.
- P7731#0 = 0 -> 1 (all paths)

14-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-7-1 Face drilling cycle (G83) and side drilling cycle (G87)
(1) High-speed peck drilling cycle: type A

Fig. 14-1 G83 (G87) Cycle Pattern: Type A

Chip is removed from the drilled area by repeating peck feed along the Z (X)
axis. Since retraction stroke is minimum, highly efficient drilling is carried
out.
(M86) If a C-axis clamp M code (M86) is designated, the C-axis is
locked.
(M87) If a C-axis clamp M code (M86) is designated, the C-axis is
unlocked.

P: Axis feed is suspended for the specified dwell period.

14-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

(2) Peck drilling cycle: type B

Fig. 14-2 G83 (G87) Cycle Pattern: Type B

When NC unit is FS-21iTB, FS-18iTB, FS-16iTB, or FS-0iTC, retraction
stroke “d” is set for NC parameter No. 5114.
For other NC units, retraction stroke “d” is set for NC parameter No. 5115.
Which type of peck drilling cycle is called is optionally selected by the set-
ting for NC parameter No. 5101, bit 2 (PTR).
(3) Normal drilling cycle

Fig. 14-3 G83 (G87) Cycle Pattern: Type C

If a P word is designated, axis feed is suspended at the hole bottom for the
specified dwell period.
For M86, M87, and P, refer to the explanation given in (1) above.

14-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-7-2 Face tapping cycle (G84) and side tapping cycle (G88)

Fig. 14-4 G84 (G88) Cycle Pattern

Rotary tool rotating direction is reversed.
While the tapping cycle is executed, feedrate override setting is ignored and if the
feed hold switch is pressed, axis feed does not stop until the tapping cycle is com-
pleted.
A rotary tool rotating direction is reversed at the bottom of the hole. This “for-
ward to reverse” mode can be changed to “forward → stop → reverse” mode by
changing the setting for NC parameter as shown below.
For NC units other than 30i series: No. 5101#6
For NC units 30i series: No. 5105#3
For M86, M87, and P, refer to the explanation given in (1) in 14-7-1.

14-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-7-3 Face boring cycle (G85) and side boring cycle (G89)

Fig. 14-5 G85 (G89) Cycle Pattern

Differing from the G84 mode, the rotary tool rotating direction is not reversed at
the hole bottom. For the retraction from the hole bottom to the point R level, the
axis is fed at a feedrate 2 times faster the designated feedrate F.
For M86, M87, and P, refer to the explanation given in (1) in 14-7-1.

14-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-7-4 Canceling the drilling cycle (G80)

To cancel the drilling cycle mode, designate the G80 command. At the same
time, point R level and point Z level are canceled.
14-7-5 Repeating the drilling cycle
To repeat the same drilling cycle at positions arranged in the same intervals, des-
ignate the number of repetitions using a K word. The maximum programmable
value of K is 9999. The K word is valid only in the designated block.
• Program example
To repeat the drilling cycle 5 times.
G98 G83 U Z (W) R P K5 F ;
A U word designates the first hole position in an incremental value.
14-7-6 Cautions on programming fixed drilling cycles
(1) In the drilling cycle mode, the designated drilling cycle is executed if X, Z,
and/or C word, or R word is designated. Drilling cycle is not executed in
blocks where none of these words is designated.
In the block, where an X word is designated with the G04 command, this
block does not call a drilling cycle.
• Program example
G00 X ;
G83 X Z R F P ;
; Does not call the drilling cycle.
F ; Does not call the drilling cycle.
An F value is updated.
M ; Does not call the drilling cycle.
Only an M function is executed.
G04 P ; Does not call the drilling cycle.
The P data, designated in the fixed drilling
cycle block, is not changed by this P word.
(2) As explained above, the drilling cycle is canceled by a G code in group 01.
This cancelation occurs at the time the G code in group 01 is read. Therefore,
if such a G code (G##) is designated with a G code (GVV) that calls a fixed
drilling cycle in the same block, the resultant operation varies depending on
which G code is designated first in that block.
G## G□□ X Z R F ;
[The drilling cycle called by the GVV command is executed.]
G□□G## X Z R F ;
[Positioning of the X and Z axes is executed in the G## mode.
The R word is ignored, and the F word is stored as the modal data.]

14-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

(3) If a miscellaneous function (M function), except for M86, is designated in

the same block as the fixed drilling cycle block, the designated M function is
executed when the first positioning is executed. The succeeding drilling
operation is executed after the completion of the M function. When a K
word is designated to repeatedly execute the drilling cycle, the M function is
executed only for the first positioning operation and not executed in the fol-
lowing drilling cycles.
(4) If a tool offset command (T command) is designated in the drilling cycle
mode, both X and Z axes are offset in the first positioning operation.
(5) Cautions for machine operators
(a) After reset or emergency stop
If the NC is reset or its operation is stopped by pressing the emergency
stop button while a drilling cycle is executed, the drilling cycle mode
and the drilling data are retained in the NC memory. Therefore, pay suf-
ficient care to restart the operation.
(b) Single block
If a drilling cycle is executed while the NC is in the single block mode,
the cycle stops at the completion of sequence 1, sequence 2, and se-
quence 6. Therefore, cycle start switch must be pressed 3 times to carry
out a single drilling cycle.
At the completion of sequence 1 and sequence 2, the feed hold indicator
lights.
At the completion of sequence 6, the operation stops in the feed hold
mode if the same cycle is to be repeated. In other cases, the operation
stops in the cycle stop state.
(c) Feed hold
In the G84 mode operation, if the feed hold switch is pressed while the
cycle is in sequence 3 to 5, the cycle continues to sequence 6 although
the feed hold indicator lights immediately.
(d) Override
In the G84 mode operation, feedrate override is fixed at 100%.
NOTE: G83/G84 cannot be used in the spindle mode.
If these are used, the cycle stops at the bottom of the hole.

14-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-8 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)

The function in which contour control is done in converting the command pro-
grammed in a cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis
(movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotary tool (C-axis) is the polar co-
ordinate interpolation.
14-8-1 Command format

Polar coordinate interpolation mode G12.1 (G112)

Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode G13.1 (G113)

14-8-2 Polar coordinate interpolation plane

In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the zero point of work coordinate sys-
tem is set to the zero point of the coordinate system, and a plane is selected in
which the linear axis is made to X-axis, and virtual axis is made to C-axis of the
plane. Polar coordinate interpolation is carried out on this plane.
In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the program command for the X-axis
is made by a diameter programming and for the C-axis, the program command is
not an angle command (unit: deg) but a radius programming (unit: mm or inch).
NOTE: G12.1 and G13.1 shall be commanded in the single block.
NOTE: The G-codes, which are possible to command in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode, are limited as shown below;
G01, G02, G03, G04, G40, G41, G42, G98, G99, G65, G66, G67
NOTE: The Z-axis, which is not related to the polar coordinate interpolation
plane, can be moved independently.
NOTE: It is not possible to switch over to the polar coordinate interpolation
mode (G12.1, G13.1) in the tool nose radius compensation mode
(G41,G42). When the tool nose radius compensation is commanded, the
program is as followed;

G12.1
G41 (G42) X_____
•
•
•
G40 X_____ (C_____)
G13.1_____

NOTE: When the circular interpolation (G02, G03) is made in the polar coor-
dinate interpolation plane, the center point of the circle is commanded
with “I” for X-axis and “J” for C-axis.

14-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-8-3 Program examples

(1) Hexagon (H30) program (2) Two-face cutting program
N1 M91 (O.D. ϕ35, 2 Width 25mm)
G00 G97 T1010 M88 S398 N1 M91
G40 X54. Z2. M8 G00 G97 G40 T1010 M3 S796
G28 H0. X61. Z2. M8
G50 C0. G28 H0.
G112 G50 C0.
G98 G42 G01 X54. C−12. F4000 G112
Z−10. G98 G01 G42 X61. C−12. F4000
1 G02 X30. C0. R12. F48 Z−10.
2 G1 C8.66 ① G02 X37. C0. R12.
3 X0. C17.32 ② G03 X27.276 C12.5 R18.5
4 X−30. C8.66 ③ G01 X−27.276 F96
5 C−8.66 ④ G03 X−27.276 C−12.5 R18.5 F4000
6 X0. C−17.32 ⑤ G01 X27.276 F96
7 X30. C−8.66 ⑥ G03 X37. C0. R18.5 F4000
8 C0. ⑦ G02 X61. C12.5 R12.
9 G02 X54. C12. R12. ⑧ G1 G40 X65.
10 G01 G40 X64. C12. F4000 G113
G113 G00 Z2.
G00 Z2. X200. Z100.
X200. Z100. M01
M01

③ ③ ⑦ ⑧
④ ⑨ ⑩
②
②
⑥ ①
⑧ ①
④
⑤ ⑤
⑦
⑥

14-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

(3) Hexagon + Corner + Radius + Chamfering

N1 M91 (25-mm square shape with C4 and R4)
G00 G97 G40 T1010 M88 S796
X59. Z2. M8
G28 H0.
G50 C0.
G112
G98 G42 G01 X49. C−12. F4000
Z−10.
1 G02 X25. C0. R12. F96
2 G01 C8.5
3 G03 X17. C12.5 R4.
4 G01 X−17.
5 X−25. C8.5
6 C−8.5
7 G03 X−17. C−12.5 R4.
8 G01 X17.
9 X25. C−8.5
10 C0.
11 G02 X49. C12. R12.
G01 G40 X59. C12. F4000
G113
G00 Z2.
X200. Z100.
M01

④ ③
⑪
⑤
②

①
⑩
⑥
⑨
⑦ ⑧

14-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-8-4 Polar coordinate interpolation of MATA-BEI C-axis (A-axis) in SC series (One-path

machine) (18i-TB)
A polar coordinate interpolation sets up the rotating axis that performs the polar
coordinate interpolation to NC parameters NO.5461. It is necessary to choose one
rotating axis (C-axis in the machine side, or MATA-BEI C-axis (A-axis) used in
case the machining of the polar coordinate interpolation is performed.), because
this parameter setting is only one axis setting.
(The standard setting of NC parameter No.5461 is “3” (C-axis in the machine
side). To use the C-axis (A-axis) in the MATA-BEI side, the setting should be “6”.
When performing the polar coordinate interpolation in both C-axes (in the ma-
chine side and the MATA-BEI side), follow the examples below.

• Example of the program (When setting the rotating axis to “A-axis”)

G10 L50 Parameter input mode ON
N5461 R4 Parameter input
N_ : Parameter No.
R_ : Parameter setting value
G11 Parameter input mode Cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode ON
- (The polar coordinate interpolation program when the rotating axis is
A-axis)
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode Can-
cel

• Example of the program (When setting the rotating axis to “C-axis”)

G10 L50 Parameter input mode ON
N5461 R3 Parameter input
N_ : Parameter No.
R_ : Parameter setting value
G11 Parameter input mode Cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode ON
- (The polar coordinate interpolation program when the rotating axis is
C-axis)
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode Can-
cel

NOTE: For the polar coordinate interpolation in SC series (Two-path machine)

(0i-TD/Nakamura-Tome FANUC), it is not necessary to program G10
and G11 which set the NC parameter No.5461.

14-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-9 C-axis Command by Mixture Control (WTW, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series)
This function can command the C-axis feed from the program of the lower turret.
For the WTW, the C-axis feed command of the L-unit from the program of the
L-lower turret or the C-axis feed command of the R-unit from the program of the
R-lower turret is valid. For the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, the C-axis feed com-
mand of the L-unit or the C-axis feed command of the R-unit from the program of
the L-lower turret.
14-9-1 Miscellaneous functions
The M functions that are used to carry out the mixture control of the C-axis com-
mand are shown below:

M Code WTW WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series

C-axis command mix on
M432 −−
(L-unit)
C-axis command mix off
M433 −−
(L-unit)
C-axis command mix on
M442 C-axis command mix on
(R-unit)
C-axis command mix off
M443 C-axis command mix off
(R-unit)

(1) Command the M codes either on the program of the upper turret or on the
program of the lower turret.
(2) The C-axis feed command on the program of the upper turret is disabled
during the mixture control (M432 or M442).
(3) Once the M432 (or M442) command is executed, the mixture command is
kept until one of the following conditions is met.
(a) The M433 (or M443) is commanded.
For the WTW series, the M443 is commanded on the program of the
unit which commands the M442.
(b) NC alarms are generated from a unit in the mixture control.
(c) The operation mode is changed to the manual mode.
(d) For the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, the C-axis mixture control (M442)
of the R-unit is commanded while the C-axis mixture control (M432) of
the L-unit is commanded. And the C-axis mixture control (M432) of the
L-unit is commanded while the C-axis mixture control (M442) of the
R-unit is commanded.

14-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 14 C-AXIS CONTROL

14-9-2 Program examples

WTW

WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series (Part 1) WTW (Part 2)

14-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPIN-

DLES
To hold a workpiece by the 1st and 2nd spindles, it is necessary to synchronize the
spindle speeds. For an irregularly shaped workpiece, the spindle phases must also
be synchronized.
Definition of 1st and 2nd spindles:
On SC(other than SC-100X2)/WT series and NTJ machines, 1st and 2nd spindles
indicate the spindle and the MATA-BEI spindle. On TW/WY/ NTY3 series and
WTW, WTS, NTM3, STW, STS, NTX(W), NTX(S), NTXL, NTRX-300,
NTRX-300L, NTX(II), NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, JX-250,
SC-100X2 machines, they indicate the L-unit spindle and the R-unit spindle.
15-1 M Codes
No. M Code Function
(1) M96 Spindle speed synchronization command
(2) M97 Spindle synchronization mode cancellation
(3) M92 Spindle phase synchronization command
(4) M93 Spindle synchronization position set

(1) M96
Used to specify the spindle speed synchronization mode. In this mode, both
the 1st and 2nd spindles rotate in synchronization when a spindle rotation
command is executed for the 1st spindle.
The phase for synchronization varies each time. This command is usually
used for supporting a round bar on both sides.
The spindle speed synchronization mode remains valid until the M97 com-
mand is executed.
(2) M97
Used to cancel the spindle synchronization mode.
With SC series (other than SC-100X2) if the spindle synchronization mode is
canceled while the spindle is rotating, the 1st spindle keeps rotating while the
2nd spindle stops rotating.
With TW/WT/WY/NTY3 series, WTS, STW, STS, NTX(W), NTX(S),
NTXL, NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, NTX(II), NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5,
MX-100, NTJ, NTM3, NTJ-100, JX-250, SC-100X2, this command resets
spindle synchronization to the same status as that before the command.
(3) M92
Used to specify the spindle phase synchronization mode. The phases for
synchronization are set by parameters or M93.
The phase for synchronization remains the same at all times. This command
is usually used for supporting a hexagonal bar on both sides.
Refer to: Section 15-4 “Setting of Spindle Phase Synchronous
Postion”
(4) M93
This command is used for setting the spindle phases synchronous position.
Refer to Section 15-4 for details.
NOTE: These M commands should be issued from the R-unit with the TW series,
but they can be issued from either unit on
TW/WT/WY/WTS/STW/STS/NTX(W)/NTX(S)/NTXL/NTJX/
NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTM3/NTY3 series/JX-250.
(M96, M97, M92).

15-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-2 Precautions when Executing Spindle Synchronization Control

(1) If the specified spindle speed is significantly changed while in the synchro-
nization control mode, the actual spindle speed does not change as quickly as
in a normal operation mode because of the extra accel/decel time.
(2) Synchronization mode control operations
• Reset Synchronized state spindle stop
• M01 Synchronized state spindle stop
• M30 Synchronized state spindle stop
• M05 Synchronized state spindle stop
• Emergency stop Not in the synchronized state
The spindles will stop in the asynchronized state if the emergency
stop button is pressed while the spindles are rotating in the syn-
chronized control mode. This will cause the workpiece to come off
the spindles.
(3) Spindle synchronization operation is possible in the spindle speed range up
to 80% of the maximum speed. If a spindle speed faster than 80% of the
maximum speed is specified for synchronized operation, spindle speed will
be locked at 80% of the maximum speed.
(4) The following operations are not possible in the synchronization control
mode:
• Spindle orientation
• C-axis selection
• Rigid tapping
• Polygon machining
(5) Spindle jogging is not allowed in the spindle synchronization mode.

15-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3 Programming
15-3-1 SC Series with MATA-BEI

15-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3-2 TW Series

15-4
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3-3 WTW-150 series

15-6
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-7
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-8
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3-4 WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series

15-10
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-11
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-12
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3-5 STW-40, NTX(W), NTXL, JX-250

15-14
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-15
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-16
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3-6 NTX(Ⅱ), NTRX-300, NTRX-300L with R-spindle specification

15-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-3-7 Remarks on synchronous program

• If the synchronization command is given while the first spindle is being accel-
erated or decelerated, it takes a long time to complete synchronization. There-
fore, this command should be given while the first spindle is rotating at a con-
stant speed or being stopped.
• Programs used for the WT/WY series and NTJ/NTJ-100/
NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100 are the same as those used with the SC
series. The command can be given from the upper or lower turret. As in the TW
series, programming can be performed in different systems (for controlling the
L- and R-units).
• As for the SC series, refer to the instruction manual of MATA-BEI for each
model.
• Pay special attention to where the M92 command (phase synchronization) is
inserted.
M96 M3 S___
↓ ↓
M3 S___ or M96
↓ ↓
M92 M92
A value following S___ could be zero. However, insert the M92 command in
program in a place where the motor is energized in the synchronization mode.
• Following alarms may occur at this time.
A9.3 Synchronization chuck interlock alarm
(a) When the M92 command is executed while both 1st spindle chuck and
2nd-spindle chuck are closed.
This alarm can be reset by the RESET button.
• The Z-axis (TW series with MATA-BEI, SC-100X2) or B-axis (SC(other than
SC-100X2)/WT series and NTJ with MATA-BEI, WY/NTY3 series, NTM3,
WTW, WTS, NTJ-100) on the R-unit does not move at a cutting feed until
commanded phase synchronization is completed. Moreover, the chuck cannot
be closed either at this time.
Movement at a rapid traverse rate or chuck open motion can be performed at
this time.
With the TW series, M72 can be used for checking the completion of phase
synchronization.
For 2nd spindle approach, Be sure to specify cutting feed command after the
block of rapid feed command.
In synchronization control, the cutting feed is enabled even while the syn-
chronization is not completed, however 2nd spindle chuck operations are
disabled unless the synchronization is completed.

15-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-4 Setting of Spindle Phase Synchronous Position

This section describes the setting of the spindle phase synchronous position which
is required for the spindle phase synchronization on the M92 command.
The spindle phase synchronization command is used when the phase adjustment
of the two spindle is required for transferring workpieces such as the following
types from 1st spindle to 2nd spindle. (For the C-axis specification, without the
phase synchronization function, the two spindle phase can be adjusted by posi-
tioning the C-axis when transferring. Generally, the phase synchronization com-
mand is used to shorten the time for the machine without the C-axis or when the
required phase precision is not high.)
• When phase adjustment is required for machining on 1st spindle and 2nd spin-
dle:

• When phase adjustment is required for: transferring a workpiece from 1st spin-
dle to 2nd spindle :)

The setting of the spindle phase synchronous position has two types depending on
the machine types. Therefore, take a step according to the machine specification.
(1) When M93 is available, refer to section “15-4-1”.
M93 is available when all of the followinfg conditions are met. If the condi-
tions are not met, take step (3).
[Conditions]
• The NT NURSE version is V4.24 or higher.
• The ladder diagram version is the corresponded version or higher.
When M93 is commanded, A600 alarm is not generated.)
(2) When Fanuc spindle motor is used and M93 is not available, refer to section
“15-4-2”.
Even if the above conditions are not met or M93 is not available, the phase
synchronous position can be set by measuring and setting the NC parameter
P4034 value (the shift amount for the rotation control of spindle phase syn-
chronous position)
NOTE: Once the phase synchronous position is set, the setting is not cleared
even if the power is turned off.
NOTE: For machines with multi-path NC system such as the TW/WT series and
NTJ, command the related M codes (M92, M93, M96, M97, etc) to the
synchronization for the 2nd spindle in the following turret base selec-
tion.

15-20
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

TW series, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, JX-250

R unit selection
(3-path)
WT/WY series, STS, NTJ, NTJ-100, NTJX,
NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, JX-250 Lower unit selection
(2-path), SC-100X2
WTW L-upper unit selection
SC series (other than SC-100X2), NTX(II),
(No turret base selection)
NTRX-300, NTRX-300L

NOTE: M93 command should be commanded independently.

15-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-4-1 When M93 is available

Never touch any spindle even while it seems stopped if both spindles
are synchronously controlled, and it is dangerous because the motor
is excited. (The spindles can be touched only when the spindle nor-
mal and reverse rotation lamps are off.)
NOTE: For machines with multi-path NC system, command the related M codes
(M92, M93, M96, M97, etc) to the synchronization for the 2nd spindle
in the following turret base selection.
SC series (other than SC-100X2),
(No turret base selection)
NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, NTX(II)
TW series, WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series,
R unit selection
JX-250 (3-path)
WT/WY series, STS, NTJ, NTJ-100, NTJX,
NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, JX-250 Lower unit selection
(2-path), SC-100X2
WTW L-upper unit selection

When M93 is commanded, a value in NC parameter P4034 (shift amount in the

spindle phase synchronous positioning rotate control )of the above turret base
(2nd spindle) is written automatically according to the spindle phase state and the
setting of the phase synchronous positioning is executed.
[Procedure]
(1) Disconnect the C-axis on both the 1st and 2nd spindles at this time (only for
the C-axis specification and stop the L- and R-spindles.
(2) Rotate the spindle at the spindle speed 200rpm or higher for over 5 minutes
in the spindle synchronization.
(If this operation is not executed, A599 alarm is generated when M93 is
commanded.)
Proceed the following steps.
(a) Make a command for ’M96’ through manual data input for the 2nd
spindle.
(b) Make a command for ’M3 S200’ through manual data input for the 1st
pindle.
The both spindles rotate in the synchronous mode.
(c) Confirm that the spindles rotate for over 5 minutes.
(d) Make a command for ’M93’ through manual data input.
(e) Make a command for ’M97’ through manual data input for the 2nd
spindle.
(f) Make a command for ’M5’ through manual data input for the 1st spin-
dle.
(g) Press the reset button for the all turret selection.
(3) Set a workpiece in the 1st spindle chuck and select ’open’ for the 2nd spindle
chuck.

15-22
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

(4) Check fully whether the 1st and 2nd spindle are excited or not, and touching
the spindle is safe or not. Then, adjust the phase between the workpiece and
the 2nd spindle chuck by rotating the spindle manually, advance the 2nd
spindle slide, close the 2nd spindle chuck on the actual chucking position,
and chuck the workpiece on the both sides as shown following.
(5) Make a command for ’M93’ through manual data input for the 2nd spindle.

The setting of the phase synchronous position (a value in P4034) is renewed.

For WTW(and NC unit is FS-18i), refer to NOTE3.
(6) Open the R-chuck and return the 2nd spindle slide to the zero position.
(7) Command the phase synchronous positioning actually and check whether the
setting is correct.
Proceed the following steps.
(a) Select ’open’ for the 2nd spindle.
(b) Make a command for ’M96’ through manual data input for the 2nd
spindle.
(c) Make a command for ’M3 S0’ through manual data input for the 1st
spindle.
Both spindles are excited in the synchronous mode.
(d) Make a command for ’M92’ through manual data input for the 2nd
spindle.
The phase adjustment is executed. In this state, check that the phase
of the spindles are at the correct position by closing the chuck.
(e) Select ’open’ for the 2nd spindle chuck and return the 2nd spindle slide
to the zero position.
(f) Make a command for ’M97’ through manual data input for the 2nd
spindle.
(g) Make a command for ’M5’ through manual data input for the 1st
spindle.
(h) Press the reset button for the all turret selection.
(8) The setting is completed. If the phase synchronous positioning is not correct,
repeat the above steps from the beginning.
NOTE: Whether M93 is available or not, refer to section 15-4 (2).
If an alarm is generated when M93 is commanded and the alarm is not
cleared even copying with the alarm messages, set the phase synchro-
nous position according to the procedures in section 14-4-3 because the
edition of the software is not still corresponded and therefore M93 is not
available.
NOTE: When the setting of the phase synchronous position is not correct even
proceeding steps, confirm the following NC parameter is set correctly. If
the setting is not correct, execute again after setting the NC parameter
correctly.
(1) Whether NC parameter P4034 (S1) for 1st spindle(R-spindle for WTW)
is set to ’0’.
If the setting is other than ’0’, input ’0’.

15-23
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

(2) Whether NC parameter P7231 is set to the following (all turret base);
P7231: Increase tendency of the spindle encoder value (diagnosis num-
ber: 445) during the spindle rotate synchronously.
0: Both spindles have a different tendency
(when one is increase, the other is decrease)
1: Both spindles have a same tendency
(both of them are increase, or decrease)
(3) Whether NC parameter P3117#1 is set to 1.
If the setting is ’0’, input to 1. (Display the spindle position data func-
tion on the diagnosis screen)
NOTE: Only for WTW(and the NC unit is FS-18i), set the spindle synchronous
mode when M93 is commanded. Command M93 after the spindle syn-
chronous mode is set, and release the spindle synchronous mode.
(Only for WTW, if M93 is commanded without the spindle mode, A600
alarm is generated.)
(a) Make a command for ’M96’ through manual data input for the
R-spindle. (command on L-lower unit)
(b) Make a command for ’M3 S0’ through manual data input for the
L-spindle. (command on L-upper unit)
Both spindles are excited in the synchronous mode.
(c) Make a command for ’M93’ through manual data input for the
R-spindle. (command on L-upper unit)
(d) Make a command for ’M97’ through manual data input for the
R-spindle. (command on L-lower unit)
(e) Make a command for ’M5’ through manual data input for the L-spindle.
(command on L-upper unit)
(f) Press the reset button for the all turret selection.

15-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-4-2 When M93 is not available

Never touch any spindle even while it seems stopped if both spindles
are synchronously controlled, and it is dangerous because the motor
is excited. (The spindles can be touched only when the spindle
normal and reverse rotation lamps are off.)
(1) Set a workpiece in the 1st spindle chuck. Then return the 2nd spindle to zero
position with 2nd spindle chuck opened.
(2) Make a command for ’M96’ through manual data input for the 2nd spindle.
(3) Make a command for ’M3 S0’ through manual data input for the 1st spindle.
Both spindles are excited in the synchronous mode.
(4) Make a command for ’M92’ through manual data input for the 2nd spindle.
The phase adjustment is executed.
(5) Make a command for M97 through manual data input on the 2nd spindle.
Synchronization control is reset. Make a command for M05 on the 1st spin-
dle.
(6) When the spindle lock function is provided, turn it on for both spindles.
(7) Open the door and use a felt pen to make a mark on both spindles.
The marked positions indicate the current phase synchronization positions.
Therefore, mark on both the chuck and the spindle nose as shown below.

(8) Advance the slide on the 2nd spindle side in the negative Z or B direction.
(9) Turn off the 2nd spindle lock function (only when it is provided) and manu-
ally turn the 2nd spindle for angle adjustment.
(10) Advance the slide on the 2nd spindle side further to the workpiece chucking
position.
(11) Close the 2nd spindle chuck.

(12) Use a felt pen to make a mark on the 2nd spindle.

Check that the 1st spindle is not dislocated from the mark at this moment.

(13) Open the 2nd spindle chuck and return the Z-axis or B-axis to the zero point.
Then reset the 1st spindle lock function. (only when it is provided)

15-25
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

(14) Obtain the angle from the two marks made in the steps 7) and 12) on the 2nd
spindle chuck.

(15) Obtain a value from the following calculation which is based on the above
angle and set it to NC parameter No. 4034 on the 2nd spindle.
Refer to the following ’NOTE’.
No.4034=Shift angle×4096
360˚
Set a plus value for the M03 command and minus value for the M04 com-
mand.
(16) Repeat the above steps from the beginning and check that the correct setting
is made.
NOTE: When the setting of the phase synchronous position is not correct even
proceeding steps, confirm the following settings are set correctly. If the
settings are not correct, execute again after setting correctly.
Whether NC parameter P4034 (S1) for 1st spindle is set to ’0’.
If the setting is other than ’0’, input ’0’.
(17) Whether a value set in step (15) reflects the phase synchronous position.
(whether the phase synchronous position changes according with the setting.)
If the phase synchronous position is not reflected, the value set in step (15) is
incorrect. Set the value again referring to the following descriptions.
SC series (18i-TB) P4034 (S2 or S3)
SC series (other than SC-100X2)
P4034 (S1)
(0i-TD/Nakamura-Tome FANUC)
NTRX-300, NTRX-300L P4034 on L-spindle (S1)
NTX(II) P4034 (S3)
TW, WTS, STW series and NTM3,
P4034 on R unit (S1)
NTY3 series, JX-250 (3-path)
WT, WY, STS series, NTJ, NTJ-100,
P4034 on lower unit (S1)
JX-250 (2-path), SC-100X2
WTW series P4034 on L-lower unit (S1)

15-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-5 Spindle Synchronization Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G496/G497)

This is a cycle G-code function to turn ON or OFF the spindle synchronization
mode for the machines with L-side and R-side spindles. Use this function to per-
form the turning machining with workpieces on both spindles.
15-5-1 Operating condition
This function is available only when all the conditions below are saisfied. If not,
skip this chapter.
• Machine has both L-side and R-side spindles.
• Version of NT NURSE is V9.01 or higher.
• Ladder program corresponds to this function.
• Machine model with multi-path NC unit except TW/WTW series, or NTX(II),
NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, AS-200L.
NOTE: If this function is used without satisfying conditions above, any of the
following alarms will be issued.
• Alarm 003: Too Many Digits
• Alarm 310: File Not Found
• Alarm A637: G-code Error, Check Program

15-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-5-2 Program command

• G496: Spindle synchronization mode ON
• G497: Spindle synchronization mode OFF
NOTE: Be sure to command “G497” to cancel this mode after commanding
“G496.” If the RESET button is pressed without G497 command, the
warning W353 will be issued.

• Details for G496

• Miminum command: G496
• Detailed command: G496 [J__. M__. S__. D__.];
C__. : C0. (When omitted) Spindle synchronization
(C1. C-axis synchronization)

J__. : (Usually omitted)

Acceleration setting in spindle synchronization
Available commanding range:
J1. (priority on accuracy) to J10. (priority on speed)
When omitted: J5.
If the synchronization error is large, make the value J smaller.

M__. : M code comand for synchronization (possible to omit)

S__. : S code comand for synchronization (possible to omit)

D__. : M92 command (Phase synchronization)* is

D0. (When omitted) : not executed.
D1. : executed.
* Needed from NT NURSE version 10.34 or higher.

15-28
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

NOTE: The command G496 carries out the following operations.

• L/R spindles: C-axis mode OFF
↓
• L/R spindles: Synchronization mode ON (M96 command)
↓
• Execution of M/S codes (Only when M/S code is commanded.)

NOTE: G497 only cancels the spindle synchronization mode. Spindles don’t
stop with this command.
NOTE: The command of value J is valid only when the following PMC param-
eters are set.
D4434 Value of P4032 when J1. (priority on accuracy) is set.
(2 byte) (Acceleration in spindle synchronization)
D4436 Value of P4032 when J10. (priority on speed) is set.
(2 byte) (Acceleration in spindle synchronization)

NOTE: If the large synchronization error affects the machining accuracy, lower
the spindle speed during the spindle synchronization or make the value
J smaller.
(The machining accuracy depends on conditions of chuck, workpiece,
jaw, clamping condition, and spindle speed.)
NOTE: D1. command (M92: phase synchronization control) is available for NT
NURSE version 10.34 or higher. Specify this command together with the
spindle rotation command.
E.g.) G496 M3 S200 D1.

Program example

O1234 (SP SYNCHRO) ;

：
：
N10 M41 (SYNCHRO) ;
G28 U0 W0 V0 ;
G00 G40 G97 G99 T0101 ;
：
G496 M3 S200 ;
：
(Turning machining with workpieces on both spindles (L/R))
：
G497 ;
M1

15-29
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-6 C-axis Synchronization Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G496 C1./G497)

This is a cycle G-code function to turn ON or OFF the C-axis synchronization
mode for the machines with C-axis on L-side and R-side spindles. Use this func-
tion to perform the C-axis machining with workpieces on both spindles.
15-6-1 Operating condition
This function is available only when all the following conditions are satisfied. If
not, skip this chapter.
• L/R spindles have C-axis units.
• Parameter setting corresponds to this function.
• Ladder program corresponds to this function.
• Version of NT NURSE corresponds to this function. (V9.01 or higher)
<Machine models with NT NURSE V9.01 or higher>
NTJ, NTJ-100, WT-150, WT-100, WT-150II/250II, WY-100/250/250L, NTJX,
NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, NTX(II), AS-200L,
NTX(S), NTY3, NTY3-100/150/250, JX-250, SC-100X2
• The version of NC system corresponds to this function. (As follows)
• 31iA – G101/G111/G131 : 36.0 or higher
• 31iA – G103/G113/G133 : 19.0 or higher
• 31iA – G104/G114/G134 : 1.0 or higher
• 31iB – G401/G411/G421/G431 : 1.0 or higher
• 32iB – G503/G523 : 1.0 or higher
• 0iTD – D6F1 : 20.0 or higher
• 0iTF – D6G1 : 1.0 or higher
• 0iTF Plus – D6G3 : 1.0 or higher
• FS-16iTB – B1HA : 06 or higher and
αi spindle software – 9D50 : 07 or higher
• FS-18iTB – BEHA : 06 or higher and
αi spindle software - 9D50 : 07 or higher
NOTE: If this function is used without satisfying conditions above, any of the fol-
lowing alarms will be issued.
• Alarm 003: Too Many Digits
• Alarm 310: File Not Found
• Alarm A221: M code Not Completed
(M1014/M1015/M1016/M1017/M91/M491)
• Alarm A637: G-code Error, Check Program
NOTE: To use this function with 16/18iTB NC unit, it is necessary to change the fol-
lowing parameters which are related to C-axis in advance.
(P1420: Rapid feedrate, P1620: Constant for rapid feed)
Moreover, be careful that the synchronization cannot be performed correctly
unless the parameter setting values are the same on all turrets.
• P1420 (C-axis) = 108000
Change to the same value for all turrets)
• P1620 (C-axis) = Maximum value in all the turrets
(Change to the same value for all turrets)
(For example)
In case of upper turret: 220
Lower turret: 250
Set to “P1620 = 250” to both upper and lower turrets.

15-30
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

15-6-2 Program command

• “G496 C1.” : C-axis synchronization mode ON
• “G497” : C-axis synchronization mode OFF

NOTE: Be sure to command the argument “C1.” for G496.

Without this argument, the machine becomes the spindle synchroniza-
tion mode.
NOTE: Be sure to cancel the mode with “G497” command after commanding
“G496 C1.”
If the RESET button is pressed without cancelling this mode, the warn-
ing W354 will be issued.

• Details for G496

• Minimum command: G496 C1. ;
• Detailed command: G496 C1. [K__. M__. S__.] ;

C__. : (C0. (When omitted) Spindle synchronization

C1. C-axis synchronization

K__. : (Usually omitted) Rapid feedrate in C-axis synchronization

Available commanding range:
K1. (priority on accuracy) to K10. (priority on speed)
When omitted: K5.
If the synchronization error is large, make the value K smaller.

NOTE: For 16/18iTB NC unit, the command of value K is invalid. Use this
function after changing the NC parameters related to C-axis rapid
feedrate to the value shown below on all turrets in advance. Moreover,
if the synchronization error is large, make the setting value smaller.
• P1420 (C-axis) = 108000 (All turrets)

M__. : M code for synchronization command (possible to omit)

S__. : S code for synchronization command (possible to omit)

15-31
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

NOTE: If the C-axis zero point (L/R) has not established once after power ON, an alarm “A499:
Connect C-axis (L/R)” occurs when “G496 C1.” is commanded.
After the power ON, execute any of the followings (only once) and command “G496 C1.”
• Turn the C-axis mode OFF ⇒ ON in the manual mode. (both L/R)
• Command “M91; G28 H0;” and “M491; G28 H0;”.

NOTE: The command G496 carries out the following operations.

L/R spindles: C-axis mode ON
↓
L/R spindles: C-axis synchronization mode ON
↓
Execution of M/S code (Only when M/S code is commanded)
↓
C-axis zero return
(For 16/18iTB NC unit, zero point should be established again.)

NOTE: G497 command only cancels the C-axis synchronization mode. C-axis mode is not can-
celled.

NOTE: Only the C-axis rapid feed command is available under the C-axis synchronization mode.
Do not command the C-axis cutting feed during the C-axis synchronization mode. (Warn-
ing “W339: C-axis synchronization error” occurs.)
In addition, do not command the following M codes during the C-axis synchronization
mode.
M41/M441/M91/M491

NOTE: Command the C-axis rapid feed to the turret that performs “G496 C1.” command. If the
rapid feed is commanded to other turrets, the warning “W414: C-axis interlock” occurs.

NOTE: C-axis zero point during the C-axis synchronization mode differs depending on the turret
that performs “G496 C1.” command (as shown below). (1st path: L-side C-axis, 2nd path:
R-side C-axis, 3rd path: L-side C-axis)
Therefore, perform the C-axis synchronization mode ON/OFF or C-axis cutting feed
command only to either of the turrets.

[Example for WT/WTW series]

• Command “G496 C1.” from upper side:
Based on the L-side C-axis zero point
• Command “G496 C1.” from lower side:
Based on the R-side C-axis zero point

NOTE: If the large synchronization error affects the machining accuracy, make the value K or
P1420 (C-axis rapid feedrate) smaller or take any possible measures.
(The machining accuracy depends on conditions of chuck, workpiece, jaw, clamping con-
dition, and spindle speed.)

15-32
C-NA104204-A2205
15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

Program example

O1234 (C-AXIS SYNCHRO) ;

:
:
N10 M91 (C-DRILL) ;
G28 U0 W0 V0 ;
G00 G40 G97 G99 T0101 ;
:
G496 C1. ;
:
(C-axis turning machining with workpieces on both spindles (L/R))
:
G497 ;
M1 ;

15-33
C-NA104204-A2205
 15 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF FIRST AND SECOND SPINDLES

MEMO

15-34
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING
A single-spindle & twin-turret turning centers, such as WT/WY series, NTJ, and
NTJ-100, or twin-spindle & multi-turret turning centers, such as WTW, WTS,
NTM3, NTY3 series, are the machines for simultaneous turning with combining
the upper and the lower turrets.
The operation of each unit can be programmed independently. The two units wait
for each other during one process.
The programs are separately stored in each program memory.

16-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

16-1 Balanced Cutting

For machining slender workpieces, simultaneous turning from both sides of the
workpieces permits highly precise processing, preventing a bend caused by nor-
mal one-sided turning.

16-1-1 Command format

G68 Balanced cutting mode
G69 Balanced cutting mode cancel
When G68 is commanded in both programs of the upper and the lower unit, bal-
anced cutting is possible, moving both the turrets simultaneously.
16-1-2 Sample program
Program for the upper turret Program for the lower turret
: :
: :
X33.; X30.;
G68; G68;
G01Z−100.0; G01Z−100.0;
U2.0; U2.0;
G69; G69;
G0Z2.0; G0Z5.0;
: :
: :

16-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

16-1-3 Precautions
1 Balance cutting is not performed in dry run or machine lock state.
2 When rapid traverse operation is specified, balance cut pro-
cessing is not performed.
3 A workpiece for which thread cutting has been performed in the
balance cut mode cannot be subjected to thread cutting in the
cancel mode. Thread cutting starts at a different position.
NOTE: Time delay before the pulse distribution of both tool posts is started is 2 msec or shorter.
NOTE: In the balance cut mode, synchronization is established at the start of a move block, so movement can
momentarily stop.
NOTE: If feed hold operation is performed during balance cutting using both tool posts, balance cut pro-
cessing is not performed at restart time, it is performed when the next move command is specified for
both tool posts.
NOTE: The cancel mode (G69) is set by a reset.
NOTE: For a machine composed of three units as the WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series, input P5 or 6 after the G code.
• Command format
G_____P_____
G:G68 or G69
P:Unit combination for balance cutting

P value WTS, NTM3, NTY3 series

P5 Balance cutting between L unit and lower unit
P6 Balance cutting between R unit and lower unit

16-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

16-2 Machining Examples (WT series, WY series, Super NTJ, and NTJ-100)
16-2-1 Reducing the time for indexing
(1) Positioning and face rough cutting
Upper turret side

M198
N1G28UOM71(BAR−STOPPER)
G99G40G0T0101M5
Z5.
X0
Z1.5
M10
M11
G4U0.8
G0W10.
X150.

X220.Z80.
M101
M1

Lower turret side

M198
N101G28UOM71(O.D.ROUGH)
G28B0
G28W0
M69
G40G0T0101
Z0.2

M101
X52.
M414*
G99G1X−1.6F0.3M8
W2.
G0X45.2

Starting face-cutting with the lower turret, immediately after positioning the
material with the upper turret.
Unlike a single-turret turning center, it is unnecessary to retract a tool for in-
dexing and re-approaching before starting machining, thus the cycle time can
be reduced.
*Required to specify when machine is equipped with MATA-BEI (sub spin-
dle).

16-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

(2) O.D. threading and thread-burr removing

Upper turret side

N5G40G0T0909(O.D.THREAD)
X60.Z0
M140
G97S2000M3
X50.Z0
G76P010060Q200R0.05M8
G76X43.Z−34.5Q400P1000F1.5
M141
G0X180.Z60.M9
M142
M1

Lower turret side

M140
M141
Z−21.8
X48.M9
M414*
G41G1X46.F0.3
X42.Z−19.8F0.15
G40G0X48.
Z−30.
G42G1X46.F0.3
X42.Z−32.F0.15
G40G0X55.K−1.
X160.Z20.M9
M142

Thread cutting with the upper turret, promptly followed by thread-burr re-
moving with the lower turret.
Unlike a single-turret turning center, it is unnecessary to retract a tool for in-
dexing and re-approaching before starting machining, thus the cycle time can
be reduced.
*Required to specify when machine is equipped with MATA-BEI (sub spin-
dle).

16-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

16-2-2 Combined turning with the upper and lower turrets

(1) O.D. rough cutting and drilling
Upper turret

N2G40G0T0303(FIX DRILL 30MM)

G97S2500M3
Z3.
M110
X0G97S3000M3
G99G1Z1.5F0.5M8
G74R0.1
G74Z−54.5Q5000F0.17
G0Z3.M9
X200.
M111
M1

Lower turret side

M110
M414*
G1Z−34.9F0.35
G4U0
X49.2F0.5
Z−54.
U1.W−0.5
G0Z2.
X38.46
G42G1Z0.1
G3X40.26Z−0.77R0.9F0.35
G1X41.59Z−19.9
X42.6
U4.W−2.
G40G0X180.Z30.M9
G28U0

Simultaneous machining of drill and O.D. rough reduces the machining time.
*Required to specify when machine is equipped with MATA-BEI (sub spin-
dle).

16-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

(2) I.D. finishing and O.D. finishing

Upper turret side

N4G40G0T0707(I.D. FINISH)
M130
G97S3000M3
Z2.
X38.
G1Z0F0.1M8
G2X36.Z−1.R1.F0.08
G1Z−10.F0.12
X32.5F0.2
G2X30.5Z−11.0R1.0F0.1
G1Z−50.F0.15
U−0.5
G0Z2.
X220.M9
M131
M1

Lower turret side

N102G40G0T04048(O.D. FINISH)
M130
Z−29.
X51.
M414*
G42G1X48.F0.5M9
X43.Z−32.F0.25
Z−34.9F0.3
X48.
G40G0Z2.
X35.5
G42G1Z0
X38.26F0.15
G3X40.06Z−0.87R0.9F0.1
G1X41.69Z−20.F0.12
X42.4F0.15
X45.0W−1.3
Z−30.5F0.22
X42.Z−32.F0.15
Z−35.R0.8
X46.
G3X49.W−1.5R1.5
G1Z−50.5
G40G0X52.Z−21.8M9

Finishing I.D. and O.D. simultaneously with the upper and lower turrets re-
duces the machining time.
*Required to specify when machine is equipped with MATA-BEI (sub spin-
dle).

16-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 16 FOUR-AXIS MACHINING

(3) I.D. grooving and O.D. grooving

Upper turret side

N6G40G0T1313(I.D. GROOVE)
M150
G97S2200M3
Z5.
X29.
Z−39.M8
G75R0.1
G75X36.P100F0.12
G0X29.
W50.
W−50.
G0Z−39.
G1X30.W−1.F0.3
X32.W1.F0.12
X32.2
G0X39.
G1X30.W1.F0.3
X32.W−1.F0.12
X32.2G97S1500M3
G0X39.G97S500M3
Z5.M9
X220.G97S50M3
M151
M1

Lower turret side

N103G40G0T0707(O.D. GROOVE)
M150
Z−45.
X50.
G75R0.12M8
M414*
G75X40.P300F0.13
G0X50.
W−1.5
G1X47.W1.5
X46.
G0X50.
W1.5
G1X47.W−1.5
X46.
X42.4F0.15
G0X55.M9
X190.Z50.
G28U0
M151

Simultaneous grooving on I.D. and O.D. with the upper and lower turrets
reduces the machining time.
*Required to specify when machine is equipped with MATA-BEI (sub spin-
dle).

16-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 17 RIGID TAPPING

17 RIGID TAPPING
17-1 Program Example
Spindle Rotary tool Rotary tool
(Only in the facing (End face) (Side)
direction)
O1234; O1234; O1234;
G80 G40 G97 G99; G80 G40 G97 G99; G80 G40 G97 G99;
G28 U0 W0; G28 U0 W0; G28 U0 W0;
M41; M91; M91;
M5; G28 H0; G28 H0;
GX Z ; M90; M90;
(1) M29 S1000; G0 X Z H ; G0 X Z H ;
(2) G84 Z−20. R5. F1. P500; (1) M29 S1000 M94;
(3) G80; (4) (2) G84 Z−20. R5. F1. P500 (1) M29 S1000;
M5; M86 (2) G88 X−20. R5. F1. P1000 M86;
M1; (5) (3) G80; (5)
M30; (3) G80; M5;
% M5; M90;
M90; M1;
M1; M30;
M30; %
%

(1) Specify a spindle rotating speed, using the M29 command instead of M3. M3
or M4 is not necessary at this time.
(2) Use a tapping cycle of G84 or G88. (Refer to the FANUC operator’s man-
ual.)
(3) Issue the G80 command after tapping is finished.
(4) Specify the pitch as it is in the X-axis direction. It does not need to be dou-
bled.
(5) For the milling rigid tap, program M86 (spindle fixing) as required.
(6) The M29 command should be issued only when the spindle (or milling axis)
is stopped.

17-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 17 RIGID TAPPING

17-2 Reverse Rigid Tapping Method

17-2-1 Spindle reverse rigid tapping
Insert the M794 command immediately before a block of M29. Once the M794
command has been issued, the G84 command is for reverse tapping, and the
M795 command is for normal tapping.
17-2-2 Rotary tool reverse rigid tapping
Program the M94 (side tapping cycle) command in the opposite of the ordinary
method.
Facing direction Insert the M94 command.
Side direction Do not insert the M94 command.
Tapping changes to the reverse direction.

17-3 MATA-BEI Rigid Tapping Method in SC(other than SC-100X2) and TMC Se-
ries (One-path Lathe)
17-3-1 Program example
O1234;
G80 G40 G97 G99;
G28 U0 B0;
M441;
M55;
M792;
(1) M29 S1000;
(2) G84 W10 F1. P1000;
(3) G80;
M793;
M1;
M30;

(1) Specify a spindle rotating speed, using the M29 command instead of M53.
M53 or M54 is not necessary at this time.
(2) Use a tapping cycle of G84 or G88.
(3) Issue the G80 command after tapping is finished.
(4) The M29 command should be issued only when MATA-BEI is stopped.
17-3-2 MATA-BEI rigid tapping
Insert the M792 command immediately before a block of M29. If the M793
command is issued, MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode is OFF.

17-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 17 RIGID TAPPING

17-4 M Codes

No. M Code Function

(1) M29 Rigid tapping mode
(2) M86 Spindle lock
(3) M94 Side plane tapping cycle
(4) M792 MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode ON
(5) M793 MATA-BEI rigid tapping mode OFF
(6) M794 Reverse rigid tapping mode ON
(7) M795 Reverse rigid tapping mode OFF
(8) M41 Spindle selection
(9) M98 P9000 (M91) C-axis selection

NOTE: Spindle rigid tapping is the optional feature.

NOTE: In the rigid tapping mode, the maximum spindle rotating speed is re-
stricted. (The speed restriction varies depending on the machine model.)
NOTE: Rotary tool rigid tapping is the optional feature.
NOTE: The maximum rotary tool rotating speed is also restricted, but it is usu-
ally 3200 rpm. (The speed restriction varies depending on the machine
model.)
NOTE: Pressing the RESET button resets the rigid tapping mode.
NOTE: Connecting or disconnecting the C-axis resets the rigid tapping mode as
well.
NOTE: With WTW/WTS, the spindle rigid tapping is valid only for the upper
turret.
NOTE: With STW/STS, the spindle rigid tapping is valid only for the upper tur-
ret and the lower turret of the R-unit.
NOTE: When the M29 (rigid tap mode) is commanded under the constant sur-
face speed control, the constant surface speed control is canceled au-
tomatically (G97).
This function is available for NT NURSE version V7.96 or higher.
If the constant surface speed control is used in the next process, it is
necessary to command the constant surface speed control (G96) again.
NOTE: For SC series (two-path machine) (0i-TD/Nakamura-Tome FANUC), it
is not necessary to command M792 and M793.

17-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 17 RIGID TAPPING

MEMO

17-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 18 POLYGONAL TURNING

18 POLYGONAL TURNING
18-1 Polygonal Turning (Except WT-100, WY-100, WY-100II, Super NTY3, NTY3-100
(Milling 6000min-1), TW-8, NTJ-100, SC-100
(Including Super NTY3 Jumbo, NTY3-100 (Milling 8000min-1), NTY3-150 and
NTY3-250))
18-1-1 M codes
M Code Function
M3 Spindle normal rotation
M4 Spindle reverse rotation
M88 Milling tool normal rotation
M89 Milling tool reverse rotation
M90 Milling tool stop

18-1-2 Programming
:
(Machining program)
(1) M41 T ; Spindle selection
(2) M88 or M89 S ; Milling tool rotation at a desired speed and
in a desired direction
(3) M3 or M4 S ; Spindle rotation at a desired speed and in a
desired direction
(4) G04 U ; Insertion of a dwell until the spindle and
milling tool reach the above speed
(5) G51.2 P Q R ; For details, see “18-1-3 Details
of polygon command”.
:
(Polygonal turning)
*See “18-1-3 Details of polygon com-
mand” and issue necessary commands in
order to obtain the desired rotating direc-
tion and speed.
:
(6) G50.2; Polygon mode reset
(Machining program)
:

NOTE: Follow the sequence of (1) to (6) strictly.

NOTE: In the polygon mode, only polygonal turning is allowed.

18-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 18 POLYGONAL TURNING

18-1-3 Details of polygonal turning command

(1) G51.2 P Q R
With the above command, the polygonal turning synchronizaiton mode can
be started or each command value following P, Q and R in the polygonal
turning synchronization mode can be modified.
• P: Spindle rotating ratio
(The spindle rotating direction is specified by M3 and M4.)
Command range : Integer within 1 X 999
• Q: Rotary tool spindle rotating ratio
(The rotary tool spindle rotating direction is specified by a plus or minus
sign of Q.)
Command range : Integer within 1 X 999 or −1 X −999
Plus command: Rotary tool spindle normal rotation
Minus command: Rotary tool spindle reverse rotation
• R: Designation of spindle and rotary tool spindle phase (relative value)
The command range and setting unit are the same as those of the rotating
axis.
Least move is 360°. (R can be omitted. If no value is specified for R,
the phase angle becomes to be zero.)
P, Q and R values once specified with G51.2 is modal until polygonal turning
synchronization mode is cancelled or until resetting for G51.2 is done.

While in polygonal turning synchronization mode, the rotary tool spindle ro-
tates at the speed of S*Q/P as polygonal turning synchronization axis ac-
cording to S command for spindle, and the phase is controlled by R com-
mand.
(2) G50.2
The polygonal turning synchronization mode is reset by this command.
This mode is also reset in the following cases.
• The NC unit is reset.
• The power is turned off.
• The P/S alarm 218, 219 or 221 occurs.
G51.2 or G50.2 should be programmed in a block independently.
In G51.2 command to validate polygonal turning synchronization mode, R
command is omissible but P and Q commands cannot be omitted.
When modal values of P, Q and R need to be modified after polygonal turn-
ing synchronization mode becomes effective by G51.2 command, specify
G51.2 command again. “R” value can be used independently at this moment.
If either P or Q is required to be modified, specify both P and Q in the G51.2
command.
Polygonal turning is a standard function with the 0i-TD, 0i-TF, 0i-TF Plus,
STW, STS series, NTX(W), NTX(S), and NTXL.
For machines other than above, polygonal turning is optional.
For the WTW/WTS series and Super NTM3, polygonal turning is available
only for the upper turret.

18-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 18 POLYGONAL TURNING

18-2 Polygonal Turning (WT-100, WY-100, WY-100II, Super NTY3, NTY3-100 (Mill-
ing 6000min-1), TW-8, NTJ-100, SC-100
(Except Super NTY3 Jumbo, NTY3-100 (Milling 8000min-1), NTY3-150 and
NTY3-250))
18-2-1 Program command
G352: Polygonal turning mode ON cycle
Format
G352 P .Q . (R .)
• P: Spindle rotating ratio
Command range: Integer within 1 to 999
The spindle rotating direction is specified by the spindle ro-
tation M code.
• Q: Rotary tool spindle rotating ratio
Command range: Integer within -999 to -1, 1 to 999
Plus command: Rotary tool spindle normal rotation
Minus command: Rotary tool spindle reverse rotation
• R: Designation of spindle and rotary tool spindle phase
(R can be omitted.)
The Shift amount at the spindle side is specified.
Command range: -360 to 360 (Command unit: 0.001°)
If no value is specified for R, it becomes the same as R0..
G352 operation description
Rotary tool spindle (milling) position control mode ON (M775)
↓
Milling zero return, coordinate system preset (G28)
↓
Milling positioning (G00)
The Milling side is positioned so that the spindle side may shift by the
phase specified by R.
↓
Waits until the spindle reaches the commanded rotation speed.
↓
Polygonal turning mode ON (G51.2)
The milling rotates, and it is controlled so that the rotation speed of the
spindle and the rotation speed of the milling become P:Q.

G50.2: Polygonal turning mode cancel

The polygonal turning mode commanded by G352 is reset.
This mode is also reset in the following cases.
(a) The power is turned off.
(b) At the time of the emergency stop.
(c) At the time of the servo alarm.
(d) The NC unit is reset.
(e) The alarms (PS0217 to PS0221, PS0314, PS5018) occur.
NOTE: G352 or G50.2 should be programmed in an block independently.
NOTE: Polygonal turning is a standard function with the 0i-TD, 0i-TF, 0i-TF
Plus, STW, STS series, NTX(W), NTX(S), and NTXL.
For machines other than above, polygonal turning is optional.

18-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 18 POLYGONAL TURNING

18-2-2 Program example

:
(1) T ; Tool selection
(2) M41 Spindle selection
(3) M03 S ; Spindle rotation at a desired speed and in a desired direction
(4) G352 P Q (R .); Polygonal turning mode ON
(For details, refer to format description in
“18-2-1”.)
:
(Polygonal turning)
:
(5) G50.2; Polygonal turning mode cancel
:

NOTE: Follow the sequence of (1) to (5) strictly.

NOTE: In the polygon mode, only polygonal turning is allowed..
NOTE: The same workpiece should be machined at the same spindle speed to
finish.
NOTE: The milling rotation command of is unnecessary.
NOTE: The polygonal turning can be commanded between every spindle and
turret base.

18-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 18 POLYGONAL TURNING

18-3 L-Spindle Polygonal Turning by R-spindle Tool (SC-100X2)

18-3-1 M codes
M Code Function
M3 L-spindle normal rotation
M4 L-spindle reverse rotation
M53 R-spindle normal rotation
M54 R-spindle reverse rotation

18-3-2 Programming
:
(Machining program)
(1) M441; R-spindle selection
(2) M53 or M54 S ; R-spindle rotation at a desired speed and in
a desired direction
(3) M41; L-spindle selection
(4) M3 or M4 S ; L-spindle rotation at a desired speed and in
a desired direction
(5) G04 U ; Insertion of a dwell until the L/R-spindle
reachs the above speed
(6) G51.2 P Q R ; For details, see “18-3-3 Details
of polygon command”.
:
(Polygonal turning)
*See “18-3-3 Details of polygon com-
mand” and issue necessary commands in
order to obtain the desired rotating direc-
tion and speed.
:
(7) G50.2; Polygon mode reset
Reset the polygon mode to stop the
R-spindle.
:
(Machining program)
:

NOTE: Follow the sequence of (1) to (7) strictly.

NOTE: In the polygon mode, only polygonal turning is allowed.
NOTE: The polygonal turning is available using the lower program for
SC-100X2.

18-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 18 POLYGONAL TURNING

18-3-3 Details of polygonal turning command

(1) G51.2 P Q R
With the above command, the polygonal turning synchronizaiton mode can
be started or each command value following P, Q and R in the polygonal
turning synchronization mode can be modified.
• P: L-spindle rotating ratio
(The L-spindle rotating direction is specified by M3 and M4.)
Command range : Integer within 1 X 999
• Q: R-spindle rotating ratio
(The R-spindle rotating direction is specified by a plus or minus sign of
Q.)
Command range : Integer within 1 X 999 or −1 X −999
Plus command: R-spindle normal rotation
Minus command: R-spindle reverse rotation
• R: Designation of L-spindle and R-spindle phase (relative value)
The command range and setting unit are the same as those of the rotating
axis.
Least move is 360°. (R can be omitted. If no value is specified for R,
the phase angle becomes to be zero.)
P, Q and R values once specified with G51.2 is modal until polygonal turning
synchronization mode is cancelled or until resetting for G51.2 is done.

While in polygonal turning synchronization mode, the rotary tool spindle ro-
tates at the speed of S*Q/P as polygonal turning synchronization axis ac-
cording to S command for spindle, and the phase is controlled by R com-
mand.
(2) G50.2
The polygonal turning synchronization mode is reset by this command.
This mode is also reset in the following cases.
• The NC unit is reset.
• The power is turned off.
• The P/S alarm 218, 219, 221, 314, or 5018 occurs.
G51.2 or G50.2 should be programmed in a block independently.
In G51.2 command to validate polygonal turning synchronization mode, R
command is omissible but P and Q commands cannot be omitted.
When modal values of P, Q and R need to be modified after polygonal turn-
ing synchronization mode becomes effective by G51.2 command, specify
G51.2 command again. “R” value can be used independently at this moment.
If either P or Q is required to be modified, specify both P and Q in the G51.2
command.

18-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

Applicable machine models: WT series, WY series, STW-40, STS-40, Super NTJ,
NTJ-100, SC-100X2
Sub spindle C-axis operation can be programmed in the upper-turret program, and
main C-axis operation can be programmed in the lower-turret program.
19-1 Programming
The following M codes are used for the back milling function. Issue this M
command following a waiting M code in the machining program.
M442 : Back milling function ON
M443 : Back milling function OFF
19-2 Conditions and Limitations
(1) C-axis to be operated should be returned to the home position before mixture
control (back milling) command M422 is executed. On machines where NC
parameter No. 8161 is set to “1”, this restriction is not placed.
(2) When the back milling function is to be used, be sure not to issue the M443
command (back milling function OFF) on the opposite turret side.
M443 command should also be issued following a waiting M code on the
same turret side where the M442 command was issued.
(3) Once M442 command is issued, it is effective until the followings occur:
• The M443 command is issued from the same program of the M442 com-
mand.
• An NC alarm occurs on either turret.
• The MODE switch is changed to MANUAL.
(4) When the upper turret is performing turning operation on the MATA-BEI
spindle while the lower turret is performing milling operation on the main
spindle, or vice versa, the spindle speed of turning operation is indicated on
the screen. The milling speed is not indicated.
(5) The milling command must be issued with an S code in one block.
Incorrect Correct
M88 M88 S1000
S1000

19-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-3 Program Examples (WT series, WY series, SC-100X2)

19-3-1 Program example 1
Main C-axis is commanded from lower program.
[Upper program] [Lower program]
:
:
M91;
G28H0;
M100; M100;
M442; Back milling ON
M101; M101;
G00H−180; Main C-axis movement
:
M448S1000;
Machining Machining Milling (CW) by the lower
turret
: :
: M443; Back milling OFF
M102; M102;
: :

19-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-3-2 Program example 2

Main C-axis is commanded from lower-turret program, and MATA-BEI C-axis is
commanded from upper-turret program
[Upper program] [Lower program]
Turning Turning
: :
M91; M491;
G28H0; G28H0;
M100; M100;
M442; Back milling ON
M101; M101;
M88S500; M488S1000; Milling tool rotation
: :
: :
G00H−180; G00H30; C-axis movement
Machining Machining Milling tool advance
: :
M102; M102;
M443; Back milling OFF
M103; M103;
: :
: :
M30; M30;
% %

M442 and M443 should be specified in either upper program or lower program. It
is unnecessary to specify them in both of the programs.

19-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-4 Program Examples (STW-40, NTX(W), NTXL, JX-250 series)

19-4-1 Program example 1
Main C-axis is commanded from R-lower turret program.
[Upper program] [R-lower program]
:
:
M91;
G28H0;
M100P12; M100P12;
M442; Back milling ON
M101P12; M101P12;
G00H−180;
:
M448S1000; Milling (CW) by the lower
turret
Machining Machining Milling tool advance
: :
: M443; Back milling OFF
M102P12; M102P12;
: :

19-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-4-2 Program example 2

Main C-axis is commanded from R-lower turret program and MATA-BEI C-axis
is commanded from upper tool program.
[Upper program] [R-Lower program]
Turning Turning
: :
M91; M491;
G28H0; G28H0;
M100P12; M100P12;
M442; Back milling ON
M101P12; M101P12;
M88S1000; M488S1000; Milling tool rotation
: :
: :
G00H−180; G00H30;
Machining Machining Milling tool advance
: :
M102P12; M102P12;
M443; Back milling OFF
M103P12; M103P12;
: :
: :
M30; M30;
% %

M442 and M443 should be specified in either upper program or lower program. It
is unnecessary to specify them in both of the programs.

19-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-4-3 Program example 3

Main C-axis is commanded from L-lower turret program.
[Upper program] [L-lower program]
:
:
M91;
G28H0;
M100P13; M100P13;
M442; Back milling ON
M101P13; M101P13;
G00H−180;
:
M448S1000;
Machining Machining Milling tool advance
: :
: M443; Back milling OFF
M102P13; M102P13;
: :

19-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-4-4 Program example 4

R-spindle is commanded from upper tool program and L-spindle is commanded
from L-lower turret program.
[Upper program] [L-lower program] [R-lower rogram]
: : :
M91; M491;
G28H0; G28H0;
M100P123; M100P123; M100P123;
M442; Back milling ON
M432;
M101P13; M101P13;
M88S1000; M488S1000; Milling tool rotation
: :
: :
G00H−180; G00H30;
Machining Machining
: :
M102P13; M102P13;
M433;
M443; Back milling OFF
M103P123; M103P123; M103P123;
: : :
: : :
M30; M30; M30;
% % %
To set back milling ON, specify M442 and M432 in the order of M442 and M432.
To set back milling OFF, specify M433 and M443 in the order of M43 and M443.
(If specifying the above M codes in a wrong order, an alarm occurs.)
In the above program, back milling ON command is specified twice. To set back
milling OFF, specify back milling OFF commands in the reverse order of back
milling ON commands specified.
However, if NC unit is 16iTB and the system version is B1HA01 or higher, the
above restriction is not applied.

19-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-5 Back Milling Function by M Code Command for C-axis Selection [WT series,
WY series, Super NTJ, NTJ-100, SC series, and NTX(Ⅱ)]
For SC series(other than SC-100X2), NTX(II), NTRX-300 and NTRX-300L, skip
the description for lower unit.
Waiting M cords are not used.
19-5-1 Programming
Spindle selection M code (M41/M441) command or C-axis selection M code
(M91/M491) command automatically executes L/R-spindle machining mode se-
lection M code (M428/M427) and back milling ON/OFF M code (M442/M443)
as internal process. Therefore, C-axis move command can be valid from the unit
commanded the M code for C-axis selection last.
M codes
<Upper Unit>
M41 :L-spindle selection, L-spindle machining mode selection
M91* :L-unit C-axis selection, L-spindle machining mode selection,
Back milling function OFF
M441 :R-spindle selection, R-spindle machining mode selection
M491 :R-unit C-axis selection, R-spindle machining mode selection,
Back milling function ON
M427 :R-spindle machining mode selection
M428 :L-spindle machining mode selection
<Lower Unit>
M41 :L-spindle selection, L-spindle machining mode selection
M91 :L-unit C-axis selection, L-spindle machining mode selection,
Back milling function ON
M441 :R-spindle selection, R-spindle machining mode selection
M491*:R-unit C-axis selection, R-spindle machining mode selection,
Back milling function OFF
M427 :R-spindle machining mode selection
M428 :L-spindle machining mode selection

19-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-5-2 Program example 1

R-unit C-axis is commanded from upper program.
[Upper program] [R-lower program]
:
M100 M100
M491; Back milling ON
(M427) M427;

G28H0;
: :
R-unit C-axis mahin- R-unit C-axis mahin-
ing ing
: :
M101; M101;
: :
M codes in parenthesis can be omitted.

19-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-5-3 Program example 2

R-unit C-axis is commanded from upper program, and L-unit C-axis is com-
manded from lower program.
[Upper program] [R-lower program]
:
M100 M100
M491; M91 Back milling ON
(M427) (M428)

G28H0; G28H0;
: :
R-unit C-axis mahin- L-unit C-axis mahin-
ing ing
: :
M101; M101;
: :
M codes in parenthesis can be omitted.

19-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

19-5-4 Program example 3

L-unit C-axis is commanded from lower program.
[Upper program] [R-lower program]
:
M100 M100
M91 Back milling ON
M428 (M428)

G28H0;
: :
L-unit C-axis mahin- L-unit C-axis mahin-
ing ing
: :
M101; M101;
: :
M codes in parenthesis can be omitted.

19-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 19 BACK MILLING FUNCTION (MIXTURE CONTROL)

MEMO

19-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE
20-1 Combinations of Machining and Sample Programming (WT series, WY se-
ries, Super NTJ, and NTJ-100)
Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper Turret Lower Turret

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Turning on N10G28U0W0V0M41; N10G28U0W0M41;
1 spindle G00G40G99G97T0101M3S2000; G28B0;
M55;
G00G40G99G97T0101;
M414;
L/T:
M100; M100;
Turning on
Machining program Machining program
spindle
M101; M101;
M01; M01;

2 U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Turning on N10G28U0W0V0M41; N10G28U0W0M441;
spindle G00G40G99G97T0101M3S2000; G28B0;
G00G40G99G97T0101M53S2000;
L/T:
Turning on
Machining program Machining program
MATA-BEI
M100; M100;
spindle
M01; M01;

20-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper Turret Lower Turret

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

3 Turning on N10G28U0W0V0M441; N10G28U0W0M41;
MATA-BEI G00G40G99G97T0101M53S2000; G28B0;
spindle G00G40G99G97T0101M3S2000;

M100; M100;
L/T:
Machining program Machining program
Turning on
spindle
M101; M101;
M01; M01;

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Turning on N10G28U0W0V0M441; N10G28U0W0M441;
4
MATA-BEI M05;
spindle G00G40G99G97T0101; G28B0;
M414; G00G40G99G97T0101M53S2000;
L/T:
M100; M100;
Turning on
Machining program Machining program
MATA-BEI
spindle
M101; M101;
M01; M01;

20-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper Turret Lower Turret

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Turning on N10G28U0W0V0M41; N10G28U0W0;
5 spindle G00G40G99G97T0101M3S2000; G28B0;
M55;
M491;
G28H0;
L/T:
G00G40G98G97T0101M488S2000;
Milling on
MATA-BEI
spindle
Machining program Machining program
M100; M100;
M01; M01;

20-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper Turret Lower Turret

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Turning on N10G28U0W0V0M441; N10G28U0W0;
MATA-BEI G28B0;
spindle M05;
M91;
6 G28H0;

L/T: G00G40G99G97T0101M53S2000; G00G40G98G97T0101M488S2000;

Milling on M100; M100;
spindle Machining program Machining program

M101; M101;

M01; M01;

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Milling on N10G28U0W0V0; N10G28U0W0;
7 spindle G28B0;
M05; M55;
M91; M491;
G28H0; G28H0;
L/T:
G00G40G98G97T0101M88S2000; G00G40G98G97T0101M488S2000;
Milling on
MATA-BEI
Machining program Machining program
spindle
M100; M100;
M01; M01;

20-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper turret Lower turret

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Milling on N10G28U0W0V0; N10G28U0W0M441;
8 spindle G28B0;
M05; M55;
M91; M428;
G28H0; G00G40G98G97T0101M488S2000;
L/T: G00G40G98G97T0101M88S2000; M100;
Milling on M100; Machining program
spindle Machining program
(C-axis control by the upper program)
M101; M101;
M01; M01;

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis)

O0001;
Milling on N10G28U0W0V0;
N10G28U0W0;
MATA-BEI M55;
G28B0;
spindle M491;
M05;
(Back mill- G28H0;
M91
ing)
9 G28H0;

L/T: G00G40G98G97T0101M88S2000;
G00G40G98G97T0101M488S2000;
Milling on M100;
M100;
spindle Machining program
Machining program
(Back mill- (MATA-BEI C-axis control by the up-
(C-axis control by the lower program)
ing) per program)
M101;
M101;

M01;
M01;

20-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper Turret Lower turret

U/T: O0001; O0001;

Milling on N10G28U0W0V0M41; N10G28U0W0;
MATA-BEI M05; G28B0;
10
spindle M55
M491
M427 G28H0;
G00G40G98G97T0101M88S2000; G00G40G98G97T0101M488S2000;
L/T:
M100; M100;
Milling on
Machining program Machining program
MATA-BEI
(MATA-BEI C-axis control by the lower
spindle
program)
M101; M101;
M01; M01;

U/T: O0001
O0001; (V0 for Y axis)
Milling on N10G28U0W0M441;
N10G28U0W0V0;
11 spindle G28B0;
M05;
G00G40G99G97T0101M53S2000;
M91;
G28H0;
L/T: G00G40G98G97T0101M88S2200;
Turning on
Machining program
MATA-BEI Machining program
spindle (C-axis control by the upper program)
M100;
M100;
M01;
M01;

20-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Operation Upper turret Lower turret

U/T: O0001; (V0 for Y axis) O0001;

Milling on N10G28U0W0V0; N10G28U0W0M41;
MATA-BEI M55; G28B0;
spindle M491;
(Back mill- G28H0;
ing)
12

G00G40G99G97T0101M03S2000;
G00G40G98G97T0101M88S2000; M100;
L/T: M100; M414;
Turning on Machining program Machining program
spindle (MATA-BEI C-axis control by the up-
per program)
M101; M101;

M01; M01;

20-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

20-2 Combinations of Machining and Sample Programming

(WTS-150, NTM3, NTY3 Series)
No. Left turret Lower turret Right turret
1 Turning on L-unit spindle Turning on L-unit spindle (R-unit machining)
2 (L-unit machining) Turning on R-unit spindle Turning on R-unit spindle
3 Milling on L-unit spindle Milling on L-unit spindle (R-unit machining)
4 (L-unit machining) Milling on R-unit spindle Milling on R-unit spindle

Machining Combinations
No.
Left turret Right turret

(L-unit) (Lower unit)

O00001; O00001;
N10G28U0W0V0M41; N10G28U0W0;
G00G40G99G97T0101M03S2000; G00G40G99G97T0101;
M475;
M100P13; M100P13;
1 Machining program Machining program
M101P13; M101P13;
M01; M01;

Control the L-unit spindle rotation by the lower unit program

(L-unit) (Lower unit)
O00001; O00001;
N10G28U0W0V0M41; N10G28U0W0M41;
G00G40G99G97T0101; G00G40G99G97T0101M03S2000;
M100P13; M100P13;
Machining program Machining program
M101P13; M101P13;
M01; M01;

20-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Left turret Right turret

(Lower unit) (R-unit)

O00001; O00001;
N10G28U0W0V0; N10G28U0W0M41;
G28B0;
G00G40G99G97T0101; G00G40G99G97T0101M03S2000;
M414
M100P23; M100P23;
2 Machining program Machining program
M101P23; M101P23;
M01; M01;

Control the R-unit spindle rotation by the lower unit program

(Lower unit) (R-unit)
O00001; O00001;
N10G28U0W0V0M441; N10G28U0W0M41;
G28B0;
G00G40G99G97T0101M53S2000; G00G40G99G97T0101;
M100P23; M100P23;
Machining program Machining program
M101P23; M101P23;
M01; M01;

20-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Left turret Right turret

(L-unit) (Lower unit)

O0001; O0001;
N10G28U0W0V0; N10G28U0W0;
M05;
M91
G28H0; M428;
G00G40G98T0101M88S2000; G00G40G98T0101M488S2000;
M100P13; M100P13;
Machining program Machining program
3 (L-unit C-axis control by the L-unit)
M101P13; M101P13;
M01; M01;
Control the L-unit C-axis rotation by the lower unit program
(L-unit) (Lower unit)
O0001; O0001;
N10G28U0W0; N10G28U0W0V0;
M05;
M91
G28H0;

G00G40G98T0101M88S2000; G00G40G98T0101M488S2000;
M100P13; M100P13;
Machining program Machining program
(L-unit C-axis control by the lower unit)
M101P13; M101P13;
M01; M01;

20-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

Machining Combinations
No.
Left turret Right turret

(Lower unit) (R-unit)

O0001; O0001;
N10G28U0W0; N10G28U0W0V0;
M05;
M91
M427; G28H0;
G00G40G98T0101M488S2000; G00G40G98T0101M88S2000;
M100P13; M100P13;
Machining program Machining program
(R-unit C-axis control by the R-unit)
4 M101P13; M101P13;
M01; M01;

Control the R-unit C-axis rotation by the lower unit program

(R-unit)
(Lower unit) O0001;
O0001; N10G28U0W0;
N10G28U0W0V0;
M05;
M91
G28H0;
M427;
G00G40G98T0101M488S2000; G00G40G98T0101M48S2000;
M100P13; M100P13;
Machining program Machining program
(R-unit C-axis control by the lower unit)
M101P13; M101P13;
M01; M01;

20-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 20 PROGRAM EXAMPLE

MEMO

20-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 21 MIRROR IMAGE FOR Z-AXIS

21 MIRROR IMAGE FOR Z-AXIS

The mirror image for Z-axis is the function that it is possible to program the sub
spindle machining (MATA-BEI) easily by reversing the direction of the Z-axis.
In the mirror image mode, it is possible to program for the sub spindle as the same
way to program for the main spindle by reversing the direction of the Z-axis as
indicated in the figure below. (such as cutting direction of Z-axis and the direc-
tions of G02/G03 and G41/G42)

X X X X

Z Z Z Z

Main spindle Sub spindle Main spindle Sub spindle

Mirror image OFF Mirror image on ON

NOTE: This function is available only when all conditions described below are
met. If this function is not available, skip this section.
• The machine model is WT serise, WY series, WTS-150, STW-40,
STS-40, Super NTM3/NTX/NTXL/NTY3 series /NTJ/
NTJ-100/SC-100X2.
• The NT NURSE software version is V5.00 or higher.
NOTE: It is also possible to program the sub spindle machining (MATA-BEI)
without the mirror image function. The mirror image for the Z-axis is
used for programming the sub spindle machining (MATA-BEI) easily.

21-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 21 MIRROR IMAGE FOR Z-AXIS

21-1 Mirror Image Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G360/G361)

The mirror image mode on/off command must be executed in the states that the
Z-axis is at the zero position and the tool offset is cancelled. Mirror image mode
on/off cycle for the Z-axis (G360/G361) is prepared to make this programming
easy.
G360; Mirror image ON
The cycle includes the following processes automatically.
1. Cancel the tool offset
2. X-axis return to zero position
3. Z-axis return to zero position
4. Mirror image ON (M700) command
G361; Mirror image OFF
The cycle includes the following processes automatically.
1. Cancel the tool offset
2. X-axis return to zero position
3. Z-axis return to zero position
4. Mirror image OFF (M701) command
NOTE: After commanding G360, cancel the mirror image mode for the Z-axis
by commanding G361.
NOTE: The mirror image mode for the Z-axis cannot be cancelled with the
RESET button, etc. If the cycle stops in the reset, A731 alarm is gener-
ated. Surely cancel the mirror image mode by commanding G361 with
the MDI mode.
NOTE: When G360 and G361 are commanded, the X-axis and Z-axis return to
the zero positions successively to restore the coordinate system. Com-
mand G360 and G361 after checking the interferance is not generated.
NOTE: When mirror image mode for the Z-axis is used, it is necessary to input
the opposites of +/- values to be required for Z-axis workpiece coordi-
nate system and tool offset.
21-2 Program Example
O1000;
:
G00 G40 G98 T0113 ; T code command
:
G360 ; Mirror image mode for Z-axis ON

(Sub spindle machining program)

G361 ; Mirror image mode for Z-axis OFF
:
:
M30

21-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

22 ATC CYCLE
This chapter describes programs for ATC tool exchange on upper turret (tool
spindle) of STW, STS, NTX, NTX(II), NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, NTJX, NTMX,
NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, JX-250.
22-1 ATC Tool Exchange Cycle G340
22-1-1 ATC tool exchange operation (G340 T .)
Cycle G340 performs automatic ATC tool exchange for tool No. of which is spec-
ified by T value, a sequence of operations below:
[G340 operations]
(1) 4th reference position return (X and Y axes) & Shutter open command
(2) 4th reference position return (Turning B-axis)
(3) 4th reference position (inside of shutter) return (Z-axis) & Tool spindle ori-
entation (NOTE 2)
(4) Movement to tool exchange position (X-axis) (NOTE 1)
(5) Tool unclamp by Tool spindle
(6) Tool exchange (Tool change arm turn)
(7) Tool clamp by Tool spindle
(8) 4th reference position return (X-axis) (NOTE 1)
(9) Next tool preparation command (only when A value is specified)
(10) Movement to retracting position (shutter close enabled) (Z-axis) (NOTE 2)
(11) Machine zero position return (X, Z and Y-axes) (Omissible) & shutter close
command
(12) T code command (Tool offset read) & M/S code command (only when M/S
value is specified)
NOTE: For NTX, NTX(Ⅱ), NTXL, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL MX5, MX-100,
NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, JX-250, the operations marked with (NOTE 1)
are not executed.
NOTE: For NTJX (40 tool type ATC), Z-axis feed is not performed in the opera-
tions marked with (NOTE 2).
For NTJX (80/120 tool type ATC), Z-axis feed is performed.

Next tool
X/Y 4th reference position
preparation

Z-axis 4th reference position

ATC unit

B-axis 4th reference position

22-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

G340 T ; Basic command

G340 T A M S E Z B K D X ;
Detail command

T : Tool exchange No. (Not omissible)

Specify tool No. to be exchanged for.
T code usually designate the 4 digits.
However, when the tool offset number is over 100, the T code will be 6
digits command, so 6 digits shuld be designated.
For NTRX300, NTRX-300, JX-250, T code will be 6 digits command in
standard.

NOTE: For NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/

JX-250, a tool on the tool spindle can be returned to the magazine by
[G340 T0] command.
Only for NTMX, MX5, MX-100, NTRX-300, and NTRX-300L, the mag-
azine station No. of a return place can be specified by performing S
value command in the same line of
[G340 T0].
If the tool cannot be returned because there is a tool on the station
specified by S value command, alarm A442 occurs.
Only when [G340 T0] command is executed, be sure that the S value
command becomes the magazine station No. of a return place and M
value command is ingnored.

A : Next tool No. to be prepared (Not omissible)

Specify tool No. to be used in the next process.
This command calls the tool on ATC magazine No. of which is
specified by “A” value and set it in wait-pot immediately after
tool exchange is completed. The next tool preparation is done
while machining, which shortens the cycle time. Specify tool No.
in 2 digits for less than 40 or 80 tool type ATC, and in 3 digits
for more than 120 tool type.
Be sure to put an decimal point for A value. (An example:
“A12.”)
(Specifying G341 performs the same operation as A vaue. For
the detail, see the section 23-3.)

M : Simultaneous M code command (Omissible)

Specified M code is executed immediately after tool exchange is
completed.
S : Simultaneous S code command (Omissible)
Specified S code is executed immediately after tool exchange is
completed.
NOTE: Be sure to program that next tool preparation be performed before tool
exchange cycle G340. (See the program example) If not, tool prepara-
tion is performed before G340 execution automatically, however wait-
ing time for tool preparation is generated at tool exchange, which
lenghens the cycle time.

22-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

NOTE: When use NT NURSE spare tool index function, be sure to put an deci-
mal point for T or A command value as shown below:
T value: T0199. , T0299. , T0899.
A value: A0199. , A0299. , A0899.
If an decimal point is not given after values, “A726” alarm sounds.
T code 6-digit specification will be the following command.
• T value : T001999, T002999 to T008999
• A value : A001999, A002999 to A008999
<Program example>
:
G340 T0199. A0299.; Tool index of group No.1
(machining program)
T0188; Offset cancel of group No.1
:
NOTE: When G340 is commanded, 4th referance point return is performed in
the order of X-axis, Y-axis and turning B-axis (in the order of turning
B-axis, X-axis and Y-axis when X-axis is at machine zero position or
2nd reference position) in the rapid feedrate while Z-axis stays at the
current position. Execute G340 command after confirming that an in-
terference with tool does not occur. If Z-axis is not in the range preset to
NC parameter P6938 to P6958 (position SW9) in machine coordinate
system when G340 is commanded, A729 alarm is generated. If not in
the range, move Z-axis into safe area near the machine zero position
before executing G340 command.
NOTE: G340 tool exchange cycle is performed based on 4th reference position.
Therefore, do not change NC parameter setting related to 4th reference
position unless requied. If NC parameters related to 4th reference posi-
tion are not preset, A734 alarm is generated.
For NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/NTX(II)/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/
JX-250, X/Z/Y/B-axis at ATC is set as not 4th zero point but following
PMC parameter.
L side magazine ATC point X D8788
Z D8792
Y D8796
B D8800
R side magazine ATC point X D8804
Z D8808
Y D8812
B D8816
NOTE: Mount a large diameter tool in a magazine to adjoin every other piece
as much as possible. If the large diameter tool and the normal diameter
tool is disorderly mounted, the maximum tool number which can be
mounted will decrease.

22-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

E : Designation of operation at ATC cycle end (Omissible)

At ATC cycle end, X/Z/Y-axis zero return is

0 : Included
1 : Not included
When E value is omitted, X/Z/Y-axis zero return is performed for safety.
Therefore specify E value (E1.) only when X/Z/Y-axis zero return is not
required.
In addition, it is possible to finish the ATC cycle after positioning the
Z-axis on the machine coordinates specified with Z value by performing
the “El. Command” and “Z??? command” simultaneously. (Possible
from the NT NURSE Version 6.24)

B : Designation of operation at ATC cycle end (Omissible)

(Invalid for NTMX, NTMXL MX5, and MX-100)
When X/Z/Y-axis zero return is executed at ATC cycle end,
B-axis zero return is

0 : Included
1 : Not included
Specify B value (B1.) when finish ATC cycle in the condition of B-axis
zero return. If “E1.” command is specified at the same time, B value is
ignored for safety. In the case, B-axis zero return is not performed.
When specified tool No. in T value command of G340 is called for the
tool spindle, ATC tool exchange operation is not executed. Also, when
“B1” command is specified, B-axis zero return is not performed. After
G340 command, program B-axis positioning command before machin-
ing.
NOTE: When specified tool No. in T value command of G340, ATC tool ex-
change operation is not executed. Note the following matters.
Usually, when ATC tool exchange is performed, the swing B-axis cycle
ends at “-90°” or “0°” (when “B1” command). However, when the
specified tool is called and ATC tool exchange is not performed because
start in the way of process, the swing B-axis position is not definite.
Therefore, after G340 command, program B-axis positioning command
before machining.
Although ATC tool exchange is not performed, T code command by T
value command, next tool preparation command by A value command,
and M/S value command is executed.
NOTE: Commanding G340 is not effective in the machine lock state.
Do not command G340 in the machine lock state.

22-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

K : Designation of change arm swing speed (Omissible)

(NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/NTX(II)/NTRX-300/
NTRX-300L/JX-250 only)
Change arm swing in ATC cycle is carried out at

For NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX100
0: High speed (When omitted)
1: Low speed

For NTX(II)/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/JX-250
0: Low speed (When omitted)
2: High speed

When using heavy tools, carry out ATC cycle at low speed. For the de-
tails of tool weight, see the specifications in appendix in operation
manual.
For ATC 80/120 tool type of NTJX, when the weight of tool data is set
as heavy, ATC cycle is carried out at low speed regardless of K value.
NOTE: Precautions for NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, NTRX-300,
NTRX-300L, JX-250
• For NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, NTRX-300, NTRX-300L,
JX-250, if a tool number unregistered on ATC tooling setting screen
is called, alam “A438 ATC tool is not registered” occurs.
Be sure that the tool registeration is performed on ATC tool setting
screen for a tool mounted to the magazine.
• For NTMX, NTMX, MX5, MX-100, NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, JX-250,
G340 command is controlled as follows. (Except G340 M746 ATC
tool alignment command)
• A toool registered on L side magazine cannot be mounted on R side
magazine. Similarly, a toool registered on R side magazine cannot
be mounted on L side magazine.
For example, in the state that a tool called from L side magazine is
mounted on the tool spindle, if another tool registered on R side
magazine is called, the tool mounted on the tool spindle is returned
to the return station of L side magazine, and then the tool on R side
magazine is called.
• If the tool diameter type (large or normal) on the tool spindle and
the called tool diameter type are different, the tool on the tool spin-
dle is returned to the return station and then the commanded tool is
called.

D : Designation of operation at ATC start

For NTJX/NTX(II)/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/JX-250
0 : X-axis, Y-axis and B-axis do not approach the ATC point
together.(When omitted)
1 : X-axis, Y-axis and B-axis approach the ATC point together.
(High speed)

22-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

For NTMX/MX5/MX100/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/JX-250
When the NC parameter is P7227=8 in standard setting,
0 : Execute the shutter close command to prevent the coolant in
the tool spindle from getting into the ATC unit after the ap-
proach in front of the ATC shutter.
(When omitted)
1 : Do not execute the shutter close command to prevent the
coolant in the tool spindle from getting into the ATC unit
after the approach in front of the ATC shutter.
(High speed)
NOTE: For the detail of the NC parameter P7227, refer to the NT NURSE op-
eration manual.

X : Designation of operation at ATC start

For NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/JX-250
In the standard setting (when NC parameter P7227=8), the tool spindle ap-
proaches in front of the ATC shutter and stop temporarily to prevent the
coolant from getting into the ATC unit. Then after the execution of dwell
(when the set time of the PMC parameter D9979 has passed), the shutter
open command is executed. The time between the execution of dwell and the
shutter open command can be changed by the X value command when re-
quired.

NOTE: For the detail of the NC parameter P7227, refer to the NT NURSE op-
eration manual.

22-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

22-1-2 Program example for ATC cycle

O2000;
:
N10
G340 T0101. A02.; Tool exchange command for T0101 & Next tool preparation command for T02
:
(Machining by T0101 & Next tool (T02) machining)
:
N20
G340 T0202. A03.; Tool exchange command for T0202 & Next tool preparation command for T03
:
(Machining by T0202 & Next tool (T03) preparation during the machining )
:
T0242;;
:
(Machining by T0242)
:
N30
G340 T0303. A01.; Tool exchange command for T0303 & Next tool preparation command for T01
:
(Machining by T0303 & Next tool (T01) preparation during the machining )
:
:
M30;

22-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

22-1-3 ATC tool alignment (G340 M746)

This command is available for the following machines.
• NTJX (80 tool type or more ATC)
• NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX100/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/JX-250
• The alignment data is the data sampled by the tool arrangement of the ATC
magazine and rack according to tool employment order. G340 M746 command
will start exchange of tools in order of the alignment data.
• Start of the tool alignment command aligns and mounts the tool used for 1st on
the tool spindle, the tool used for 2nd on the wait pot, and the tool used for 3rd
hereinafter on the magazine and the rack.
(Only for NTJX)
• For the tool alignment data sampling, refer to Chapter “ATC TOOLING
FUNCTION” in NT NURSE operation manual.

22-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

22-2 ATC Tool Condition Screen

ATC tool condition screen displays the conditions of current tools mounted on
ATC. The screen is used to check the No. of tool currently being mounted on tool
spindle when turning on the power, or used at maintenance work on ATC.
To display ATC tool condition screen, follow the procedure below:
(1) Press the CUSTOM key on the MDI key board to display MENU screen of
NT NURSE. If the MENU screen is not displayed, press the right end
soft-key below the screen several times.
(2) Select “8. GUIDANCE” on the NT NURSE MENU screen, then press
soft-key [ATC] to display the ATC TOOL CONDITION screen.

Example of ATC TOOL CONDITION

NOTE: ATC TOOL CONDITION screen can be displayed only when UPPER
UNIT (tool spindle) is being selected for turret selection.
22-3 ATC Next Tool Preparation Command G341
G341 command calls the tool on ATC magazine No. of which is specified by T
value and set it in the waiting pot. Next tool preparation is usually commanded by
“A” value following G340 in machining program. G341 is used when perform
maintenance work for AC unit or execute next tool preparation command only.
G341 T ;
T : Next tool No. (Not omissible)
Specify tool No. to be used in the next process.
The tool on ATC magazine No. of which is specified by T value
is called and is set in the waiting pot immediately after tool
exchange is completed.
Specify tool No. in 2 digits for less than 40 or 80 tool type ATC,
and in 3 digits for more than 120 tool type ATC.

22-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 22 ATC CYCLE

MEMO

22-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23 SWING B-AXIS
This chapter describes programming related to swing B-axis on STW, STS, NTX,
NTXL, NTX(II), NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, NTJX, NTMX, MTMXL, MX5,
MX-100, JX-250, and Super NTJ.
This chapter is divided into two sections according to types of swing B-axis.
Commanding method differs depending on the machine configuration, therefore
see the section corresponding with your machine model.

Tool Offset Conversion

Section Type of swing B-axis Machine Model
G code
STW, STS, NTX, NTXL,
NTX(II), NTRX-300,
23-1 Tool spindle swing type G342
NTRX-300L, NTJX, NTMX,
NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, JX-250
23-2 Turret head swing type Super NTJ, NTJ-100 G344

Tool spindle swing type Turret head swing type

23-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1 Swing B-axis (Tool Spindle Swing Type)

23-1-1 Workpiece coordinate system and tool offset of upper unit (Tool spindle)
To use “tool offset conversion” function (G342) and Chapter 24 “3 dimensional
coordinate conversion” funcion (G368/G369) for upper turret head which has a
swing B-axis (tool spindle), it is necessary to preset “workpiece coordinate system”
and “tool offset” as described below:
(1) Workpiece coordinate system
Set workpiece coordinate systems for main spindle side and sub spindle side
respectively.
Usual setting : G54 main spindle side
: G55 sub spindle side
(See the illustration shown below)

B-axis swing center

G54Z G55Z

G54 GX G55
G54 X X G55

Main spindle Sub spindle

Fig. 23-1 Work Coordinate System Screen

23-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

X-axis : Set the distance (G54X/G55X) between B-axis swing center at

X-axis zero position in machine coordinate system and spindle
center in diameter.
STW40/STS40 : About −1200. mm
NTX : About −1220. mm
NTXL : About −1220. mm
NTX(II) : About −1220. mm
NTRX-300/NTRX-300L : About −1150. mm
NTJX : About − 870. mm
NTMX/MX5/NTMXL : About −1070. mm
MX-100 : About −1070. mm
JX-250 : About −1040. mm

Set the distance (G54Z/G55Z) between B-axis swing center at Z-axis zero
position in machine coordinate system and
workpiece center.
Main spindle: Set nevative value (-) for Z
Sub spindle : Set positive value (+) for Z
(When use Z-axis mirror image mode on the sub spindle, set
opposite value: negative value)
NOTE: Specifying a G10 command at the head of programs converts preset
values in workpiece coordinate system into NC program, which enables
workpiece coordinate system values to be converted into NC program
evry program/workpiece.
• [G54] G10 L2 P1 X Z ;
• [G55] G10 L2 P2 X Z ;
For NT NURSE version 5.51 or higher, a G354 command can be speci-
fied.
• [G54] G354 A54. X Z ;
• [G55] G354 A55. X Z ;
NOTE: For the detail of workpiece coordinate system, refer to instruction
manual on NC unit.
NOTE: G54 to G59 are available in workpiece coordinate system. However, if
conversational programming system LUCK-BEI is equipped with, do
not use G59 because LUCK-BEI uses it internally.

23-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

(2) Tool offset

Set tool geometry offset ( tool geometry offset and tool wear offset) as de-
scribed below. Be sure to set tool offset at tool orientation position (M785)
and at an angle of swing B-axis 0 degree.

B-axis swing center B-axis swing center

STW40/STS40 :About 250. mm

NTX :About 250. mm
NTXL :About 250. mm
NTX(II) :About 250. mm
NTRX-300 :About 200. mm
NTRX-300L :About 200. mm
NTJX :About 187.5 mm
NTMX/MX5 :About 135. mm
GX MX-100 :About 135. mm GX
JX-250 :About 200. mm
(Radius value)

GZ

Rotary tool Cutting tool

Fig. 23-2 Tool Offset Screen

X-axis : Set distance (GX) between B-axis swing center and tool
nose in X-axis direction as diameter value.
(Reference)
For STW40/STS40, the distance between B-axis swing
center and tool mounting surface is set 250.000 mm as
shown on the above illustration. Therefore GX is calcu
rated by the following formula if distance between tool
mounting surface and tool nose is expressed by “L”.

GX = (250.000+L)×2

23-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

Z-axis : Rotary tool Set “0”.

(It is preset in workpiece coordinate
system)
Cutting tool Set distance (GZ) between tool swing
center and tool nose in Z-axis direction
(positive value) in the condition that
tool nose is facing to main spindle at B-axis 0 de-
gree and at tool orientation position (M785).

For R (rudius) and TIP (imaginary tool nose position No.), set according to the
tool to be used acually. Specially for turning tool, be sure to set TIP at tool orien-
tation position (M785) and at an angle of swing B-axis 0 degree. If a wrong set-
ting is done, tool offset conversion function (G342) can not be operated correctly.

2 6 1 X

0 Z
7 5

3 8 4

NOTE: For the setting of the X-axis tool geometry offset, refer to chapter
23-1-4, too.
NOTE: The last 2 numbers of tool offset pairs should not be used because those
numbers are used in system. (Ex. For 99 pairs of tool offsets, offset No.
98 and 99 should not be used.)
e.g.) When offset pairs are 99, No.98 and 99 cannot use.
When offset pairs are 400, No.399 and 400 cannot use.
When offset pairs are 999, No.998 and 999 cannot use.
NOTE: Offset No. 88/99(T code 4-digit specification), and Offset No.888/999 (T
code 6-digit specification) cannot be used as usual offset No. because
they are used in spare tool index command ( NT NURSE) or tool life
management command (NC option).

23-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-1-1 ATC tool spindle X-axis tool geometry offset tool length input function
Although the X-axis tool geometry offset amount of ATC tool spindle sets the
distance (diameter value) between B-axis swing center and tool nose usually (re-
fer to section 23-1-1), it can be set in the distance (diameter value) between tool
mounting surface and tool nose by setting the following NC parameters
(P7292/D7988).
This parameter is valid for NT NURSE version V7.77 or higher.

B-axis swing center B-axis swing center

D7988

GX

GX

When this function is invalid (Standard) When this function is valid

Fig. GX: Difference in setting method of X-axis geometry offset

[Explanations of NC parameter]
When G342 (Offset conversion function) or G368 (Three-dimensional coordinate
conversion function) is used, X-axis tool geometry offset value of the tool spindle
P7292 = 0: Sets the distance (diameter value) between B-axis swing center and
tool nose (Standard specfication))
2: Sets the distance (diameter value) between tool mounting surface
tool nose
(Tool length input function)

D7988 = Distance between B-axis swing center and tool mounting surface
(Unit:0.001mm/diameter value)
(Valid when setting P7292=2.)
[Reference]
• For NTX, NTXL,
NTX(II), STW, STS : About 500000 (Diameter value)
• For NTJX : About 375000 (Diameter value)
• For NTMX, MX5, NTMXL, MX-100 : About 270000 (Diameter value)
• For NTRX-300, NTRX-300L, JX-250 : About 400000 (Diameter value)

NOTE: P7292 is NC parameter and D7988 is PMC parameter.

For the setting of P7292, refer to Chapter 4 in NT NURSE instruction
manual.
NOTE: This parameter is valid for NT NURSE version V7.77 or higher.
NT NURSE version V7.77 or lower cannot be used.
NOTE: When this parameter is set effectively, at the time of G342 (offset con-
version function) or G368 (three-dimensional coordinate conversion
function) command, the distance between B-axis swing center and tool
mounting surface set as PMC parameter: D7988 is added to X-axis tool
geometry offset value, auto output is performed to the last offset number
as distance between B-axis swing center and tool nose.

23-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

NOTE: For the setting of the X-axis tool geometry offset, see chapter 23-1-4,
together.
NOTE: Note that the distance between B-axis swing center and tool mounting
surface is not taken into consideration when not using G342 or G368
when this parameter is valid. Moreover, when G368 is commanded, be
sure to perform the T code command of the tool used first. Note that au-
tomatic addition of D7988 is not performed when the T code command
is not performed before G368.
NOTE: D7988 is set with a diameter value per 1 μm (0.001mm).
(Even if the inch system is used, set the metric value. D7988 is 4-byte
type data.)
Moreover, when this parameter is set to “valid,” it is necessary to
change the X-axis tool geometry offset value of ATC tool spindle (for
D7988 setting value).
In addition, this function changes the reference position for the X-axis
offset value to be set on the geometry offset screen.
For machines with tool setter, change the following parameters to adjust
the reference position of the tool setter.
L-side tool setter
P5015: +X direction
P5016: −X direction
R-side tool setter
P5056: +X direction
P5057: −X direction

23-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-1-2 Tool spindle orientation: Arbitrary angle command function

This function is to perform the tool spindle orientation at the arbitrary angle by
every 30 degrees. Use this function when performing the tool spindle orientation
in the positions other than M785/M786/M787/M788.

• G code
G419 A .;
A .: Orientation angle
Command range: 0 to 360. (per 30 deg.)

NOTE: It is available to use this function only when the machine is equipped
with the NT NURSE version V7.984 or later, and when the version num-
ber of ladder diagram satisfies the following condition.
For NTX : 40100166 AT or later
For NTJX : 40100193 AO or later
For NTMX/MX5 : 40100193 AO or later
For NTXL : 40100224 -- or later
For NTMXL/NTX(II)/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/MX-100/JX-250
: 40100273-- or later
NOTE: It is possible to command angles of “0, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210,
240, 270, 300, 330, 360” to the value A. Be sure to put a decimal point.
If the value “A” is outside the available range, an alarm A431: ““A”,
WRONG VALUE INPUT” is issued.
NOTE: Axis feed of “XZCYBUVWH” can be commanded in the same block.
Performing the orientation during the axis feed can shorten the ma-
chining time.

23-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

• Program example 1
O6001
;
;
G340 T001001;
G28 B0;
G419 A30.;
;
;
M30;
Program example 2
O6002
;
;
G340 T002002;
G342 B0. I4. M787;
G419 A30. X200. Z-50.;
;
;
M30;

NOTE: Command G419 like the program example 2 above, and it becomes
possible to use G419 command together with G342: Offset conversion
function.
In this case, M785/M787 in G342 becomes the meaning of whether the
standard offset is converted to L-spindle (M785) or to R-spindle (M787)
in the state that the swing B-axis is at 0 degree.
Commanding G419 in the next block of G342, and reperforming the
tool orientation enable G342 and G419 to be used together. (At this
time, it is necessary to input the offset to become the standard at the
orientation angle specified in G419 as the standard offset.)

23-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-2 The setting of X-axis tool geometry offset (Tool point offset)
The diameter value is set as the X-axis tool offset value in the ATC tool spindle
specification, indicating the distance between B-axis swing center to the tool nose.
Either pattern shown in the table below can be selected depending on the combi-
nation of the parameter setting and the version of NT NURSE. Select the setting
when required.

B-axis B-axis
swing center swing center

Pattern

GX GX
GX GX

Diameter / radius Diameter value Radius value

Between Between the Between Between the
Applicable the swing center mounting surface the swing center mounting surface
and the tool nose and the tool nose and the tool nose and the tool nose
P7292#1(2)
0 2 0 2
P5004#1
0 0 1 1
Corresponding ver-
sion of - V7.77 or higher V10.39 or higher V10.39 or higher
NT NURSE
Setting D7988 is Setting D7988 is
Remark
Standard setting needed. Refer to - needed. Refer to
chapter 23-1-2 chapter 23-1-2

NOTE: Do not change the parameter setting if the version of NT NURSE is not
corresponding to the function.
NOTE: Refer to chapter 23-1-2 for the detail of P7292 / D7988.
NOTE: Refer to the parameter manual of the NC unit for the detail of P5004#1.
NOTE: When the setting is changed, all the tool offset values (geometry offset,
wear offset) have to be changed according to the setting, too. If it is the
tool setter specification, the related parameter values have to be
changed.
NOTE: Even if the radius value is designated as the tool offset value, the diam-
eter value equals the work coordinate system value.

23-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-3 Tool offset conversion function G342 (Tool spindle swing type)
Tool offset conversion is the function to perform automatic conversion of tool
offset values according to specified angle of swing B-axis and direction of tool
orientation, which allows tools to have only one offset data. In other words, this
function realizes simple management of tool offset data and the followings are not
required:
[Before]
• One rotary tool has each offset data for “ B-90. ,B0. , and B90. ”.
• One cutting tool has each offset data for main spindle side (M785) and sub
spindle side (787).

Convert tool offset value

according to B-axis angle
automatically.

Ｍ785 Ｍ787

⊿X Convert tool offset value ac-

cording to the direction of tool
orientation automatically.
⊿Z

23-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-4 Program commands

Tool offset conversion command G344 is specified in the following format after
original offset command (T code) is made. For the detail of commanding method,
see the section 23-1-4 “Program examples”.
G342 B . M . I . [A .W .]
B : B-axis swing angle (Not omissible)
Command range: -100 ≦ B ≦ +100
M : Tool orientation M code
(Omissible for rotary tool; Not omissible for cutting tool)
It is necessary to specify either of following M commands
when use cutting tool because the position of tool nose
will change depending on the tool orientation position.
M785. : Tool orientation direction shown below
M787. : Tool orientation direction shown below

I3. I4.
M785. M787.

I : Specifying imaginary tool nose number

(Omissible for rotary tool; Not omissible for cutting tool)
Specify imaginary tool nose number of the tool to be used.
It is necessary to specify I commands when use cutting
tool because the position of tool nose will change
depending on the angle of swing B-axis.
Command range: 0 ≦ I ≦ 8
NOTE: If M value and I value are not specified although a cutting tool is used
(Z value is not “0”), an alarm A720 or A722 is generated.
[G342 Operations]
(1) Performs B-axis positioning and tool orientation by B and M commands.
(2) Calculates shift amount from standard offset value by commanded B vaule
and M value, then output the result to the last offset number. (EX. The result
is output to offset No. 99 for 99 pairs of offset tools)
When I value is specified, the value of imaginary tool nose is output as well.

23-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

(3) Issues a T code in which tool No. currently being used and the last offset
number are specified internally. (Ex.: T??99)
A : Tool type
0: Tools except ones for I.D.
(selected when value is omitted.)
1: Tools for inside diameter cutitng
NOTE: Set tool type only when perform tool dimension control in radial direc-
tion with X-axis wear offset in the case of using a tool as an inside di-
ameter cutter at an angle of 90/-90 degrees (swing B-axis). For the de-
tail, see the following [Details of Tool Type (“A” value command]).
[Details of Tool Type (“A” value command)]
When use a tool as I.D cutting tool and specify G342 command with B-axis
90/-90 degree turn, tool wear offset in radial direction (X-axis direciton)
should be set at Z-axis because the standard position for tool offset is at 0
degree (swing B-axis) as shown in Fig. “A”.
Fig. A: Without “A” command Fig. B: With “A” command
G342 B−90. M785. I2.; G342 B−90. M785. I2. A1.;

Wear X
Wear X
Wear Z

Wear Z

Wear X
Wear X
Wear Z
Wear Z
• Tool wear offset in radial direction • Tool wear offset in radial direction
(X-axis direction) should be set at (X-axis direction) can be set at X-axis
Z-axis. by specifying “A1.” command.

On the other hand, specifying “A1.” in G342 block enables to set tool wear offset
in radial direction (X-axis direction) at X-axis even when using a tool for inside
diameter cutting.as shown in Fig. “B”.
NOTE: When use tool offset conversion command G342, it is necessary to pre-
set workpiece coordinate system and tool offset. For the detail, refer to
section 23-1.
• Workpiece coordinate system: distance between B-axis swing center
and workpiece zero position
• Tool offset: distance between B-axis swing center and tool nose (Tool
offset is set at swing B-axis 0 degree and tool orientation position
(M785) as standard position.)
If irregal values are set for the above settings or if G342 is not com-
manded correctly, offset conversion is not performed correctly. When
creating a program including G342, perform the operation after check-
ing that tool moves on the intended tool path.
NOTE: Be sure to command G342 in the cndition that standard offset value is
read.
(Ex.) Drilling tool in straight direction
G340 T0101;Set T0101 offset (command offset to be referenced) G342
B-90. ;Convert offset according to B-90.
:
:

23-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

T0101 ;Reset T0101 offset (command standard offset)

G342 B90. ;Convert offset according to B+90.
If make a command G342 in the following conditions, an alarm “A723
is generated:
• when make a command of G342 in the offset cancel state
• when make a command of G342 again without specifying T
command after G342.
NOTE: Making a command of G342 turns B-axis to the specified B-axis coor-
idnate. Perform it after checking that an interference does not occur by
the command.
NOTE: When use 3 dimensional coordinate conversion function, G342 com-
mand is not required because the funciton performs offset conversion
according to the angle specified automatically. Making a command
“G342” during 3 dimensional conversion mode generates an alarm
“A721”.
NOTE: When making a command of G342 for sub spindle (MATA-BEI) unit
during Z-axis mirror image mode ON, it is necessary to specify B, M, I
values to perform machining on main spindle side.
(If specify “G342 B-90.” in program during mirror image mode ON,
B-axis is positioned at +90 degrees.)
Example

G361 (mirror image OFF) G360 (mirror image ON)

G342 B-90. G342 B-90.

NOTE: Specifying W command following after G342 ignores the wear offset
value of its standard offset (before conversion), but read the wear offset
value of the offset number designated by W command into the wear off-
set after offset conversion. This command is effective for machining with
a turning tool at an arbitrary angle and controlling the dimension of the
tool with the designated wear offset.
(This command is available for NT NURSE version 5.51 or higher.)

When omitting W command, the wear offset value of the standard offset
number (before conversion) is added into the geometry offset, then offset
conversion is executed.

23-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-5 Program examples

Program for end face machining with same rotary tool on main/sub spindle
Case 1: Z-axis mirror image OFF for sub spindle

O1000;

N10 (MAIN SP SIDE)

G54;
G340 T0101; (Tool exchange command & standard offset
reading)
G342 B−90.; (Turn the tool toward main spindle)
:
[MAIN SP SIDE MACHINING]
:
G28 U0 W0;

N20 (SUB SP SIDE)

G55;
T0101; (Reading standard offset)
G342 B90.; (Turn the tool toward sub spindle)
:
[SUB SP SIDE MACHINING]
:
G28 U0 W0;
:

Program for end face machining with same rotary tool on main/sub spindle
Case 2: Z-axis mirror image ON for sub spindle

O1001;

N10 (MAIN SP SIDE)

G361; (Z-axis mirror image mode OFF)
G54;
G340 T0101; (Tool exchange command & standard offset
reading)
G342 B−90.; (Turn the tool toward main spindle)
:
[MAIN SP SIDE MACHINING]
:
G28 U0 W0;

N20 (SUB SP SIDE)

G360; (Z-axis mirror image mode ON)
G55;
T0101; (Reading standard offset)
G342 B−90.; (Turn the tool toward sub spindle)
:
[SUB SP SIDE MACHINING]
:
G28 U0 W0;
G361; (Z-axis mirror image mode OFF)
:

23-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

Program for cutting with same O.D. tool on main/sub spindle

Case 1: Z-axis mirror image OFF for sub spindle

O2000;

N10 (MAIN SP SIDE)

G54;
G340 T0202; (Tool exchange command & standard offset reading)
G342 B0. M785. I3.; (Turn the tool toward main spindle)
:
[MAIN SP SIDE MACHINING] M785. I3.
:
G28 U0 W0;

N20 (SUB SP SIDE)

G55
T0202; (Reading standard offset)
G342 B0. M787. I4.; (Turn the tool toward sub spindle)
:
[SUB SP SIDE MACHINING] M787. I4.
:
G28 U0 W0;
:

Program for cutting with same O.D. tool on main/sub spindle

Case 2: Z-axis mirror image ON for sub spindle

O2001;

N10 (MAIN SP SIDE);

G361; (Z-axis mirror image mode OFF)
G54;
G340 T0202; (Tool exchange command & standard offset reading)
G342 B0. M785. I3.; (Turn the tool toward main spindle)
:
[MAIN SP SIDE MACHINING] M785. I3.
:
G28 U0 W0;

N20 (SUB SP SIDE)

G360; (Z-axis mirror image mode ON)
G55;
T0202; (Reading standard offset)
G342 B0. M785. I3.; (Turn the tool toward sub spindle)
:
[SUB SP SIDE MACHINING] M785. I3.
:
G28 U0 W0;
G361; (Z-axis mirror image mode OFF)
:

23-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-6 Simple tool head control function G343 (Tool spindle swing type)
Simple tool head control is the function to perform B-axis swing feed (cutting
feed) with tool head position held. This function operated that X/Z/B-axis operate
simultaneously and B-axis swing center performs circular interpolation.

Program command

G343 B__. F__.; Basic command

G343 B__. F__. [ E__. I.__ M__. C__. Y__. R__. W__. ] ; Detail command
H__. V__.

B__. End point angle of B-axis swing angle

F__. Feedrate speed (mm/min)

The feedrate is not the feedrate speed of the tool head but the feedrate of B-axis
swing center.
Maximum feedrate speed is 4800mm/min.

E__. Offset conversion (G342) automatic command

0:Perform (when value is omitted.)
1:Not perform
Specify whether ther offset conversion is automatically performed or not at the B-axis angle
after feedrate end.

I__. Specifying imaginary tool nose number

Specify imaginary tool nose number of the tool after conversion at the time of the
offset conversion (G342) automatic command.

M__. Specify tool spindle orientation M code (M785/M787) at the time of the offset conversion
(G342) automatic command.
C__. C-axis feedrate (ABS)
H__. C-axis feedrate (INC)
Y__. Y-axis feedrate (ABS)
V__. Y-axis feedrate (INC)
Specify them if C-axis or Y-axis is attempted to operate simultaneously with X/Z/B-axis op-
eration.

23-17
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

R__. Tool head circle radius

When value is omitted, it is =0 and B-axis rotates centering on the imaginary tool nose posi-
tion.

If +R is commanded, the tool head draws the arc (radius R) of the

perimeter.
If -R is commanded, the tool head draws the arc (radius R) of the
inner. (See the following figure. Nose R center is standard.)

Swing center Swing center

Tool head
+R −R

+R
Tool head −R

Fig. +R operation Fig. −R operation

W__. Specifying wear offset number

It is available to read wear offset of the number specified after feed end
In this case, standard T code wear offset is invalidated.

23-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

NOTE: Before this function is commanded, it is necessary to read the tool offset as a standard (refer to
chapter 23-1-1) by T command.

NOTE: Before this function is commanded, command M496 (swing B-axis unclamp).
After this function is commanded, perform a program to command M495 (swing B-axis).

NOTE: Before this function is commanded, it is necessary to command G98: feed per minute.
Also, if the milling is not rotated during the C-axis connection, feed per minute is invalidated.
Therefore, specify M408/M409 (feed per minute enable mode ON/OFF during a milling stop).

NOTE: If this function is commanded, Plane specifying modal G code is G18.

○Program example (Tool spindle type)

:
:
:
N10 M41 (EXAMPLE);
G28 U0 W0 V0 ;
G28 B0 ;
G0 G98 T0101 ;
G0 X100. Z-30. ;
M496 ;
G343 B-90. F4800 ;
M495 ;
:
:
:

23-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-7 Tool center point control mode ON/OFF cycle G435/G436 (Tool spindle swing type)
This function is the G code function for performing more easily the mode
ON/OFF of the tool center point control function (NC option).

NOTE: This function is available when all the following conditions are satisfied. Skip this chapter, when not
available.
•Either G43.4/G43.5/G43.7 are available.
•NC unit 30/31-iA or later
•NT NURSE version V8.53 or higher

NOTE: It is necessary to set the tool offset according to the contents described in chapter 23.
Moreover, the tool offset becomes effective for X (tool length) and the value set as Z is ignored.

NOTE: When G435 (ON cycle) is commanded, be sure to command G436 (OFF cycle) and to cancel the mode.
The following alarm is generated when the reset button is pressed in the state of ON of this mode.
• A0172 Ｇ436 is not commanded

NOTE: When G435 (ON cycle) command is executed, a series of following processes are executed.
•Tool offset cancel
•P5040#3 = 1 :Tool offset mode setting −1
•P11400#2 = 1 :Tool offset mode setting −2
•”G5.1 Q1” command :AI contour control mode ON
•From the geometry X of the offset number and wear X which were specified with the D value, tool
length is calculated and it is outputted to the geometry Z of the last offset number.
•The following command is executed according to the command type specified with A value.
•G43.? D [Last offset number] •••;

NOTE: When G436 (OFF cycle) command is executed, a series of following processes are executed.
•G49 command :Tool center point control mode cancel
•P5040#3 = 0 :Tool offset mode cancel −1
•P11400#2 = 0 :Tool offset mode cancel −2
•”G5.1 Q0” command :AI contour control mode OFF

NOTE: For detailed descriptions of G43.4/G43.5/G43.7, refer to FANUC operation manual.

23-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

•Program command of G435: tool center point control mode ON cycle

G435 A__ D__ Basic command

G435 A__ D__ [Q__ R__ L__ P__ U__ V__ W__ X__ Y__ Z__ B__ C__] Detail command

A__: Specifying control mode (Not omissible)

A0. G43.7 Tool point offset (D_ )
A1. G43.4 Tool center point control type 1 (D_ )
A2. G43.5 Tool center point control type 2 (D_ Q_ )

D__: Tool offset number (Not omissible)

L__: Specifying rotary axis offset

L0. (Invalid/Default)
L1. (Valid)
(NOTE) This can be specified only when type 1 (A1.) is commanded.

P__: Specifying tool position control mode

P0. (Invalid/Default)
P1. (Tool position control: Valid)
P3. (Smooth control: Valid)
(NOTE) This can be specified only when type 1 (A1.) is commanded.

Q__: Tool slant angle (This is valid only for A2. and indispensable.)
(NOTE) Be sure to specify this only when type 2 (A2.) is commanded.

R__: Machining condition selecting function (Option) specifying accuracy level

U__,V__,W__,X__,Y__,Z__,B__,C__,H__ : Axis coordinate command

NOTE: Precautions on arguments of G43.7/G43.4/G43.5

•For detailed explanations of these arguments, refer to FANUC operation manual.
•The argument address which can be specified is above D,L,P,Q,R,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,B,C,H.
•Since it may be able to be commanded values except the above, for the command value
of each argument, refer to FANUC operation manual.

• The argument A1.2. command is available only when the tool nose point control function (NC op-
tion) is valid.
• The argument L1. command is available only when the smooth TCP function (NC option) is valid.

23-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

• The argument P1. command is available only when the tool position control function (NC option) is
valid.
• The argument P3. command is available only when the high-speed smooth TCP function (NC op-
tion) is valid.
• R command can be specified only when machining condition selecting function is valid.
• High-speed smooth TCF function includes tool nose position control, smooth TCF, and tool posi-
tion control functions.

NOTE: When the smooth control (argument P3. command) is valid, the applicable axes for the tool center
point control function (X, Z, C, Y, B) will be in axis feed mode regardless of the program execution.
Therefore, machining starts with the B-axis unclamped even when the B-axis program command is not
executed.

• Program command of G436: tool center point control mode OFF cycle

G436 Basic command

Program example

:
:
G340 T2020 A21. ;
G435 A1. D20. (TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL MODE ON) ;
:
Machining program of tool center point control
:
G436 (TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL MODE OFF);
M1 ;
:
:

23-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-8 Dynamic switching of diameter / radius specification of the X-axis

This function is available when the following conditions are all satisfied.
• “Dynamic switching of diameter / radius specification (DGN-1129#1) in the
NC optional function is valid.
• NT NURSE version V10.39 or higher.

If those conditions are not satisfied, skip this chapter.

23-1-8-1 Description of the function

“The diameter value” is designated as the X-axis command value or the coordi-
nate display value in the standard specification. However, this function makes it
possible to select “the diameter value or the radius value” with the G code com-
mands below.

G10.9 X0 Diameter specification

G10.9 X1 Radius specification

Even when the radius value is designated as X-axis command coordinate in the
NC program of the CAM putout, it is possible to perform machining by executing
the switch command of radius or diameter as required.

23-1-8-2 NC parameter setting

To use this function, it is necessary to set the PC parameters as follows.
Data No Description Setting
Command G10.9 (Dynamic switching diameter / radius specifica-
tion of the X-axis)
P3400#5 1
0:Invalid
1:Valid
0:The absolute coordinate value, the relative coordinate value, and
the remaining motion distance are displayed with either the diam-
eter value or the radius value designated at the time.
P3194#2 0
1:The absolute coordinate value, the relative coordinate value, and
the remaining motion distance are displayed with the diameter
value only.
0:The machine coordinate value of the X-axis is displayed with
the diameter value only.
P3194#3 1:The machine coordinate value of the X-axis is displayed with 0
either the diameter value or the radius value designated at the
time.
0:X-axis G53 (the coordinate value of the machine coordinate sys-
tem select command) is displayed with either the diameter value
P11222#7 or the radius value selected at the time. 1
1:X-axis G53 (the coordinate value of the machine coordinate sys-
tem select command) is displayed with the diameter value only.

23-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-8-3 Precautions and restrictions

• Command “G10.9 X?” in a single block. And command the X value with no
decimal point.
• The diameter value is set as the following data necessarily.
(a) NC parameter
(b) PMC parameter
(c) Workpiece coordinate system
(d) Machine coordinate value
(e) G53: Machine coordinate system select command
• For the setting (the diameter value / the radius value) of the correct amount of
the tool position (tool offset), refer to chapter 23-1-4.
• When the radius value is designated, the motion amount is twice as much as
that when the diameter value is designated. Pay as much attention as possible
when switching diameter to radius, and radius to diameter.
• Then the power is ON, the diameter value is designated. By pressing [RESET]
button, it is possible to reset to the diameter value even if the radius value is
selected later. Change the designation as required.
Machining programs for the radius value shall be executed when the radius
value is designated only, and programs for the diameter value shall be executed
when the diameter value is designated only.
Be more careful not to execute the machine program for the radius value when
the diameter value is designated in such cases as when restarting the machine
program for the radius value after resetting.
• For the details of this function, refer to the chapter of “Dynamic switching of
diameter / radius” in the NC unit operation manual.
• This function is available for NT NURSE version V10.39 or higher.
• The PMC signals below show which of the diameter value or the radius value is
designated for the X-axis currently.

Data No Description
0: The diameter value is designated.
F296.0
1: The radius value is designated.

Which of the diameter value or the radius value is designated can be checked on
the operation massage screen of the NT NURSE or by the display of the absolute
coordinate axis name of in the NT-IPS screen (available for the NT-IPS version
V2.0.2 or higher).
Refer to the example below.
(The following display is not shown in the FANUC NC screen.)
X: The diameter value is designated.
XR: The radius value is designated.

23-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

NT NURSE G codes that can be commanded while the radius value is designated
are limited to the followings. Never designate the others while the radius value is
designated.
While the diameter value is designated, all the G codes including the followings
can be commanded.

Data No. Description

G131 Software work pusher
G200 Spare tool indexing program command
G300 Software cut-off check
G310 NT work navigator (for Z-axis and C-axis only)
G330 2nd/3rd/4th reference point return
G340 ATC cycle
G341 ATC tool standby command
G342 Offset conversion function
G343 Simple tool center point control function
G354 Work coordinate system shift amount modification function
G359 Optional axes torque restriction function (for Z-axis and B-axis only)
G368 Three-dimensional coordinate conversion ON

23-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

Data No. Description

G369 Three-dimensional coordinate conversion OFF
G376 Software quill pusher ON
G377 Software quill pusher OFF
G435 Tool center point control mode ON
G436 Tool center point control mode OFF

The standard measurement program can not be executed when the radius value is
designated for the specifications of HAN-BEI and HAN-BEI Mill. Execute the
program when the diameter value is designated.

Input the X-axis measurement value (X???) in the NT-IPS tool setup screen or the
tool offset screen with the direct value when the diameter is designated.

23-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-1-9 Tool offset conversion function G322 (tool offset at B−45 deg. position for tool
spindle)
This function is available for NT NURSE version V10.95 or higher with the
swing B-axis for tool spindle. If not, skip this chapter.

(1) Function
In the offset conversion function (G342), it is necessary to set the basic tool
offset position at the “B-axis 0 deg.” position.
This function (G332) sets the basic tool offset position to the“B-axis −45
deg.” position (or any arbitrary angle) using the tool setter to correspond to
tools such as straight turning tool with point corner shown below.
For turning tools, be careful of the following points.
• Tool offset position should be M785 (tool orientation direction) and at the
“B-axis −45 deg.” position.
• Set the radius of tool nose and imaginary tool nose number (normally TIP
= 3) for tool offset.

B-axis swing center

GX

GZ

B: −45 deg.

[Tool offset setting example]

Driven tool

Turning tool

23-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

(2) Program commands

Command the G332 code in the format shown below after the basic offset
(T-code) to be converted is commanded.

G332 B__. M__. I__. [W__. T__.]

B__: B-axis turning angle (Not omissible)

Available range for command: −90 ≤ B ≤ +90

M__: Tool orientation M code

(For driven tool: omissible /For turning tool: not omissible)
For turning tools, it is necessary to command this M code because the
tool nose position changes depending on the tool orientation point. Two
M codes (785/787) are available.
• 785: Tool orientation direction = M785
• 787: Tool orientation direction = M787

I3. I4.
M785. M787.

I__: Designation of imaginary tool nose number

(For driven tool: omissible /For turning tool: not omissible)
Designate the imaginary tool nose number of the tool to be used. For
turning tools, it is necessary to command this number because the im-
aginary tool nose position changes depending on the B-axis turning an-
gle.
Available range for command: 0 ≤ I ≤ 8

W__: Designation of wear offset number (omissible)

Designating the argument W in the line of G332 ignores the wear offset
value of the conversion source (basic offset number) and reflects the
wear offset value designated by the argument W to the offset number
after the conversion.
This command is validated to perform the machining by tilting the
turning tool to the arbitrary angle and to manage the dimension by wear
offset value.
When the argument W is omitted, the offset is converted by adding the
wear offset value of the conversion source (basic offset number) to the
geometry offset.

T__: B-axis angle at the geometry offset setting (usually omitted)

(Usually omitted. When omitted, the B-axis angle at the geometry offset
setting is set to B-45 deg.
Designating the argument T in the line of G332 can arbitrarily designate
the B-axis angle set by the basic tool offset. Designate this command
only when the basic tool offset is set other than B−45 deg.
Available range for command: −90 ≤ T ≤ +90

23-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

• Program Example (Driven tool)

:
G340 T0101 A2. ;
G332 B0 W1. ;
:

• Program Example (Turning tool)

:
G340 T0202 A3. ;
G332 B0 M785 I8. W2. ;
:

NOTE: Same cautions and restrictions as G342 are applied to those of G332.
Check the section for G342 (23-1-3).
When using the G332 command, fully check the differences between G342
and G332 before use. Be fully careful not to command two G codes
wrongly.

NOTE: The following functions are not available in the tool offset setting other
than “B 0 deg.” for G332. To use the following functions, create the pro-
gram to use the tool offset value set by “B 0 deg.” using another offset
number setting.
• Tool center point control mode ON/OFF cycle (G435/G436)
• Simple tool center point control function (G343)
• Drill breakage detection by argument W designation in ATC cycle (G340)
(Optional)

23-29
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2 Swing B-axis (Turret Head Swing Type)

23-2-1 Workpiece coordinate system and tool offset of upper unit (Tool spindle)
To use “tool offset conversion” function (G344) and Chapter 24 “3 dimensional
coordinate conversion” funcion (G358/G369) for upper turret head which has a
swing B-axis (Turret head), it is necessary to preset “workpiece coordinate system”
and “tool offset” as described below: (However, this does not applies when not
using G344/G358/G369.).

B-axis Dimension Screen:

The following “B-AXIS DIMENSION” screen is provided to set “workpiece co-
ordinate system” and “tool offset” for turret head swing type upper unit more eas-
ily.
This screen is displayed by pressing CUSTOM key on MDI key board, then se-
lecting “No. 16” NT NURSE MENU screen.

Fig. 23-3 B-axis Dimension Screen

23-30
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

(1) Workpiece coordinate system

Set workpiece coordinate systems for main spindle side and sub spindle side
respectively.

X-axis : Set the distance (G5?X/G5?X) between B-axis swing center

and spindle center at X-axis zero position in machine
coordinate system.

(Model NTJ: X= Approx. -1130.00 (diameter value)

(Model NTJ-100: X= Approx. -1070.00 (diameter value)
Z-axis : Set the distance (G5?Z/G5?Z) between B-axis swing center
and workpiece zero position at X-axis zero position in
machine coordinate system.

L-spindle : Z= −???.???
R-spindle : Z=+???.???
(When using Z-axis mirror image mode on the R-spindle, set op-
posite value: Z= −???.???)

Fig. 23-4 Work Coordinate System Screen

NOTE: For NT NURSE version 5.51 or higher, specifying a G354 command at
the head of programs converts preset values in workpiece coordinate
system into NC program, which enables workpiece coordinate system
values to be converted into NC program evry program/workpiece.
• [G54] G354 A54. X_____ Z_____;
• [G55] G354 A55. X_____ Z_____;
NOTE: For the detail of workpiece coordinate system, refer to instruction
manual on NC unit.
NOTE: G54 to G59 are available in workpiece coordinate system. However, if
conversational programming system LUCK-BEI is equipped with, do
not use G59 because LUCK-BEI uses it internal processes.

23-31
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

(2) Tool offset

Set tool geometry offset ( tool geometry offset and tool wear offset) as de-
scribed below. Be sure to set tool offset at the position of “swing B-axis -90
deg .” and “M765: turret selection M code.”
X-axis : Set distance (GX) between B-axis swing center and tool
nose in X-axis direction in diameter value.
Z-axis : Set distance (GZ) between B-axis swing center and tool
nose in Z-axis direction.

2 6 1 X

0 Z
7 5

3 8 4

For R (rudius) and TIP (imaginary tool nose position No.), set according to the
tool to be used acually. Specially for turning tool, be sure to set TIP at the position
designated by turret selection M code (M765) and at an angle of swing B-axis -90
degrees. If a wrong setting is done, tool offset conversion function (G344) cannot
be operated correctly.

2 6 1 X

0 Z
7 5

3 8 4

NOTE: The last 2 numbers of tool offset pairs should not be used because those
numbers are used in system.
(Ex.)
For 99 pairs of tool offsets, offset No. 98 and 99 are not available.
For 64 pairs of tool offsets, offset No. 63 and 64 are not available.
NOTE: Offset No. 88/99 (T code 4-digit specification), and Offset No.888/999
(T code 6-digit specification) can not be used as usual offset No. be-
cause they are used in spare tool index command ( NT NURSE) or
tool life management command (NC option).

23-32
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

NOTE: To use the facing tool (mounted on end face with 45 deg.) with the mod-
els such as NTJ-100, set the tool offset value and imaginary tool nose
value in the position of “swing B-axis =
−45 deg.” and “turret selection M code M765” as shown below.
In addition, for the turning tools like the figure shown below, set the
imaginary nose value to “3”.

To use the G344 function (tool offset conversion), specify the argument
“J1. (for facing tool).” For details, see the description of G344.

Z
+GX
B=－45.0

+GZ
Fig. 23-5 Facing Tool (45-deg. Turning Tool)

23-33
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2-2 Tool offset conversion function G344 (Tool spindle swing type)
Tool offset conversion (G344) is the function to automatically perform conversion
of tool offset values according to specified angle of swing B-axis and the turret
post direction selected, which allows tools to have only one offset data. In other
words, this function realizes simple management of tool offset data and the fol-
lowings are not required:
[Before]
• One driven tool has each offset data for “ B-90. ,B0. , and B90. ”.
• One cutting tool has each offset data for left turret post selection (M764) and
right turret post selection (M765).

M764 M765

⊿X Convert tool offset value Convert tool offset value according

according to B-axis angle to the direction of tool orientation

⊿Z automatically. automatically.

23-34
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2-3 Program commands

Tool offset conversion command G344 is specified in the following format after
original offset command (T code) is made. For the detail of commanding method,
see the section 23-2-4 “Program examples”.
G344 B . M . I . [J___.]
B : B-axis swing angle
B-axis swings by the angle specified by “B” value, then the
offset is converted according to the angle.
M : M code for tool post selection
M764. : Left side
M765. : Right side
When “M” value is omitted, the offset is converted
according to theturret position being selected when G344
command is executed.
I : Specifying imaginary tool nose number
Specify imaginary tool nose number of the tool to be used.
It is necessary to specify I commands when use cutting
tool because the position of tool nose will change
depending on the angle of swing B-axis.
Command range: 0 ≦ I ≦ 8
J : Specifying facing tool (45-deg. turning tool)
J0. (When omitted): Normally omitted
J1. .: Specifying facing tool
Be sure to specify “J1.” Only when the facing tool is used.
In this case, set the tool offset value and and imaginary
tool nose value in the position of “swing B-axis =
−45 deg.” and “turret selection M code M765”.
(Value J is available for NT NURSE version V9.16 or
higher.)

23-35
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

[G344 Operations]
(1) Performs turret rotation to B-axis swing by B and M commands.
(2) Calculates shift amount from standard offset value by commanded B vaule
and M value, then output the result to the second last offset number. (EX.
The result is output to offset No. 63 for 64 pairs of offset tools)
When I value is specified, the value of imaginary tool nose is output as well.
(3) Issues a T code in which tool No. currently being used and the last offset
number are specified internally. (Ex.: T??63)
NOTE: When use tool offset conversion command G344, it is necessary to pre-
set workpiece coordinate system and tool offset. For the detail, refer to
section 24-1.
• Workpiece coordinate system: distance between B-axis swing center
and workpiece zero position
• Tool offset: distance between B-axis swing center and tool nose (Tool
offset is set at the standard position of swing B-axis -90 degrees des-
ignated by turret post selection “M765”.)
If irregal values are set for the above settings or if G344 is not com-
manded correctly, offset conversion is not performed correctly. When
creating a program including G344, perform the operation after check-
ing that tool moves on the intended tool path.
NOTE: Be sure to command G344 in the cndition that standard offset value is
read.
T0101 M765 ;Set T0101 offset (Standard offset)
G344 B-90. M765 ;Convert offset according to B-90.
:
:
T0101 M764
G342 B90. M764 ;Convert offset according to B+90.
If making a command of G344 in the state that offset is cancelled, an
alarm “A723 is generated:
NOTE: Making a command of G344 turns B-axis to the specified B-axis coor-
idnate. Perform it after checking that an interference does not occur by
the command.
NOTE: When use 3 dimensional coordinate conversion function, G344 com-
mand is not required because the funciton performs offset conversion
according to the angle specified automatically. Making a command
“G344” during 3 dimensional conversion mode generates an alarm
“A721”.
NOTE: Specifying W command following after G344 ignores the wear offset
value of its standard offset (before conversion), but read the wear offset
value of the offset number designated by W command into the wear off-
set after offset conversion. This command is effective for machining
with a turning tool at an arbitrary angle and controlling the dimension
of the tool with the designated wear offset.
When omitting W command, the wear offset value of the standard offset
number (before conversion) is added into the geometry offset, then off-
set conversion is executed.
NOTE: When making a command of G344 for R-spindle (MATA-BEI) unit dur-
ing Z-axis mirror image mode ON, it is necessary to specify B, M, I
values with an opposite sign (+ or −) to perform machining on main
spindle side.
(If specifying “G344 B-90.” in program during mirror image mode ON,
B-axis is positioned at +90 degrees.)
Example

23-36
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

G361 (Mirror image OFF) G360 (Mirror image ON)

G344 B-90. M765 G344 B-90. M765

23-37
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2-4 Program examples of G344

X X
X

Z
Z Z

Standard offset (B-90.) G344 B-45. M765 G344 B0. M765

X X
X

Z Z
Z

G344 B90. M764 G344 B45. M764 G344 B0. M764

23-38
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2-5 Program example of G344 J1.

This section shows a program example to use the facing tool (45-deg turning
tool).

X X X

Z
Z Z

Offset base (B−45.) G344 B−45. M765 I3. J1. G344 B45. M764 I4. J1.

NOTE: Be careful about the specifying order of I value/ J value.

• Specify “I__. J__.”
• Do not specify “J__. I__.”
(The machine does not opeerate correctly.)

23-39
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2-6 Simple tool head control function G345 (Turret head swing type)
Simple tool head control is the function to perform B-axis swing feed (cutting
feed) with tool head position held. This function operated that X/Z/B-axis operate
simultaneously and B-axis swing center performs circular interpolation.

Program command

G345 B__. F__. D__. ; ••• Basic command

G345 B__. F__. D__. [ E__. I.__ M__. C__. Y__. R__. W__. ] ; ••• Detail command
H__. V__.

B__ End point angle of B-axis swing angle

F__. Feedrate speed (mm/min)

The feedrate is not the feedrate speed of the tool head but the feedrate of B-axis
swing center.
Maximum feedrate speed is 4800mm/min.

E__. Offset conversion (G344) automatic command

0:Perform (when value is omitted.)
1:Not perform
Specify whether ther offset conversion is automatically performed or not at the B-axis angle
after feedrate end.

I__. Specifying imaginary tool nose number

Specify imaginary tool nose number of the tool after conversion at the time of the
offset conversion (G344) automatic command.
M__. Specify tool spindle orientation M code (M764/M765) at the time of the offset con-
version (G344) automatic command.
C__. C-axis feedrate (ABS)
H__. C-axis feedrate (INC)
Y__. Y-axis feedrate (ABS)
V__. Y-axis feedrate (INC)
Specify them if C-axis or Y-axis is attempted to operate simultaneously with X/Z/B-axis
operation.

23-40
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

R__. Tool head circle radius

When value is omitted, it is =0 and B-axis rotates centering on the imaginary tool nose posi-
tion.
If +R is commanded, the tool head draws the arc (radius R) of the
perimeter.
If -R is commanded, the tool head draws the arc (radius R) of the
inner. (See the following figure. Nose R center is standard.)
If R value command is performed for NTJ, NTJ-100, be sure to perform D value
command.

D__ R value direction against standard offset

(Command is available for NTJ, NTJ-100.)
D0.:X-direction (when value is omitted.)
D1.:Z-direction
Used to perform R value command for NTJ.
Usually, when a tool is mounted in the cross direction, set to “D0”.
When a tool is mounted in the straight direction, set to “D1”.

Swing center Swing center

Tool head
+R −R

+R
Tool head −R

Fig. +R operation Fig. −R operation

23-41
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

W__. Specifying wear offset number

It is available to read wear offset of the number specified after feed end
In this case, standard T code wear offset is invalidated.

NOTE: Before this function is commanded, it is necessary to read the tool offset as a standard (refer to chapter
23-1-1) by T command.

NOTE: Before this function is commanded, command M496 (swing B-axis unclamp).
After this function is commanded, perform a program to command M495 (swing B-axis).

NOTE: Before this function is commanded, it is necessary to command G98: feed per minute.
Also, if the milling is not rotated during the C-axis connection, feed per minute is invalidated. Therefore,
specify M408/M409 (feed per minute enable mode ON/OFF during a milling stop).

NOTE: If this function is commanded, the G code for plane specification is G18.

NOTE: This function is available from NT NURSE version V6.46 or higher.

NOTE: Facing tools (45-deg turning tool) do not correspond to this function.

• Program example (Turret type)

:
:
:
N10 M41 (EXAMPLE);
G28 U0 W0 V0 ;
G0 G98 T0101 M765;
G344 B-90. M765 I0;
G0 X200. Z100. ;
M496 ;
G345 B0. F4800;
M495 ;
:
:
:

23-42
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

23-2-7 Tool center point control mode ON/OFF cycle G435/G436 (Turret head swing type)
This function is the G code function for performing more easily the mode
ON/OFF of the tool center point control function (NC option).

NOTE: This function is available when all the following conditions are satisfied. Skip this chapter, when not
available.
• Either G43.4/G43.5/G43.7 are available.
• NC unit 30/31-iA or later
• NT NURSE version V10.17 or higher

NOTE: It is necessary to set the tool offset according to the contents described in chapter 23.

NOTE: When G435 (ON cycle) is commanded, be sure to command G436 (OFF cycle) and to cancel the mode.
The following alarm is generated when the reset button is pressed in the state of ON of this mode.
• A0172 G436 is not commanded

NOTE: When G435 (ON cycle) command is executed, a series of following processes are executed.
•Tool offset cancel
•P5040#3=1 :Tool offset mode setting −1
•P11400#2=1 :Tool offset mode setting −2
•”G5.1 Q1” command :AI contour control mode ON
•From the geometry and wear offset of the offset number specified with the D and S values, tool offset
vector parameters (P19697, P19709, and P19711) are updated and the value of the last offset
number is all cleared.
・The following command is executed according to the command type specified with A value.
・G43.? D [Last offset number] •••;

NOTE: When G436 (OFF cycle) command is executed, a series of following processes are executed.
•G49 command :Tool center point control mode cancel
•P5040#3=0 :Tool offset mode cancel −1
•P11400#2=0 :Tool offset mode cancel −2
•”G5.1 Q0” command :AI contour control mode OFF

NOTE: For detailed descriptions of G43.4/G43.5/G43.7, refer to FANUC operation manual.

•Program command of G435: tool center point control mode ON cycle

G435 A__ D__ ••• Basic command

G435 A__ D__ [S__Q__ R__ L__ P__ U__ V__ W__ X__ Y__ Z__ B__ C__]
••• Detail command

23-43
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

A__: Specifying control mode (Not omissible)

A0. G43.7 Tool point offset (D_ )
A1. G43.4 Tool center point control type 1 (D_ )
A2. G43.5 Tool center point control type 2 (D_ Q_ )

D__: Tool offset number (Not omissible)

S__: Specifying milling holder

S0. (Cross/Default)
S1. (Straight)

L__: Specifying rotary axis offset

L0. (Invalid/Default)
L1. (Valid)
(NOTE) This can be specified only when type 1 (A1.) is commanded.

P__: Specifying tool position control mode

P0. (Invalid/Default)
P1. (Tool position control: Valid)
P3. (Smooth control: Valid)
(NOTE) This can be specified only when type 1 (A1.) is commanded.

Q__: Tool slant angle (This is valid only for A2. and indispensable.)
(NOTE) Be sure to specify this only when type 2 (A2.) is commanded.

R__: Machining condition selecting function (Option) specifying accuracy level

U__,V__,W__,X__,Y__,Z__,B__,C__,H__ : Axis coordinate command

NOTE: Precautions on arguments of G43.7/G43.4/G43.5

• For detailed explanations of these arguments, refer to FANUC operation manual.
• The argument address which can be specified is above D,L,P,Q,R,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,B,C,H.
• Since it may be able to be commanded values except the above, for the command value of each
argument, refer to FANUC operation manual.
• The argument A1.2. command is available only when the tool nose point control function (NC op-
tion) is valid.
• The argument L1. command is available only when the smooth TCP function (NC option) is valid.
• The argument P1. command is available only when the tool position control function (NC option) is
valid.
• The argument P3. command is available only when the high-speed smooth TCP function (NC op-
tion) is valid.
• R command can be specified only when machining condition selecting function is valid.

23-44
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

• High-speed smooth TCF function includes tool nose position control, smooth TCF, and tool posi-
tion control functions.

• Program command of G436: tool center point control mode OFF cycle

G436 ••• Basic command

○Program example

:
:
G0 T0202 M765 ;
G0 B-90. ;
G435 A1. D2. S0. (TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL MODE ON) ;
:
Machining program of tool center point control
:
G436 (TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL MODE OFF);
M1 ;
:
:

23-45
C-NA104204-A2205
 23 SWING B-AXIS

MEMO

23-46
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

For machines equipped with rotational B-axis such as STW, STS, NTX, NTXL,
NTX(II), NTRX-300, NYRX-300L, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100,
JX-250, Super NTJ, NTJ-100 and machines equipped with a driven tool holder
mounted on turret head at an angle, this 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
function allows programming of slant plane machining as shown below even on
crossed coordinate system by difining imaginary plane X’-Z’:specifying rotation
center and rotation angle.

Machine zero position

Swing center

X Tool offset X

Z Workpiece
coordinate system
X

Workpiece zero
position Workpiece coordinate system Z

24-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

This chapter is devided into two sections according to types of swing B-axis.
Commanding method differs depending on the machine configuration, therefore
see the section corresponding with your machine model.

Tool Offset Conversion

Section Type of swing B-axis Machine Model
G code
STW, STS, NTX, NTXL,
NTX(II), NTRX-300,
24-1 Tool spindle swing type NTRX-300L, NTJX, NTMX, G368/G369
NTMXL, MX5, MX-100,
JX-250
24-2 Turret head swing type Super NTJ, NTJ-100 G358/G369

Tool spindle swing type Turret head swing type

NOTE: To use the function of the three-dimensional coodinate conversion, the

three-dimensional coordinate conversion of NC function is required.
Also, to use the function of rigid tapping while three dimensional
coodinate conversion, the three-dimensional rigid tapping of NC func-
tion is required. This function is not available for machine without
C-axis or Y-axis.
NOTE: For the details and restrictions on the the function of the
three-dimensional conversion, refer to the operator’s manual of the NC
unit. The main restrictions are described below.
• The tool nose radius compensation (G41/G42) must be ON after
G68.1 and OFF before G69.1.
• Must not change the workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) while
the three-dimensional conversion is executed.
• Must not change the setting value of the workpiece coordinate system
(G54 to G59) while the three-dimensional conversion is executed.
• Must not return to the zero position manually while the
three-dimensional conversion is executed. Return to the zero position
by using G369.

24-2
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

NOTE: When the three-dimensional conversion is executed, setting the NC pa-

rameters is required as follows.
• P5400#2=1
(Clear three-dimensional conversion by G69.1 only.)
• P1007#7(X/Z)=1
(When automatic reference zero return, preset on coordinate sys-
tem is executed.)
• P1201#7=0
(RESET operation does not set the workpiece coordinate system
back to the workpiece coordinate system G54.)
• P1203#4=1
(Must not change the workpiece coordinate system value while the
three-dimensional conversion is executed.)
• P1203#5=1
(Must not change the workpiece coordinate system selection while
the three-dimensional conversion is executed.)
• P1401#1=1
(Linear type.of rapid positioning)
NOTE: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode ON/OFF cycle
(G368/G369 or G358/G369) described in this chapter is used in order
to perfrom the conversion mode ON/OFF without paying heed to the
following restrictions on the three-dimensional coordinate conversion
function of NC function (G68.1/G69.1).
<Restrictions on three-dimensional coordinate conversion function
(G68.1/G69.1).>
• When conversion mode is ON :
if executing the command in the state that
offset is not cancelled, the coordinate system
can not be correctly set after the command.
• When conversion mode is OFF :
if not performing X and Z-axis zero return
after cancelling offset mode, the coordinate
system can not be correctly set back to the
coordinate system before G68.1 command is
given.
<Using this cycle (G368/G369)>
• When conversion mode is ON :
if executing the command in the state that
offset is not cancelled, the following
commands are issued:
Offset cancel command→G68.1 command→
Offset command
• When conversion mode is OFF :
if not performing X and Z-axis zero return
after cancelling the offset mode, the following
commands are issued:
Offset cancel command→G69.1 command→
X-axis zero return→Z-axis zero return
These commands are automatically executed in the cycles, therefore
three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode ON/OFF can be per-
formed without paying heed to the above-mentioned restrictions by
specifying only the command G368/G369.
NOTE: When performing manual operations after stopping the program while
three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, each axis is fed on the

24-3
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

three-dimensional coordinate plane. Therefore in the cases that a pro-

gram is stopped while machining a slant hole, the drill can be manually
removed in the oblique direction.
Before performing manual operations, be sure to check that the axis and
its move direction currently being selected is correct, otherwise the tool
may collide with a workpiece.
NOTE: For programs to simultaneously operate X and Z axes, machining trace
in cutting feed is not the same as is in rapid feed even in the
three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode. When retracting the
drill from the bottom of the slant hole while slant hole machining, be
sure to retract it in cutting feed.
NOTE: The X-axis should always be commanded by diameter program even in
the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.

24-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-1 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion Mode ON/OFF Cycle

(G368/G369) (Tool Spindle Swing Type)
NOTE: This function is available only when all the following condtions are ful-
filled. If not, skip this section.
• Tool spindle type swing B-axis is equipped with
• Three-dimensional coordinate conversion function of NC func-
tion is validated.
• C-axis or Y-axis is equipped with as standard
• NT NURSE version 4.04 or higher is installed
24-1-1 Program commands
The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is set ON by using G368 and
off by using G369.
NOTE: This function is available only when all conditions described below are
met. If this function is not available, skip this section.
• The three-dimensional coordinate conversion of the NC function
is valid.
• The NT NURSE version is higher than V4.04.
G368 X Z B [W___ D___];
(three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode ON command)
X: X-axis coordinate of the coordinate turning center
Z: Z-axis coordinate of the coordinate turning center
B: Angle of plane X’-Z’ (B-axis turning angle)
Commandable range: -100.≦B≦+100.

W: Wear offset number designation

(Refer to NOTE for details.)
(Available for NT NURSE version V8.60 or higher)

X’ +B
D: Axis direction setting
(Refer to NOTE for details.)
Z’ B -B
(Available for NT NURSE version V8.60 or higher)

24-5
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

[Operation outline]
B-axis swings to the coordinate specified by B. (only for machines with
swing B-axis)
The coordinate of the turning center specified by X and Z is set “X0,
Z0”, and imaginary plane X’-Z’ is difined at an angle specified by B.
The program is executed on the imaginary plane X’-Z’ until it is can-
celled by using G369.
G369 ; (three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode OFF command
(G369 independent command))
Cancel the three-dimensional coordinate conversioin mode by specify-
ing G369 after G368 command. Making a command of G369 cancels
offset and returns X- and Z-axis to the zero position to return the coor-
dinate system before the conversion.
[Operation Outline]
The operation is executed as the following steps.
1. Offset cancel command
2. G69.1 command
3. Return the X/Y-axis to the zero position
4. Return the Z-axis to the zero position
NOTE: For G368 use, workpiece coordinate system and tool offset should be
preset. For the details. see section 24-1 “Swing B-axis”.
• Workpiece coordinate system:
Set the distance between the turning center at machine zero position
and workpiece zero position (X and Z axes) for workpice coordinate
system.
• Tool offset:
Set the distance between turning center and tool nose for X-axis tool
offset.
Before operation, be sure to check that the above settings are done read
correctly, and that NC program is created correctly.
NOTE: After G368 command, be sure to cancel the three-dimensional coordi-
nate conversion mode by specifying G369. However when
three-dimensional coordinate conversion commands specified with an
angle different from one another are followed in succession as below
example, it is unnecessary to specify G369 every after G368 command.
In this case, specify G369 only when set the coordinate system back to
the normal coordinate system.

Example:

O1234;
:
G368 X100. Z50. B−30.;
:
G368 X100. Z50. B−45.;
:
G368 X100. Z50. B−60.;
:
G369;
NOTE: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode cannot be
canncelled by the reset button. If the operation stops in the reset in the
three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode (an A732 alarm is gen-
erated), cancel the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode by
commanding G369 in the MDI mode.

24-6
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

NOTE: For machines with swing B-axis, when G368 is commanded, B-axis
turns to the specified B-axis coordinate. Command G368 after checking
surely that the B-axis does not interfere with the tool.
NOTE: When G369 is commanded, X, Y and Z axes return to the zero position
in the order of X, Y and Z axes. to restore the coordinate system before
the three-dimensional coordinate conversion. Command G369 after
checking surely that turret does not interfere with the tool.
NOTE: When three-dimensional coordinate conversional function is used, exe-
cuting G342 command (tool offset conversion command) is not required.
The offset conversion is executed automatically according to the speci-
fied angle by the three-dimensional coordinate conversional function. If
G368 is commanded right after offset conversion command G342, the
A727 alarn is generated.
NOTE: The standard position for rotaion is in the state the tool is perpendicular
(tool faces down).
For the STW/STS/NTX/NTXL/NTX(II)/NTRX-300/NTRX-300L/NTJX/
NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250 series, the standard position is in
the state that rotational B-axis is at zero degree. (Refer to the program-
ming example.) For example, if B-90. is commanded and B-axis rotates
-90 degrees, the Z-axis motion is done by X command. (When D-value
is omitted.)
NOTE: Normally, the rotational angle is set by B. However, specifying R is the
same as B command.
NOTE: When arguments Y, I, J and K of G68.1 are omitted, Y0, I0, J0 and K0
are commanded.
NOTE: When making a command of G368 on the R-spindle side using mirror
image mode G360, it is required to specify values of arguments B and Z
with an mark “+”/“-”opposite to one that is specified for R-spindle
side machining, imaging that machining is performed on L-spindle side.
NOTE: Commanding W value in G368
(Available only for NT NURSE version V8.16 or higher)
Commanding the W value in the block of G368 ignores the wear offset
value of the modal T-code which is currently being commanded, and it
becomes possible to validate the wear offset value of the number desig-
nated by W value.
For the geometry offset, the setting of modal T-code which is currently
being commanded is validated.
Commanding the W value enables operators to control the wear offset
per processing site when the slant face machining to multiple sites is
carried out with the same tool, and so on.
Be sure to command the W value in G368 in the state that the standard
offset (T-code) has been read. In addition, when the W value is com-
manded, the offset number of the modal T-code becomes the last number
of offset pairs that can be commanded.
NOTE: It is possible to command the arbitrary M codes in the same line as
G369 command.
(Available for NT NURSE version V7.03 or higher)
NOTE: “D” value command for G368
(Available for NT NURSE version V8.60 or higher)
• When D value is omitted: X-axis direction (Fig.24-1)
• When D1. is commanded: Z-axis direction (Fig.24-2)
Normally, the tool cutting direction is X-axis direction, but D1. com-
mand enables to change the cutting direction to Z-axis direction.
In addition, when the D value is specified, the offset number of modal
T-code will be the last number of available offset pairs.

24-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

Z’
X’ +B X’ +B

B -B B -B
Z’

Z Z
X X

Fig. 24-1 When D value is omitted Fig. 24-2 When D1. is specified
(Cutting direction: X-axis) (Cutting direction: Z-axis)

24-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-1-2 Program example

ZERO POSITION OF
IMAGINARY
PLANE X’-Z’ (X0, Z0)

X’

20 Z’ －30°

20

φ100

Example
Set the workpiece coordinate (X100, Z20) the rotation center and define imaginary
plane X’-Z’ at an angle of -30 degrees for G368. After performing drill machining
for X’-Z plane on the crossed coordinate system, cancel the mode by G369.

O1000;
:
G55; workpiece coordinate system selection
G00 G40 G98 T0101; T code command
:
:
G368 X100. Z−20. B−30.; three-dimensional conversional mode ON
G00 X5. Z0.; Rapid traverse to the machining start point
G01 X−40. F100; Drill machining
Three-dimensional coor- G04 U0.5; Dwell at the bottom of the hole
G00 X10.; Drill turn-out (Safe position even if zero
dinate conversion mode
position return)
G369; three-dimensional conversional mode OFF
G54; workpiece coordinate system selection--Return
:
:
M30

24-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-1-3 B value omission in G368

When B value (angle specification) is omitted in G368 command,
three-dimensional coordinate conversion is executed according to the current an-
gle of swing B-axis. Only with this basic command of G368, three-dimensional
imaginary plane can be created according to the current B-axis angle.
○Program command: G368;
X and Z values can be omitted only when B value is omitted. If X and Z values is
omitted when B value is ommitted, it is the same as commanding “X0” or “Z0”.
(This function is available for NT NURSE version 5.33 or higher.)
○Example
When performing slant hole machining in the three-dimensional coordinat e con-
version mode, a spindle alarm is generated and the power is required to turn on
again. In this state, the drill is gets into workpiece slantingly, and can not be
pulled out of the workpiece because the three-dimensional coordinate conversion
was cancelled by turning the power on.
↓
With the single command of G368 through manual data input command, the
three-dimensional imaginary plane is made according to the present swing B-axis
angle, and the drill can be pull out of the workpiece in the slantwise direction in
the manual handle feed mode. When operating the manual handle feed, be careful
about the axis feeding direction.

24-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-2 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion Mode ON/OFF Cycle

(G358/G369) [Turret Swing Type]
NOTE: This function is available only when all the following condtions are ful-
filled. If not, skip this section.
• Tool spindle type swing B-axis is equipped with
• Three-dimensional coordinate conversion function of NC func-
tion is validated.
• C-axis or Y-axis is equipped with as standard
• NT NURSE version 5.51 or higher is installed
24-2-1 Program commands
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode for turret siwng type B-axis is set
to ON by making a command of G358, and OFF by G369. G358 commanding
patterns and axis directions are shown in the following Table 25-2-1 and Table
25-2-2.
• G358 A C M X Z D ;
(Three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode ON command)
A: Angle of workpiece standard plane (See the figure shown below.)
C: Tool mounting direction: C1. (Cross direciton),C2.(Straight direction)
M: Turret position direction: M764. (Left side), M765. (Right side)
X: X-axis coordinate of coordinate turning center
Z: Z-axis coordinate of coordinate turning center
D: Axis direction setting (Omissible) : Omitted (Z-axis direction),
D1. (X-axis direction)

X’ Z’ +A X’ +A

A -A Z’ A -A

Z Z
X X

Fig. 24-3 Cutting direction: Z-axis Fig. 24-4 Cutting direction: X-axis
(“D” value is omitted) (D1. value is specified)

24-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

Table 24-1-1 G358 Commanding Patterns and Axis Directions [”D” Value Omitted]
< >: Direction of wear offset

Cross Holder
L-spindle

G358 A－15. C1. M764 X_ Z_ G358 A－45. C1. M764 X_ Z_ G358 A－75. C1. M764 X_ Z_
R-spindle

G358 A15. C1. M765 X_ Z_ G358 A45. C1. M765 X_ Z_ G358 A75. C1. M765 X_ Z_

Straight Holder
L-spindle

G358 A－15. C2. M765 X_ Z_ G358A－45. C2. M765 X_ Z_ G358 A－75. C2. M765 X_ Z_
R-spindle

G358 A15. C2. M764 X_ Z_ G358 A45. C2. M764 X_ Z_ G358 A75. C2. M764 X_ Z_

24-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

Table 24-1-2 G358 Commanding Patterns and Axis Directions [”D1.” Value Specified]
< >: Direction of wear offset

Cross Holder
L-spindle

G358 A-15. C1. M764 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A-45. C1. M764 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A-75. C1. M764 X_ Z_ D1
R-spindle

G358 A15. C1. M765 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A45. C1. M765 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A75. C1. M765 X_ Z_ D1

Straight Holder
L-spindle

G358 A-15. C2. M765 X_ Z_ D1 G358A-45. C2. M765 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A-75. C2. M765 X_ Z_ D1
R-spindle

G358 A15. C2. M764 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A45. C2. M764 X_ Z_ D1 G358 A75. C2. M764 X_ Z_ D1

24-13
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

NOTE: B-axis angle and the directions of X and Z axes differ according to each
G358 commanding pattern, therefore Be careful about programming
and its operation.
[G358 Operation Outline]
B-axis indexing angle is automatically calcurated according to “A” value, “C” and
“M” specified, turret is indexed, then B-axis swings to the specified position.
↓
The coordnate turning center specified by “X” and “Z” is set to “X0, Z0”. Then
imaginary plane X’-Z’ at an angle specified by “A” is defined.
↓
The program runs on the imaginary plane X’-Z’ until G369 command is given.

• G369 (Three-dimensional cooridnate conversion mode OFF command)

(G369 independent command)
Cancel the three-dimensional coordinate conversioin mode by specify-
ing G369 after G368 command. Making a command of G369 cancels
offset and returns X- and Z-axis to the zero position to set the coordi-
nate system before the conversion.
[Operation Outline]
The operation is executed as the following steps.
1. Offset cancel command
2. G69.1 command
3. Return the X/Y-axis to the zero position
4. Return the Z-axis to the zero position
NOTE: For G358 use, workpiece coordinate system and tool offset should be
preset. For the details. see section 24-2 “Swing B-axis”.
• Workpiece coordinate system:
Set the distance between the turning center at machine zero po-
sition and workpiece zero position (X and Z axes) for workpice
coordinate system.
• Tool offset:
Set the distance between turning center and tool nose at an an-
gle of B-axis ” -90” degrees and the position of turret position
direction M765 for X-axis tool offset and Z-axis tool offset.
Before operation, be sure to check that the above settings are done read
correctly, and that NC program is created correctly.

24-14
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

NOTE: After G358 command, be sure to cancel the three-dimensional coordi-

nate conversion mode by specifying G369. However when
three-dimensional coordinate conversion commands specified with an
angle different from one another are followed in succession as below
example, it is unnecessary to specify G369 every after G368 command.
In this case, specify G369 only when set the coordinate system back to
the normal coordinate system.

Example:

O1234;
:
G358 X100. Z50. B−30.;
:
G358 X100. Z50. B−45.;
:
G358 X100. Z50. B−60.;
:
G369;
NOTE: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode cannot be
canncelled by the reset button. If the operation stops in the reset in the
three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode (an A732 alarm is gen-
erated), cancel the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode by
commanding G369 in the MDI mode.
NOTE: For machines with swing B-axis, when G358 is commanded, B-axis
turns to the specified B-axis coordinate. Command G358 after checking
surely that the B-axis does not interfere with the tool.
NOTE: When G369 is commanded, X, Y and Z axes return to the zero position
in the order of X, Y and Z axes. to restore the coordinate system before
the three-dimensional coordinate conversion. Command G369 after
checking surely that turret does not interfere with the tool.
NOTE: When three-dimensional coordinate conversional function is used, exe-
cuting G344 command (tool offset conversion command) is not required.
The offset conversion is executed automatically according to the speci-
fied angle by the three-dimensional coordinate conversional function. If
G358 is commanded right after offset conversion command G344, the
A727 alarn is generated.
NOTE: When making a command of G358 on the R-spindle side using mirror
image mode G360, it is required to specify values of arguments A and Z
with an mark “+”/“-”opposite to one that is specified for R-spindle
side machining, imaging that machining is performed on L-spindle side.
NOTE: Commanding W value in G358
Commanding the W value in the block of G358 ignores the wear offset
value of the modal T-code which is currently being commanded, and it
becomes possible to validate the wear offset value of the number desig-
nated by W value.
For the geometry offset, the setting of modal T-code which is currently
being commanded is validated.
Commanding the W value enables operators to control the wear offset
per processing site when the slant face machining to multiple sites is
carried out with the same tool, and so on.
Be sure to command the W value in G358 in the state that the standard
offset (T-code) has been read.

24-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-2-2 Direction of wear offset

In the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, the feed direction of the
axis is changed by this command.
(Refer to Table 24-1 and Table 24-2.)
In the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, the direction of the wear
offset is not in accord to the feed direction of the axis. The flow of the wear offset
conversion process is described below as reference to the three-dimensional coor-
dinate conversion command.
(G358 command pattern and direction of the wear offset are shown in Table 24-1
and Table 24-2.)

1. When commanding G358 A-15.C1.M764X_Z_(D1.)

Flow of offset process (Reference)

Offset standard Offset conversion

(M765 B-90.) (G344 M764 B90.)

Operation point and offset direction

when commanding

G358-A15.C1.M764 X_Z_(D1.)

24-16
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

2. When commanding G358 A15.C1.M765X_Z_(D1.)

Flow of offset process (Reference)

Offset standard
(M765 B-90.)

Operation point and offset

direction when commanding

G358 A15. C1. M765 X_ Z_(D1.)

24-17
C-NA104204-A2205
24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

3. When commanding G358 A-15.C2.M765X_Z_(D1.)

Flow of offset process (Reference)

Offset standard
(M765 B-90.)

Operation point and offset

direction when commanding

G358 A-15. C2. M765 X_ Z_(D1.)

24-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

4. When commanding G358 A15.C2.M764X_Z_(D1.)

Flow of offset process (Reference)

Offset standard B-axis feed Offset conversion

(M765 B-90.) (G0 B0.) (G344 M764 B0.)

Operation point and offset

direction when commanding

G358 A15.C2.M764X_Z_(D1.)

24-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-2-3 Program example

ZERO POSITION OF
IMAGINARY PLANE
X’-Z’ (X0, Z0)

X’
Z’

-30°
20

20

φ100

Example
Set the workpiece coordinate (X100, Z-20) the rotation center and define imagi-
nary plane X’-Z’ at an angle of -”-30” degrees for G358. After performing drill
machining for X’-Z plane on the crossed coordinate system, cancel the mode by
G369.

O1000;
:
G54; workpiece coordinate system selection
M764; Left turret position select
G00 G40 G98 T0101; T code command
:
:
G358 A−30. C1. M764 X100. Z−20.;three-dimensional conversional
mode ON
G00 X0. Z5.; Rapid traverse to the machining start point
G01 Z−20. F100; Drill machining
Three-dimensional coor-
G04 U0.5; Dwell at the bottom of the hole
dinate conversion mode G01 Z30. F2000; Drill turn-out (Safe position even if zero
position return)
G369; three-dimensional conversional mode OFF
:
:
M30

24-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

24-2-4 “A” value omission in G358

When B value (angle of workpiece plane) is omitted in G358 command,
three-dimensional coordinate conversion is executed according to the current an-
gle of swing B-axis. Only with this basic command of G358, three-dimensional
imaginary plane can be created according to the current B-axis angle.
○Program command: G358 C1.;
• “C” value cannot be omitted. C1. or C2. should be specified.
• Omitting “X” value or “Z” value is the same as specifying “X0, Z0”
• When omitting “M” value, three-dimensional coordinate conversion is
executed according to the current turret position selection (M764/M765) as
well as the case omittng “A” value.
○Example
When performing slant hole machining in the three-dimensional coordinat e con-
version mode, a spindle alarm is generated and the power is required to turn on
again. In this state, the drill is gets into workpiece slantingly, and can not be
pulled out of the workpiece because the three-dimensional coordinate conversion
was cancelled by turning the power on.
↓
With the single command of G358 C?. through manual data input command, the
three-dimensional imaginary plane is made according to the present swing B-axis
angle, and the drill can be pull out of the workpiece in the slantwise direction in
the manual handle feed mode. When operating the manual handle feed, be careful
about the axis feeding direction.

24-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 24 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

MEMO

24-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 25 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE

25 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE

25-1 Manual Handle Retrace Function
This is the function to perform NC program check by manual handle more easily:
synchronizing machine operation and manual handle rotation. Set handle check
mode ON then press START button, and machine operates in the corresponding
speed of manual handle rotation only while manual handle is rotated. Rotating
manual handle clockwise advances the program, and rotating it counterclockwise
reverses the program.
For multi-turret machines, it is enabled to run all the programs of turrets simulta-
neously to perform program check by manual handle.

NOTE: Manual handle retrace function is optional. This function is available

only for machines with manual handle retrace option. If not equipped
with, skip this chapter.
25-2 Manual Handle Retrace Operation
Program check by manual handle retrace function is performed as follows:
For the details of restrictions and cautions on handle check mode, see the next
chapter.
[Procedure for operation]
(1) Press ”RESET” switch or ”RESET & REWIND” switch in the EDIT mode,
then index the head of NC program. If employing a multi-turret lathe, index
the heads of all programs for turrets. It is able to start program check after
setting handle check mode ON in the condition that the cursor is placed in
the program.
(2) Set MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE switch on the operation panel ON:
handle check mode ON.
(3) Select ”MEM.” mode on the MODE switch, then press the CYCLE START
button.
With this step done, program operation is executed with handle rotation in
the corresponding speed of handle rotation. Rotate the handle in the forward
direction (clockwise) to perform program check. Handle speed in the handle
check mode can be selected with HANDLE toggle switch next to MANUAL
HANDLE RETRACE switch.
(4) When M30 in the program is read, the program execution is stopped.
Set MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE switch OFF to cancel the handle check
mode. If cancel the handle check in the middle of the program, press RESET
then set MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE switch OFF to cancel the handle
check mode. When perform handle check again, start with step (1).

25-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 25 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE

25-3 Restrictions and Cautions on Manual Handle Retrace Function

(1) With this function, if setting handle check mode to OFF while program is
executed in the handle check mode, automatic operation is immediately
started toward the forward direction in the specified speed.
Also, if setting handle check mode to ON during usual automatic operation,
handle check mode is validated after executing a block buffered on NC. In
this time, please note that a block executed before setting to handle check
mode to ON cannot retrace.
(2) Only the blocks in which move command or dwell is specified are controlla-
ble in the handle check mode by handle operation. Blocks such as M/S/T/F
code blocks (without move or dwell command) are executed irrespective of
handle rotation speed. Spindle rotation is also executed at the specified speed
regardless of handle rotation speed.
(3) For machines STW-40/STS-40 equipped with composite Y-axis, it is disa-
bled to retrace the program but forward it.
(4) Precedent control G code (G08) cannot be executed during handle check
mode. If G08 is commanded during handle check mode, an alarm is gener-
ated.
(5) At thread cutting cycle or tapping cycle execution, handle is invalidated even
when handle check mode is ON, and the program operation is executed at the
speed OVERRIDE 100% regardless of handle rotation. This is set for secur-
ing correct thread cutting or tapping. Handle feed is invalidated only during
thread cutting or tapping. Handle feed for approach or retreat is valid. When
thread cutting retract is executed by pressing FEED HOLD button during
handle check mode, the program execution is suspended. To perform pro-
gram check again, press RESET switch once and index the head of the pro-
gram before executing it.
(6) Machine move amount by one pulse of manual handle is determined by the
calculation below:
• Move amount=[command speed]×[number of handle pulses per 1sec]×
[handle power]×[(setting value of P6410)/100]×[8/1000]
(Standard setting value for P6410: 5)
Even when rotating handle faster, the feed rate is clamped and cannot exceed
the upper limit value as shown below:
• Cutting feed: Clamped at specified cutting feed rate (modal F value)
• Rapid feed: Clamped at rapid feed rate 10%.
Please note that there are cases that the timing of each turret operation during
program check may differ from the actual timing of the turret operation when
performing simultaneous handle check of turret programs since thread cut-
ting and tapping cycles are executed irrespective of the handle rotation. If
waiting M codes are included in programs, synchronization of program exe-
cution between turrets is performed when forwarding the programs.
(7) DRY RUN switch is invalid during handle check mode. Program operation is
performed in the condition of dry run OFF regardless of the dry run switch
setting.

25-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 25 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE

(8) There are various restrictions placed when performing forward/retrace opera-
tion of program during handle check mode.
The following conditions disable retrace operations of programs even if han-
dle is rotated counterclockwise. In that case, rotate the handle clockwise to
forward the program.
• The following G codes allow inverse operation of program. (The other
G codes do not allow inverse operation of program.)
[G codes] G00 G01 G02 G03 G04
G22 G23 G25 G26 G28 G30
G40 G41 G42 G50 G53 G65
G70 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75
G80 G83 G85 G87 G89
G90 G94 G96 G97 G98 G99
• Retrace operation of program is not allowed during interpolation modes as
shown below:
• Programmable data input mode G10/G11
• Polar interpolation mode G12.1/G13.1
• Cylindrical interpolation mode G7.1
• Polygonal turning mode G51.2/G50.2
• Macro modal call mode G66/G67
• Balance-cut mode G66/G67
• Thread cutting, tapping and others
• Retrace operation of program is disabled if exceeding the specified num-
ber of blocks up to which retrace operation is allowed.
(Retrace operation of program is allowed up to approximate 200
blocks.)
• Retrace operation of M codes are not usually allowed. However, retrace
operations of the following M codes are allowed since they are set in a
group beforehand. When performing retrace operation for these M codes,
the modal value one block before it that is memorized when forwarding
the program is output.
• Group 1: M05, M03, M04, M205 (Spindle rotation control)
• Group 2: M55, M53, M54, M255 (Sub spindle rotation
control)
• Group 3: M90, M88, M89 (Tool spindle rotation
control)
• Group 4: M490, M488, M489 (Tool spindle rotation
control)
Each M code above-mentioned is set in a group by the NC parameters P6411
to P6490. For the details, see the NC parameter instruction manual. As an
exception, retrace operation for waiting M code (M00, M100 to M199) is
possible regardless of the above-mentioned parameter setting.
• Retrace operation of NT NURSE G codes and M codes are not allowed.
Never perform retrace operation during NT NURSE G code/M code exe-
cution.
(9) Retrace operation of S codes/T codes
When performing retrace operation of S code or T code, the modal value one
block before it which is memorized when forwarding the program is output.

25-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 25 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE

(10) Retrace operation of macro variables

Macro variable settings and calculations can be done only once during han-
dle check mode. Therefore, the macro variable setting or calculation that was
executed once cannot be executed when going back to the block again re-
gardless the direction of program execution.
(11) No reverse operation allowed condition
The condition that the direction of program execution cannot be changed
(forward → retrace/retrace → forward) is called ”No reverse operation al-
lowed condition”. When program is in the following state, it enters ”No re-
verse operation allowed condition”:
• When executing a block including M code or T code accompanied by
completion condition
• In blank process until the next block process starts after the precedent
block process finishes
• During thread cutting or tapping process
• Stop in single block mode or stop in the feed hold
When performing handle check for all turrets, if one of their programs en-
ters ”no retrace operation allowed condition” or ”no reverse operation al-
lowed condition”, all the turret programs are set in the same condition. When
it occurs, turn the handle in the direction that allows program to be executed.
(12) Do not change the operation mode during handle check mode to change off-
set or parameter setting
(13) Memory start mode is invalid during handle check mode. If memory restart
mode is selected, the program execution stops at M30 as well as memory
mode.
(14) When this function is used, positioning G00 is set to the linear interpolation
positioning (bit 1 of parameter No.1401 is set to 1). The retrace tool path
agrees with the forward tool path.
(15) The handle on the machine operation panel is used in this function as a
standard. When the handy operation box is attached to the machine, it is pos-
sible to change the parameter setting and use the handle on the handy opera-
tion box in this function.
• NC parameter
P7105 bit 1 = 1 (Manual handle for I/O Link function is manually set.)
Change over the setting values of P12300 and P12301
(X address of the 1st and 2nd manual pulse generator)
• PMC parameter
D4048 = 3 (Manual handle retrace is performed by the handle on the
handy operation box)
NOTE: To change over the handles used in this function, satisfy the fol-
lowing conditions.
- NC unit: 0i-TD, 0i-TF, 0i-TF Plus, 31i, or 32i
- Ladder program supports this function.

25-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 26 Y-AXIS

26 Y-AXIS
Machines with C-axis milling can be equipped with Y-axis as an optional unit.
26-1 Y-axis Knock
For machines equipped with Y-axis (except WT-150, STW-40, and STS-40) have
a knock unit to fix Y-axis. The knock pin IN/OUT operations are commanded by
M codes.
(1) Y-axis knock out M471
When M471 is commanded, the knock pin is out and the Y-axis feed is
available. The operation is available in the spindle mode and the C-axis
mode. An interlock is not equipped.
(2) Y-axis knock in M470
When M470 is commanded, the knock pin gets in and the Y-axis is fixed.
The Y-axis cannot feed. The operation is not available when the Y-axis is at
the zero return position.
26-2 Program Examples
(1) Example of end face drilling by feeding Y-axis in the C-axis mode
:
M91; C-axis mode
G28 H0;C-axis zero return
M471;Y-axis knock out (NOTE)
G0 X0. Z5. Y−10. S1000 M88; Positioning
G98 G83 Z−10. F100; Drill machining
Y10.;Y-axis positioning/Drill machining
G80;
G28 V0;Y-axis zero return
M470;Y-axis knock in (NOTE)
:
NOTE: For machines not equipped with Y-axis knock, it is unnecessary to spec-
ify this M code.
(2) Example of outer diameter cutting machining by moving Y-axis in the spin-
dle mode
:
M41; Spindle mode
M471; Y-axis knock out/Y-axis feed enabling mode ON
G0 X10. Z10. Y0.1. S1000 M3; Positioning
G99 G1 Z−100. F0.1; Outer diameter machining
G0 X15.; Clearance
G28 V0; Y-axis zero return
M470; Y-axis knock in/Y-axis feed enabling mode OFF
:
NOTE: “Y-axis knock out” is for machines equipped with Y-axis knock, “Y-axis
feed enabling mode ON” is for machines not equipped with Y-axis
knock.

26-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 26 Y-AXIS

26-3 Y-axis Operations in Manual Mode

<In the case of machines equipped with Y-axis knock>
(1) In the spindle mode, Y-axis knock pin cannot be OFF automatically even
when selecting a manual mode. To release the Y-axis knock pin in the spindle
mode, command a M471.
(2) In the C-axis mode, the Y-axis knock pin is out automatically when the
manual mode is set, and the Y-axis can be fed with the manual feed. In the
manual mode, the Y-axis knock operations are the same when the C-axis
mode is changed from the spindle mode.
(3) When return the Y-axis to the zero position in the manual zero return mode,
the Y-axis knock pin gets in automatically.
(4) When the Y-axis is at the zero position and the automatic mode is set, the
Y-axis knock pin gets in automatically.
(5) When the Y-axis is at the zero position and the spindle mode is changed form
the C-axis mode, the Y-axis knock pin gets in automatically.
<In the case of machines not equipped with Y-axis knock>
(1) To feed Y-axis in spindle mode, make a command of M471.
26-4 Interlocks for Y-axis
<In the case of machines equipped with Y-axis knock>
(1) After the emergency stop is released, return the Y-axis to the zero position
manually once. Until this operation completes, automatic cycle start is disa-
bled.
(2) When Y-axis knock pin is not advanced at Y-axis zero position, M41 (change
from the C-axis mode to the spindle mode) is disabled.
(3) When Y-axis knock pin is not advanced in the spindle mode, automatic spin-
dle rotation is disabled. This is for avoiding unintended turning process with
Y-axis out of position. However, specifying M471 before the operation ena-
bles automatic spindle rotation.
When performing turning process, perform it with Y-axis knock IN. There
are cases that changeover to Y-axis knock IN/OUT may cause small turret
dislocation.
(4) Spindle rigid tapping with Y-axis knock pin OUT is disabled even when
M471 is specified. Milling rigid tapping is enabled.
<In the case of machines not equipped with Y-axis knock>
(1) After the emergency stop is released, return the Y-axis to the zero position
manually once. Until this operation completes, automatic cycle start is disa-
bled.
(2) When Y-axis is not at the zero position, M41 (change from the C-axis mode
to the spindle mode) is disabled.
(3) When Y-axis is not at the zero position in the spindle mode, automatic spin-
dle rotation is disabled. This is for avoiding unintended turning process with
Y-axis out of position. However, specifying M471 before the operation ena-
bles automatic spindle rotation in the state.

26-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 26 Y-AXIS

26-5 Precaution Matters for Y-axis Offset

(1) When Y-axis tool wear offset is used, pull out Y-axis knock pin by com-
manding M471 before T code command.
[Example] When Y-axis tool wear offset is used in T0101
:
G0 M471;
T0101;
:
When the Y-axis knock pin is in, the axis cannot traverse and stops.
NOTE: For machines not equipped with Y-axis knock, M471 is required only in
spindle mode.
(2) When Y-axis tool geometry offset is used, Y-axis positioning is required in
the absolute command after T command.
[Example] When Y-axis tool geometry offset is used in T0101
: :
G0 M471; T0101;
T0101; M471;
G0 Y0; G0 Y0;
: :
When the wear offset is not used, M471 can be set after T code.
26-6 Y-axis Knock Unit is Installed with the Following Machines
SC-150, SC-250, SC-450
TW-10, TW-20, TW-30, TMC-20II
WT-250 (II), WTW-150, WTS-150, WT-20II
For the machines other than the above, explanations for Y-axis knock may
not be considered.

26-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 26 Y-AXIS

MEMO

26-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27 AUTOMATIC DOOR
27-1 Outline
This is the function to automatically open and/or close the door using the
push-button or specifying its M code. The function is used for two uses. The op-
erations of door open and close differs according to respective use:
• To reduce operator’s task of opening and closing the door at workpiece
change.
• To perform automatic workpiece change using a robot placed in front of
the machine.
27-2 AUTOMATIC DOOR Push-button Operations
AUTO DOOR OPEN button:
Pressing the push-button in a manual mode opens the door. Once the button
is pressed, the door is automatically opened to the open end even after re-
leasing the hold of the button.
For CE marking machines, it is unnecessary to press ENABLE switch to-
gether.
AUTO DOOR CLOSE button:
Pressing the push-button in a manual mode closes the door.
Do not release the hold of the button until the door is closed to the end. If
once releasing the hold of the button, the door closing operation immediately
stops at the position. Pressing and holding the button again restarts the clos-
ing operation.
For CE marking machines, it is required to press ENABLE switch together.
27-3 M Codes
M62 (Door Open):
When M62 is read, the door is opened.
Normally, the M code is specified right before M30 block at the end of ma-
chining program. MDI command is also available.
M63 (Door Close):
When M63 is read, the door is closed.
Normally, M63 is not allowed to use. Be sure to use the CLOSE push-button
when closing the door, otherwise the part of operator’s body may be caught
in the door.
However, M63 command is allowed to use when introducing a system that
an operator does not change workpieces but robot does. In this case, it is re-
quired to study at arrangements to secure operator’s safety.

27-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-4 Conditions for Operations and Interlocks

Conditions for door open:
• Spindle stop (both L-spindle and R-spindle)
• Milling spindle stop
• Coolant stop
• CYCLE START indicator is OFF
Conditions for door close:
• Spindle stop (both L-spindle and R-spindle)
• Milling spindle stop
• Coolant stop
• CYCLE START indicator is OFF
Interlock:
This is the interlock to invalidate all the M codes except M30, M02, M00,
axis feeds (X, Z, C, Y and B axes), turret index, and coolant operation when
M62 should be specified in the middle of program. This is for preventing
machining from being continued with the door open after M62 is command-
ed.
Door interlock:
This is the standard function that is not changed even for automatic door type
machines. When the door is open, cycle start, spindle rotation and milling
spindle rotation are disabled.
For machines with CE marking, opening the door by making a command of
M62 generates an alarm as usual. Closing the door terminates the alarm.
<Operation and Interlock for Each Machine Model>
SC series (except for SC-450L), AS-200, TMC series, NTRX-300, NTRX-300L:
There are no special descriptions added to those series since they are 1-door
type lathes with 1-path control.
SC-450L/NTX(II):
SC-450L is double door type lathe with 1-path control. Both of the doors
open or close simultaneously regardless of the pushbutton or M code com-
mand.
WT series, WY series, and Super NTJ/NTJ-100/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/
MX5/MX-100:
WT series are 1-door type lathes with 2-path control.
Door open and door close pushbuttons are available even when either turret
(upper turret or lower turret) is selected. M codes for door open and close are
also commandable from either upper head or lower head. These operations
are not effective if the conditions for door open are all fulfilled.
TW series:
TW series are double door type lathes with 2-path control.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while L unit is being selected
opens/closes L unit door.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while R unit is being selected
opens/closes R unit door.
M codes for door open and close are also effective for the door of the unit
specified.
To simultaneously open both the doors after machining completion, use
waiting M codes.
L unit: R unit:
M100; M100; Waiting M code
M62; M62; Door open
M30; M30; End of program
% %

27-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

For machines without a function of automatic partition, or when auto-

matic partition is open, if the conditions for door open are not fulfilled
for both L unit and R unit, door cannot be operated. When automatic
partition is closed, the conditions of the unit not being selected are not
regarded.
WTW:
WTW series are double door type lathes with 4-path control (2-path control
×2).
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while L unit is being selected
opens/closes L unit door.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while R unit is being selected
opens/closes R unit door.
Door open/close operation by pushbutton is effective for the selected unit
regardless of the turret selection (upper or lower turret).
M codes for door open and close are also effective for the specified unit from
either turret.
To simultaneously open both the doors after machining completion, use
waiting M codes.
L-upper L-lower R-upper R-lower
M840; M840; Synchronization
of L unit and R unit
M100; M100; M110; M110; Synchronization
of upper and lower
M62; M62; Door open
M30; M30; M30; M30; End of program
% % % %
For machines without a function of automatic partition, or when auto-
matic partition is open, if the conditions for door open are not fulfilled
for both L unit and R unit, door can not be operated. When automatic
partition is closed, the conditions of the unit not being selected are not
regarded.
WTS:
WTS series are double door type lathes with 3-path control.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while L unit is being selected
opens/closes L unit door.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while R unit is being selected
opens/closes R unit door.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton while Lower unit is being selected
opens/closes the doors of both L and R units simultaneously.
M codes for door open and close are also effective for the specified unit (L or
R unit). When lower unit is specified, door open/close M code performs sim-
ultaneous door open/close operations for L and R unit.
Door operation is not effective when the conditions of door open are not all
fulfilled on L unit, R unit and Lower unit.
STW:
STW series are double door type lathes with 3-path control.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton performs simultaneous door
open/close operation for L unit and R unit regardless of unit selection (upper,
R-lower, or L-lower unit).
Door open/close M code command can be made from either head (upper,
R-lower, or L-lower unit), and performs simultaneous door open/close opera-
tion for L unit and R unit.
It is enabled to open either L or R unit door by M code after changing the
setting.
Door operation is not effective when the conditions of door open are not all
fulfilled on Upper unit, R-lower unit and L-Lower unit.

27-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

STS:
STS series are double door type lathes with 2-path control.
Pressing the door open/close pushbutton performs simultaneous door
open/close operation for L unit and R unit regardless of unit selection (upper
or lower unit).
Door open/close M code command can be made from either head (upper or
lower unit), and performs simultaneous door open/close operation for L unit
and R unit.
It is enabled to open either L or R unit door by M code after changing the
setting.
Door operation is not effective when the conditions of door open are not all
fulfilled on upper unit and lower unit.
NTM3/NTY3 series:
Super NTM3 is 1-door type lathe with 3-path control.
Door open and door close pushbuttons are available even when either turret
(L-turret, R-turret, or lower turret) is selected. M codes for door open and
close are also commandable from either L-head, R-head, or lower head.
These operations are not effective if the conditions for door open are all ful-
filled.
JX-250:
JX-250 is 1-door type lathe with 3-path control.
Door open and door close pushbuttons are available even when either turret
(upper turret, R-lower turret, or L-lower turret) is selected. M codes for door
open and close are also commandable from either turret (upper turret,
R-lower turret, or L-lower turret). These operations are not effective if the
conditions for door open are all fulfilled.

27-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5 Program Examples and Operation Patterns

27-5-1 Program examples for SC(other than SC-100X2), AS-200, TMC series, NTX(Ⅱ),
NTRX-300, and NTRX-300L
• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Memory mode operation
O1234;
:
Machining program
:
M62;←Door open
M30;
%
After machining operation, the door automatically opens (cycle operation is
finished).
↓
Operator removes the finished part, then mounts a workpiece material on
chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press DOOR CLOSE pushbutton.
Press and hold the button until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select an automatic mode, then press CYCLE START button.
NOTE: First, it is required for operator to mount a workpiece material
on chuck, then to press CYCLE START button.
At cycle end, finished part is left on chuck, therefore it is required
for operator to remove the finished part.
• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine
Memory restart mode operation
O1234;
M62; ←Door open
M58; ←Robot start command (special command)
M63; ←Door close
:
Machining program
:
M62; ←Door open
M30; ←Restart at the beginning of the program
%
Door opens by M62.
↓
Robot automatically starts to change workpieces by M58.
(special command)
↓
Door closes by M63.
↓
Machining is started.
↓
After machining completion, door opens by M62, then the program restarts
at the beginning.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with
chuck clamping no workpiece. At the end of the cycle, a finished part
is left on the chuck. When the same machining is to be performed on
the next day, the finished workpiece shall be left on the chuck. If the

27-5
C-NA104204-A2205
27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

same machining is no more performed, remove the finished part from

the chuck manually.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode.
When robot performs workpiece change, the following 2 operations
are required:
1. To remove a finished part and load a workpiece material on
chuck. (When chuck is closed)
2. Only to load a workpiece material on chuck. (When chuck is
open)
In the case that robot can perform only operation pattern 1, it is nec-
essary to load a finished part or dummy workpiece on chuck before-
hand for the first start.

27-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-2 Program examples for TW series with a partition

• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Memory mode operation for both L unit and R unit.
Do not use M75 (R unit start command) in L unit program, but use each
CYCLE START button on operation panels of L and R units.
L unit: R unit:
O1234; O1234;
: :
Machining program :
: :
M100; M100; Waiting M code
: M32; Partition open
M101; M101; Waiting M code
Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110; Waiting M code
: M33; Partition close
M111; M111; Waiting M code
M62; L-door open :
M30; Machining program
% :
M62; R-door open
M30;
%
After finishing L-unit machining, workpiece transfer to R unit is performed,
then L unit door automatically opens with L unit operation stop.
↓
Operator mounts a workpiece material on L unit chuck while R unit machin-
ing is being performed. Since partition is closed, workpiece change by oper-
ator is enabled under the condition of L unit door open.
↓
Select L unit and a manual mode, then press door close button. Hold down
the pushbutton until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on L unit, then press CYCLE START button on L unit
operation panel.
↓
Machining on R unit is performed after workpiece transfer from L unit. After
completion of R unit machining, R unit door automatically opens with R unit
operation stop.
↓
Operator removes a finished part on R unit chuck while L unit machining is
being performed. Since partition is closed, workpiece change by operator is
enabled under the condition of R unit door open.
↓
Select R unit and a manual mode, then press door close button. Hold down
the pushbutton until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on R unit, then press CYCLE START button on R unit
operation panel.
NOTE: For the first start of program, operator should mount a workpiece ma-
terial on L unit chuck. Start automatic cycle for each unit (L and R
units) with no workpiece on R unit chuck.
At the cycle end, a finished part is left on R unit chuck. Manually un-
load the part by operator.

27-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine

Use M75 (R unit start command) in L unit program.

L unit R unit
Memory restart mode operation Memory mode operation
O1234; O1234;
M62; ←L unit door open :
M58; ←Workpiece load by Robot (special command)
M63; ←L unit door close :
: :
Machining program :
: :
M75; ←R unit start :
M100; M100;←Waiting M code
: M32;←partition open
M101; M101;←Waiting M code
Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110;←Waiting M code
: M33←Partition close
M111; M111←Waiting M code
M30; :
% Machining program
:
M62;←R unit door open
(Special M code)→ M58;←Finished part unload
by robot
M63;←R unit door close
M30;
%

[Flow of motions for L unit]

L unit door opens by M62.
↓
Robot automatically starts to change workpieces by M58.
(Special command)
↓
L unit door closes by M63.
↓
Machining is started.
↓
After machining completion, R-unit is started, and workpiece transfer is per-
formed.
↓
The program restarts at the beginning.

27-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

[Flow of motions for R unit]

After R unit is started by L unit command, workpiece transfer is performed.
↓
Machining is started.
↓
R unit door opens by M62.
↓
Robot automatically starts to change workpieces by M58.
(Special command)
↓
R unit door closes by M63.
↓
Operation stop by M30.
Automatic cycle stops until start command is given from L unit again.

NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with
both L and R unit chucks clamping no workpieces. At the end of the cy-
cle, no finished parts are left on both the chucks.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode on L unit operation panel.

27-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-3 Program examples for TW series without a partition

• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Both L and R unit are operated in memory restart mode. M75 (R unit start )
is not used, but CYCLE START button for each unit start.

L unit R unit
M100; M100;←Waiting M code
: M62;←R unit door open
M101; M101;←Waiting M code
M00;←① M00;←①
Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110;←Waiting M code
M62;←L unit door open :
M111; M111←Waiting M code
M00;←② M00;←②
M30;←Restart at the head of program :
% Machining program
:
M30;←Restart at the head
of program
%
After completion of machining on L unit and R unit, R unit door opens au-
tomatically, then the operation stops by M00 (indicated with mark ①) on L
and R unit program.
↓
Operator unloads a finished part from R unit chuck.
↓
Select R unit and a manual mode, then press the door close button. Hold
down the button until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on both L and R unit operation panel, then press the
CYCLE START buttons on both L and R unit operation panels.
↓
Workpiece transfer is executed. Then L unit door is automatically opens, and
operation stops by M00 (indicated with mark ②) in L and R unit program.
↓
Operator loads a workpiece material on L unit chuck.
↓
Select L unit and a manual mode, then press the door close button. Hold
down the button until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on both L and R unit operation panel, then press the
CYCLE START buttons on both L and R unit operation panels.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with R
unit chuck clamping no workpiece after loading a workpiece material
on L unit chuck by operator.
When program stops at M00 (mark ①), manually close the R unit door
immediately since a finished part is not loaded on R unit for the first
cycle, then press CYCLE START buttons on L and R unit operation pan-
el.
At the end of the cycle, a finished parts is left on R unit chuck, therefore
unload the part by operator manually.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode on both L unit and R unit operation panels when pro-

27-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

gram stops at M00 (mark ②) . At this moment, press CYCLE START

buttons on L and R unit operation panels without loading a workpiece
material on L unit chuck.
• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine
Both L and R unit are operated in memory restart mode. M75 (R unit start) is
not used, but CYCLE START button for each unit start.
L unit R unit

O1234; O1234;
: :
Machining program :
: :
M100; M100;←Waiting M code
: M62;←R unit door open
(Special M code)→ M58;←Finished part unload
by robot
M63;←R unit door close
M101; M101;←Waiting M code
Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110;←Waiting M code
M62;←L unit door open :
M58;←Workpiece material load
by robot (Special M code)
M63;←L unit door close
M111; M111←Waiting M code
M30;←Restart at the head of program :
% Machining program
:
M30;←Restart at the head
of program
%
Workpieces on L and R unit turrets are simultaneously machined.
↓
After completion of L and R unit machining, R unit door is automatically
opened by M62.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to unload a finished
part from R unit.
↓
R unit door is automatically closed by M63.
↓
Workpiece transfer is performed.
↓
L unit door is opened by M62.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to load a workpiece
material on L unit.
↓
L unit door is closed by M63.
↓
R unit machining is started, and L unit machining is started after returning to
the head of program.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping

27-11
C-NA104204-A2205
27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

a finished part ( or dummy workpiece). For the first start, robot unloads
a workpiece from R unit without machining.
At the end of the cycle, a finished part is left on the R unit chuck. When
the same machining is to be performed on the next day, the finished
workpiece shall be left on the chuck. If the same machining is no more
performed, remove the finished part from the chuck manually.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the L-side memory restart
mode to memory mode. Then after the last workpiece on L unit is trans-
ferred to R unit chuck, switch the R-side memory restart mode to
memory mode on R unit operation panel.

27-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-4 Program examples for WT/WY series, Super NTJ, NTJ-100, STS, NTX(S),
Super NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, SC-100X2
• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Memory mode operation

Upper turret Lower turret

O1234; O1234;
: :
L/R unit machining program L/R unit machining program
: :
M100; M100;←Waiting M code
: M62;←door open
M101; M101;
M00;←① M00;←①
Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110;←Waiting M code
M62;←door open :
M111; M111←Waiting M code
M30; M30;
% %
Workpieces on L and R unit chucks are simultaneously machined by upper
and lower turrets.
↓
After completion of machining, the door opens automatically, then the opera-
tions stop by M00 (indicated with mark ①) on upper and lower unit pro-
gram. For STS series, L and R unit doors are simultaneously opened.
↓
Operator unloads a finished part from R unit chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press the door close button. For STS series, L
and R unit doors are simultaneously closed. Hold down the button until the
door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on operation panel, then press the CYCLE START but-
ton.
↓
Workpiece transfer is executed. Then the door is automatically opens, and
operation stops.
↓
Operator loads a workpiece material on L unit chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press the door close button. For STS series, L
and R unit doors are simultaneously closed. Hold down the button until the
door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on operation panel, then press the CYCLE START but-
tons.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).
At the end of the cycle, a workpiece having been machined on L unit
chuck is left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining is to be
performed on the next day, the machined workpiece shall be left on the
chuck. If the same machining is no more performed, another program to

27-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

complete the machined workpiece is required.

The workpiece to be loaded on R unit chuck for the first cycle start
should be machined with another program beforehand, or should be a
dummy workpiece.
• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine
Memory restart mode operation
Upper turret Lower turret
O1234; O1234;
M62;←Door open :
M58;←Workpiece loading by robot : *(M58:special command)
M63;←Door close
M100; M100;←Waiting M code
: :
L/R unit machining program L/R unit machining program
: :
M110; M110;←Waiting M code
: M62;←Door open
: (Special M code)→ M58;←Finished part unload
by robot
: M63;←Door close
M111; M111;←Waiting M code
Transfer program Transfer program
M112; M112;←Waiting M code
M30; M30;
% %
The door is automatically opened by M62. For STS series, L and R unit
doors are automatically opened.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to load a workpiece
material on L unit.
↓
The door is automatically closed by M63. For STS series, L and R unit doors
are automatically closed.
↓
Workpieces on L and R units are simultaneously machined by upper and
lower turrets.
↓
After completion of machining, the door is automatically opened by M62.
For STS series, L and R unit doors are automatically opened.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to unload a finished
part on R unit automatically.
↓
The door is automatically closed by M63. For STS series, L and R unit doors
are automatically closed.
↓
Workpiece transfer is performed.
↓
Program is started at the head of the program.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping no workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).
At the end of the cycle, a workpiece having been machined on L unit is
left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining is to be performed

27-14
C-NA104204-A2205
27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

on the next day, the machined workpiece shall be left on the L chuck. If
the same machining is no more performed, another program to com-
plete the machined workpiece is required.
The workpiece to be loaded on R unit chuck for the first cycle start
should be machined with another program beforehand, or should be a
dummy workpiece.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode.

27-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-5 Program examples for STW, NTX (W), NTXL, JX-250

• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Each unit is operated in memory mode.
L-lower turret Upper tool head R-lower turret
O1234; O1234; O1234;
: : :
L unit machining program L/R unit machining program R unit machining program
: : :
M100P123; M100P123; M100P123;←Waiting M code
M62;←L and R unit door open : :
M101P123; M101P123; M101P123;←Waiting M code
M00;←① M00;←① M00;←①
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M110P123; M110P123; M110P123;←Waiting M code
: : M62;←L and R door open
M111P123; M111P123; M111P123;←Waiting M code
M30; M30; M30;
% % %
Workpieces on L and R unit chucks are simultaneously machined by upper
tool head, L-lower turret and R-lower turret in the following combinations:
upper tool head and L-lower turret for L unit workpiece; upper tool head and
R-lower turret for R unit workpiece.
↓
After completion of machining, L and R unit doors are opened automatically,
then each turret operation stop by M00 (indicated with mark ①) on each
program.
↓
Operator unloads a finished part from R unit chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press the door close button together with ENA-
BLE switch. Hold down the button until the doors are completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on operation panel, then press the CYCLE START but-
ton.
↓
Workpiece transfer is executed. Then L and R unit doors are automatically
opened, and operation stops.
↓
Operator loads a workpiece material on L unit chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press the door close button together with ENA-
BLE switch. Held down the button until the doors are completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on operation panel, then press the CYCLE START but-
tons.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).
At the end of the cycle, a workpiece having been machined on L unit
chuck is left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining is to be
performed on the next day, the machined workpiece shall be left on the
chuck. If the same machining is no more performed, another program to
complete the machined workpiece is required.
The workpiece to be loaded on R unit chuck for the first cycle start

27-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

should be machined with another program beforehand, or should be a

dummy workpiece.
• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine
Each unit is operated in memory restart mode.
L-lower turret Upper tool head R-lower turret

O1234; O1234; O1234;

M62;←L and R unit door open : :
M58;←Workpiece material load by robot (special command) :
M63;L and R unit door close : :
M100P123; M100P123; M100P123;←Waiting M code
: :
L unit machining program L/R unit machining program R unit machining program
: : :
M110P123; M110P123; M110P123;←Waiting M code
: : M62;←Door open
: : M58;←Finished part unload :
: by robot (special command)
: : M63;←Door close
M111P123; M111P123; M111P123;←Waiting M code
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M112P123; M112P123; M112P123;←Waiting M code
M30; M30; M30;
% % %
L and R doors are automatically opened by M62.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to load a workpiece
material on L unit.
↓
L and R doors are automatically closed by M63.
↓
Workpieces on L and R unit chucks are simultaneously machined by upper
tool head, L-lower turret and R-lower turret in the following combinations:
upper tool head and L-lower turret for L unit workpiece; upper tool head and
R-lower turret for R unit workpiece.
↓
After completion of machining, L and R unit doors are automatically opened
by M62.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to unload a finished
part on R unit automatically.
↓
L and R unit doors are automatically closed by M63.
↓
Workpiece transfer is performed.
↓
Program is started at the head of the program.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping no workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).
At the end of the cycle, a workpiece having been machined on L unit is
left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining is to be performed
on the next day, the machined workpiece shall be left on the L chuck. If
the same machining is no more performed, another program to com-

27-17
C-NA104204-A2205
27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

plete the machined workpiece is required.

The workpiece to be loaded on R unit chuck for the first cycle start
should be machined with another program beforehand, or should be a
dummy workpiece.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode.

27-18
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-6 Program examples for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series

• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Each unit is operated in memory mode.
L-turret R-turret Lower turret
O1234; O1234; O1234;
: : :
L unit machining program R unit machining program L/R unit machining program
: : :
M100P123; M100P123; M100P123;←Waiting M code
: : M62;←L and R door open
M101P123; M101P123; M101P123;←Waiting M code
M00;←① M00;←① M00;←①
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M110P123; M110P123; M110P123;←Waiting M code
: : M62;←L and R door open
M111P123; M111P123; M111P123;←Waiting M code
M30; M30; M30;
% % %
Workpieces on L and R unit chucks are simultaneously machined by L-turret,
R-turret and Lower turret in the following combinations: L-turret and Lower
turret for L unit workpiece; R-turret and Lower turret for R unit workpiece.
↓
After completion of machining, L and R unit doors are opened automatically,
then each turret operation stop by M00 (indicated with mark ①) on each
program. For WTS, L and R unit doors are automatically closed by M63
command from lower turret program.
↓
Operator unloads a finished part from R unit chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press the door close button together with ENA-
BLE switch. Hold down the button until the doors are completely closed. For
WTS, selecting lower turret enables to close L and R unit doors simultane-
ously with that operation. Selecting L-turret or R-turret enables to close the
corresponding door with that operation.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on operation panel, then press the CYCLE START but-
ton.
↓
Workpiece transfer is executed. For WTS, then L and R unit doors are auto-
matically opened by M62 command from lower turret program, and opera-
tion stops.
↓
Operator loads a workpiece material on L unit chuck.
↓
Select a manual mode, then press the door close button together with ENA-
BLE switch. Hold down the button until the doors are completely closed.
Selecting lower turret enables to close L and R unit doors simultaneously
with that operation. Selecting L-turret or R-turret enables to close the corre-
sponding door with that operation.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on operation panel, then press the CYCLE START but-
tons.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping

27-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).

At the end of the cycle, a workpiece having been machined on L unit
chuck is left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining is to be
performed on the next day, the machined workpiece shall be left on the
chuck. If the same machining is no more performed, another program to
complete the machined workpiece is required.
The workpiece to be loaded on R unit chuck for the first cycle start
should be machined with another program beforehand, or should be a
dummy workpiece.
• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine
Each unit is operated in memory restart mode.
L-turret R-turret Lower turret

O1234; O1234; O1234;

: : M62;←L and R door open
: Workpiece material load by robot (special command)→M58;
: : M63;←L and R door close
M100P123; M100P123; M100P123;←Waiting M code
: : :
L unit machining program R unit machining program L/R unit machining program
: : :
M110P123; M110P123; M110P123;←Waiting M code
: : M62;←L and R door open
: : M58;←Finished part unload :
: by robot (special command)
: : M63;←L and R door close
M111P123; M111P123; M111P123;←Waiting M code
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M112P123; M112P123; M112P123;←Waiting M code
M30; M30; M30;
% % %
For WTS, L and R doors are automatically opened by M62 command from
lower turret program.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to load a workpiece
material on L unit.
↓
For WTS, L and R doors are automatically closed by M63 command from
lower turret program.
↓
Workpieces on L and R unit chucks are simultaneously machined by L-turret,
R-turret and Lower turret in the following combinations: L-turret and Lower
turret for L unit workpiece; R-turret and Lower turret for R unit workpiece.
↓
After completion of machining, For WTS, L and R unit doors are automati-
cally opened by M62 command from lower turret program.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to unload a finished
part from R unit automatically.
↓
For WTS series, L and R unit doors are automatically closed by M63 com-
mand from lower turret program.
↓
Workpiece transfer is performed.
↓

27-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

Program is started at the head of the program.

NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping no workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).
At the end of the cycle, a workpiece having been machined on L unit is
left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining is to be performed
on the next day, the machined workpiece shall be left on the L chuck. If
the same machining is no more performed, another program to com-
plete the machined workpiece is required.
The workpiece to be loaded on R unit chuck for the first cycle start
should be machined with another program beforehand, or should be a
dummy workpiece.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode.

27-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-7 Program examples for WTW with a partition

• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Each unit is operated in memory mode. M75 (R unit start command) is not
used but CYCLE START buttons on L unit and R unit are used.
L-upper turret L-lower turret R-upper turret R-lower turret
O1234; O1234; O1234; O1234;
: : : :
Machining Machining : :
: : : :
M100; M100; M120; M120; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M840; : M840; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
: : M32;←Partition open:
M841; : M841; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M101; M101; M121; M121; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110; M130; M130; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M842; : M842; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
: : M33;←Partition close:
M843; : M843; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M111; M111; M131; M131; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M62;←L door open: : :
M112; M112; : : ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M30; M30; : :
% % Machining program Machining program
: :
M132; M132; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M62;←R door open :
M133; M133; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M30; M30;
% %

27-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

After completion of machining on L unit, the machined workpiece is trans-

ferred to R unit, then L unit door is automatically opened with operation
stopped.
↓
Operator loads a workpiece material on L unit chuck while R unit machining
is continued. Workpiece change is enabled since the partition divides L unit
from R unit.
↓
Select L unit and a manual mode, then press the door close button. Hold
down the button until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on L unit operation panel, then press the CYCLE
START button.
↓
After workpiece transfer, the workpiece is machined on R unit. Then after
completion of machining, R unit door is automatically opened with the oper-
ation stopped.
↓
Operator unloads a finished part from R unit chuck while L unit machining is
continued. Workpiece change is enabled since the partition divides L unit
from R unit.
↓
Select R unit and a manual mode, then press the door close button. Hold
down the button until the doors are completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on R unit operation panel, then press the CYCLE
START button on R unit.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
no workpiece.
At the end of the cycle, a finished part is left on the R unit chuck.
Manually unload the finished part by operator.

27-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine

L unit is operated in memory restart mode, and R unit in memory mode.
Use M75 (R unit start command) from L unit program.
L-upper turret L-lower turret R-upper turret R-lower turret
O1234; O1234; O1234; O1234;
M100; M100; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
M62: : : : ←L unit door open
M58;←Workpiece material load by robot (special command) :
M63: : : : ←L unit door close
M101; M101; : : ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
: : : :
Machining Machining : :
: : : :
M75: : : : ←R unit start
M110; M110; M120; M120; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
M840; : M840; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
: : M32;←Partition open:
M841; : M841; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M111; M111; M121; M121; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M112; M112; M122; M122; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
M842; : M842; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
: : M33;←Partition close:
M843; : M843; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M113; M113; M123; M123; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
M30; M30; : :
% % Machining program Machining program
: :
M130; M130; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
M62;←R door open :
M58;←Finished part unload by robot (special command)
M63;←R door close :
M131; M131; ←Waiting M code
for upper and lower
M30; M30;
% %

27-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

<L unit program>

L unit door is automatically opened by M62 command.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to load a workpiece
material on L unit.
↓
L unit door is automatically closed by M63 command.
↓
Machining is started.
↓
After completion of machining, R unit is started to transfer the workpiece
from L unit to R unit.
↓
Program is started at the head of the program.

<R unit program>

Workpiece transfer is performed after R unit start command from L unit pro-
gram.
↓
Machining is started.
↓
R unit door is automatically opened by M62 command.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to unload a finished
part from R unit.
↓
R unit door is automatically closed by M63 command.
↓
The automatic operation is stopped by M30 until R unit start command is
given from L unit program.
NOTE: For the first start of L unit program, automatic cycle should be started
with both L chuck and R chuck clamping no workpiece material.
At the end of the cycle, no workpieces are left on both L and R unit
chucks.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode on L unit operation panel.

27-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

27-5-8 Program examples for WTW without a partition

• In the case of workpiece change by operator
Each unit is operated in memory restart mode. M75 (R unit start command)
is not used but CYCLE START buttons on L unit and R unit are used.
L-upper turret L-lower turret R-upper turret R-lower turret
O1234; O1234; O1234; O1234;
: : : :
Machining Machining : :
: : : :
M100; M100; M120; M120; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M840; : M840; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
: : M62;←R unit door open
M841; : M841; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M101; M101; M121; M121; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M00←① M00←① M00←① M00←①
M102; M102; M122; M122; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110; M130; M130; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M842; : M842; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M62;←L unit door open : :
M843; : M843; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M111; M111; M131; M131; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M00←② M00←② M00←② M00←②
M30; M30; : : ←Back to head of
program
% Machining program Machining program
: :
M30; M30; ←Back to head of
program
% %

27-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

After completion of machining on L and R units, R unit door is automatically

opened, and operation is stopped at M00 (indicated with ①) in L and R unit
program.
↓
Operator unloads a finished part from R unit chuck.
↓
Select R unit and a manual mode, then press the door close button. Hold
down the button until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on both L and R unit operation panels, then press the
CYCLE START buttons on L and R unit operation panels.
↓
Workpiece transfer is performed. Then L unit door is automatically opened,
and operation is stopped at M00 (indicated with ②) in L and R unit pro-
grams.
↓
Operator loads a workpiece material on L unit chuck.
↓
Select L unit and a manual mode, then press the door close button. Hold
down the button until the door is completely closed.
↓
Select AUTO. mode on both L and R unit operation panels, then press the
CYCLE START button on L and R unit operation panel.
NOTE: For the first start of L and R unit programs, automatic cycle should be
started with L chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit
chuck clamping no workpiece.
When operation stops at M00 (indicated with ①) in the first cycle of
the program, manually close the R unit door immediately since no fin-
ished workpiece is left on R unit chuck, then press CYCLE START but-
tons on L and R unit operation panels.
At the end of the cycle, a finished part is left on the R unit chuck.
Manually unload the finished part by operator.
To stop the cycle, switch memory restart mode to memory mode on L
and R unit operation panels when program stops at M00 indicated with
②. At this moment, start automatic cycle for L and R units without
loading a workpiece material on L unit chuck.

27-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

• In the case of automatic workpiece change by robot in front of machine

Each unit is operated in memory restart mode.
M75 (R unit start command) is not used.
L-upper turret L-lower turret R-upper turret R-lower turret
O1234; O1234; O1234; O1234;
: : : :
Machining Machining : :
: : : :
M100; M100; M120; M120; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M840; : M840; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
: : M62: : ←R unit door open
: : M58;←Finished part unload by robot (special command)
: : M63; : ←R unit door close
M841; : M841; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M101; M101; :M121; M121: ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program Transfer program
M110; M110; M130; M130; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M842; : M842; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M62;←L unit door open : :
M58;←Workpiece material load by robot (special command)
M63;←L unit door close : :
M843; : M843; : ←Waiting M code
for L and R units
M111; M111; M131; M131; ←Waiting M code
for upper and
lower
M30; M30; : : ←Back to head of
program
% % Machining program Machining program
: :
M30; M30; ←Back to head of
program
% %

27-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

Workpieces on L and R unit chucks are simultaneously machined with tur-

rets.
↓
After completion of machining, R unit door is automatically opened by M62
command.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to unload a finished
part from R unit.
↓
R unit door is automatically closed by M63 command.
↓
Workpiece transfer is performed.
↓
L unit door is automatically opened by M62 command.
↓
Robot operation is started by M58 (special command) to load a workpiece
material on L unit chuck.
↓
L unit door is automatically closed by M63 command.
↓
While machining is started on R unit, L unit program is started at the head of
the program to start machining.
NOTE: For the first start of program, automatic cycle should be started with L
chuck clamping a workpiece material, and with R unit chuck clamping
a workpiece having been machined on L unit (or dummy workpiece).
At the first start of the program, the robot in front of the machine takes
out the workpiece from R unit chuck without machining it.
At the end of the cycle, a workpiece material is left on L unit chuck,
and finished part is left on the R unit chuck. When the same machining
is to be performed on the next day, the workpieces shall be left on L and
R unit chucks. If the same machining is no more performed, manually
unload the workpieces from chucks by operator.
To stop the cycle at the cycle end, switch the memory restart mode to
memory mode on L unit operation panel, then after the last workpiece is
transferred from R unit chuck to L unit chuck, switch the memory restart
mode to memory mode on R unit operation panel.

27-29
C-NA104204-A2205
 27 AUTOMATIC DOOR

MEMO

27-30
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-1 Correct Chucking Check Display

(d)

(a)-1 (e)

(b)

(a)-2 (c)

(1) Set up
(a) ON/OFF soft key
In the correct chucking check mode, every time this soft key ((a)-2) is
pressed, this switch turns ON and OFF respectively.
A lamp ((a)-1) light up when the switch is set to ON.
(b) RETRY (Count / Preset)
When the judgment of a correct chucking check is “NG” (Not OK),
operation is repeated to the number of times set up.
(Setting range : 0 to 10)
(c) CLR (Clear) soft key
If a clear key and an execution key are pressed, a retry counter is
cleared to zero.
(2) Judgment
When a judgment result is “OK”, OK lamp ((d)) blinks.
When a judgment result is “NG”, NG lamp ((e)) blinks.

28-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-2 Manual Correct Chucking Check

(1) Operation
Correct chucking check judges by check air turning on after a manual chuck
clamp.
Alarm is displayed when a judgment is NG.
After a manual check a clamp, a push on a reset key cancels alarm.
Automatic starting cannot be carried out during an alarm display.

NOTE: In a manual case, a retry counter is not counted.

The chucking status is being monitored while machining. If the chucking

status is NG while machining, all the turrets stop in the next M01 block.
An alarm will occur if the correct chucking signal turns OFF automatically
and the signal stays ON after a manual chuck clamp.
The automatic cycle start is not performed as long as the alarm is displayed.

(2) Set up
1. After manual chuck clamp commands, time until a chucking check sole-
noid valve turns on and air comes out is set up.
• D4134 (L side spindle)
• D5134 (Sub spindle / MATA-BEI or R side spindle)
Standard setting value 125 (1 sec.)

2. After manual chuck clamp commands, time until a chucking check air
comes out and check judgment is set up.
• D4136 (L side spindle)
• D5136 (Sub spindle / MATA-BEI or R side spindle)
Standard setting value 250 (2 sec.)

3. After manual chuck unclamp commands, time until a chucking check air
comes out and check judgment is set up.
• D4242 (L side spindle)
• D5242 (Sub spindle / MATA-BEI or R side spindle)
Standard setting value 250 (2 sec.)

4. (For double pipe specification, this setting is necessary.) After manual

chuck unclamp commands, time until a chucking lubrication changeover
valve turns ON and OFF is set up.
• D4292 (L side spindle)
• D5292 (Sub spindle / MATA-BEI or R side spindle)
Standard setting value 20 (20 sec.)

5. (For double pipe specification, this setting is necessary.) After automatic

chuck unclamp commands, time until a chucking lubrication changeover
valve turns ON and OFF is set up.
• D4294 (L side spindle)
• D5294 (Sub spindle / MATA-BEI or R side spindle)
Standard setting value 4 (4 sec.)

28-2
C-NA104204-A2205
28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

6. (For double pipe specification, this setting is necessary.) After automatic

chuck unclamp commands, time until a chucking lubrication changeover
valve turns OFF and correct chucking signal OFF confirmation judge-
ment is set up.
• D4240 (L side spindle)
• D5240 (Sub spindle / MATA-BEI or R side spindle)
Standard setting value 125 (1 sec.)

NOTE: Turn the lubricator knob so that the lubricator can drip a drop at
the time until a chuck opens and closes during machining cycle.
When it is difficult to adjust the volume by the lubricator, turn
the speed controller attached to the the primary side of the lu-
bricator.

28-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-3 M Codes
Insert M460 and M860, M461 and M861 in the program, although the check air is
always ON.
Chucking status is monitored while machining, so insert M461 and M861 when
the machining programs is executed to the end.

M460 : Sub spindle / MATA-BEI side,

a correct chucking check solenoid valve : ON
M860 : L side,
a correct chucking check solenoid valve : ON
A solenoid valve turns on by the M code commands, and air comes out.

M461 : Sub spindle / MATA-BEI side,

a correct chucking check solenoid valve : OFF
M861 : L side,
a correct chucking check solenoid valve : OFF
A solenoid valve turns off by the M code commands, and air stops.

M462 : Sub spindle / MATA-BEI side,

a correct chucking check judgment
M862 : L side,
a correct chucking check judgment
Perform the judgment of a chucking check by the M code commands after M460 /
M860 code.

M463 : Sub spindle / MATA-BEI side,

a correct chucking signal OFF confirmation
M863 : L side,
a correct chucking signal OFF confirmation
Confirm that chucking check signal is OFF by the M code commands after M460
/ M860 code.

M465 : Sub spindle / MATA-BEI side,

Feed hold by MATA-BEI correct chucking check,
“NG” judgment
M865 : L side,
Feed hold by MATA-BEI correct chucking check,
“NG” judgment
When the retry counter counts up M465 / M865 commands is executed to stop
machine in the feed hold.

28-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-4 Correct Chucking Check and Transfer Programming

It is an example of a program in the case of transferring a work to the R side
(MATA-BEI spindle) from the L side (main spindle)
(When chucking solenoid valve is kept ON.)
NOTE: R side (MATA-BEI side) spindle, correct chucking check “NG”
signal D963.0
R side (MATA-BEI side) spindle , correct chucking check retry
count up signal R4299.0

[L side or upper side programming] [R side or upper side programming]

:Transfer preparation (positioning etc.) :Transfer position (positioning etc.)
M100; Waiting M100; Waiting
M463; Chucking signal
OFF confirmation
N100; N100 N100; N100
M460; Correct chucking
check solenoid valve ON
:Moves to a transfer position
M50; Chuck closes
G04U0.1.; Dwelling
G04U0.1.; Dwelling
M462; Correct chucking
check judgment
G4U1.; Dwelling
M101; Waiting M101; Waiting
G471D963.0Q1.I200.; G471D963.0Q1.I200.;
(D963.0=1, Correct chucking check (D963.0=1, Correct chucking check
“NG” judgment, go to N200 ) “NG” judgment, go to N200 )
GOTO400; Go to N400 GOTO400; Go to N400
(D963.1=1, Correct chucking check (D963.1=1, Correct chucking check
“OK” judgment, go to N400 ) “OK” judgment, go to N400 )
N200; N200;
M51; Chuck opens
G04U1.; Dwelling
M105; Waiting M105; Waiting
G471R4299.0Q1.I300.; G471R4299.0Q1.I300.;
(R4299.0=1 Correct chucking check, (R4299.0=1 Correct chucking check,
retry counter count up, go to N300 ) retry counter count up, go to N300 )
:R side spindle or MATA-BEI side spindle
retreat
M106; Waiting M106; Waiting
M20; Fixed air blow: ON M420; Fixed air blow: ON
G04U2.; Dwelling G04U2.; Dwelling
M21; Fixed air blow: OFF M421; Fixed air blow: OFF
M107; Waiting M107; Waiting
GOTO100.; Go to N100 GOTO100.; Go to N100
N300; N300;
M108; Waiting M108; Waiting
M465; Correct chucking
check “NG”
judgment
Machine feed hold

28-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

N400; N400;
M11; Chuck opens
: Machining program : Machining program
M461; Correct chucking
check solenoid valve OFF
M30; M30;
% %

28-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-5 PMC Parameter

D4013 Correct chucking check unit
0: Invalid
1: Valid (L side)
2: Valid (R side)

D4514 Additional function for L-side correct chucking check

0 bit: Air is not always ON.
1 bit: Correct chucking check is invalid while machining.
2 bit: Correct chucking signal OFF confirmation is not performed
when chuck is open.
3bit: M01 Optional stop will not be effective even if the chucking
status is “NG” while machining.
4 bit: How to reset the “NG” status of the chucking status while
machining.
(0: Chuck Open + RESET key)
(1: Chuck Open or RESET key)

D4599 L-side chucking lubrication changeover valve (For double pipe speci-
fication, this setting is necessary.)
0: Invalid
1: Valid

D5514 Additional function for R-side correct chucking check

0 bit: Air is not always ON.
1 bit: Correct chucking check is invalid while machining.
2 bit: Correct chucking signal OFF confirmation is not performed
when chuck is open.
3bit: M01 Optional stop will not be effective even if the chucking
status is “NG” while machining.
4 bit: How to reset the “NG” status of the chucking status while
machining.
(0: Chuck Open + RESET key)
(1: Chuck Open or RESET key)

D5599 R-side chucking lubrication changeover valve (For double pipe speci-
fication, this setting is necessary.)
0: Invalid
1: Valid

28-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-6 PMC Timer

D4134 Delay timer for L-side manual correct chucking check start
Standard setting value: 125 (1 sec.)

D4136 Delay timer for L-side manual correct chucking check judgment
Standard setting value: 250 (2 sec.)

D4240 Delay timer for L-side automatic correct chucking check OFF confirmation judgment (For double
pipe specification, this setting is necessary.)
Standard setting: 125 (1 sec.)

D4242 Delay timer for L-side manual correct chucking check OFF confirmation judgment (For double pipe
specification, this setting is necessary.)
Standard setting: 250 (2 sec.)

D4292 L-side correct chucking check changeover valve OFF timer

Standard setting value: 20 (20 sec.)

D4294 L-side automatic chucking lubrication changeover valve OFF timer (For double pipe specification,
this setting is necessary.)
Standard setting value: 4 (4 sec.)

D5134 Delay timer for R-side manual correct chucking check start
Standard setting value: 125 (1 sec.)

D5136 Delay timer for R-side manual correct chucking check judgment
Standard setting value: 250 (2 sec.)

D5240 Delay timer for R-side automatic correct chucking check OFF confirmation judgment (For double
pipe specification, this setting is necessary.)
Standard setting: 125 (1 sec.)

D5242 Delay timer for R-side manual correct chucking check OFF confirmation judgment (For double
pipe specification, this setting is necessary.)
Standard setting: 250 (2 sec.)

D5292 R-side correct chucking check changeover valve OFF timer

Standard setting value: 20 (20 sec.)

D5294 R-side automatic chucking lubrication changeover valve OFF timer (For double pipe specification,
this setting is necessary.)
Standard setting value: 4 (4 sec.)

28-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-7 Alarm
A14.0 CHUCKING JUDGMENT, "NG"
L unit chucking check judgment results in NG. L unit is stopped in the feed hold state
by M865.
The followings are considered as the cause:
1. Chucking error.
2. Chips are caught between the chuck and the workpiece.
After removing the cause, clear the retry counter to "0".

A18.0 CHUCKING JUDGMENT, "NG"

R unit chucking check judgment results in NG. L unit is stopped in the feed hold state
by M465.
The followings are considered as the cause:
1. Chucking error.
2. Chips are caught between the chuck and the workpiece.
After removing the cause, clear the retry counter to "0".

A169 CHUCKING CHECK ERR. DURING MACHINING

The chucking check results in NG during the machining. The machine stops in optional
stop.
Check the followings.
1. Work is shifted during machining.
2. Chucking check pressure is not adjusted correctly.
Press the RESET button to cancel the alarm.

A170 CHUCKING CHECK SIGNAL NOT OFF

The chuck opens, but the chucking check signal is not OFF. The machine stops in feed
hold.
Check the followings.
1. Chip is clogged in air jet of chucking check.
2. Chucking check pressure is not adjusted correctly.
Press the RESET button to cancel the alarm.

Operation cannot be continued in either case. Also, it is not possible to start the
cycle operation.
Stop the machine operation by pressing the RESET key and then remove the
workpiece.
The alarm can be canceled by pressing the RESET button.

28-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 28 WORKPIECE CORRECT CHUCKING CHECK

28-8 Warning
W336 CHUCKING CHECK RETRY, “NG”
The number of times to retry the chucking check operation at the time
when the chucking check results in NG (not OK) reached its preset val-
ue. Press the RESET button to cancel the warning.

28-10
C-NA104204-A2205
29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE)

(STW/STS40)
29-1 M Code
M377 R ;
R: Number of custom macro variable to which drill breakage signal is out-
putted.
Making a M377 command checks if the laser beam of transmission sensor is
intercepted by drill or not.
• If not intercepted, which is judged as drill breakage, ”1” is outputted to the
variable, and the program proceeds to the next block.
If an argument ”R” is not specified, the operation stops in the feed hold
state at M01 block to generate an alarm.
• If intercepted, which is not judged as drill breakage, ”0” is outputted to the
variable, and the program proceeds to the next block.

29-2 Programming
There are two methods of making a drill breakage detection command available:
(1) making a M377 command after moving the tool to an arbitrary position. Select
either method depending on the use required; (2) making a command while ATC
cycle is running.
(1) Making a M377 command after moving the tool to the specified position.
Making a M377 command after moving the tool the specified position per-
forms drill breakage detecting operation as shown in the program example
(1).
When drill breakage is detected, the operation is stopped in the feed hold
state at M01 block to generate an alarm. Specifying R command in M377
block outputs drill breakage signal to custom macro variable. (Drill breakage
signal ”1” indicates that drill is broken; signal ”0” indicates that drill is not
broken.) Specifying an argument ”R” shall not stop the program at M01
block with an alarm when drill breakage is detected.
Use the following method (2) if drill breakage detecting operation is required
when ATC cycle is running.

NOTE: If an argument ”R” is not specified, machine operation shall be stopped

in the feed hold at M01 block to generate an alarm when drill breakage
is detected. If drill breakage is detected although the drill is not broken,
check if the drill is lased in position. Make sure of the selected axis and
the direction before moving it.

29-1
C-NA104204-A2205
29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

Program example (1)

:
:
G28 U0 W0 Y0 ;Home position return
M968 ;ATC shutter open
G30 P4 B−90. ;B-axis 4th home position return
G30 P4 U0 V0 ;X and Y-axis 4th home position return
G00 W___. ;Z axis move to the detecting position (specified
position)
G04 U0.1 ;Dwell
M377 R500. ;Drill breakage detection command
(Outputting drill breakage signal to #500)
G28 W0 ;Z-axis home return
M969 ;ATC shutter close
M01 ;(If detecting a breakage when an argument ”R” is not
specified, operation stops at this block with an alarm)
:
:

29-2
C-NA104204-A2205
29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

(2) Making a drill breakage detection command while ATC cycle is running
Specifying an argument ”W” in the block of ATC cycle command ”G340”
automatically performs drill breakage detecting operation while ATC cycle is
running. Drill breakage detection is performed for the tool currently being
mounted on the upper tool spindle before returning the tool to the magazine
(before calling a next tool).

• Programming
G340 T___. [ W___. R___. ]
• Argument ”W”
Specify the position where tool is lased as shown below by the distance
from the tool nose to the lased point. Specifying an argument W in
G340 block performs positioning to the specified position right before
Z-axis move to the 4th home position, then M76 is commanded to exe-
cute drill breakage detecting operation.
If an argument W is not specified in G340 block, only normal ATC cy-
cle operation is performed (drill breakage detection is not performed).

• Argument ”R”
Designate the custom macro variable to which drill breakage signal is
outputted. When a breakage is detected, the machine operation shall be
stopped in the feed hold with an alarm. Specifying an argument ”R”
outputs ”1” to the custom macro variable when a breakage is detected,
and proceeds the program to the next block (”0” when a breakage is not
found). Therefore machine operation shall not be stopped by an alarm
although a drill breakage is detected.
NOTE: The Z-axis position when drill breakage detecting operation is per-
formed is determined by W value and tool offset (both position and
wear) specified. Please note the following cautions.

• For specifying W value following G340, be sure to specify it after tool

offset is read. If the offset is being cancelled, an alarm A743 ”TOOL
OFFSET COMMAND ERROR” occurs.

• It is necessary to preset the distance between B-axis rotation center

and tool nose in diameter value for tool position offset X. (For the
details, see the Chapter 24 in programming manual.)
If a wrong value is preset to the tool position offset X, the Z-axis cor-
rect position at drill breakage detection cannot be calculated.

29-3
C-NA104204-A2205
29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

• It is possible to perform fine adjustments for the Z-axis position at

drill breakage detection by setting the following sequence parameter
in the case that the sensor mounting position is changed, or in the
case of adjusting the drill breakage detecting position. This is the
parameter for shifting lased position that is effective for all the tools.

• D7116 : Z Shift amount for drill breakage

detecting position in ATC cycle
• D7120 : X Shift amount for drill breakage
detecting position in ATC cycle
(From 4th home position-X)
Setting unit : 0.001mm (1000 = 1mm)
Setting range : ±99999999

• In the sub micron specification (ISC), the setting unit is “0.0001

mm (10000: 1 mm).
NOTE: When it is judged as drill breakage, the machine stops in the feed hold
at the drill breakage detecting position to generate an alarm. Check if
the tool is correctly lased or not, then return the Z-axis to the machine
zero position by pulse handle in order to check the tool condition. When
moving Z-axis, be careful about the axis direction to be selected.
NOTE: Drill breakage detection is performed when each axis (X, Y and B). is at
its 4th home position. If breakage detection is required when those axes
are not at their 4th position or when ATC cycle is not running, follow
the step (1) ”Making a M377 command after moving the tool to the
specified position”.
NOTE: For the details of G340, see the Chapter 23 in Programming manual.
NOTE: Specifying W command in G340 block is available for NT NURSE
V5.20 and higher. R command is available for NT NURSE V5.34 and
higher.

29-4
C-NA104204-A2205
29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

Program example (2)

:
G340 T0101 A02. ; T0101 Tool change & T02 Next tool preparation
: Drill breakage detection is not executed
(Machining by T0101)
:
G340 T0202 A03. W3. R500 ; T0101 Drill breakage detection & T0202 Tool change
& T03 Next tool preparation
When drill breakage is detected, output ”1” to #500,
and an alarm does not occur.
:
(Machining by T0202)
:
G340 T0303. A04. W3. ; T0202 Drill breakage detection & T0303 Tool change
& T04 Next tool preparation
When drill breakage is detected, the machine stops
with an alarm.
:

29-3 Related Parameters

• ES101 : Drill breakage detection 0: Invalid/①: Valid
• D7116 : Z shift amount for drill breakage detecting position
in ATC cycle

29-5
C-NA104204-A2205
29 DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTION (TRANSMISSION SENSOR TYPE) (STW/STS40)

MEMO

29-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

30-1 M Code
Upper turret Lower turret
Both are required for upper and lower turrets.
Ejecting cycle valid M401 M401
Insert just before M30.

If M401 is not commanded, the following reference address is not operated.

30-2 Reference Address
Upper turret Lower turret
The address is set zero until the first M30 is
First cycle R3080.1 R4080.1
read. It is set 1 after the second cycles.
Last cycle R3080.2 R4080.2 The address is set 1 only at the last ejection.

30-3 Branch Program

G471 R3080.1 Q0I1000. ; ← This branch programming means ”if
first cycle, jump to N1000.”.
G471 R3080.2 Q1 I2000. ; ← This branch programming means ”if
the last cycle, jump to N2000.”.
Be sure to give a period mark (.) for the jump sequence number
specified by I.

Example) I5. I1000.

30-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

30-4 Cycle Pattern and Procedure for Creating Program

(1) Create the NC program with the following composition for upper/lower tur-
ret.
O1234 ;

Loading

L-unit machining
←L-unit/R-unit machining is
R-unit machining
arbitrary.
Unloading Whichever machining is sufficient.

Transfer

M30 ;
%
(2) Insert M401and branch program into the NC program created with the above
composition.

O 1234(UPPER) ; ←NC program for upper turret

★ N1 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I3. ; ←If last cycle, skip loading.
N2 Loading

★ N3 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I5. ; ←If last cycle, skip L-unit

machining.
N4 L-unit machining

★ N5 G471 R3080.1 Q0 I7. ; ←If first cycle, skip R-unit

machining.
N6 R-unit machining

★ N7 G471 R3080.1 Q0 I9. ; ←If first cycle, skip unloading.

N8 Unloading

★ N9 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I11. ; ←If last cycle, skip transfer.

N10 Transfer

N11 ;
★ M401 ;
M30 ;
%

30-2
C-NA104204-A2205
30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

O1234(LOWER) ; ←NC program for lower turret

★ N1 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I3. ; ←If last cycle, skip loading.
N2 Loading

★ N3 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I5. ; ←If last cycle, skip L-unit

machining.
N4 L-unit machining

★ N5 G471 R4080.1 Q0 I7. ; ←If first cycle, skip R-unit

machining.
N6 R-unit machining

★ N7 G471 R4080.1 Q0 I9. ; ←If first cycle, skip unloading.

N8 Unloading

★ N9 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I11. ; ←If last cycle, skip transfer.

N10 Transfer

N11 ;
★ M401 ;
M30 ;
%

The NC programs for upper/lower turret have different reference addresses, but
the compositions are completely the same.

30-3
C-NA104204-A2205
30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

(3) When the same jump continues, programs can be summarized.

As for the above example, the following NC program is simpler.
O1234(UPPER) ; ←NC program for upper turret
★ N1 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I5. ; ←If last cycle, skip loading and
L-unit machining
N2 Loading

N4 L-unit machining

★ N5 G471 R3080.1 Q0 I9. ; ←If first cycle, skip R-unit

machining and unloading.
N6 R-unit machining

N8 Unloading

★ N9 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I11. ; ←If last cycle, skip transfer.

N10 Transfer

N11 ;
★ M401 ;
M30 ;
%

O1234(LOWER) ; ←NC program for lower turret

★ N1 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I5. ; ←If last cycle, skip loading and
L-unit machining
N2 Loading

N4 L-unit machining

★ N5 G471 R4080.1 Q0 I9. ; ←If first cycle, skip R-unit

machining and unloading.
N6 R-unit machining

N8 Unloading

★ N9 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I11. ; ←If last cycle, skip transfer.

N10 Transfer

N11 ;
★ M401 ;
M30 ;
%

30-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

30-5 Flow of Operation Cycle

As for the above example, the following operation cycle can be performed.
Press CYCLE START button after MEM. : UPPER/LOWER TURRET mode is
selected and MEMORY RESTART switch is set to ON.
A. Bar loading
↓
Machining L-unit workpiece with upper/lower turret
↓
(R-unit machining and unloading are not performed.)
↓
Transfer
↓
Read first M30 and restart from the beginning
↓
B. Bar loading
↓
Machining L-unit workpiece with upper/lower turret
↓
Machining R-unit workpiece with upper/lower turret
↓
Unloading
↓
Transfer
↓
Read M30 and restart from the beginning
↓
Repeat the operation from above mentioned B
↓
Set MEMORY RESTART switch to OFF
Lubricating oil alarm or counting up of work counter is generated.
↓
Read next M30 and restart from the beginning
↓
C. (Loading and L-unit machining are not performed.)
↓
Machining R-unit workpiece with upper/lower turret
↓
Unloading
↓
(Transferring is not performed.)
↓
Read M30 and reset upper/lower turret

30-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

30-6 Program Example: WT150

The following program is the program to perform bar stopper operation/cut-off
machining on upper turret, and perform unloading operation by commanding parts
catcher from lower turret.
For machining, this is the simultaneous machining example that
Machining is the example that performs simultaneous machining of the L-unit
workpiece with upper/lower turret first, and then performs simultaneous machin-
ing of the R-unit workpiece with upper/lower turret.
01234(UPPER MAIN); ←NC program example for upper turret
G28 U0 W0;
G59;
;
;
N1 G471 R3080.2 Q 1I5. (IF LAST CYCLE THEN GOTO N5);
;
N2 G0 X−50.(BAR LOADING);
Z−50.;
M11; Bar stopper
G4 U1.;
M10;
;
N4 G0 Z−100. M428 (L MACHINING WITH LOWER);
M100;
G98 G1 U−10. F500;
G4 U1.; L-unit machining
G0 U10.;
M101;
;
;
N5 G471 R3080.1 Q0 I9. (IF 1ST CYCLE THEN GOTO N9);
;
N6 G0 Z100. M427 (R MACHINIG WITH LOWER);
M110;
G98 G1 U−10. F500;
G4 U1.; R-unit machining
G0 U10.;
M111;
;
N8 G28 U0 (PCA UNLOADING);
G0 Z−150.;
M120; Transfer
M121;
;
;
N9 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I11. (IF LAST CYCLE THEN GOTO N11);
;
N10 G28 U0(TRANSFER);
M130;
M131;
M428;
G0 Z−150.;
G98 G1 U−50. F500;
G4 U1.; Cut-off and transfer
G28 U0;
M132;
M133;
;
N11;

30-6
C-NA104204-A2205
30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

M401;
M30;
%

O1234 (LOWER MAIN); ←NC program example for lower turret

G28 U0 W0;
G59;
;
;
N1 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I5. (IF LAST CYCLE THEN GOTO N5);
;
N4 G0 Z−100. M428 (L MACHINING WITH UPPER);
M100;
G98 G1 U−10. F500;
G4 U1.; L-unit machining
G0 U10.;
M101;
;
;
N5 G471 R4080.1 Q0 I9. (IF 1ST CYCLE THEN GOTO N9);
;
N6 G0 Z100. M427 (R MACHINIG WITH UPPER);
M110;
G98 G1 U−10. F500;
G4 U1.; R-unit machining
G0 U10.;
M111;
;
N8 G28 U0 (PCA UNLOADING);
G0 Z150.;
M120;
M68;
G0 B−100.; Unloading
M51;
G4 U1.;
M69;
M121;
;
;
N9 G471 R4080.2 Q1 I11. (IF LAST CYCLE THEN GOTO N11);
;
N10 G28 U0 (TRANSFER);
M130;
G0 B−200. M428;
G98 G1 B−250. F500;
M50;
G4 U1.; Transfer
M131;
M132;
G28 B0;
M133;
;
N11;
G28 B0;
M401;
M30;
%

30-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 30 EJECTING CYCLE: NTJ/ NTJ-100/WT/WY SERIES

30-7 Precautions
(1) Z-axis coordinate and B-axis coordinate shown in the above program exam-
ple are examples. They are required to change depending on the machine.
(2) When inserting the branch program, be sure of the waiting M code.
If the jump of the waiting M code is mistaken, waiting may be performed
incorrectly.
When jumping the waiting, jump similarly with upper/lower turret.
(3) Insert 2 blocks of EOB or 2 blocks of G4 U0.1; before the block of G471.
This is to prevent pre-reading.

Example 1)
★ ;
★ ;
N1 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I5. (IF LAST CYCLE THEN GOTO N5);

Example 2)
★ G4 U0.1;
★ G4 U0.1;
N1 G471 R3080.2 Q1 I5. (IF LAST CYCLE THEN GOTO N5);

(4) Be sure to give a period mark (.) for the jump sequence number specified by
I.
Example) I5. I1000.

(5) In case that operation check is performed by turning single block and dry run
ON, an alarm ”M code is not completed.” may be generated when the one
head goes to M401 and waits for the opposite head.
In this case, insert waiting M code before M401.
Example) Upper turret Lower turret
; ;
M199; ← → M199;
M401; M401;
M30; M30;
% %
(6) This function can be used for NTM3 and WTS-150 (16iTB).
Reference address is described as follows.
L-upper turret R-upper turret Lower turret
The address is set zero until the first M30 is read. It is
R3080.1 R4080.1 R5080.1
set 1 after the second cycles.
R3080.2 R4080.2 R5080.2 The address is set 1 only at the last ejection.
How to arrange a program is completely the same.

30-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
This is the function that the continuous operation can start from the status of
loading workpiece by specifying G code for jump during the machining program.
This is for the machine with upper/lower two turrets and L/R two spindles.
31-1 Specification
(NOTE1) The following patterns are prepared for this function.
No. Spec. Work change Work flow Comments
Manual Pattern which mounts workpiece material to L-chuck
F1. Standard L→R
operation and unmounts finished part from R-chuck
Manual Pattern which mounts workpiece material to R-chuck
F2. Standard R→L
operation and unmounts finished part from L-chuck
Manual Pattern which does not transfer, mounts same workpiec-
F3. Standard No transfer
operation es on L and R chucks
Manual Pattern which mounts workpiece material to L-chuck
F5. Standard only L
operation and unmounts finished part from L-chuck
Manual Pattern which mounts workpiece material to R-chuck
F6. Standard only R
operation and unmounts finished part from R-chuck
Pattern with which Bar feeder performs loading and
Bar feeder +
F11. Automatic L → R Parts catcher performs unloading, Bar loading is com-
Parts catcher
manded by upper turret.
Pattern with which Bar feeder performs loading and
Bar feeder +
F12. Automatic L → R Parts catcher performs unloading, Bar loading is com-
Parts catcher
manded by lower turret.
Pattern with which Bar feeder performs loading and GR
Bar feeder +
F13. Automatic L → R performs unloading, Bar loading is commanded by up-
GR210
per turret.
Pattern with which Bar feeder performs loading and GR
Bar feeder +
F14. Automatic L → R performs unloading, Bar loading is commanded by low-
GR210
er turret
Pattern which GR loads workpiece material to L-chuck
GR203,
F21. Automatic L → R and GR unloads finished part from R-chuck, GR double
GR210
hand operation
Same as F21.. However, GR hand always has only one
F22. GR210 Automatic L → R workpiece, GR single hand operation. It is for heavy or
large workpiece.
Pattern which does not transfer, same workpiece on L
F23. GR210 Automatic No transfer
and R chucks, GR double hand operation
GR210 + Pattern which GR loads workpiece material to L-chuck
F26. Automatic L→R
Parts catcher and parts catcher unloads finished part from R-chuck

31-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
No bar feeder, No parts catcher, No GR F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.
Bar feeder + Parts catcher F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.F11.F12.
GR203 F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.F21.
GR210 F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.F21.F22.F23.
GR210 + Parts catcher F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.F21.F22.F23.F26.
GR210 + Bar feeder F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.F13.F14.F21.F22.F23.
GR210 + Bar feeder + Parts catcher F1.F2.F3.F5.F6.F11.F12.F13.F14.F21.F22.
F23.F26.
NOTE: For GR203 specification, even if the parts catcher and the bar feeder
are installed, the operation patterns other than F21. are not provided.
Only the operation pattern F21. is provided.
NOTE: For the lathe of NTX (W), NTX (S), NTXL, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5,
MX-100, JX-250, STW or STS, in the case of the bar feeder specifica-
tion, the operation pattern F11. (bar loading by the upper tool spindle)
is not provided.
Only the operation pattern F12. (bar loading by the lower turret) is
provided.
NOTE: For the lathe of NTX (W), NTX (S), NTXL, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5,
MX-100, JX-250, STW or STS, in the case of the GR210 specification,
the operation pattern F13. (bar loading by the upper tool spindle) is not
provided.
Only the operation pattern F14. (bar loading by the lower turret) is
provided.
NOTE: For the lathe of NTX (W), NTX (S), NTXL, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5,
MX-100, JX-250, STW or STS, even if GR210 and the parts catcher are
selected simultaneously, the operation pattern F26. (GR loading +
Parts catcher unloading) is not provided.
For the operation patterns other than the above, it needs special order.

(NOTE2) For GR specification, it is restricted to the following standard stockers that this
function can be used.
GR203 WS231 Heap type 10 pallets, max ϕ150
WS221 Heap type 10 pallets, max ϕ100
WS124 Flat type 120 pallets, max ϕ80
WS122 Flat type 60 pallets, max ϕ80
WS121 Flat type 30 pallets, max ϕ80
GR210 WS442W Heap type 20 pallets
WS445W Heap type 14 pallets
WS342 Flat type 20 pallets
This function cannot be used about stockers except the above, such as special
stockers and stockers except the product made from NAKAMURA-TOME.
(NOTE3) For GR specification, as for the following specifications, this function cannot be
used even if the stocker is standard type.
The specification which is the heap type stocker and puts a spacer between work-
pieces
The specification which is the flat type stocker and puts two (or more) workpieces
on each pallet
HAKO-BEI specification

31-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
(NOTE4) For GR specification, this function cannot be used when there is equipment
that holds a workpiece in addition to L-chuck, R-chuck of the lathe, the
workpiece material hand, the finished-part hand of GR, and the stocker.
Temporary tray
Operation cannot be changed by whether a workpiece is in the temporary
tray.
(As for the temporary tray for HAKO-BEI C2 and D type, it is necessary to
remove the workpiece of the temporary tray at the time of automatic cycle
start.)
Measuring system outside machine
Operation cannot be changed by whether the workpiece is in the measuring
system.
Cleaning system
Operation cannot be changed by whether the workpiece is in the cleaning
system.
(NOTE5) This function does not support the following optional equipment.
Correct chucking system
Whether the correct chucking result is OK or NG cannot change operation.
Measuring system inside machine
Whether the measuring result is OK or NG cannot change operation.
Although the chuck pressure changeover system (high/low) can be used using this
function, the modification of the program (M code addition etc.) are required.
(NOTE6) For the parts catcher type G, although operation can be started from the status
that PCG holds the workpiece in the hand, usually open the hand with the push
button first, and remove the workpiece before starting the cycle.
(NOTE7) This function cannot be used from the following machine models.
TMC series, SC series(other than SC-100X2), TW series, WTW150, WTS150,
and NTM3
(NOTE8) There is a case where it becomes impossible to use this function depending on
the contents of the special specification.
It is necessary to inquire at the time of the estimate of the special specification.
(NOTE9) This function may not be used in order to sustain the compatibility of the
program with the supplied machine in the repeat order of the supplied machine.
(NOTE10) This function can be used for the machines with the software version is higher
than the following versions stored in the machine.

31-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
NC system 18iTB, 16iTB, 30i, 31i, 32i, Nakamura-Tome FANUC
NT NURSE Version V6.43 and higher Common with all models
LADDER Version 40100175AI and higher WT300
Version 40100153CO and higher WT150 and 250, NTJ
Version 40100183 and higher WT100, WY100, WY250,
WT250II and WY250L (31iA)
Version 40100166AL and higher NTX
Version 40100224 and higher NTXL
Version 40100165AK and higher STW
Version 40100193 and higher NTJX, NTMX, MX5
Version 40100194 and higher NTY3, NTY3 Jumbo
Version 40100254 and higher WT100, WY100, WY250,
WT150II, WT250II, WY250L,
NTJ-100 (31iB), WY100II,
WY150, SC-100X2
Version 40100255 and higher NTY3-250 (31iB),
NTY3-100, NTY3-150
Version 40100271 and higher WTS-150 (31iB)
Version 40100273 and higher NTMXL, NTX (II), MX-100,
JX-250

In addition, for GR specification, when this function cannot be used according to

the above-mentioned restriction, it becomes GR program of the conventional type
(start from the status for which the workpiece was removed from L -chuck,
R-chuck, and the hands of GR when the operation starts).

31-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

31-2 G Code
G411 It can be used with all heads.
The function changes in the character (it is called an arguments) which
continues after G411.
G411 F−; Function: Specifying operation pattern and confirming machine status.
Input into the head of the program. Necessary for the program of all heads.
Input numbers such as F1. or F21. after F.
Number after F shows the operation pattern.
G411 A1. I−; Function: When GR start is unnecessary, jump to sequence number specified
with I.
Input just before GR start block.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 B1. I−; Function: When bar change is unnecessary, jump to sequence number
specified with I.
NOTE) Input just before bar change block.
Set PMC Parameter After I, input sequence number of a jump.
D4075=1 Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 D1. I−; Function: When loading operation is unnecessary, jump to sequence number
specified with I.
Input just before loading operation block.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 L1. I−; Function: When L-chuck workpiece machining is unnecessary, jump to
sequence number specified with I.
Input just before L-chuck machining operation block.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 R1. I−; Function: When R-chuck workpiece machining is unnecessary, jump to
sequence number specified with I.
Input just before R-chuck machining operation block.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 U1. I−; Function: When unloading operation is unnecessary, jump to sequence
number specified with I.
Input just before unloading operation block.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 T1. I−; Function: When transfer operation is unnecessary, jump to sequence number
specified with I.
Input just before transfer operation block.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
G411 C1. I−; Function: When 1 cycle stop button is pressed, jump to sequence number
specified with I.
Input so that unloading and transfer operations are jumped.
After I, input sequence number of a jump.
Make sure to give a point such as I10. and I1000.
Refer to program examples for how and where G code is input.
31-3 M Code
M797 L-chuck machining finish Input at the end of L-chuck machining block.
M799 R-chuck machining finish Input at the end of R-chuck machining block.

31-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
These M codes can be commanded from any head. For example, for WT-300,
when the L-chuck workpiece machining finishes finally on the lower turret, input
M797 for lower head. Similarly, when the R-chuck workpiece machining finishes
finally on the upper turret, input M799 for upper head. M codes of starting ma-
chining are not necessary.
M705 Bar stopper operation finish Input at the end of bar stopper operation block.
M405 Cut-off machining finish Input at the end of cut-off machining block.
M705 and M405 are used only for bar type. Command M705 after the operation
to the bar stopper end is finished. Command M405 after cut-off machining is fin-
ished.
These M codes can be commanded from any head. For example, for WT-300,
when bar stopper operations performed on the lower turret, input M705 for lower
head. Similarly, when the cut-off machining is performed on the lower turret, in-
put M405 for lower head.
Refer to program examples for how and where M code is input.
Confirm the opposite head is
M991 Input before commanding loading/unloading
retracted
If the loading or unloading is performed during the opposite head is machining,
wait M-codes are not available.
Use this M-code to confirm the opposite head stays in the area of retracted posi-
tion before starts loading or unloading. Refer to program examples for how and
where M code is input.

31-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-4 How to Create the Program
The following procedure is the example for GR type. In the case of bar type, and
also hand type, the view is the same.
(1) First, create NC program with the following composition on upper and lower
turret.
O1234 ;

Loading

L machining
←Machining of L/R is arbitrary.
R machining What kind turn and how many times are
available.
Unloading In this example, it is considered as L, R,
and one each.
Transfer

M30 ;
%

(2) Insert G411 and sequence number in NC program with the above composi-
tion.
Except the case of C1., create a program with considering that jump to
NEXT if the operation is unnecessary.
Jumping many processes is not necessary.
O1234 (UPPER) ; ← NC program for upper turret
★ G411 F21. ; ; ← With GR, normal operation from L to R is
performed.
★ N100 G411 A1. I101. ; ←When GR start is unnecessary, unload-
ing is jumped.
GR start

★ N101 G411 D1. I102. ; ← When loading operation is

unnecessary, loading is jumped.
Loading

★ N102 G411 L1. I103. ; ←When L-machining is unnecessary,

L-machining is jumped.
L-machining

★ N103 G411 R1. I104. ; ←When R-machining is unnecessary,

R-machining is jumped.
R-machining

★ N104 G411 C1. I2. ; ←When 1cycle stop, unloading and

transferring operations are jumped.
★ N105 G411 U1. I106. ; ←When unloading operation is
unnecessary, unloading is
jumped.
Unloading

★ N106 G411 T1. I30. ; ←When transferring is unnecessary,

transferring is jumped.

31-7
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
Transfer

★ N30 ;
M30 ;

★ N2 ;
M2 ;
%

For GR type, although unloading is usually performed with lower head,

sometimes it is necessary to wait for upper turret during unloading. There-
fore, unloading part is also carried as mentioned above. For example, if the
workpiece is very long, it is necessary for upper turret to wait for lower head
to finish unloading. So these wait M codes and G411U blocks are necessary.
For the machine with Parts catcher-A, it is also necessary to program these
waiting M codes and G411U blocks, because the upper turret must wait until
unloading is finished.
For the machine with Parts catcher-B, C, G or the shaft unloader, it is not
necessary to program these waiting M codes and G411U blocks, because the
upper turret do not have to wait until unloading is finished.
If the last machining of the upper turret is R-chuck side, these blocks are also
necessary.
Refer to program examples for more information.

31-8
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
Lower turret side is the same. However, GR start is unnecessary.
O1234 (LOWER) ; ← NC program for lower turret
★ G411 F21. ; ; ← When GR start is unnecessary, unloading is
jumped.
★ N101 G411 D1. I102. ; ←When loading operation is un
necessary, loading is jumped.
Loading

★ N102 G411 L1. I103. ; ←When L-machining is unnecessary,

L-machining is jumped.
L-machining

★ N103 G411 R1. I104. ; ←When R-machining is unnecessary,

R-machining is jumped.
R-machining

★ N104 G411 C1. I2. ; ←When 1cycle stop, unloading and

transferring operations are jumped.
★ N105 G411 U1. I106. ; ←When unloading operation is un
necessary, unloading is jumped.
Unloading

★ N106 G411 T1. I30. ; ←When transferring is unnecessary,

transferring is jumped.
Transfer

★ N30 ;
M30 ;

★ N2 ;
M2 ;
%

For GR type, although loading is usually performed with upper head, some-
times it is necessary to wait for lower turret during loading. Therefore, load-
ing part is also carried as mentioned above. For example, if the workpiece is
very long, it is necessary for lower turret to wait for upper head to finish
loading. So these wait M codes and G411D blocks are necessary.
For the machine with the bar feeder or the shaft loader, it is not necessary to
program these waiting M codes and G411D blocks, because the lower turret
do not have to wait until loading is finished.
If the first machining of the lower turret is L-chuck side, these blocks are al-
so necessary.
Refer to program examples for more information.

31-9
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
(3) Next, input M codes shown machining finish.
This shows the lower turret is for L-chuck last machining, and the upper tur-
ret is for R-chuck last machining.
O1234 (UPPER) ; ← NC program for upper turret
G411 F21. ; ;
N100 G411 A1. I101. ;

GR start

N101 G411 D1. I102. ;

Loading

N102 G411 L1. I103. ;

L-machining

N103 G411 R1. I104. ;

R-machining

☆ N799 ; ←End of R-chuck machining

N104 G411 C1. I2. ;
N105 G411 U1. I106. ;

Unloading

N106 G411 T1. I30. ;

Transfer

N30 ;
M30 ;

N2 ;
M2 ;
%

31-10
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
O 1234(LOWER) ; ←NC program for lower turret
G411 F21. ; ;
N101 G411 D1. I102. ;

Loading

N102 G411 L1. I103. ;

L-machining

☆ N797 ; ←End of L-chuck machining

N103 G411 R1. I104. ;

R-machining

N104 G411 C1. I2. ;

N105 G411 U1. I106. ;

Unloading

N106 G411 T1. I30. ;

Transfer

N30 ;
M30 ;

N2 ;
M2 ;
%

Without considering a head, find the last of workpiece machining and input
corresponded M code.

31-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-5 Actual Operation
When this program is used, the operation can start even from the status that the
chuck holds a workpiece.
Operation with this program is described below.
(1) In the case of chuck open on L and R, normal operation is performed.
L-loading→L-machining→Transfer→L-loading→L and R simultaneous
machining→R-unloading→Transfer→L-loading→L and R simultaneous
machining→...
(2) In the case of workpiece completed machining on L and R
R-unloading→Transfer→L-loading→L and R simultaneous machining→...
(3) In the case of workpiece before machining start on L and R
L and R simultaneous machining→R-unloading→Transfer→
L-loading→L and R simultaneous machining→...
Thus, considering the workpiece status on L and R at the time of operation
start, the next operation is performed.
The following nine kinds are supported.
L-chuck R-chuck
× × × Chuck open
× ○ ○ Before machining start
× ● ● Completion of machining
○ ×
○ ○
○ ●
● ×
● ○
● ●

For the machine with GR, since the operation can start even from the status
that GR hand 1 and hand 2 hold a workpiece, 4 times status can be corre-
sponded.
NOTE: Operation cannot be started when a workpiece is in the status
in the middle of machining. If it is started, an alarm is gener-
ated. When the operation stops in the status in the middle of
machining, finish machining before restarting the operation,
or if machining cannot continue, remove the workpiece. For
the procedure to finish the machining of workpiece in the sta-
tus in the middle of machining, refer to 7-⑥.

31-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-6 Status Check Screen
This is the screen to check the status. It can be checked on the screen whether the
present workpiece is before machining start, or is in the middle of machining, and
so on. Select NT NURSE menu NO.17.
NOTE: This screen appears on the status check screen of NT-IPS when the ver-
sion of NT-IPS operation panel is V3.0.0 or higher in the NT-IPS speci-
fication. For details on this screen, refer to the NT-IPS operation manu-
al.
(Although this screen does not appear on NT NURSE screen, it is possi-
ble to display the screen by the setting of P7373.)

By pressing the soft-key, this status can be changed forcibly. However the
soft-key does not work during the automatic operation.
L-MAT Set L-workpiece to "before machining start" state.
L-MID Set L-workpiece to "middle of machining" state.
L-FIN Set L-workpiece to "completion of machining" state.
L-CUT BAR-TYPE Set L-workpiece to "after finishing cut-off" state.
Soft-keys of R are de- R-MAT Set R-workpiece to "before machining start" state.
scribed in the next page. R-MID Set R-workpiece to "middle of machining" state.
R-FIN Set R-workpiece to "completion of machining" state.

NOTE: Except bar type, when opening the chuck, the state is that "no work-
piece is gripped".
For bar type, when the soft-key "L-CUT" is pressed, the state is that "no work-
piece is gripped" = "after finishing cut-off", same as the state by commanding
M405.
For bar type, when the soft-key "L-MAT" is pressed, the state is that "after finish-
ing bar stopper dash operation", same as the state by commanding M705.

31-13
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
NOTE: When the workpiece status changes to "machining completion" by
pressing the soft-key, take a special care. In the case of L-workpiece, if
it is made completion of machining settled in spite of not having com-
pleted machining in fact, it will interfere at the time of transferring. In
the case of R-workpiece, it will interfere with the GR hand at the time of
unloading. It is left to judgment of an operator whether the present
workpiece may be treated as the completion of machining.
PATTERN Shows the last commanded G411F- number.
Not cleared by RESET.
MAC. STATUS Shows the machine status No. at the time of G411F-.
It is not the current status NO. Not cleared by RESET.
GR ACTION Shows the GR action No. that is now operating or
last operated.
Cleared by RESET.
GR USE ON Shows the GR USE switch is ON.
If the GR USE switch is not ON, then the lamp does
not light.
If he GR mode switch is not in the position of AUTO, the
lamp does not light too.
NOTE: For the machine without GR, information about GR will not appear.
MAC.STATUS and GR ACTION are used for the information of maintenance.
Machine status NO. is listed here.

31-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

STATUS LIST ×- No Workpiece ○- Blank ●- Finished

NO. L-Chuck Hand-1 Hand-2 R-Chuck NO. L-Chuck Hand-1 Hand-2 R-Chuck NO. L-Chuck Hand-1 Hand-2 R-Chuck

1 × × × × 13 ○ × × × 25 ● × × ×
2 × ○ × × 14 ○ ○ × × 26 ● ○ × ×
3 × × ● × 15 ○ × ● × 27 ● × ● ×
4 × ○ ● × 16 ○ ○ ● × 28 ● ○ ● ×
5 × × × ○ 17 ○ × × ○ 29 ● × × ○
6 × ○ × ○ 18 ○ ○ × ○ 30 ● ○ × ○
7 × × ● ○ 19 ○ × ● ○ 31 ● × ● ○
8 × ○ ● ○ 20 ○ ○ ● ○ 32 ● ○ ● ○
9 × × × ● 21 ○ × × ● 33 ● × × ●
10 × ○ × ● 22 ○ ○ × ● 34 ● ○ × ●
11 × × ● ● 23 ○ × ● ● 35 ● × ● ●
12 × ○ ● ● 24 ○ ○ ● ● 36 ● ○ ● ●
For the machine without GR, machine status will be one of
1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29,or 33.

31-15
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
The following screen is effective for WT150, WT250, NTJ (18iTB), NTX, NTXL,
STW and STS.
For WT300, WT100, WY100, WY100II, WY150, WY250, WY250L, NTY3 se-
ries, NTJX, NTJ (31iB), NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, WT150II, WT250II,
NTJ-100, JX-250, SC-100X2, this screen will not be shown.

1-STOP soft-key 1 cycle stop button

If this button is pressed, then the lamp
turns ON. And if this button is pressed
again, then the lamp turns OFF.
1-STOP lamp 1 cycle stop lamp
If this lamp is turned ON, then 1 cycle stop
function is effective.

31-16
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-7 Other Explanations and Precautions
(1) When inserting G411 jump program, take care about the waiting M code.
If the jump of the waiting M code is mistaken, waiting may stop suiting.
When waiting is jumped, jump similarly on upper and lower turret.
(2) Information whether the workpiece loaded now is before machining start or
having finished, etc, does not disappear even if the power supply is turned
off. The former status is maintained.
(3) In the case of bar feed-function type, existence of a workpiece cannot be dis-
tinguished by the Chuck OPEN or CLOSE..
In the case of bar type, existence of a workpiece is distinguished considering
the commanding situation of M705 and M405.
(4) In the case of GR type, if the GR valid/invalid button on the pendant opera-
tion panels of GR is pressed and the indicator is made to switch off , GR will
become invalid and will be recognized as hand type.
G411 F21.; GR invalid L→R Same as G411 F1.;
G411 F22.; GR invalid L→R single Same as G411 F1.;
G411 F23.; GR invalid LR same Same as G411 F1.;
(5) When 1 cycle stop button is pressed, the program is finished after completing
machining on L and R chucks. Reset and stop by M2.
Use for size check and chip change.
For WT300, WT250Ⅱ, WT100, WY100, WY100II, WY150,
WY250,WY250L, NTY3 series, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL,
1 CYCLE MX5, MX-100, NTXL, JX-250, the switch is on the main
STOP panel.
For WT150, WT250, NTJ, NTX, STW, STS, SC-100X2, the
switch is on the soft-key of WORK PIECE STATE screen.
NOTE: 1 cycle has no restrictions on the operation performed by interrupting
because the cycle stops in the state that the lathe and GR are reset.
However, it takes time for a while because the cycle does not stop until
completing machining. In hurry, use the optional stop. For the optional
stop, the cycle stops by the next M01, but the cycle may stop by waiting
on the opposite head depending on the case. Stop positions differ by
where M01 was inserted in each time.
(6) Program for loader type such as GR type and bar type can be operated as
hand operation.
For GR type Press the GR USE on/off button on the pendant op-
eration panel of GR and turn off the indicator.
Programs related to GR is jumped automatically, and
is operated as the hand program.
For hand operation, since all programs related to the loader are ignored, the
machining is performed normally.
For a familiar operator, cursor can be jumped in the middle of a program, and
machining can be resumed from there.
NOTE: When the machining starts after moving the cursor in the middle of
the program, G411 F-; of the head of the program is not read. In this
case, previous G411 F-number is used. If the operator wants to start
different program of different pattern in the middle of the program,
command G411 F-; by MDI command before starting the operation.
Failure of this leads incorrect operation because the program is not
recognized the changing of the operation. Therefore, only the opera-
tor who became skillful enough needs to perform this operation.

31-17
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
For bar type Change G411 F11.; of the head of the program
into G411 F1.;
There is no switch to invalidate the bar.
(7) For hand operation, the following operation is performed.
In the case that the MEMORY RESTART switch is ON
Mount first workpiece material on L-chuck and press the CYCLE
START button.
↓
Machining is performed only on L-chuck and the cycle is reset and
stops after completion of transferring.
↓
Mount next workpiece material on L-chuck and press the CYCLE
START button.
↓
Machining is performed simultaneously on L and R chucks and the cy-
cle is reset and stops after completion of machining.
↓
Remove finished part on R-chuck and press the CYCLE START button.
↓
When transferring is performed and completed, the cycle is reset and
stops.
↓
Machining is performed simultaneously on L and R chucks and the cy-
cle is reset and stops after completion of machining.
↓
Repeat the above operations.
↓
Press the CYCLE START button without mounting next workpiece ma-
terial on L-chuck.
↓
Machining is performed only on R-chuck and the cycle is reset and
stops after completion of machining.
In the case that the MEMORY RESTART switch is OFF
Mount first workpiece material on L-chuck and press the CYCLE
START button.
↓
Machining is performed only on L-chuck and the cycle continues after
completion of transferring.
Machining is also performed on R-chuck and the cycle is reset and stops
in the state that the finished part is left on R-chuck.
NOTE: Turn OFF the RESTART switch and operate to make only one finished
part. Turn ON the RESTART switch and operate to perform machining
continuously by hand operation.
NOTE: If the program of G411 F13.(Bar loading GR unloading) is run with the
GR USE switch OFF, the program is operated as the Bar loading +
Hand unloading.

31-18
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
(8) When changing from GR type operation to bar operation, the operation is not
performed even if the soft-key is pressed on the status display screen. This is
why bar operation is not recognized until reading G411F- command.
Similarly, when changing from bar operation to GR type operation, the oper-
ation is not in the state without workpiece even if chuck opens. This is why
GR type operation is not recognized until reading G411F- command.
In these cases, command G411 F- ; by MDI command.
Make sure to check the WORK STATUS screen before starting the cy-
cle.
(9) The relation of spindle selection switch and G411 is shown.
NOTE: Spindle selection switch is attached to WT300,WT250Ⅱ, WT100,
WY100, WY100II, WY150, WY250, WY250L, NTX, NTXL, NTM3, NTY3
series, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, JX-250, SC-100X2,
(Since Jun 2007)
Although the spindle selection switch is referred to by G410, it is effective
also in G411. However, it cannot be used when GR is valid.
(a) For GR type, the spindle selection switch cannot be used in the state
that GR is valid. Always use it in the [LR SPINDLE] mode. The auto-
matic cycle start is not performed when the mode is [L SPINDLE] or [R
SPINDLE]. Even GR type, if GR is invalidated with the switch, the
spindle selection switch can be used.
(b) For bar type, it becomes below.
When the spindle selection switch is set to [L SPINDLE], machining on
R-chuck, unloading, and transferring are jumped. Loading and machin-
ing only on L-chuck are performed.
When the spindle selection switch is set to [R SPINDLE], machining on
L-chuck, loading, and transferring are jumped. Unloading and machin-
ing only on R-chuck are performed.
(c) For hand type, it becomes below. When GR is invalid, it is the same.
When the spindle selection switch is set to [L SPINDLE], machining on
R-chuck, loading, unloading, and transferring are jumped. Machining
only on L-chuck is performed.
When the spindle selection switch is set to [R SPINDLE], machining on
L-chuck, loading, unloading, and transferring are jumped. Machining
only on R-chuck is performed.
(10) What happens in single head memory mode is described here.
If the single head memory mode is selected, G411 jumping function does not
work.
Do nothing G411F1., G411A1., G411L1., G411R1., G411C1.,
G411U1.
Do not finish G411D1., G411T1.

31-19
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-8 Alarm
There are following alarms.

A0360 FINISH MACHINING OF L-WORKPIECE

Operation was made to start for L-work in the middle of machining. Start automatic cycle after fin-
ishing machining of L-work beforehand. (When G411 command)
Operation can be started when L-work finishes machining, is before start machining, or is not loaded.
To release the alarm, press the RESET button.

A0361 FINISH MACHINING OF R-WORKPIECE

Operation was made to start for R-work in the middle of machining. Start automatic cycle after fin-
ishing machining of R-work beforehand. (When G411 command)
Operation can be started when R-work finishes machining, is before start machining, or is not loaded.
To release the alarm, press the RESET button.

A0362 MISMATCH OF OPERATION PATTERN NO.

Operation pattern number commanded in G411F- is not matched among paths. Check the program. To
release the alarm, press the RESET button.

A0349 MACHINE STATUS DOES NOT SUIT G411

Since the machine status does not suit the operation pattern commanded with G411, automatic opera-
tion cannot be continued. To release the alarm, press the RESET button.
Example) when workpiece is in GR hand 1, GR hand 2, L-chuck, and R-chuck.

31-20
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9 Program Example WT/WY series/
NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100
Program example for every pattern of operation is described below. These are the
examples of WT300.
Coordinates relations have taken WT300 for the example.
As for other machine models, it cannot perform as it is.
When running the program on other machine models, please modify the coordi-
nates relations and stroke relations.
The M code of the bar feed functions is carried as an example.
Before running the program, it is necessary to change according to the type of the
bar feed functions.
The 3rd zero position of the Z-axis is used.
Before running the program, check that the value is set to the parameter of the 3rd
zero position.
Command G330 A3. W0.;
Parameter 1242 (Z) Near the - stroke end (left side) for the
upper turret
Near the + stroke end (right side) for the
lower turret

31-21
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-1 G411F1. Manual work change, L-R transfer
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
O1234 (UPPER UPPER TURRET MAIN PRO- O1234 (LOWER LOWER TURRET MAIN PRO-
MAIN); GRAM MAIN); GRAM
OPERATION PATTERN SE- OPERATION PATTERN SE-
N1 G411 F1.; N1 G411 F1.;
LECT AND STATUS CHECK LECT AND STATUS CHECK
; ;

; ;

; ;

; ;
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN L-MACHINING IS WHEN L-MACHINING IS UN-
G411 L1. I102.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO G411 L1. I102.; NECESSARY, JUMP TO NEXT.
NEXT.
: ◇ :

: L-MACHINING PROGRAM : L-MACHINING PROGRAM

: :

● M797; L-MACHINING FINISH ;

; ;

◆ ; ◆ ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN R-MACHINING IS WHEN R-MACHINING IS UN-
G411 R1. I201.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO G411 R1. I201.; NECESSARY, JUMP TO NEXT.
NEXT.
: :

: R-MACHINING PROGRAM : R-MACHINING PROGRAM

: :

; ● M799; R-MACHINING FINISH

; ;

; ;
N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS-
FER); FER);
WHEN TRANSFERRING IS WHEN TRANSFERRING IS
G411 T1. I30.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO G411 T1. I30.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
CUT-OFF TRANSFER PRO- CUT-OFF TRANSFER PRO-
: :
GRAM GRAM
: :

; ;

; ;

N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET

% %

31-22
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I201.; Skip R-machining
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 F1.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the operation to
be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual work
change type with transfer from L to R.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the lower turret performs machining for L-chuck finally,
input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper turret performs machining for R-chuck
finally, input in the upper head.
◇SC-100X2 cannot process the L-spindle side with the lower turret.

31-23
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300
%; %;
O0001(UPPER MAIN F1.); O0001(LOWER MAIN F1.);
N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;

31-24
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M120; M120;
M121; G0B-500.;
M11; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M122; G4U1.;
M123; M121;
; M122;
; G28B0;
M123;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-25
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-2 G411F2. Manual work change, R-L transfer
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
O1234 (UPPER UPPER TURRET MAIN O1234 (LOWER LOWER TURRET MAIN PRO-
MAIN); PROGRAM MAIN); GRAM
OPERATION PATTERN SE- OPERATION PATTERN SE-
N1 G411 F1.; N1 G411 F1.;
LECT AND STATUS CHECK LECT AND STATUS CHECK
; ;

; ;

; ;

; ;
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN L-MACHINING IS WHEN L-MACHINING IS UN-
G411 L1. I102.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO G411 L1. I102.; NECESSARY, JUMP TO NEXT.
NEXT.
: ◇ :

: L-MACHINING PROGRAM : L-MACHINING PROGRAM

: :

● M797; L-MACHINING FINISH ;

; ;

◆ ; ◆ ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN R-MACHINING IS WHEN R-MACHINING IS UN-
G411 R1. I201.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO G411 R1. I201.; NECESSARY, JUMP TO NEXT.
NEXT.
: :

: R-MACHINING PROGRAM : R-MACHINING PROGRAM

: :

; ● M799; R-MACHINING FINISH

; ;

; ;
N201 (TRANS-
N201 (TRANSFER);
FER);
WHEN TRANSFERRING IS WHEN TRANSFERRING IS
G411 T1. I30.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO G411 T1. I30.; UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
CUT-OFF TRANSFER PRO- CUT-OFF TRANSFER PRO-
: :
GRAM GRAM
: :

; ;

; ;

N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET

% %

31-26
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I201.; Skip R-machining
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 F2.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual
work change type with transfer from R to L.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
2
◇SC-100X cannot process the L-spindle side with the lower turret.

31-27
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300
%; %;
O0002(UPPER MAIN F2.); O0002(LOWER MAIN F2.);
N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;

31-28
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; ;
; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M120; M120;
M121; G0B-500.;
M10; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M121;
M122; M122;
M123; M51;
; G4U1.;
; G28B0;
M123;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-29
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-3 G411F3. Manual work change, same workpiece for L and R, no transfer
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
TERN SELECT TERN SELECT
N1 G411 F3.; N1 G411 F3.;
AND STATUS AND STATUS
CHECK CHECK
; ;

; ;

; ;

; ;

N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: ◇ :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING
● M797; ;
FINISH
; ;

◆ ; ◆ ;

N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I30.; G411 R1. I30.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING
; ● M799;
FINISH
; ;

; ;

N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET

% %

31-30
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I30.; Skip R-machining
G411 F3.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual
work change type without transfer.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
◇SC-100X2 cannot process the L-spindle side with the lower turret.

31-31
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300
%; %;
O0003(UPPER MAIN F3.); O0003(LOWER MAIN F3.);
N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I30.; G411R1.I30.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0;

31-32
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
% %

31-33
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-4 G411F5. Manual work change only on L-chuck
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
O1234 (UPPER UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER LOWER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN PROGRAM MAIN); MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN SE- PATTERN SELECT
N1 G411 F5.; N1 G411 F5.;
LECT AND STA- AND STATUS
TUS CHECK CHECK
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
N101 (L MACHIN- N101 (L MA-
◆
ING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I30.; G411 L1. I30.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: ◇ :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING
● M797; ;
FINISH
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
% %

◆ The machining program of R-chuck is not acceptable for this pattern. Keep R-chuck open.
G411 L1. I30.; Skip L-machining
G411 F5.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual
work change type with only L-chuck machining.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly required for a
change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
2
◇SC-100X cannot process the L-spindle side with the lower turret.

31-34
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300
%; %;
O0005(UPPER MAIN F5.); O0005(LOWER MAIN F5.);
N1G411F5.; N1G411F5.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N101(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
M1;
;
;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I30.; G411L1.I30.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
% %

31-35
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-5 G411F6. Manual work change only on R-chuck
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PATTERN
N1 G411 F6.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F6.; SELECT AND STATUS
STATUS CHECK CHECK
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
◆N102 (R MACHINING); ◆N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN
WHEN R-MACHINING
R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I30.; G411 R1. I30.; IS UNNECESSARY,
UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT.
JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING PRO-
: :
PROGRAM GRAM
: :
; ● M799; R-MACHINING FINISH
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
% %

◆ The machining program of L-chuck is not acceptable for this pattern. Keep L-chuck open.
G411 R1. I30.; Skip R-machining
G411 F6.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the hand
operation type with only R-chuck machining.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly required for a
change of operation.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.

31-36
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300
%; %;
O0006(UPPER MAIN F6.); O0006(LOWER MAIN F6.);
N1G411F6.; N1G411F6.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N101(R MACHINING);
G411R1.I103.;
G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M55;
M1;
;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I30.; G411R1.I30.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
% %

31-37
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-6 G411F11. Bar loading (upper turret) + Parts catcher unloading
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
TERN SELECT TERN SELECT
N1 G411 F11.; N1 G411 F11.;
AND STATUS AND STATUS
CHECK CHECK
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
N10 (BAR CHANGE); ;
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS UN-
■ G411 B1. I100.; ;
NECESSARY, SKIP
TO NEXT.
G0 X＿Z＿T＿; BAR STOPPER ;
M11; CHUCK OPEN ;
G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE ;
BAR CHANGE
M61; ;
M58/M81
M10; CHUCK CLOSE ;
TOP CUT ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (BAR LOADING); ;
WHEN LOADING
G411 D1. I101.; IS UNNECESSARY, ;
SKIP TO NEXT.
G0 X＿Z＿T＿; BAR STOPPER ;
M11; CHUCK OPEN ;
G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE ;
M10; CHUCK CLOSE ;
COMPLETION OF
● M705; ;
BAR ADVANCE
; ;
; ;

31-38
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; ◇ G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING
● M797; ;
FINISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆ ;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING
; ● M799;
FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO
END. END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆ M152; ☆ M152;
LOWER WAITING LOWER WAITING
WHEN UNLOAD- WHEN UNLOAD-
ING IS UNNEC- ING IS UNNEC-
G411 U1. I202.; G411 U1. I202.;
ESSARY, JUMP TO ESSARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆ M153; ☆ M153;
LOWER WAITING LOWER WAITING
PARTS CATCHER
; M68;
ADVANCE
; M51; CHUCK OPEN
PARTS CATCHER
; M69;
RETRACT
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆ M154; ☆ M154;
LOWER WAITING LOWER WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-39
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANS- WHEN TRANS-
FERRING IS UN- FERRING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
CUT-OFF TRANS- CUT-OFF TRANS-
: :
FER PROGRAM FER PROGRAM
: :
COMPLETION OF
● M405; ;
CUT-OFF
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F11.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feed + parts catcher unloading type.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place during the machining
program. It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input immediately after dashing a bar against the bar stopper and
closing the chuck regardless of upper head or lower head. When
the bar stopper is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is
recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input immediately after completing the cut-off operation
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the cut-off
bite is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is
recognized as there is no workpiece on the L-chuck with
this command.

31-40
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump func-
tion.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.

☆ For WT with parts catcher type A, it is required L turret to wait for the parts catcher unloading finishes.
For WT with parts catcher type G, this waiting is not necessary because it is not required L-turret to wait for
the parts catcher unloading finishes.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◇SC-100X2 cannot process the L-spindle side with the lower turret.

31-41
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper waits lower during unloading like Parts catcher A
%; %;
O0011(LOWER MAIN
O0011(UPPER MAIN F11.PCA);
F11.PCA);
N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;

31-42
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; G0B-300.;
; M68;
; M51;
G4U1.;
M69;
☆M142;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;

31-43
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-44
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper does not wait lower during unloading like Parts
catcher G
%; %;
O0211(LOWER MAIN
O0211(UPPER MAIN F11.PCG);
F11.PCG);
N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F500;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;

31-45
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0B0M768;
; G330A3.W0.;
; M991;
M468;
G0B-10.M472;
M719;

31-46
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M51;
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M469;
M473;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-47
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper and lower turrets perform L-machining during
unloading using M368 or M868 of Parts catcher G
%; %;
O0311(LOWER MAIN
O0311(UPPER MAIN F11.PCG);
F11.PCG);
N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M81;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F500;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;

31-48
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I104.;
;
;
N201(UNLOADING);
G411U1.I104.;
G28U0B0M768;
M991;
M368B-10.(OR M868);
;
;
N104(L MACHINING WITH N104(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I202.;
G28U0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G330A3.W0.; M120;
M120; G0W-150.T0404;
G0W200.T0404M3S10; M121;
M121; U-100.;
U-100.; G98G1W-100.F1000;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M122;
M122; G28U0;
G28U0M5; M123;

31-49
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M797; M1;
M123; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N202(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0;
G330A3.W0.;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N203(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-50
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-7 G411F13. Bar loading (upper turret) + GR unloading
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100

UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET

O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F13.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F13.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
; G411 A1. I101.;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
; ▲ M358 A8213.; GR START
; ;
; ;
N10 (BAR CHANGE); ;
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS UN-
■ G411 B1. I100.; ;
NECESSARY, SKIP
TO NEXT.
G0 X_Z_T_; BAR STOPPER ;
M11; CHUCK OPEN ;
G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE ;
BAR CHANGE
M61; ;
M58/M81
M10; CHUCK CLOSE ;
TOP CUT ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (BAR LOADING); ;
WHEN LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY, ;
JUMP TO NEXT.
G0 X_Z_T_; BAR STOPPER ;
M11; CHUCK OPEN ;
G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE ;
M10; CHUCK CLOSE ;
BAR ADVANCE
● M705; ;
FINISH
; ;
; ;

31-51
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M152; ☆M152;
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UNLOADING WHEN UNLOADING
G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY, G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M153; ☆M153;
WAITING WAITING
; M650; UNLOADING START
; M651; UNLOADING FINISH
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M154; ☆M154;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-52
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANSFER- WHEN TRANSFER-
RING IS UNNECES- RING IS UNNECES-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
SARY, JUMP TO SARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
CUT-OFF TRANS- CUT-OFF TRANSFER
: :
FER PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
COMPLETION OF
● M405; ;
CUT-OFF
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F13.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feeder + GR unloading type with L-R transfer.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place during the machining
program. It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input immediately after dashing a bar against the bar stopper and
closing the chuck regardless of upper head or lower head. When
the bar stopper is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is
recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input immediately after completing the cut-off operation
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the cut-off
bite is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is

31-53
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
recognized as there is no workpiece on the L-chuck with
this command.
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump
function.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.

☆ When the last machining on the upper turret is R-chuck machining, unloading cannot start until ma-
chining of the upper turret finishes. The start of R unloading is kept waiting with upper and lower wait-
ing M code.
In the case of a long workpiece, L-machining cannot be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading.
When L-machining can be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining
of L and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-54
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For long workpiece
%; %;
O0013(UPPER MAIN O0013(LOWER MAIN
F13.LONG); F13.LONG);
N1G411F13.; N1G411F13.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1); G411A1.I101.;
G411B1.I100.; M358A8213.C1.;
G28U0W0; ;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212; ;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;

31-55
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.B0.;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; M650;
; M305(CHUTE COUNTER);
; M651;
☆M142;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;

31-56
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-57
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For short workpiece
%; %;
O0213(UPPER MAIN O0213(LOWER MAIN
F13.SHORT); F13.SHORT);
N1G411F13.; N1G411F13.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1); G411A1.I101.;
G411B1.I100.; M358A8213.;
G28U0W0; ;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212; ;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F500;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;

31-58
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F400;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0M472;
; G330A3.W0.B0.;
; M991;
M650;
M305(CHUTE COUNTER);
M651;
M473;

31-59
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-60
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-8 G411F14. Bar loading (lower turret) + GR unloading
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100

UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET

O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F14.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F14.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
; G411 A1. I101.;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
; ▲ M358 A8213.; GR START
; ;
; ;
; N10 (BAR CHANGE);
WHEN BAR CHANGE
; ■ G411 B1. I100.; IS UNNECESSARY,
SKIP TO NEXT.
; G0 X_Z_T_; BAR STOPPER
; M11; CHUCK OPEN
; G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE
BAR CHANGE
; M61;
M58/M81
; M10; CHUCK CLOSE
; TOP CUT
; ;
; ;
; N100 (BAR LOADING);
WHEN LOADING IS
; G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT.
; G0 X_Z_T_; BAR STOPPER
; M11; CHUCK OPEN
; G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE
; M10; CHUCK CLOSE
BAR ADVANCE FIN-
; ● M705;
ISH
; ;
; ;

31-61
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M152; ☆M152;
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UNLOADING WHEN UNLOADING
G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY, G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M153; ☆M153;
WAITING WAITING
; M650; UNLOADING START
; M651; UNLOADING FINISH
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M154; ☆M154;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-62
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANSFER- WHEN TRANSFER-
RING IS UNNECES- RING IS UNNECES-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
SARY, JUMP TO SARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
CUT-OFF TRANS- CUT-OFF TRANSFER
: :
FER PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
COMPLETION OF
● M405; ;
CUT-OFF
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F14.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feed + GR unloading type.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place during the machining
program. It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input immediately after dashing a bar against the bar stopper and
closing the chuck regardless of upper head or lower head. When
the bar stopper is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is
recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input immediately after completing the cut-off operation
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the cut-off
bite is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is

31-63
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
recognized as there is no workpiece on the L-chuck with
this command.
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump
function.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.

☆ When the last machining on the upper turret is R-chuck machining, unloading cannot start until ma-
chining of the upper turret finishes. The start of R unloading is kept waiting with upper and lower wait-
ing M code.
In the case of a long workpiece, L-machining cannot be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading.
When L-machining can be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining
of L and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-64
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For long workpiece
%; %;
O0014(UPPER MAIN O0014(LOWER MAIN
F14.LONG); F14.LONG);
N1G411F14.; N1G411F14.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I101.;
M358A8213.C1.;
;
;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(R MACHINING);
G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M55;
M1;
;
;

31-65
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.B0.;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; M650;
; M305(CHUTE COUNTER);
; M651;
☆M142;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;

31-66
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-67
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For short workpiece
%; %;
O0214(UPPER MAIN O0214(LOWER MAIN
F14.SHORT); F14.SHORT);
N1G411F14.; N1G411F14.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I101.;
M358A8213.;
;
;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F500;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;

31-68
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F400;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0M472;
; G330A3.W0.B0.;

31-69
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M991;
M650;
M305(CHUTE COUNTER);
M651;
M473;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-70
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-9 G411F12. Bar loading (lower turret) + Parts catcher unloading
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/SC-100X2
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
TERN SELECT TERN SELECT
N1 G411 F12.; N1 G411 F12.;
AND STATUS AND STATUS
CHECK CHECK
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
; N10 (BAR CHANGE);
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS UN-
; ■ G411 B1. I100.;
NECESSARY, SKIP
TO NEXT.
; G0 X＿Z＿T＿; BAR STOPPER
; M11; CHUCK OPEN
; G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE
BAR CHANGE
; M61;
M58/M81
; M10; CHUCK CLOSE
; TOP CUT
; ;
; ;
; N100 (BAR LOADING);
WHEN LOADING
; G411 D1. I101.; IS UNNECESSARY,
SKIP TO NEXT.
; G0 X＿Z＿T＿; BAR STOPPER
; M11; CHUCK OPEN
; G4 U1.; BAR ADVANCE
; M10; CHUCK CLOSE
COMPLETION OF
; ● M705;
BAR ADVANCE
; ;
; ;

31-71
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; ◇ G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING
● M797; ;
FINISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆ ;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING
; ● M799;
FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO
END. END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆ M152; ☆ M152;
LOWER WAITING LOWER WAITING
WHEN UNLOAD- WHEN UNLOAD-
ING IS UNNEC- ING IS UNNEC-
G411 U1. I202.; G411 U1. I202.;
ESSARY, JUMP TO ESSARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆ M153; ☆ M153;
LOWER WAITING LOWER WAITING
PARTS CATCHER
; M68;
ADVANCE
; M51; CHUCK OPEN
PARTS CATCHER
; M69;
RETRACT
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆ M154; ☆ M154;
LOWER WAITING LOWER WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-72
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANS- WHEN TRANS-
FERRING IS UN- FERRING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
CUT-OFF TRANS- CUT-OFF TRANS-
: :
FER PROGRAM FER PROGRAM
: :
COMPLETION OF
● M405; ;
CUT-OFF
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F12.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feeder + parts catcher unloading type.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place during the machining
program. It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input immediately after dashing a bar against the bar stopper and
closing the chuck regardless of upper head or lower head. When
the bar stopper is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is
recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input immediately after completing the cut-off operation
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the cut-off
bite is on the lower turret, input in the lower head. It is
recognized as there is no workpiece on the L-chuck with
this command.

31-73
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump
function.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

☆ For WT with parts catcher type A, it is required L turret to wait for the parts catcher unloading finishes.
For WT with parts catcher type G, this waiting is not necessary because it is not required L-turret to wait for
the parts catcher unloading finishes.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining
of L and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◇SC-100X2 cannot process the L-spindle side with the lower turret.

31-74
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper waits lower during unloading like Parts catcher A
%; %;
O0012(LOWER MAIN
O0012(UPPER MAIN F12.PCA);
F12.PCA);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;

31-75
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; G0B-300.;
; M68;
; M51;
G4U1.;
M69;
☆M142;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;

31-76
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-77
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper does not wait lower during unloading like Parts
catcher G
%; %;
O0212(LOWER MAIN
O0212(UPPER MAIN F12.PCG);
F12.PCG);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F500;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;

31-78
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0B0M768;
; G330A3.W0.;
; M991;
M468;
G0B-10.M472;
M719;

31-79
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M51;
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M469;
M473;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-80
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper and lower turrets perform L-machining during
unloading using M368 or M868 of Parts catcher G
%; %;
O0312(UPPER MAIN O0312(LOWER MAIN
F12.PCG); F12.PCG);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M81;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOADING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F500;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;

31-81
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I104.;
;
;
N201(UNLOADING);
G411U1.I104.;
G28U0B0M768;
M991;
M368B-10.(OR M868);
;
;
N104(L MACHINING WITH N104(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I202.;
G28U0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G330A3.W0.; M120;
M120; G0W-150.T0404;
G0W200.T0404M3S10; M121;
M121; U-100.;
U-100.; G98G1W-100.F1000;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M122;
M122; G28U0;

31-82
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0M5; M123;
M797; M1;
M123; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N202(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0;
G330A3.W0.;
;
;
N202(CUT & TRANSFER); N203(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.;
M151; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3S10; M50;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.;
M152; M96;
G28U0; M151;
M405; M152;
M153; G28B0M97;
; M153;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-83
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-10 G411F21. WS→L→R→WS GR double hand operation
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F21.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F21.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
G411 A1. I100.; ;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
▲ M358 A8221.; GR START ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (LOADING); N100 (LOADING);
WHEN LOADING IS WHEN LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY, G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★M150; ★M150;
WAITING WAITING
M600; LOADING START ;
M601; LOADING FINISH ;
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★M151; ★M151;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-84
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M152; ☆M152;
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UNLOADING WHEN UNLOADING
G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY, G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M153; ☆M153;
WAITING WAITING
; M650; UNLOADING START
; M651; UNLOADING FINISH
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M154; ☆M154;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-85
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANSFER- WHEN TRANSFER-
RING IS UNNECES- RING IS UNNECES-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
SARY, JUMP TO SARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
TRANSFER PRO- TRANSFER PRO-
: :
GRAM GRAM
: :
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F21.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
double hand operation (standard) type with transferring
from L-chuck to R-chuck.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly
required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ When the first machining on the lower turret is L-chuck machining, lower turret cannot start machining
until L-loading finishes. The start of lower turret machining is kept waiting with upper and lower wait-
ing M code.
In the case of a long workpiece, R-machining cannot be performed on the lower turret during L-loading.
When R-machining can be performed on the lower turret during L-loading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
When this upper and lower waiting is deleted, insert M991 in the upper program to check the lower turret
stays in the area near the Z-axis-3rd reference point.

31-86
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
☆ When the last machining on the upper turret is R-chuck machining, unloading cannot start until ma-
chining of the upper turret finishes. The start of R-unloading is kept waiting with upper and lower wait-
ing M code.
In the case of a long workpiece, L-machining cannot be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading.
When L-machining can be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
When this upper and lower waiting is deleted, insert M991 in the lower program to check the upper turret
stays in the area near the Z-axis-3rd reference point.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining
of L and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-87
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For long workpiece
%; %;
O0021(UPPER MAIN O0021(LOWER MAIN
F21.LONG); F21.LONG);
N1G411F21.; N1G411F21.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8221.C1.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G411D1.I101.;
G28U0T0100M560; G28U0T0100;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
★M190; ★M190;
M600; ★M191;
M601; ;
★M191; ;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);

31-88
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.B0;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; M650;
M305(COUNTER FOR
;
CHUTE);
; M651;
☆M142;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
M151; G0B-500.;
M11; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M152; G4U1.;
M153; M151;
; M152;
; G28B0;
M153;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;

31-89
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-90
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For short workpiece
%; %;
O0221(UPPER MAIN O0221(LOWER MAIN
F21.SHORT); F21.SHORT);
N1G411F21.; N1G411F21.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8221.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G28U0T0100;
G28U0T0100M560; G330A3.W0.;
G330A3.W0.; ;
M991; ;
M600;
M601;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G330A3.W0.;
G0U-100.; G0W-200.T0101M54S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; U-100.;
G28U0M5; G98G1W100.F200;
M1; G28U0M55;
; M1;
; ;
;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;

31-91
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F400;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0M472;
; G330A3.W0.B0;
; M991;
M650;
M305(CHUTE COUNTER);
M651;
M473;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
M151; G0B-500.;
M11; G1G98B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M152; G4U1.;
M153; M151;

31-92
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M152;
; G28B0;
M153;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-93
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-11 G411F22. WS→L→R→WS GR single hand operation
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F22.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F22.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
G411 A1. I100.; ;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
▲ M358 A8222.; GR START ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (LOADING); N100 (LOADING);
WHEN LOADING IS WHEN LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY, G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★M150; ★M150;
WAITING WAITING
M600; LOADING START ;
M601; LOADING FINISH ;
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★M151; ★M151;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-94
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M152; ☆M152;
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UNLOADING WHEN UNLOADING
G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY, G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M153; ☆M153;
WAITING WAITING
; M650; UNLOADING START
; M651; UNLOADING FINISH
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M154; ☆M154;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-95
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANSFER- WHEN TRANSFER-
RING IS UNNECES- RING IS UNNECES-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
SARY, JUMP TO SARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
TRANSFER PRO- TRANSFER PRO-
: :
GRAM GRAM
: :
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F22.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
single hand operation type with transferring from L-chuck to
R-chuck.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ When the first machining on the lower turret is L-chuck machining, lower turret cannot start machining until
L-loading finishes. The start of lower turret machining is kept waiting with upper and lower waiting M code.
In the case of a long workpiece, R-machining cannot be performed on the lower turret during L-loading.
When R-machining can be performed on the lower turret during L-loading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
When this upper and lower waiting is deleted, insert M991 in the upper program to check the lower turret
stays in the area near the Z-axis-3rd reference point.
☆ When the last machining on the upper turret is R-chuck machining, unloading cannot start until machining of
the upper turret finishes. The start of R-unloading is kept waiting with upper and lower waiting M code.

31-96
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
In the case of a long workpiece, L-machining cannot be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading.
When L-machining can be performed on the upper turret during R-unloading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
When this upper and lower waiting is deleted, insert M991 in the lower program to check the upper turret
stays in the area near the Z-axis-3rd reference point.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining
of L and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-97
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For long workpiece
%; %;
O0022(UPPER MAIN O0022(LOWER MAIN
F22.LONG); F22.LONG);
N1G411F22.; N1G411F22.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8222.C1.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G411D1.I101.;
G28U0T0100M560; G28U0T0100;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
★M190; ★M190;
M600; ★M191;
M601; ;
★M191; ;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);

31-98
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.B0;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; M650;
M305(COUNTER FOR
;
CHUTE);
; M651;
☆M142;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
M151; G0B-500.;
M11; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M152; G4U1.;
M153; M151;
; M152;
; G28B0;
M153;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;

31-99
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-100
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For short workpiece
%; %;
O0222(UPPER MAIN O0222(LOWER MAIN
F22.SHORT); F22.SHORT);
N1G411F22.; N1G411F22.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8222.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G28U0T0100;
G28U0T0100M560; G330A3.W0.;
G330A3.W0.; ;
M991; ;
M600;
M601;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G330A3.W0.;
G0U-100.; G0W-200.T0101M54S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; U-100.;
G28U0M5; G98G1W100.F200;
M1; G28U0M55;
; M1;
; ;
;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;

31-101
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F400;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0M472;
; G330A3.W0.B0;
; M991;
M650;
M305(CHUTE COUNTER);
M651;
M473;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
M151; G0B-500.;
M11; G1G98B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M152; G4U1.;
M153; M151;

31-102
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M152;
; G28B0;
M153;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-103
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-12 G411F23. WS→L→WS/WS→R→WS without L-R transfer, GR double hand opera-
tion (Type A)
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F23.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F23.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
G411 A1. I100.; ;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
▲ M358 A8223.; GR START ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (L WORK CHANGE); N100 (L WORK CHANGE);
☆M428; Select L-side ☆M428; Select L-side
WHEN WORK WHEN WORK
CHANGE IS UN- CHANGE IS UN-
G411 D1. I150.; G411 D1. I150.;
NECESSARY, JUMP NECESSARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M150; ★M150;
L-LOWER WAITING L-LOWER WAITING
WORK CHAGE
M600; ;
START
WORK CHAGE FIN-
M601; ;
ISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M151; ★M151;
L-LOWER WAITING L-LOWER WAITING
; ;
; ;
N150 (R WORK CHANGE); N150 (R WORK CHANGE);
☆M427; Select R-side ☆M427; Select R-side
WHEN WORK WHEN WORK
CHANGE IS UN- CHANGE IS UN-
G411 D1. I101.; G411 D1. I101.;
NECESSARY, JUMP NECESSARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M152; ★M152;
R-LOWER WAITING R-LOWER WAITING
WORK CHANGE
; M650;
START
WORK CHANGE
; M651;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M153; ★M153;
R-LOWER WAITING R-LOWER WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-104
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

31-105
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F23.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
double hand operation type without transferring from
L-chuck to R-chuck.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
☆ Selection of L loading or R loading is necessary. M428 is to select L-loading and M427 is to select
R-loading.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ During workpiece exchange, both of turrets stand by in waiting mode.
L-loading→R-loading→LR-machining start→LR-machining finish→L-workpiece exchange→R-workpiece
exchange→LR-machining start→LR-machining finish→Cycle stop→L-unloading→R-unloading
① Both of turrets can machine with L/R units freely. There is no loader-related restriction.
② Since workpiece exchange is performed after machining of both L and R units is completed,
there is little restriction of the workpiece length which can be used.
Restriction matter: In this system, machining cannot be performed during workpiece exchange.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-106
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For long workpiece
%; %;
O0023(UPPER MAIN O0023(LOWER MAIN
F23.LONG); F23.LONG);
N1G411F23.; N1G411F23.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8223.C1.;
;
;
N100(L WORK CHANGE); N100(L WORK CHANGE);
☆ M428; ☆ M428;
G411D1.I150.; G411D1.I150.;
G28U0T0100M560; G28U0T0100;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
★ M190; ★ M190;
M600; ★ M191;
M305(CHUTE COUNTER)
M601; ;
★ M191; ;
;
;
N150(R WORK CHANGE); N150(R WORK CHANGE);
☆ M427; ☆ M427;
G411D1.I101.; G411D1.I101.;
G28U0T0100; G28U0T0100M562;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
★ M192; ★ M192;
★ M193; M650;
M305(CHUTE COUNTER)
; M651;
; ★ M193;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;

31-107
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-108
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-13 G411F23. WS→L→WS/WS→R→WS without L-R transfer, GR double hand opera-
tion (Type B)
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F23.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F23.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
G411 A1. I100.; ;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
▲ M358 A8223.; GR START ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (L WORK CHANGE); N100 (R WORK CHANGE);
☆M428; Select L-side ☆M427; Select R-side
WHEN WORK WHEN WORK
CHANGE IS UN- CHANGE IS UN-
G411 D1. I101.; G411 D1. I101.;
NECESSARY, JUMP NECESSARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
WORK CHAGE WORK CHANGE
M600; M650;
START START
WORK CHAGE FIN- WORK CHANGE
M601; M650;
ISH FINISH
; ;
; ;

31-109
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %
◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F23.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.

31-110
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
double hand operation type without transferring from
L-chuck to R-chuck.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
☆ Selection of L loading or R loading is necessary. M428 is to select L-loading and M427 is to select
R-loading.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ During workpiece exchange, both of turrets don't stand by in waiting mode. It is possible to perform R-side
workpiece exchange during L-side machining.
L-loading→L-machining start→R-loading→R-machining start→LR-machining finish→L-workpiece ex-
change→L-machining start→R-workpiece exchange→R-machining start→LR-machining finish→Cycle
stop→L-unloading→R-unloading
① The L-side machining is limited within the area of which GR does not interfere.
② While L-side is machining, the loader has two workpieces and rotate 180 degrees within the machine in
the R-side area. Therefore, restriction may occur to the workpiece length which can be used.
③ The 1st machining of L-side should be performed by the upper turret, otherwise R-side workpiece ex-
change cannot be performed during L-machining.
④ Since there is no upper and lower waiting during R-side workpiece exchange, insert M991 in the lower
program to check the upper turret stays in the area near the Z-axis-3rd reference point.
Restriction matter: In this system, the program is quite difficult.
Restriction matter: In this system, it is possible to perform R-side workpiece exchange during L-side
machining, but it is not possible to perform L-side workpiece exchange during R-side machining,
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-111
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 For short workpiece
%; %;
O0223(UPPER MAIN O0223(LOWER MAIN
F23.SHORT); F23.SHORT);
N1G411F23.; N1G411F23.;
G28U0(V0)(M586); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8223.;
;
;
N100(L WORK CHANGE);
☆M428;
G411D1.I150.;
G28U0T0100M560;
G330A3.W0.;
M991;
M600;
M601;
;
;
N150(R WORK CHANGE
N100(R WORK CHANGE);
START);
☆M427; ☆M427;
; G411D1.I101.;
; G28U0T0100M562;
G330A3.W0.;
M991;
M650;
M651;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G330A3.W0.; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
G0W200.T0101M3S10; U-100.;
G0U-100.; G98G1W100.F1000;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G28U0M55;
G28U0M5; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;

31-112
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-113
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-9-14 G411F26. GR loading + Parts catcher unloading L→R transfer
2 head machine WT/WY/NTJ/NTJ-100/NTX(S)/STS/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100
UPPER TURRET LOWER TURRET
O1234 (UPPER MAIN); O1234 (LOWER MAIN);
MAIN PROGRAM MAIN PROGRAM
OPERATION PAT- OPERATION PAT-
N1 G411 F26.; TERN SELECT AND N1 G411 F26.; TERN SELECT AND
STATUS CHECK STATUS CHECK
; ;
; ;
WHEN GR IS INVA-
G411 A1. I100.; ;
LID, JUMP TO NEXT.
▲ M358 A8226.; GR START ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (LOADING); N100 (LOADING);
WHEN LOADING IS WHEN LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY, G411 D1. I101.; UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★M150; ★M150;
WAITING WAITING
M600; LOADING START ;
M601; LOADING FINISH ;
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★M151; ★M151;
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-114
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);

WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINING IS L-MACHINING IS
G411 L1. I102.; G411 L1. I102.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINING L-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHINING FIN-
● M797; ;
ISH
; ;
◆ ; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINING IS R-MACHINING IS
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
UNNECESSARY, UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINING R-MACHINING
: :
PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
R-MACHINING FIN-
; ● M799;
ISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE
WHEN 1 CYCLE
▼ G411 C1. I2.; STOP, JUMP TO ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP TO END.
END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M152; ☆M152;
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UNLOADING WHEN UNLOADING
G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY, G411 U1. I202.; IS UNNECESSARY,
JUMP TO NEXT. JUMP TO NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M153; ☆M153;
WAITING WAITING
PARTS CATCHER
M68;
ADVANCE
M51; CHUCK OPEN
PARTS CATCHER
M69;
RETRACT
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆M154; ☆M154;
WAITING WAITING

31-115
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; ;
; ;
N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);
WHEN TRANSFER- WHEN TRANSFER-
RING IS UNNECES- RING IS UNNECES-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
SARY, JUMP TO SARY, JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
TRANSFER PRO- TRANSFER PRO-
: :
GRAM GRAM
: :
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

31-116
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many times in what
kind of turn. Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F26.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
loading + parts catcher unloading type with from L to R
transfer.
Must input at the head of upper and lower head.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly
required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret
performs machining for L-chuck finally, input in the lower head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret
performs machining for R-chuck finally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ When the first machining on the lower turret is L-chuck machining, lower turret cannot start machining until
L-loading finishes. The start of lower turret machining is kept waiting with upper and lower waiting M code.
In the case of a long workpiece, R-machining cannot be performed on the lower turret during L-loading.
When R-machining can be performed on the lower turret during L-loading, this upper and lower waiting is
unnecessary.
☆ For WT with parts catcher type A, it is required L turret to wait for the parts catcher unloading finishes.
For WT with parts catcher type G, this waiting is not necessary because it is not required L-turret to wait for
the parts catcher unloading finishes.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed. There is a push button for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

31-117
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper waits lower during unloading like Parts catcher A
Also for long workpiece
%; %;
O0026(LOWER MAIN
O0026(UPPER MAIN F26.PCA);
F26.PCA);
N1G411F26.; N1G411F26.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8226.C1.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G411D1.I101.;
G28U0T0100M560; G28U0T0100;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
★M190; ★M190;
M600; ★M191;
M601; ;
★M191; ;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G0W100.T0101M54S10;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103;
M103; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;

31-118
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140; ☆M140;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
☆M141; ☆M141;
☆M142; G0B-300.;
; M68;
; M51;
☆G4U1.;
M69;
M142;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M150; M150;
M151; G0B-500.;
M11; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M152; G4U1.;
M153; M151;
; M152;
; G28B0;
M153;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;

31-119
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-120
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR WT300 Upper does not wait lower during unloading like
Parts catcher G
Also for short workpiece
%; %;
O0226(LOWER MAIN
O0226(UPPER MAIN F26.PCG);
F26.PCG);
N1G411F26.; N1G411F26.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0;
; ;
; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8226.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G28U0T0100;
G28U0T0100M560; G330A3.W0.;
G330A3.W0.; ;
M991; ;
M600;
M601;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING); N101(R MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G330A3.W0.;
G0U-100.; G0W-200.T0101M54S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; U-100.;
G28U0M5; G98G1W100.F200;
M1; G28U0M55;
; M1;
; ;
;
N102(L MACHINING WITH N102(L MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I103.; G411L1.I103.;
M100; M100;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G0W-100.T0202;
M101; M101;
G0U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102; M102;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M103; M103;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;

31-121
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N103(R MACHINING WITH N103(R MACHINING WITH
LOWER); UPPER);
G411R1.I104.; G411R1.I200.;
M110; M110;
G28U0W0M441; G28U0W0M441;
G0W100.T0303; G0W100.T0303M54S10;
M111; M111;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000;
M112; M112;
G28U0; G28U0M55;
M113; M799;
M1; M113;
; M1;
; ;
;
N104(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I200.;
G28U0M41;
G330A3.W0.;
G0W200.T0404M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F400;
G28U0M5;
M797;
;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ;
; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G330A3.W0.; G28U0B0M768;
; G330A3.W0.;
; M991;
M468;
G0B-10.M472;
M719;
M51;
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M469;
M473;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M55;
G330A3.W0; G330A3.W0.;

31-122
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M150; M150;
M151; G0B-500.;
M11; G1G98B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M50;
M152; G4U1.;
M153; M151;
; M152;
; G28B0;
M153;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30;
; ;
; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0B0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2;
% %

31-123
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10 Program Example NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250
These are the examples of the machine model constituted from 3-path control and
one tool spindle for the upper unit and two (L and R) turrets for the lower unit.
Coordinates relations have taken NTX(W) for the example. As for other machine
models, it cannot perform as it is.
When running the program on other machine models, please modify the coordi-
nates relations and stroke relations.
The M code of the bar feed functions is carried as an example. Before running the
program, it is necessary to change the M-code according to the type of the bar
feed functions.
The 3rd zero position of the Z-axis is used. Before running the program, check
that the value is set to the parameter of the 3rd zero position.
Command G30 P3 W0;
Parameter 1242 (Z) Near the - stroke end (left side) for the
upper tool spindle
Near the - stroke end (right side) for the
R-lower turret
Near the - stroke end (left side) for the
L-lower turret
The 2nd zero position of the Z-axis is used for the upper tool spindle. Before run-
ning the program, check that the value is set to the parameter of the 2nd zero posi-
tion.
Command G30 P2 W0;
Parameter 1241 (Z) Near the + stroke end (right side) for the
upper tool spindle

31-124
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-1 G411F1. Manual work change, L-R transfer
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F1.; SELECT N1 G411 F1.; SELECT N1 G411 F1.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;

31-125
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I201.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆ ; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I201.; G411 R1. I201.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :

31-126
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
CUT-OFF CUT-OFF CUT-OFF
: TRANSFER : TRANSFER : TRANSFER
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I201.; Skip R-machining
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 F1.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual work
change type with L-R transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.

31-127
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs L machining first
%; %; %;
O0001(L LOWER MAIN O0001(UPPER MAIN O0001(R LOWER MAIN
F1.); F1.); F1.);
N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
G0W-100.T0101M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10; G0W-100.T0303M488S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;

31-128
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-129
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs R machining first
%; %; %;
O0201(L LOWER MAIN O0201(UPPER MAIN O0201(R LOWER MAIN
F1.); F1.); F1.);
N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10; G0W-100.T0303M488S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N102(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
G0W-100.T0202M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;

31-130
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-131
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-2 G411F2. Manual work change, R-L transfer
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F2.; SELECT N1 G411 F2.; SELECT N1 G411 F2.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;

31-132
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I201.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I201.; G411 R1. I201.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :

31-133
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
CUT-OFF CUT-OFF CUT-OFF
: TRANSFER : TRANSFER : TRANSFER
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I201.; Skip R-machining
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 F2.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual work
change type with R-L transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.

31-134
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs L machining first
%; %; %;
O0002(L LOWER MAIN O0002(UPPER MAIN O0002(R LOWER MAIN
F2.); F2.); F2.);
N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
G0W-100.T0101M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S10
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M10; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M121P123;

31-135
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M122P123; ; M122P123;
M123P123; ; M51;
; G4U1.;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-136
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs R machining first
%; %; %;
O0202(L LOWER MAIN O0202(UPPER MAIN O0202(R LOWER MAIN
F2.); F2.); F2.);
N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S10
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N102(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
G0W-100.T0202M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M10; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M121P123;

31-137
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M122P123; ; M122P123;
M123P123; ; M51;
; G4U1.;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-138
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-3 G411F3. Manual work change, same workpiece for L and R, no transfer
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F3.; SELECT N1 G411 F3.; SELECT N1 G411 F3.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;

31-139
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
NG IS UN- NG IS UN-
G411 L1. I30.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
: NG PRO- : NG PRO-
GRAM GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I30.; G411 R1. I30.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

31-140
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I30.; Skip R-machining
G411 F3.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual work
change type without transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.

31-141
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs L machining first
%; %; %;
O0003(L LOWER MAIN O0003(UPPER MAIN O0003(R LOWER MAIN
F3.); F3.); F3.);
N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
G0W-100.T0101M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I30.; G411R1.I30.; G411R1.I30.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S1
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
0;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-142
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs R machining first
%; %; %;
O0203(L LOWER MAIN O0203(UPPER MAIN O0203(R LOWER MAIN
F3.); F3.); F3.);
N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S1
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
0;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N102(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
G0W-100.T0202M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-143
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-4 G411F5. Manual work change only on L-chuck
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F5.; SELECT N1 G411 F5.; SELECT N1 G411 F5.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆ ◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
NG IS UN- NG IS UN-
G411 L1. I30.; G411 L1. I30.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
: NG PRO- : NG PRO-
GRAM GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

31-144
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of R-chuck is not acceptable for this pattern. Keep R-chuck open.
G411 L1. I30.; Skip L-machining
G411 F5.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual work
change type with only L-machining.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly required for a
change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.

31-145
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that L-lower turret performs L machining first
%; %; %;
O0005(L LOWER MAIN O0005(UPPER MAIN O0005(R LOWER MAIN
F5.); F5.); F5.);
N1G411F5.; N1G411F5.; N1G411F5.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
M1;
;
;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I30.; G411L1.I30.;
M100P13; M100P13;
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
G0W-100.T0202M488S10; G0Z-300.M88S10;
M101P13; M101P13;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102P13; M102P13;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90;
M797; M103P13;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-146
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-5 G411F6. Manual work change only on R-chuck
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F6.; SELECT N1 G411 F6.; SELECT N1 G411 F6.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆ ◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I30.; G411 R1. I30.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

31-147
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of L-chuck is not acceptable for this pattern. Keep L-chuck open.
G411 R1. I30.; Skip R-machining
G411 F6.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the manual work
change type with only R-machining.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly required for a
change of operation.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.

31-148
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that R-lower turret performs R machining first
%; %; %;
O0006(L LOWER MAIN O0006(UPPER MAIN O0006(R LOWER MAIN
F6.); F6.); F6.);
N1G411F6.; N1G411F6.; N1G411F6.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING);
G411R1.I103.;
G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M55;
M1;
;
;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411R1.I30.; G411R1.I30.;
M110P12; M110P12;
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S1
G0Z300.M88S10;
0;
M111P12; M111P12;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M112P12; M112P12;
G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-149
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-6 G411F12. Bar loading (lower turret) + Parts catcher unloading
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F12.; SELECT N1 G411 F12.; SELECT N1 G411 F12.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10 (BAR
; ;
CHANGE);
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS
■ G411 B1. I100.; UNNECES- ; ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.
BAR STOP-
G0 X_Z_T_; ; ;
PER
CHUCK
M11; ; ;
OPEN
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ; ;
VANCE
BAR
M61; CHANGE ; ;
M58/M81
CHUCK
M10; ; ;
CLOSE
TOP CUT ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N100 (BAR
; ;
LOADING);

31-150
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
WHEN
LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES- ; ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.
BAR STOP-
G0 X_Z_T_; ; ;
PER
CHUCK
M11; ; ;
OPEN
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ; ;
VANCE
CHUCK
M10; ; ;
CLOSE
COMPLE-
TION OF
● M705; ; ;
BAR AD-
VANCE
; ;
; ;

31-151
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
NG IS UN- NG IS UN-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
: NG PRO- : NG PRO-
GRAM GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 WHEN 1 WHEN 1
CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP STOP, JUMP JUMP TO
TO END. TO END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (UN- N201 (UN-
;
LOADING); LOADING);

31-152
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
UPPER AND UPPER AND
; ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UN- WHEN UN-
LOADING IS LOADING IS
; G411 U1. I202.; UNNECES- G411 U1. I202.; UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
; ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; :
R-LOWER
TURRET
; : PARTS
CATCHER
UNLOADING
; :
UPPER AND UPPER AND
; ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :
TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER
: : :
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% % %
◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.

31-153
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F12.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feeder + R turret parts catcher unloading type with L-R
transfer. Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place during the machining
program.
It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input immediately after dashing a bar against the bar stopper and
closing the chuck regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the bar stopper is on the lower turret, input in the
lower head.
It is recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input immediately after completing the cut-off operation
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the cut-off bite is on the lower turret, input in the
lower head.
It is recognized as there is no workpiece on the L-chuck
with this command.
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump func-
tion.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

★ Bar loading is commanded from the 3rd-path R-lower turret.

Upper tool spindle is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
R-lower turret is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
☆ Unloading is commanded from the 2nd-path L-lower turret. This example is in case that the last process of
the upper tool spindle is the R-unit machining and the R-lower turret needs to wait the completion of the up-
per tool spindle machining.
This waiting is unnecessary when the upper tool spindle machines with L unit during unloading. L-lower

31-154
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
turret is not related to unloading. L-unit machining can be continued also in unloading.
In addition, waiting is required as mentioned above also just before the block of G411U1.
■ If the above-mentioned waiting is deleted, depending on the machining process, unloading command may
come out before the upper tool spindle moves to the L unit.
In order to avoid this, add the following M code into the R-lower machining program.
M991: L unit area confirmation of upper tool spindle
Completes when the Z-axis of the upper tool spindle is in the L unit area. Enter just before starting unload-
ing.
This area is set on the following parameter of the upper tool spindle head. This is also the retraction area for
GR unloading.
6936: −150000 NTX standard
6936: −150.000 NTXL standard
See the sample program of O0212 below.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For the upper tool spindle, it is necessary to move the upper tool spindle to the L unit at the time of unloading.
Refer to the following program example.
G30 P3 W0; Upper tool third zero point (Unloading point)

31-155
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle waits lower turrets during
unloading
%; %; %;
O0012(L LOWER O0012(UPPER MAIN O0012(R LOWER
MAIN F12.); F12.); MAIN F12.);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S1
0;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N101(R MACHIN-
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER); ING);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
10;
G0W-100.T0101M488
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
S10;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;

31-156
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHIN- N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
ING); WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S1
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
0;
G0W-100.T0303M488
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140P12; ☆M140P12;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G30P2U0W0B0; 2nd Ref. point
G30P3W0; Move to L-area ☆M141P12; is for turret PC
☆M141P12; for loading U-300.T0700;
☆M142P12; G0W50.;
; M51;
; G4U1.;
G30P2W0;
G30P2U0;
G367T0700F5000;
M468;
G4U1.;
M469;
☆M142P12;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;

31-157
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; for transfer M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-158
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W)
Sample that upper tool spindle performs R-machining during loading, and L-machining during unloading.
%; %; %;
O0212(L LOWER O0212(UPPER MAIN O0212(R LOWER
MAIN F12.); F12.); MAIN F12.);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212
;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10
;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212
;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
;
G0W-100.T0303M488
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;

31-159
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N102(R MACHIN-
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER); ING);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
10;
G0W-100.T0202M488S Move to L-area
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
10; for machining
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G30P3W0; Move to L-area ■ G30P2U0W0B0M991; Confirm that
; for unloading U-300.T0700; upper tool
; G0W50.; spindle is in
M51; L-area
G4U1.;
G30P2W0;
G30P2U0;
G367T0700F5000;
M468
G4U1.;
M469;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; for transfer M120P123;

31-160
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-161
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-7 G411F14. Bar loading (lower turret) + GR unloading
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F14.; SELECT N1 G411 F14.; SELECT AND N1 G411 F14.; SELECT AND
AND STA- STATUS STATUS
TUS CHECK CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
WHEN GR IS
INVALID,
; ; G411 A1. I100.;
JUMP TO
NEXT.
; ; ▲ M358 A8213.; GR START
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10 (BAR
; ;
CHANGE);
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS
■ G411 B1. I100.; UNNECES- ; ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.
BAR STOP-
G0 X_Z_T_; ; ;
PER
CHUCK
M11; ; ;
OPEN
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ; ;
VANCE
BAR
M61; CHANGE ; ;
M58/M81
CHUCK
M10; ; ;
CLOSE
TOP CUT ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N100 (BAR
; ;
LOADING);
WHEN
LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES- ; ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.

31-162
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
BAR STOP-
G0 X_Z_T_; ; ;
PER
CHUCK
M11; ; ;
OPEN
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ; ;
VANCE
CHUCK
M10; ; ;
CLOSE
BAR AD-
● M705; VANCE ; ;
FINISH
; ;
; ;

31-163
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 WHEN 1 WHEN 1
CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP STOP, JUMP JUMP TO
TO END. TO END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (UN- N201 (UN-
LOADING); LOADING);
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M152 P12; R-LOWER ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UN- WHEN UN-
G411 U1. I202.; G411 U1. I202.;
LOADING IS LOADING IS

31-164
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
UNNECES- UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M153 P12; R-LOWER ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
UNLOADING
; M650;
START
UNLOADING
; M651;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M154 P12; R-LOWER ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :
TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER
: : :
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% % %

31-165
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F14.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feeder + GR unloading type with L-R transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place during the machining
program.
It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input immediately after dashing a bar against the bar stopper and
closing the chuck regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the bar stopper is on the lower turret, input in the
lower head.
It is recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input immediately after completing the cut-off operation
regardless of upper head or lower head.
When the cut-off bite is on the lower turret, input in the
lower head.
It is recognized as there is no workpiece on the L-chuck
with this command.
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump func-
tion.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.

31-166
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.

★ Bar loading is commanded from the 3rd-path R-lower turret.
Upper tool spindle is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
R-lower turret is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
☆ Unloading is commanded from the 2nd-path L-lower turret. This example is in case that the last process of
the upper tool spindle is the R-unit machining and the R-lower turret needs to wait the completion of the up-
per tool spindle machining.
This waiting is unnecessary when the upper tool spindle machines with L unit during unloading. L-lower
turret is not related to unloading. L-unit machining can be continued also in unloading.
In addition, waiting is required as mentioned above also just before the block of G411U1.
■ If the above-mentioned waiting is deleted, depending on the machining process, unloading command may
come out before the upper tool spindle moves to the L unit.
In order to avoid this, add the following M code into the R-lower machining program.
M991: L unit area confirmation of upper tool spindle
Completes when the Z-axis of the upper tool spindle is in the L unit area. Enter just before starting unload-
ing.
This area is set on the following parameter of the upper tool spindle head. This is also the retraction area for
GR unloading.
6936: −150000 NTX standard
6936: −150.000 NTXL standard
See the sample program of O0214 below.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For the upper tool spindle, it is necessary to move the upper tool spindle to the L unit at the time of unloading.
Refer to the following program example.
G30 P3 W0; Upper tool third zero point (Unloading point)

31-167
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle waits lower turrets during
unloading
%; %; %;
O0014(L LOWER O0014(UPPER MAIN O0014(R LOWER
MAIN F14.); F14.); MAIN F14.);
N1G411F14.; N1G411F14.; N1G411F14.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
G411A1.I100.;
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.; M358A8213.;
G28U0W0; ;
G0U-100.W-150.T121
;
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S1
0;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N101(R MACHIN-
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER); ING);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
10;
G0W-100.T0101M488
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
S10;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;

31-168
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHIN- N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
ING); WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S1
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
0;
G0W-100.T0303M488
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140P12; ☆M140P12;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
☆M141P12; for unloading ☆M141P12;
☆M142P12; M650;
M305(COUNTER
;
FOR CHUTE);
; M651;
☆M142P12;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; for transfer M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;

31-169
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-170
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs R-machining
during loading, and L-machining during unloading.
%; %; %;
O0214(L LOWER O0214(UPPER MAIN O0214(R LOWER
MAIN F14.); F14.); MAIN F14.);
N1G411F14.; N1G411F14.; N1G411F14.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
G411A1.I100.;
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.; M358A8213.;
G28U0W0; ;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212
;
;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S1
0;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212
;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHIN- N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
ING); WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
0;
G0W-100.T0303M488
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;

31-171
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N102(R MACHIN-
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER); ING);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
10;
G0W-100.T0202M488 Move to L-area
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
S10; for machining
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G30P3W0; Move to L-area G28U0;
; for machining ■ G30P3W0M991; Confirm that
; M650; upper tool
M305(COUNTER FOR spindle is in
CHUTE); L-area
M651;
;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; for transfer M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;

31-172
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-173
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-8 G411F21. WS→L→R→WS GR double hand operation
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
GRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F21.; SELECT N1 G411 F21.; SELECT AND N1 G411 F21.; SELECT AND
AND STA- STATUS STATUS
TUS CHECK CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
WHEN GR IS
INVALID,
G411 A1. I100.; ; ;
JUMP TO
NEXT.
▲ M358 A8221.; GR START ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N100 (LOAD- N100 (LOAD-
ING); ING);
WHEN WHEN
LOADING IS LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES- G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M150 P13; L-LOWER ★M150 P13; L-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
LOADING
M600; ;
START
LOADING
M601; ;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M151 P13; L-LOWER ★M151 P13; L-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-174
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 WHEN 1 WHEN 1
CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP STOP, JUMP JUMP TO
TO END. TO END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (UN- N201 (UN-
LOADING); LOADING);

31-175
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M152 P12; R-LOWER ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UN- WHEN UN-
LOADING IS LOADING IS
G411 U1. I202.; UNNECES- G411 U1. I202.; UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M153 P12; R-LOWER ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
UNLOADING
; M650;
START
UNLOADING
; M651;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M154 P12; R-LOWER ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :
TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER
: : :
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
T T T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% % %

31-176
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F21.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
double hand operation (standard) type with L-R transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly
required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining
block regardless of upper tool head or lower turret.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining
block regardless of upper tool head or lower turret.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ Loading is commanded from the 3rd-path R-lower turret. This example is in case that the first process of the
upper tool spindle is the L-unit machining and the upper tool spindle needs to wait the completion of loading..
This waiting is unnecessary when the upper tool spindle machines with R unit during loading.
R-lower turret is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
☆ Unloading is commanded from the 2nd-path L-lower turret. This example is in case that the last process of
the upper tool spindle is the R-unit machining and the R-lower turret needs to wait the completion of the up-
per tool spindle machining.
This waiting is unnecessary when the upper tool spindle machines with L unit during unloading. L-lower
turret is not related to unloading. L-unit machining can be continued also in unloading.
In addition, waiting is required as mentioned above also just before the block of G411U1.
■ If the above-mentioned waiting is deleted, depending on the machining process, loading command may come
out before the upper tool spindle moves to the R unit, the upper tool spindle may move to the L unit during
loading on the L unit, or unloading command may come out before the upper tool spindle moves to the L unit.
In order to avoid this, add the following M code into the machining program.
M991: For confirmation of GR operation This M code has the different meanings with the
commanded heads.
M991: GR recession confirmation (This is commanded by the upper tool spindle side.)
Completes while GR is not advancing into the lathe. Enter just before the upper
tool spindle moves from the R unit to the L unit or from the L unit to the R unit.
M991: L unit area confirmation of upper tool spindle (This is commanded by the R-lower turret side.)
Completes when the Z-axis of the upper tool spindle is in the L unit area. Enter
just before starting unloading.
M991: R unit area confirmation of upper tool spindle (This is commanded by the L-lower turret side.)
Completes when the Z-axis of the upper tool spindle is in the R unit area. Enter
just before starting loading.
If the upper tool spindle advances into the area while GR is advancing, the upper tool spindle will stop
in the feed hold.

31-177
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
If the GR advances into the lathe while upper tool spindle has not finished moving into the
NO-interference area, the GR will stop in the feed hold. The program of the upper tool is required to
determine the process of the L and R units and coordinates with being always conscious of this.
If M991 is inserted correctly, GR and lathe can be kept waiting with M991, without stopping in the
feed hold.
See the sample program of O0221 below.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For the upper tool spindle, it is necessary to move the upper tool spindle to the R unit at the time of loading,
and to the L unit at the time of unloading. Refer to the following program example.
G30 P2 W0; Upper tool second zero point (Loading point), G30 P3 W0; Upper tool third zero point (Un-
loading point)

31-178
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle waits lower turrets during
loading and unloading
%; %; %;
O0021(L LOWER O0021(UPPER MAIN O0021(R LOWER
MAIN F21.); F21.); MAIN F21.);
N1G411F21.; N1G411F21.; N1G411F21.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8221.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G411D1.I102.;
G28U0T0100M560; G28U0;
G30P3W0; G30P2W0; Move to R-area
★M190P13; ★M190P13; for loading
M600; ★M191P13;
M601; ;
★M191P13; ;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S1
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
0;
G0W-100.T0101M488S
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
10;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;

31-179
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140P12; ☆M140P12;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
☆M141P12; for unloading ☆M141P12;
☆M142P12; M650;
M305(COUNTER FOR
;
CHUTE);
; M651;
☆M142P12;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; for transfer M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-180
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs R-machining
during loading, and L-machining during unloading.
%; %; %;
O0221(L
O0221(UPPER O0221(R LOW-
LOWER MAIN
MAIN F21.); ER MAIN F21.);
F21.);
N1G411F21.; N1G411F21.; N1G411F21.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8221.;
;
;
N100(LOADIN N100(LOADING
G); );
G411D1.I101.; G28U0;
G28U0T0100M Move to R-area
G30P2W0;
560; for
G30P3W0M991 loading
■ ;
; Confirm that
M600; upper tool spin- ;
M601; dle is in R-area
;
;
N101(R MA- N101(R MA-
N101(L MA-
CHINING WITH CHINING WITH
CHINING);
LOWER); UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T010
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
1M3S10;
G0W-100.T0303
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
M488S10;
G98G1W-100.F
M111P12; M111P12;
1000;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F10 G98G1W-100.F10
M1;
00; 00;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MA- N102(L MA-
N102(R MA-
CHINING CHINING WITH
CHINING);
WITH UPPER); LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
M54S10;

31-181
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W-100.T020 Confirm GR is
■ M991; U-100.;
2M488S10; out of lathe
G0Z-300.M88S1 Move to L-area G98G1W-100.F10
M101P13;
0; for machining 00;
U-100.; M101P13; As far as this G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F sample is con-
U-100.; M799;
1000; cerned, this
G98G1W-100.F1 M991 is not
M102P13; M1;
000; necessary, be-
G28U0M490; M102P13; cause there is ;
M797; G28U0M90; waiting M-code ;
M103P13; M103P13; between upper
M1; M1; and lower. If
; ; there is no
; ; waiting M-code,
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE M991 is neces- N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); sary. STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADI N201(UNLOADI
NG); NG);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G30P3W0; Move to G28U0;
L-area for un- Confirm that
; ■ G30P3W0M991;
loading upper tool
; M650; spindle is in
M305(COUNTER L-area
FOR CHUTE);
M651;
;
;
N202(TRANSF N202(TRANSFE N202(TRANSFE
ER); R); R);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; L-area for M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; transfer G0B-500.;
G98G1B-550.F10
M11; M122P123;
00;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41
N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;

31-182
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-183
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-9 G411F22. WS→L→R→WS GR single hand operation
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
GRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F22.; SELECT N1 G411 F22.; SELECT AND N1 G411 F22.; SELECT AND
AND STA- STATUS STATUS
TUS CHECK CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
WHEN GR IS
INVALID,
G411 A1. I100.; ; ;
JUMP TO
NEXT.
▲ M358 A8222.; GR START ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N100 (LOAD- N100 (LOAD-
ING); ING);
WHEN WHEN
LOADING IS LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES- G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M150 P13; L-LOWER ★M150 P13; L-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
LOADING
M600; ;
START
LOADING
M601; ;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M151 P13; L-LOWER ★M151 P13; L-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-184
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 WHEN 1 WHEN 1
CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP STOP, JUMP JUMP TO
TO END. TO END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (UN- N201 (UN-
LOADING); LOADING);
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M152 P12; R-LOWER ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UN- WHEN UN-
G411 U1. I202.; G411 U1. I202.;
LOADING IS LOADING IS

31-185
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
UNNECES- UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M153 P12; R-LOWER ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
UNLOADING
; M650;
START
UNLOADING
; M651;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
☆M154 P12; R-LOWER ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :
TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER
: : :
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
T T T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% % %

31-186
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F22.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
single hand operation type with L-R transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper tool head or lower turret.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper tool head or lower turret.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ Loading is commanded from the 3rd-path R-lower turret. This example is in case that the first process of
the upper tool spindle is the L-unit machining and the upper tool spindle needs to wait the completion of
loading. This waiting is unnecessary when the upper tool spindle machines with R unit during loading.
R-lower turret is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
☆ Unloading is commanded from the 2nd-path L-lower turret. This example is in case that the last process of
the upper tool spindle is the R-unit machining and the R-lower turret needs to wait the completion of the up-
per tool spindle machining.
This waiting is unnecessary when the upper tool spindle machines with L unit during unloading. L-lower
turret is not related to unloading. L-unit machining can be continued also in unloading.
In addition, waiting is required as mentioned above also just before the block of G411U1.
■ If the above-mentioned waiting is deleted, depending on the machining process, loading command may come
out before the upper tool spindle moves to the R unit, the upper tool spindle may move to the L unit during
loading on the L unit, or unloading command may come out before the upper tool spindle moves to the L unit.
In order to avoid this, add the following M code into the machining program.
M991: For confirmation of GR operation This M code has the different meanings with the
commanded heads.
M991: GR recession confirmation (This is commanded by the upper tool spindle side.)
Completes while GR is not advancing into the lathe. Enter just before the upper
tool spindle moves from the R unit to the L unit or from the L unit to the R unit.
M991: L unit area confirmation of upper tool spindle (This is commanded by the R-lower turret side.)
Completes when the Z-axis of the upper tool spindle is in the L unit area. Enter
just before starting unloading.
M991: R unit area confirmation of upper tool spindle (This is commanded by the L-lower turret side.)
Completes when the Z-axis of the upper tool spindle is in the R unit area. Enter
just before starting loading.
If the upper tool spindle advances into the area while GR is advancing, the upper tool spindle
will stop in the feed hold.

31-187
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
If the GR advances into the lathe while upper tool spindle has not finished moving into the
NO-interference area, the GR will stop in the feed hold. The program of the upper tool is re-
quired to determine the process of the L and R units and coordinates with being always con-
scious of this.
If M991 is inserted correctly, GR and lathe can be kept waiting with M991, without stopping in
the feed hold.
See the sample program of O0221 below.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For the upper tool spindle, it is necessary to move the upper tool spindle to the R unit at the time of loading,
and to the L unit at the time of unloading. Refer to the following program example.
G30 P2 W0; Upper tool second zero point (Loading point), G30 P3 W0; Upper tool third zero point (Un-
loading point)

31-188
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle waits lower turrets during
loading and unloading
%; %; %;
O0022(L LOWER O0022(UPPER MAIN O0022(R LOWER
MAIN F22.); F22.); MAIN F22.);
N1G411F22.; N1G411F22.; N1G411F22.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8222.;
;
;
N100(LOADING); N100(LOADING);
G411D1.I101.; G411D1.I102.;
G28U0T0100M560; G28U0;
G30P3W0; G30P2W0; Move to R-area
★M190P13; ★M190P13; for loading
M600; ★M191P13;
M601; ;
★M191P13; ;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S1
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
0;
G0W-100.T0101M488S
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
10;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
G0W-100.T0303M488S
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;

31-189
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140P12; ☆M140P12;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0; G28U0;
G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
☆M141P12; for unloading ☆M141P12;
☆M142P12; M650;
M305(COUNTER FOR
;
CHUTE);
; M651;
☆M142P12;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to L-area G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; for transfer M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; G0B-500.;
M11; M122P123; G98G1B-550.F1000;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-190
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W) Sample that upper tool spindle performs R-machining
during loading, and L-machining during unloading.
%; %; %;
O0222(L LOWER O0222(UPPER O0222(R LOWER
MAIN F22.); MAIN F22.); MAIN F22.);
N1G411F22.; N1G411F22.; N1G411F22.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8222.;
;
;
N100(LOADIN
N100(LOADING);
G);
G411D1.I101.; G28U0;
G28U0T0100M560 Move to
G30P2W0;
; R-area
■ G30P3W0M991; Confirm that ; for loading
M600; upper tool ;
M601; spindle is in
; R-area
;
N101(R MA-
N101(R MA-
N101(L MA- CHINING
CHINING WITH
CHINING); WITH LOW-
UPPER);
ER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P12;
G0W-100.T0101M
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
3S10;
G0Z300.M88S1 G0W-100.T0303M
U-100.;
0; 488S10;
G98G1W-100.F10
M111P12; M111P12;
00;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1 G98G1W-100.F100
M1;
000; 0;
; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
M113P12; M113P12;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MA-
N102(L MA-
CHINING N102(R MA-
CHINING WITH
WITH LOW- CHINING);
UPPER);
ER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;

31-191
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0W-100.T0101M
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
54S10;
Confirm GR
G0W-100.T0202M
■ M991; is out of U-100.;
488S10;
lathe
G0Z-300.M88S Move to G98G1W-100.F100
M101P13;
10; L-area for 0;
U-100.; M101P13; machining G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F10 As far as
U-100.; M799;
00; this sample
G98G1W-100.F is con-
M102P13; M1;
1000; cerned, this
G28U0M490; M102P13; M991 is not ;
M797; G28U0M90; necessary, ;
M103P13; M103P13; because
M1; M1; there is
; ; waiting
M-code
; ;
between
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
upper and
STOP); STOP); STOP);
L-lower. If
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
there is no
; ; ;
waiting
M-code,
; ; M911 is ;
necessary.
N201(UNLOAD N201(UNLOADIN
ING); G);
G28U0; G411U1.I202.;
G30P3W0; Move to G28U0;
; L-area for ■ G30P3W0M991; Confirm that
; unloading M650; upper tool
M305(COUNTER spindle is in
FOR CHUTE); L-area
M651;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER N202(TRANSF N202(TRANSFER
); ER); );
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M91; G28U0M90; G28U0B0M491;
G30P3W0; G30P3W0; Move to G30P3W0;
M120P123; M120P123; L-area for M120P123;
M121P123; M121P123; transfer G0B-500.;
G98G1B-550.F100
M11; M122P123;
0;
G4U1.; M123P123; M50;
M122P123; ; G4U1.;
M123P123; ; M121P123;
; M122P123;
; G28B0;
M123P123;
;

31-192
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-193
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-10-10 G411F23. WS→L→WS/WS→R→WS without L-R transfer, GR double hand opera-
tion
3 head machine NTX(W)/NTXL/STW/JX-250 Note: Not for WTS, NTM3 and NTY3 series
3rd path 1st path 2nd path
L LOWER UPPER TOOL R LOWER
O1234 (L LOW- TURRET O1234 (UPPER SPINDLE O1234 (L LOW- TURRET
ER MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO- ER MAIN); MAIN PRO-
GRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F23.; SELECT N1 G411 F23.; SELECT AND N1 G411 F23.; SELECT AND
AND STA- STATUS STATUS
TUS CHECK CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
WHEN GR IS
INVALID,
G411 A1. I100.; ; ;
JUMP TO
NEXT.
▲ M358 A8223.; GR START ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N100 (L WORK N100 (L WORK
CHANGE); CHANGE);
☆M428; Select L-side
WHEN WHEN
WORK WORK
CHANGE IS CHANGE IS
G411 D1. I101.; G411 D1. I150.;
UNNECES- UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M150 P13; L-LOWER ★M150 P13; L-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WORK
M600; CHAGE ;
START
WORK
M601; CHAGE ;
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M151 P13; L-LOWER ★M151 P13; L-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N150 (R WORK N100 (R WORK
CHANGE); CHANGE);
☆M427; Select R-side
G411 D1. I101.; WHEN G411 D1. I102.; WHEN

31-194
C-NA104204-A2205
31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
WORK WORK
CHANGE IS CHANGE IS
UNNECES- UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M152 P12; R-LOWER ★M152 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WORK
; M650; CHANGE
START
WORK
; M650; CHANGE
FINISH
UPPER AND UPPER AND
★M153 P12; R-LOWER ★M153 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-195
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 WHEN 1 WHEN 1
CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP STOP, JUMP JUMP TO
TO END. TO END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
T T T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP

31-196
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
% % %

◆ For upper tool spindle, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how
many times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
For L-lower turret, only the machining program of L is acceptable. For R-lower turret, only the machining
program of R is acceptable.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F23.; Operation pattern select and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the GR
double hand operation type without transfer.
Must input at all heads.
☆ For upper tool spindle, selection of L loading or R loading is necessary. M428 is to select L-loading and
M427 is to select R-loading.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place during the machining program. It is certainly re-
quired for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper tool head or lower turret.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for L-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper tool head or lower turret.
When the upper tool spindle performs machining for R-chuck fi-
nally, input in the upper head.
▲ GR start is only 1 time at the program head.
★ During workpiece exchange, the upper tool spindle stands by in waiting mode. For the lower turret, even if
the opposite side is exchanging workpieces, machining can be performed.
L-loading→R-loading→Upper tool spindle machining start→LR-machining finish→L-workpiece ex-
change→R-workpiece exchange→Upper tool spindle machining start→LR-machining finish→Cycle
stop→L-unloading→R-unloading
① The upper tool spindle can machine with L/R units freely. There is no loader-related restriction.
② Since workpiece exchange is performed after machining of both L and R units is completed, there is little
restriction of the workpiece length which can be used.
Restriction matter: In this system, machining cannot be performed with the upper tool spindle during
the workpiece exchange.

31-197
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For the upper tool spindle, it is necessary to move the upper tool spindle to the R unit at the time of loading,
and to the L unit at the time of unloading. Refer to the following program example.
G30 P2 W0; Upper tool second zero point (Loading point), G30 P3 W0; Upper tool third zero point (Un-
loading point)

31-198
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTX(W)
%; %; %;
O0023(L LOWER O0023(UPPER O0023(R LOWER
MAIN F23.); MAIN F23.); MAIN F23.);
N1G411F23.; N1G411F23.; N1G411F23.;
G28U0; G28U0V0B0; G28U0B0;
; ; ;
; ; ;
G411A1.I100.;
M358A8223.;
;
;
N100(L WORK N100(L WORK
CHANGE); CHANGE);
G411D1.I101.; M428;
G28U0T0100M560; G411D1.I150.;
G30P3W0; G28U0;
★M190P13; G30P2W0; Move to R-area
M600; ★M190P13; for L work change
M601; ★M191P13;
★M191P13; ;
; ;
N150(R WORK N100(R WORK
;
CHANGE); CHANGE);
M427; G411D1.I101.;
G411D1.I102.; G28U0T0100;
G28U0; G30P3W0;
G30P3W0; Move to L-area ★M140P12;
★M140P12; for R work change M650;
★M141P12; M651;
; ★M141P12;
; ;
;
N101(L MACHIN- N102(L MACHIN- N101(R MACHIN-
ING WITH UPPER); ING WITH LOWER); ING);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M441;
G0W-100.T0101M54S
G28U0W0M91; G28U0M428;
10;
G0W-100.T0101M488
G0Z-300.M88S10; U-100.;
S10;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M490; G28U0M90; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHIN- N103(R MACHIN- N103(R MACHINING
ING); ING WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);

31-199
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; Move to L-area M110P12;
G0W-100.T0202M3S for unloading
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M491;
10;
G0W-100.T0303M488
U-100.; G0Z300.M88S10;
S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P12; M111P12;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P12; M112P12;
; G28U0M90; G28U0M490;
; M113P12; M799;
M1; M113P12;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N30G28U0M41; N30G28U0; N30G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0M41; N2G28U0; N2G28U0M441;
G30P3W0; G28W0; G30P3W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-200
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11 Program Example NTY3 series
This section describes program examples of 3-path control machine that consists
of two (L and R) turrets for upper unit and one (Lower) turret for lower unit.
Machine model NTY3 is used as the examples of coordinate relations. As for other
machine models, it cannot perform as it is.
When running the program on other machine models, please modify the coordi-
nates relations and stroke relations.
The M code of the bar feed functions is carried as an example. Before running the
program, it is necessary to change the M-code according to the type of the bar
feed functions.
The 3rd zero position of the Z-axis is used. Before running the program, check
that the value is set to the parameter of the 3rd zero position.
Command G30 P3 W0;
Parameter 1242 (Z)
Near the - stroke end (left side) for the L-upper turret
Near the - stroke end (right side) for the R-upper turret
Near the - stroke end (left side) for the lower turret

31-201
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-1 G411F1. Manual work change, L-R transfer
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER LOWER R UPPER
O1234 (L UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER TURRET O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F1.; SELECT N1 G411 F1.; SELECT N1 G411 F1.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;

31-202
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I201.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆ ; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I201.; G411 R1. I201.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :

31-203
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
CUT-OFF CUT-OFF CUT-OFF
: TRANSFER : TRANSFER : TRANSFER
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

◆ For lower turret, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many
times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
As for upper turrets, L-unit machining program is acceptable only for L-turret, and the R-unit machining
program, only for R-turret.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I201.; Skip R-machining
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 F1.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is designated that this program is the
manual work change type with L-R transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place in the machining program. It is certainly required
for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on L-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on R-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.

31-204
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs L-machining first
%; %; %;
O0001(L UPPER MAIN O0001(LOWER MAIN O0001(R UPPER MAIN
F1.); F1.); F1.);
N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.;
G28U0; G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0101; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
; M113P23; M799;
M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M5; G28U0M5;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; G0B-500.; M121P123;
; G98G1B-550.F1000; ;

31-205
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M50; ;
G4U1.;
M11
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M121P123;
; ;
; ;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3W0; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0; G330A3.W0; G330A3.W0;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-206
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs R-machining first
%; %; %;
O0201(L UPPER MAIN O0201(LOWER MAIN O0201(R UPPER MAIN
F1.); F1.); F1.);
N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.; N1G411F1.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303M3S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
M113P23; M113P23;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N102(R MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0202; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M5; G28U0M5;
G330A3W0; G330A3W0; G330A3W0.;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; G0B-500.; M121P123;
; G98G1B-550.F1000; ;

31-207
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M50; ;
G4U1.;
M11;
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M123P123;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-208
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-2 G411F2. Manual work change, R-L transfer
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER LOWER R UPPER
O1234 (L UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER TURRET O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F2.; SELECT N1 G411 F2.; SELECT N1 G411 F2.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;

31-209
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 L1. I201.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI
L-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I201.; G411 R1. I201.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS- N201 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :

31-210
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
CUT-OFF CUT-OFF CUT-OFF
: TRANSFER : TRANSFER : TRANSFER
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

◆ For lower turret, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many
times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
As for upper turrets, L-unit machining program is acceptable only for L-turret, and the R-unit machining
program, only for R-turret.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I201.; Skip R-machining
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 F2.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is designated that this program is the
manual work change type with R-L transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place in the machining program. It is certainly required
for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on L-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on R-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.

31-211
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs L-machining first
%; %; %;
O0002(L UPPER MAIN O0002(LOWER MAIN O0002(R UPPER MAIN
F1.); F1.); F1.);
N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING );
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I102.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0101; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING );
WITH UPPER); WIH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M110P23; M110P23;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303M3S10;
U-100.; M111P23; M111P23;
G98G1W-100.F1000; U-100.; U-100.;
G28U0M5; G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M797; M112P23; M112P23;
M1; G28U0; G28U0M5;
; M113P23; M799;
; M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M5; G28U0M5;
G330A3W0; G330A3W0; G330A3W0.;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; G0B-500.; M121P123;
; G98G1B-550.F1000; ;

31-212
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M10; ;
G4U1.;
M51;
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M121P123;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-213
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs R-machining first
%; %; %;
O0202(L UPPER MAIN O0202(LOWER MAIN O0202(R UPPER MAIN
F2.); F2.); F2.);
N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.; N1G411F2.;
G28U0; G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303M3S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
M113P23; M113P23;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N102(R MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0202; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP); N200(1 CYCLE STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N201(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M5; G28U0M5;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
M121P123; G0B-500.; M121P123;
; G98G1B-550.F1000; ;

31-214
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; M10; ;
G4U1.;
M51;
G4U1.;
G28B0;
M121P123;
;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-215
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-3 G411F3. Manual work change, same workpiece for L and R, no transfer
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER LOWER R UPPER
O1234 (L UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER TURRET O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F3.; SELECT N1 G411 F3.; SELECT N1 G411 F3.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;

31-216
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
NG IS UN- NG IS UN-
G411 L1. I30.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
: NG PRO- : NG PRO-
GRAM GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I30.; G411 R1. I30.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

31-217
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ For lower turret, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many
times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
As for upper turrets, L-unit machining program is acceptable only for L-turret, and the R-unit machining
program, only for R-turret.
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I30.; Skip R-machining
G411 F3.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is designated that this program is the
manual work change type without transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place in the machining program. It is certainly required
for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on L-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on R-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.

31-218
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs L-machining first
%; %; %;
O0003(L UPPER MAIN O0003(LOWER MAIN O0003(R UPPER MAIN
F3.); F3.); F3.);
N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N101(R MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0101; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
N102(L MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I30.; G411R1.I30.; G411R1.I30.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303M3S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
; M113P23; M799;
M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-219
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs R-machining first
%; %; %;
O0203(L UPPER MAIN O0203(LOWER MAIN O0203(R UPPER MAIN
F3.); F3.); F3.);
N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.; N1G411F3.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10; G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303M3S10;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
M113P23; M113P23;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
N102(R MACHINING);
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I30.; G411L1.I30.; G411L1.I30.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428; G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0202; U-100.;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-220
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-4 G411F5. Manual work change only on L-chuck
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER LOWER R UPPER
O1234 (L UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER TURRET O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F5.; SELECT N1 G411 F5.; SELECT N1 G411 F5.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆ ◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
NG IS UN- NG IS UN-
G411 L1. I30.; G411 L1. I30.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
: NG PRO- : NG PRO-
GRAM GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

31-221
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of R-chuck is not acceptable for this pattern. Keep R-chuck open.
G411 L1. I30.; Skip L-machining
G411 F5.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is designated that this program is the
manual work change type with only L-machining.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797 into the predetermined place in the machining program. It is certainly required for a
change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on L-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.

31-222
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs L-machining first
%; %; %;
O0005(L UPPER MAIN O0005(LOWER MAIN O0005(R UPPER MAIN
F5.); F5.); F5.);
N1G411F5.; N1G411F5.; N1G411F5.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(L MACHINING);
G411L1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
M1;
;
;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I30.; G411L1.I30.;
M100P13; M100P13;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10; G53G0Z-200.T0202;
M101P13; M101P13;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102P13; M102P13;
G28U0M5; G28U0;
M797; M103P13;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-223
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-5 G411F6. Manual work change only on R-chuck
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER LOWER R UPPER
O1234 (L UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER TURRET O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F6.; SELECT N1 G411 F6.; SELECT N1 G411 F6.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆ ◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I30.; G411 R1. I30.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
% % %

31-224
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ The machining program of L-chuck is not acceptable for this pattern. Keep L-chuck open.
G411 R1. I30.; Skip R-machining
G411 F6.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is designated that this program is the
manual work change type with only R-machining.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M799 into the predetermined place in the machining program. It is certainly required for a
change of operation.

M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on R-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.

31-225
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs R-machining first
%; %; %;
O0006(L UPPER MAIN O0006(LOWER MAIN O0006(R UPPER MAIN
F6.); F6.); F6.);
N1G411F6.; N1G411F6.; N1G411F6.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N101(R MACHINING);
G411R1.I103.;
G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10;
U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
M1;
;
;
N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411R1.I30.; G411R1.I30.;
M110P23; M110P23;
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
G53G0Z200.T0303; G0W-100.T0303M3S10;
M111P23; M111P23;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M112P23; M112P23;
G28U0; G28U0M5;
M113P23; M799;
M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
% % %

31-226
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-6 G411F11. Bar loading (upper turret) + Parts catcher unloading
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER LOWER R UPPER
O1234 (L UPPER TURRET O1234 (LOWER TURRET O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
MAIN); MAIN MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F11.; SELECT N1 G411 F11.; SELECT N1 G411 F11.; SELECT AND
AND STA- AND STA- STATUS
TUS CHECK TUS CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10 (BAR
; ;
CHANGE);
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS
■ G411 B1. I100.; UNNECES- ; ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.
BAR STOP-
G0 X_Z_T_; ; ;
PER
CHUCK
M11; ; ;
OPEN
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ; ;
VANCE
BAR
M61; CHANGE ; ;
M58/M81
CHUCK
M10; ; ;
CLOSE
TOP CUT ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N100 (BAR
; ;
LOADING);

31-227
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
WHEN
LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES- ; ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.
BAR STOP-
G0 X_Z_T_; ; ;
PER
CHUCK
M11; ; ;
OPEN
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ; ;
VANCE
CHUCK
M10; ; ;
CLOSE
COMPLE-
TION OF
● M705; ; ;
BAR AD-
VANCE
; ;
; ;

31-228
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
NG IS UN- NG IS UN-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.;
NECES- NECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
: :
L-MACHINI L-MACHINI
: NG PRO- : NG PRO-
GRAM GRAM
: :
L-MACHINI
● M797; ;
NG FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHINI R-MACHININ
NG IS UN- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
NECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHINI
R-MACHININ
: NG PRO- :
G PROGRAM
GRAM
: :
R-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 WHEN 1 WHEN 1
CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
STOP, JUMP STOP, JUMP JUMP TO
TO END. TO END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (UN- N201 (UN-
;
LOADING); LOADING);

31-229
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
UPPER AND UPPER AND
; ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER ☆M152 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UN- WHEN UN-
LOADING IS LOADING IS
; G411 U1. I202.; UNNECES- G411 U1. I202.; UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
UPPER AND UPPER AND
; ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER ☆M153 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; :
R-LOWER
TURRET
; : PARTS
CATCHER
UNLOADING
; :
UPPER AND UPPER AND
; ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER ☆M154 P12; R-LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS RING IS RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
UNNECES- UNNECES- NECESSARY,
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP JUMP TO
TO NEXT. TO NEXT. NEXT.
: : :
TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER
: : :
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE- RE- RE-
N30 M30; START/RES N30 M30; START/RESE N30 M30; START/RESE
ET T T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% % %
◆ For lower turret, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many
times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
As for upper turrets, L-unit machining program is acceptable only for L-turret, and the R-unit machining
program, only for R-turret.

31-230
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F11.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the operation to be
performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is designated that this program is the Bar
feeder loading + Parts catcher unloading type by L-upper turret.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place in the machining program.
It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on L-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on R-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input this M code right after the block of pushing a bar
against the bar stopper and closing the chuck..
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the bar stopper is on the L-upper turret, input in the L-upper
head.
It is recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input this M code right after the block of completing the
cut-off operation.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the cut-off bite is on the L-upper turret, input in the L-upper
head.
It is recognized that there is no workpiece on the L-chuck
with this command.
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump
function.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting

To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

★ Bar loading is commanded from the 1st-path L-upper turret.

Lower turret is not related to bar loading. R-unit machining can be started also in bar loading.
R-upper turret is not related to bar loading. R-unit machining can be started also in bar loading.
☆ Unloading is commanded from the 2nd-path R-upper turret. This example is in case that the last process
of lower turret is the R-unit machining, and the R-upper turret needs to wait for the completion of the

31-231
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
lower turret machining.
This waiting is unnecessary when lower turret machines on L unit during unloading. L-upper turret is not re-
lated to unloading. L-unit machining can be continued also in unloading.
In addition, waiting is required as mentioned above also just before the block of G411U1.
■ If the above-mentioned waiting is deleted, depending on the machining process, unloading command may be
carried out before the lower turret moves to the L unit.
In order to avoid this, add the following M code into the R-upper machining program.
M991: L unit area confirmation of lower turret
Completes when the Z-axis of lower turret is in the L unit area. Specify this command just before the block
of starting unloading.
This area is set on the following parameter of the lower head. This is also the retraction area at GR210 un-
loading.
6937: 0 WTS standard setting value
See the sample program of O0211 below.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining
of L and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For NTY3, it is necessary to move the lower turret to the L unit at unloading.
Refer to the following program example.
G330A3.W0.; Lower turret third zero point (Unloading point)

* Removing the waiting command “M180P123;” that is specified before 1 cycle stop block, can shorten the
cycle stop time when L-unit machining time is long. However pressing the 1 CYCLE STOP button may not
stop the cycle.

31-232
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret waits during unloading
%; %; %;
O0011(L UPPER O0011(LOWER O0011(R UPPER
MAIN F11.); MAIN F11.); MAIN F11.);
N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S1
0;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N101(R MACHIN-
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER); ING);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1
G28U0W0M41; G28U0;
0;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1
G53G0Z-200.T0101; U-100.;
0;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M55;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;

31-233
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHIN- N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
ING); WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0202M3S1
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
0;
G0W-100.T0303M3S1
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303;
0;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
; M113P23; M799;
M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140P23; ☆M140P23;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0B0; G28U0;
Move to L-area
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
for unloading
☆M141P23; ☆M141P23;
☆M142P23; M68;
; M11;
; G4U1.;
M69;
☆M142P23;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M5; G28U0M5;
Move to L-area
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
for transfer
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.; M121P123;
M121P123; G98G1B-550.F1000; M122P123;

31-234
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G98G1U-100.F1000M
M50; M123P123;
3S10;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.; ;
M122P123; M96; ;
G28B0; M121P123;
M405; M122P123;
M123P123; G28B0M97;
; M123P123;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-235
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3
Sample that lower turret performs R-machining during loading, and L-machining during unloading.
%; %; %;
O0211(L UPPER O0211(LOWER O0211(R UPPER
MAIN F11.); MAIN F11.); MAIN F11.);
N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.; N1G411F11.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T1212
;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S10
;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T1212
;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
N101(L MACHINING);
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I102.; G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P12; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0101M3S10
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
;
G0W-100.T0303M3S1
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303;
0;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;

31-236
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M1; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
M113P23; M113P23;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N102(R MACHIN-
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER); ING);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428;
0;
G0W-100.T0202M3S10 Move from R unit
G53G0Z-200.T0202; U-100.;
; to L unit
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M799;
M102P13; M102P13; M1;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M797; M103P13; ;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0B0; G411U1.I202.;
Move to L area
G330A3.W0.; G28U0;
for unloading
; G330A3.W0.;
Confirmation of
completion of
; ■ M991;
lower turret
move to L area
M68;
M11;
G4U1.;
M69;
;
;

N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);

G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M5; G28U0M5;

31-237
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
Move to L area
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G30A3.W0.;
for transfer
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.; M121P123;
M121P123; G98G1B-550.F1000; M122P123;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3
M50; M123P123;
S10;
G0U100.M5; G4U1.; ;
M122P123; M96; ;
G28U0; M121P123;
M405; M122P123;
M123P123; G28B0M97;
; M123P123;
; ;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-238
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-11-7 G411F12. Bar loading (lower turret) + Parts catcher unloading
3 head machine NTY3 Note: Except NTX(W), NTXL, STW, WTS, NTM3, JX-250
1st path 3rd path 2nd path
L UPPER R UPPER
LOWER TUR-
O1234 (L UP- TURRET O1234 (LOWER O1234 (R UPPER TURRET
RET MAIN
PER MAIN); MAIN PRO- MAIN); MAIN); MAIN PRO-
PROGRAM
GRAM GRAM
OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION
PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN
N1 G411 F12.; SELECT AND N1 G411 F12.; SELECT AND N1 G411 F12.; SELECT AND
STATUS STATUS STATUS
CHECK CHECK CHECK
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10 (BAR
;
CHANGE);
WHEN BAR
CHANGE IS
■ G411 B1. I100.; UNNECES- ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.
G0 X_Z_T_; BAR STOPPER ;
M11; CHUCK OPEN ;
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ;
VANCE
BAR CHANGE
M61; ;
M58/M81
CHUCK
M10; ;
CLOSE
TOP CUT ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (BAR
;
LOADING);
WHEN
LOADING IS
G411 D1. I101.; UNNECES- ;
SARY, JUMP
TO NEXT.

31-239
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
G0 X_Z_T_; BAR STOPPER ;
M11; CHUCK OPEN ;
BAR AD-
G4 U1.; ;
VANCE
CHUCK
M10; ;
CLOSE
● M705; BAR AD-
VANCE FIN- ;
ISH
; ;
; ;

31-240
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
N101 (L MA- N101 (L MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN
WHEN
L-MACHININ
L-MACHINING
G IS UNNEC-
G411 L1. I200.; G411 L1. I102.; IS UNNECES-
ESSARY,
SARY, JUMP
JUMP TO
TO NEXT.
NEXT.
: :
L-MACHININ L-MACHINING
: :
G PROGRAM PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
● M797; ;
G FINISH
; ; ;
; ◆; ;
N102 (R MA- N102 (R MA-
◆
CHINING); CHINING);
WHEN WHEN
R-MACHININ R-MACHININ
G IS UNNEC- G IS UN-
G411 R1. I200.; G411 R1. I1200.;
ESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT.
: :
R-MACHININ R-MACHININ
: :
G PROGRAM G PROGRAM
: :
L-MACHININ
; ● M799;
G FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE N200 (1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
WHEN 1 CY- WHEN 1
WHEN 1 CY-
CLE STOP, CYCLE STOP,
▼ G411 C1. I2.; ▼ G411 C1. I2.; CLE STOP, ▼ G411 C1. I2.;
JUMP TO JUMP TO
JUMP TO END.
END. END.
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201 (UN- N201 (UN-
LOADING); LOADING);
R-UPPER AND R-UPPER
☆M152 P23; LOWER ☆M152 P23; AND LOWER
WAITING WAITING
WHEN UN- WHEN UN-
LOADING IS LOADING IS
G411 U1. I202.; G411 U1. I202.;
UNNECES- UNNECES-
SARY, JUMP SARY, JUMP

31-241
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
TO NEXT. TO NEXT.
R-UPPER AND R-UPPER
☆M153 P23; LOWER ☆M153 P23; AND LOWER
WAITING WAITING
PARTS
; M68; CATCHER
ADVANCE
CHUCK
; M11;
OPEN
PARTS
CATCHER
M69;
RETRAC-
TION
R-UPPER AND R-UPPER
☆M154 P23; LOWER ☆M154 P23; AND LOWER
WAITING WAITING
; ; ;
; ; ;
N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS- N202 (TRANS-
FER); FER); FER);
WHEN WHEN WHEN
TRANSFER- TRANSFER- TRANSFER-
RING IS UN- RING IS UN- RING IS UN-
G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.; G411 T1. I30.;
NECESSARY, NECESSARY, NECESSARY,
JUMP TO JUMP TO JUMP TO
NEXT. NEXT. NEXT.
: : :
TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER
: : :
PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM
: : :
; ; ;
; ; ;
RE-
RE- RE-
N30 M30; N30 M30; N30 M30; START/RESE
START/RESET START/RESET
T
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% % %

31-242
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
◆ For lower turret, the machining program of L and R may not be this turn. L and R may come out how many
times in what kind of turn.
Make sure that the jump program is always input at a head.
As for upper turrets, L-unit machining program is acceptable only for L-turret, and the R-unit machining
program, only for R-turret.
G411 A1. I100.; Skip GR start
G411 B1. I100.; Skip bar change
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip transferring
G411 C1. I2.; When 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and transferring.
G411 F14.; Operation pattern selection and status check
With this command, the chuck status is grasped and the
operation to be performed next is distinguished.
Simultaneously, it is selected that this program is the bar
feeder + GR unloading type with L-R transfer.
Must input at all heads.
● Please insert M797, M799, M705 and M405 into the predetermined place in the machining program.
It is certainly required for a change of operation.
M797: L-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on L-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M799: R-MACHINING FINISH Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the lower turret performs final machining on R-unit, input
this M code in the lower head program.
M705: BAR ADVANCE FINISH Input this M code right after the block of pushing a bar
against the bar stopper and closing the chuck..
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the bar stopper is on the L-upper turret, input in the L-upper
head.
It is recognized as the workpiece material being prepared for the
L-chuck with this command.
M405: COMPLETION OF CUT-OFF Input this M code right after the block of completing the
cut-off operation.
(Regardless of the selected head: Upper or lower head)
When the cut-off bite is on the L-upper turret, input in the L-upper
head.
It is recognized that there is no workpiece on the L-chuck
with this command.
■ Set PMC Parameter D4075 to set whether the bar change signal is processed as block delete or as jump
function.
D4075 bar change/block delete 1: Use G411 B1. (jump function) <- Change to “1”.
0: Use block delete (block skip) <- Factory setting
To create the machining program using G411, be sure to change this parameter value to “1”. Also, be sure to
use “G411B1.” for bar change program.
NOTE: When only the bar change program is created by block delete system although the machining
program uses the G411 function, the jump programming cannot work correctly and it may cause
machine interference. This is because the block delete system does not correspond to the status
screen.
When the above parameter value is changed to “1”, it becomes possible to use the block delete
function for other functions except for bar change because the bar change signal and block de-
lete signal work separately.

31-243
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
★ Bar loading is commanded from the 3rd-path lower turret.
L-upper turret is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
R-upper turret is not related to loading. R-unit machining can be started also in loading.
☆ Unloading is commanded from the 2nd-path R-upper turret. This example is in case that the last process of
the lower turret is the R-unit machining and the R-upper turret needs to wait the completion of the lower tur-
ret machining.
This waiting is unnecessary when the lower turret machines on L unit during unloading. L-upper turret is not
related to unloading. L-unit machining can be continued also in unloading.
In addition, waiting is also required as mentioned above just before the block of G411U1.
■ If the above-mentioned waiting is deleted, depending on the machining process, unloading command may be
carried out before the lower turret moves to the L unit.
In order to avoid this, add the following M code into the R-upper head machining program.
M991: L unit area confirmation of lower turret
Completes when the Z-axis of the lower turret is in the L unit area. Enter just before the block of starting un-
loading.
This area is set on the following parameter of the lower head. This is also the retraction area at GR210 un-
loading.
6937: 0 WTS standard setting value
See the sample program of O0212 below.
▼ If 1 cycle stop is operated during continuation operation, a reset stop will be carried out when machining of L
and R is completed.
There is a switch for exclusive use.

1 CYCLE
STOP

◎ For machine model NTY3, it is necessary to move the lower turret to the L unit at unloading.
Refer to the following program example.
G330A3.W0.; Lower turret third zero point (Unloading point)

* Removing the waiting command “M180P123;” that is specified before 1 cycle stop block, can shorten the
cycle stop time when L-unit machining time is long. However pressing the 1 CYCLE STOP button may not
stop the cycle.

31-244
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret waits during unloading
%; %; %;
O0012(L UPPER O0012(LOWER O0012(R UPPER
MAIN F12.); MAIN F12.); MAIN F12.);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S1
0;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I102.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING N101(R MACHIN-
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER); ING);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
M100P13; M100P13; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1
G28U0W0M41; G28U0;
0;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1
G53G0Z-200.T0101; U-100.;
0;
M101P13; M101P13; G98G1W-100.F1000;
U-100.; U-100.; G28U0M5;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000; M1;

31-245
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M102P13; M102P13; ;
G28U0M5; G28U0; ;
M103P13; M103P13;
M1; M1;
; ;
; ;
N102(L MACHIN- N103(R MACHINING N103(R MACHINING
ING); WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411L1.I200.; G411R1.I200.; G411R1.I200.;
G28U0W0M41; M110P23; M110P23;
G0W-100.T0202M3S1
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
0;
G0W-100.T0303M3S1
U-100.; G53G0Z200.T0303;
0;
G98G1W-100.F1000; M111P23; M111P23;
G28U0M5; U-100.; U-100.;
M797; G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M1; M112P23; M112P23;
; G28U0; G28U0M5;
; M113P23; M799;
M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
☆M140P23; ☆M140P23;
G411U1.I202.; G411U1.I202.;
G28U0B0; G28U0;
Move to L area
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
for unloading
☆M141P23; ☆M141P23;
☆M142P23; M68;
; M11;
; G4U1.;
M69;
☆M142P23;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0B0M5; G28U0M5;
Move to L area
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
for transfer
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.; M121P123;

31-246
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
M121P123; G98G1B-550.F1000; M122P123;
G98G1U-100.F1000M M123P123;
M50;
3S10;
G0U100.M5 G4U1.; ;
M122P123; M96; ;
G28B0; M121P123;
M405; M122P123;
M123P123; G28B0M97;
; M123P123;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-247
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR NTY3 Sample that lower turret performs L-machining during unloading
%; %; %;
O0212(L UPPER O0212(LOWER O0212(R UPPER
MAIN F12.); MAIN F12.); MAIN F12.);
N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.; N1G411F12.;
G28U0(V0); G28U0B0; G28U0(V0);
; ; ;
; ; ;
N10(BAR CHANGE
D4075=1);
G411B1.I100.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-150.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M61;
M10;
G4U1.;
G28U0W0M41(TOP
CUT);
G0W-150.T0404M3S1
0;
G98G1U-100.F1000;
G28U0M5;
;
;
N100(BAR LOAD-
ING);
G411D1.I101.;
G28U0W0;
G0U-100.W-100.T121
2;
M11;
G4U1.;
M10;
G4U1.;
M705;
G28U0W0;
;
;
N101(L MACHIN- N102(R MACHIN-
ING); ING);
G411L1.I102.; G411L1.I102.;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0101M3S1 G0W-100.T0101M3S1
0; 0;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
G28U0M5; G28U0M5;
M1; M1;
; ;

31-248
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
; ;
N101(R MACHINING N101(R MACHINING
WITH UPPER); WITH LOWER);
G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
M110P23; M110P23;
G28U0M427; G28U0W0M41;
G0W-100.T0303M3S1
G53G0Z200.T0303;
0;
M111P23; M111P23;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M112P23; M112P23;
G28U0; G28U0M5;
M113P23; M799;
M1; M113P23;
; M1;
; ;
;
N102(L MACHINING N102(L MACHINING
WITH LOWER); WITH UPPER);
G411L1.I200.; G411L1.I200.;
M100P13; M100P13;
G28U0W0M41; G28U0M428;
G0W-100.T0202M3S1 Move from R-unit
G53G0Z-200.T0202;
0; to L-unit
M101P13; M101P13;
U-100.; U-100.;
G98G1W-100.F1000; G98G1W-100.F1000;
M102P13; M102P13;
G28U0M5; G28U0M90;
M797; M103P13;
M103P13; M1;
M1; ;
; ;
;
N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE N200(1 CYCLE
STOP); STOP); STOP);
M180P123; M180P123; M180P123;
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N201(UNLOADING); N201(UNLOADING);
G28U0B0; G411U1.I202.;
Move to L area
G330A3.W0.; G28U0;
for unloading
; G330A3.W0;

31-249
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
Confirmation
of completion
; ■ M991;
of lower turret
move to L-area
; M68;
M11;
G4U1.;
M69;
;
;
N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER); N202(TRANSFER);
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
G28U0M5; G28U0M5; G28U0M5;
Move to L area
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
for transfer
M120P123; M120P123; M120P123;
G0W100.T0404M41; G0B-500.; M121P123;
M121P123; G98G1B-550.F1000; M122P123;
G98G1U-100.F1000M3
M50; M123P123;
S10
G0U100.M5. G4U1.; ;
M122P123; M96; ;
G28U0; M121P123;
M405; M122P123;
M123P123; G28B0M97;
; M123P123;
; ;
;
N30G28U0; N30G28U0; N30G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M30; M30; M30;
; ; ;
; ; ;
N2G28U0; N2G28U0; N2G28U0;
G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.; G330A3.W0.;
M2; M2; M2;
% % %

31-250
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-12 Trouble Shooting on G411

• Though an alarm of “Waiting M-codes not in correspondence” occurs, the method of specifying
waiting M codes is not known.

The basic method of specifying waiting M codes is as follows:

(1) When upper turret and lower turret carry out machining on the same workpiece→Specify waiting M
codes so that they can be jumped (specify before the jump destination).

Upper Turret Lower Turret

L-Chuck ; ;
N100; N100;
G411L1.I101.; G411L1.I101.;
G0X_Z_C_T_; G0X_Z_T_;
M88S_: M488S_:
M100; M100;
G81Z_; G81X_;
★ M101; ★ M101;
G0C_; ;
★ M102; ★ M102;
G81Z_; G81X_;
★ M103; ★ M103;
G28U0W0; G28U0W0;
M1; M1;
; ;
N101; N101;
G411R1.I102.; G411R1.I102.;
: :

NOTE: For the above example, create programs so that M codes can be
jumped together since both upper turret and lower turret carry
out machining on L-unit.

31-251
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
(2) When machining unit is changed by upper and lower turrets→Specify waiting M codes so that they
should not be jumped (specify after the jump destination)

L-Chuck R-Chuck Upper turret Lower turret

; ;
N100; N100;
G411R1.I101.; G411L1.I101.;
G0X_Z_C_T_; G0X_Z_C_T_;
M88S_: M488S_:
G81Z_; G81X_;
G28U0W0; G28U0W0;
M1; M1;
; ;
☆ N101; ☆ N101;
★ M100; ★ M100;
; ;
N102; N102;
G411L1.I103.; G411R1.I103.;
G0X_Z_C_T_; G0X_Z_C_T_;
M88S_: M488S_:
G81Z_; G81X_;
G28U0W0; G28U0W0;
M1; M1;

NOTE: For the above example, create programs so that waiting M codes
should be always executed since machining units are exchanged
(L⇔R). Specify M codes not to be jumped. Designate a sequence
number “N” only for the waiting M code.

31-252
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
• Lower turret program stops at “G411L1.” and stays without completion. When checking the modal,
it is indicated that M986 is not completed.

For the example that upper turret loads a workpiece on L-unit, the program is created so that “G411L1.”
specified in lower turret program should waits for upper turret to execute “G411L1.” or “G411R1.”. This is
necessary for lower turret to start machining after the completion of loading. M986 is the special waiting M
code issued by G411 in the internal process.

(1) In the example on the right hand, lower Upper turret Lower turret
turret waits at the block indicated with a
mark ☆. When upper turret program O1234; O1234;
proceeds to the block indicated with a G411F11.; G411F11.;
mark ★ after finishing the bar stopper ; ;
operation, both L and R units start ma-
chining. N100;
G411D1.I101.;
Even if the first machining of upper tur- Bar stopper operation
ret is on R unit (if G411R1. is specified M1;
for G411L1. at the block indicated with a
mark ★), the operation is the same. ; ;
N101.; N101.;
★ G411L1.I102.; ☆ G411L1.I102.;
: :

(2) When a waiting M code is specified at the Upper turret Lower turret
block indicated with a mark ※ as
O1234; O1234;
shown in the right hand program, the
program stops at the block indicated with G411F11.; G411F11.;
a mark ☆. ; ;
N100;
Though the intention to specify a waiting
G411D1.I101.;
M code indicated with a mark ※ is
Bar stopper opera-
starting lower turret machining after
tion
loading, it is unnecessary to specify a
waiting M code since a waiting M code ※ M100;
for confirming the loading completion is M1;
internally programmed in G411 as
above-mentioned. ; ;
N101.; N101.;
★ G411R1.I102.; ☆ G411L1.I102.;
: ※ M100;
:

31-253
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
(3) In the example on the right hand, lower Upper turret Lower turret
turret program does not wait at the block
O1234; O1234;
indicated with a mark ◎. Lower turret
does not need to wait for loading since G411F11.; G411F11.;
lower turret carries out R unit machin- ; ;
ing.
N100;

Lower turret starts L unit machining at G411D1.I101.;

the block indicated with a mark ☆ after Bar stopper opera-
confirming that upper turret program tion
finishes the block indicated with a mark M1;
★. ; ;
N101.; N101.;
Also, upper turret program does not wait
at the block with a mark ★ for lower ★ G411L1.I102.; ◎ G411R1.I102.;
turret program to carry out the block : :
with a mark ☆.
:
Only the turret that does not carry
out loading is required to wait for N108;
the other turret. ☆ G411L1.I109.;
:

(4) The loading command “G411D1.” is always followed by “G411L1.” or “G411R1.”, therefore the
counter head judges loading to be completed when “G411L1.” or “G411R1.” is read. The counter head
waits till then.

31-254
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
• As above-mentioned, fixed waiting M codes are internally included in G411 forms as much as possi-
ble.

(1) A waiting M code is internally included in transfer command “G411T1.” Therefore it is unnecessary
to specify a waiting M code right before “G411T1.”. (If a waiting M code is inserted, there is no
problem.)

In the example on the right hand, it is Upper turret Lower turret

the same even if the waiting M codes
indicated with marks ★ are specified ; ;
or not. N201; N201;
★ M190; ★ M190;
G411T1.I30.; G411T1.I30.;
: :
(2) Though a waiting M code is not internally included in 1 cycle stop command “G411C1.”, it is not
necessary to specify waiting M codes in programs for 2-turret type machines. (If specified, there are
no problems.) If “G411C1.” in one head program is passed before 1 cycle stop button is pressed, the
other head program is set not to jump at the block “G411C1.” even when 1 cycle button is pressed.

However, specify waiting M codes in programs for 3-turret machines such as NTY3, or there are cases
that 1 cycle stop cannot be carried out successfully. This may occur especially to the first time of
pressing 1 cycle stop button.

For 2-turret machines, the M code in- Upper turret Lower turret
dicated with a mark ★ does not need
; ;
to be specified.
N200; N200;
For 3-turret machines, specify the M ★ M180; ★ M180;
codes indicated with marks ★.
G411C1.I2.; G411C1.I2.;
Example: M180P123;
: :

31-255
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-13 Program Resume Function
This function is to resume a suspended program automatically from the head of the process when the
program is suspended during the automatic operation. When the program is suspended, the sequence
number (N-number) at the head of its process is memorized. In order to resume the suspended pro-
gram, rewind the program by the RESET & REWIND button and such, and press the CYCLE START
button.
With this function, operators don’t have to memorize the process which is suspended. After stopping
the machine during the machining program and removing chips, changing tools, or moving the axes to
the safe area, operators should just simply press the RESET & REWIND button and CYCLE START
button to resume the suspended program from the head of its process.

O1234 (RESUME IMAGE) Start Resume

G411 F11.
Processes ① to ③

N10 (O.D.ROUGH) are automatically

G411 L1. I20. jumped.

: [Process①]
M1

N20 (O.D.FINISH) Program resumes

G411 L1. I30. from the suspended
: [[Process②] point in process ④.
M1

N30 (CENTER DRILL) Program is

G411 L1. I40. suspended at
: [[Process③] process ④
M1

N40 (DRILL)
G411 L1. I50.
: [[Process④]
M1

N50 (TAP)

Fig. 31-1 Image flow of program resume function

31-256
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
NOTE: This function is available if all the following conditions are satisfied.
If all the following conditions are not satisfied, this function is not available.

[Conditions to enable this function]

(1) The version of NT NURSE is V8.30 or higher.
(2) NT NURSE menu, “17: Work status display screen” is validated. Or, for the NT-IPS version
V3.0.0 or higher in the NT-IPS specification, "Work Status" icon appears on the icon menu
screen.
(3) NC parameter P7282#4 is validated (Set to 16.).
(If this parameter is invalidated, change the setting of NC parameter.)
(4) The version of ladder diagram (P33) is AG version or higher (D8679=7 or higher).
(5) The machine model employs the jump programming function (G411).
(6) The machining program uses the jump programming function (G411).

NOTE: It is necessary to create a machining program in advance using the jump programming func-
tion (G411) in order to use this function. When the program is suspended by this function and
the automatic operation is started from the head of the program, the program jumps to its head
of the process by G411 command, and the machining starts again.
• It is necessary to command G411 at the head of every process.
For details on how to command G411, refer to the programming manual.
• Use the sequence number (N-number) in the range of 1 to 99999 (within 5-digit).
• It is necessary to create the program of each process so that the machining can be started
after the tool is indexed in the safe position even if the CYCLE START button is pressed in
the middle of the program when the cursor is positioned at the head of the process.
NOTE: It may be very dangerous to resume the cycle operation depending on the positions where the
program is suspended, such as the position where the I/D turning tool is advancing into the in-
ner diameter of workpiece. Therefore, it is necessary to retract the turrets or tools to the safe
position such as the zero point before resuming the automatic operation. Start the automatic
operation after fully checking that no interference occurs.

NOTE: If the operation is suspended while the peripheral devices such as parts catcher, bar feeder,
gantry loader, or robot are entering the lathe, it is not possible to resume the automatic opera-
tion. Return the peripheral devices manually to the position where the automatic operation can
be carried out.

31-257
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-13-1 Setting the program resume function
Use soft-keys on “17: Work status display screen” in NT NURSE menu in order to change over this
function to VALID or INVALID. Every time the “RESUME” soft key is pressed, this function is val-
idated or invalidated alternately.

NOTE: If the “RESUME” soft key is not displayed on the screen, check the conditions indicated in
the previous page to see if all the conditions to enable this function are satisfied.

The process counter number (sequence number) of each turret appears on the item
of “N 0” on the screen, and this number is updated every time the G411 com-
mand is executed.
When you suspend the program in the setting of “RESUME ■ON”, and then,
press the “RESET & REWIND” or “RESET” button, this screen is selected auto-
matically, and lamps related to this function blink. The blink lamp tells that the
machine is waiting for program resume; displaying “W132: Program resume
standby mode”. At this time, the process counter number of the turret to be re-
sumed appears on the screen.

Process counter
number

31-258
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

NOTE: Press the “RESUME” soft key until the “RESUME □OFF” appears on the screen to re-
lease the standby mode. This mode is not released even in the emergency stop state or NC
shut down state.

NOTE: When resuming the suspended program, be sure to rewind the program by the RESET &
REWIND button first, and then, start the automatic operation.

NOTE: The process counter number can be changed manually. (It is not possible to manually input
the counter number during the automatic operation.)
When manually inputting the counter number, start the program after fully checking wheth-
er the inputted counter number is correct. Be especially careful that the execution timing of
turret operation may change from the usual operation due to the combination of inputted
numbers if the machine has multiple turrets. It is not possible to manually input the counter
number during the automatic operation.
After manually inputting the process counter number, press the RESET & REWIND button
or RESET button. The machine becomes the standby mode.

NOTE: The update of the process counter number under the automatic operation is carried out by
the modal N code (sequence number) at the G411 command.

NOTE: The position to display the process counter number corresponds to the turret position.
WT series, for example, the upper side counter number stands for upper turret, and the
lower side, the lower turret.

NOTE: Supplements
• Condition to set the program resume standby mode to ON:
• The program is suspended in the status of “RESUME ■ON”, and the “RESET &
REWIND” or “RESET” button is pressed when the process counter number is not
0.
• Condition to set the program resume standby mode to OFF:
• “RESUME” key is pressed until the setting is changed from ON to OFF.
• Program resume is executed, and the program jumps to the suspended position by
G411 command.
• “M30” is executed.
• After inputting “0” to the process counter numbers of all the turrets, and “RESET
& REWIND” button is pressed.

31-259
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

NOTE: Perform the procedure below to use this function with GR (gantry loader) specification.
(1) After suspending the operation, return the GR manually to the zero point or to the posi-
tion where the automatic operation can be started.
(2) Set “USE GR” switch to OFF once.
(3) Press the RESET & REWIND button to rewind the program. Then, start the automatic
operation in “W0132: PROGRAM RESUME STANDBY MODE” to finish the sus-
pended workpiece machining without using GR.
(4) Set “USE GR” switch to ON again, and start the automatic operation and continue the
continuous machining.

When the automatic operation is started in the status of “USE GR ■ON” in “program re-
sume standby mode” and if the “G411 F?” command is executed, an alarm “A437 SET
“USE GR” SWITCH TO “OFF” is issued. Be sure to set the “USE GR” switch to “OFF”
in order to use this function.

31-260
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-13-2 Procedure to operate program resume function
(1) Press the “RESUME” key on the work status display screen until the display
on the screen becomes “RESUME ■ON”.
-> This function is validated.

(2) Suspend the automatic operation by alarm stop, reset stop, or power OFF.
-> The workpiece being machined remains in the lathe.

(3) Enable the machine to start the automatic operation.

-> After changing tools or removing chips, retract the turret or peripheral de-
vices manually to the safe position to enable the machine to start.

(4) Press the RESET &REWIND button to rewind the program.

-> When “RESUME ■ON” is set, the work status display screen is auto-
matically selected. Lamps related to this function blink, and indicate that the
machine is in standby mode.
The process counter number (sequence number) of the turret to be resumed
appears on the screen, so check to see if it is correct.

(5) Press the CYCLE START button.

-> The automatic operation starts and the program jumps to the head of the
process which is suspended by G411 command, and the machining restarts.

31-13-3 Warning message

W0132 PROGRAM RESUME STANDBY MODE

Machine is in standby mode and waiting for program resume by G411: Jump pro-
gram function. Rewind the program first, then, press the CYCLE START button
to resume the program. To cancel the program resume, press the RESUME switch
on the work status display screen until "RESUME OFF" appears on the screen.

A0437 SET “USE GR” SWITCH TO “OFF”

While the warning “W0132: PROGRAM RESUME STANDBY MODE” is being
issued, the cycle operation cannot be started by the “USE GR” switch. Set the
“USE GR” switch to OFF once, and after the suspended work is machined, set the
“USE GR” switch to ON.

31-261
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
31-14 G411 F15./ F16. Pattern
Before using this pattern, read the special operation manual together
with this manual. The special operation manual may contain further
information on this pattern.

It may be possible to use the pattern “G411 F15.” or “G411 F16.” when the ma-
chine is equipped with an automatic loading unit on the L-side and unloading unit
on the R-side.
<Loading unit available for this pattern>
• ZEN-BEI loader (Nakamura-Tome) or loading unit with its equivalent structure
• Robots (other manufacturer)
This pattern cannot be used with bar feeders or Gantry loader (Nakamura-Tome).

<Unloading unit available for this pattern>

• HAI-BEI unloader (Nakamura-Tome) or unloading unit with its equivalent
structure
• Robots (other manufacturer)
Parts catchers or Gantry loader (Nakamura-Tome) are not considered as the un-
loading units in this pattern.
NOTE: Whether this pattern can be used or not depends on the whole system
specifications. This pattern is not always available for a certain sys-
tem. For robot systems specially applied, other patterns may be suita-
ble.

31-262
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
L-side automatic loading -> L -> R -> R-side automatic unloading (G411 F15.)
The following shows an example when the ZEN-BEI loader (NT) is used as the L-side automatic loading unit
and HAI-BEI unloader (NT) as the R-side automatic unloading unit. When a robot is used as the L-side auto-
matic loading unit, change the blocks of “M61; M10; M57;” in the example to “M776; (robot loading for special
operations), or external M codes M751; M10; M752; (option).” When a robot is used as the R-side automatic
unloading unit, change the blocks of “M458; M51; M459;” in the example to “M476; (robot unloading for spe-
cial operations), or external M codes M753; M51; M754; (option).”

UPPER TURRET MAIN LOWER TURRET MAIN

O1234 (UPPER MAIN); PROGRAM O1234 (LOWER MAIN); PROGRAM
OPERATION PATTERN OPERATION PATTERN
SELECT AND STATUS SELECT AND STATUS
N1 G411 F15.; CHECK N1 G411 F15.; CHECK
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
N100 (LOADING); N100 (LOADING);
WHEN LOADING IS WHEN LOADING IS
UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO UNNECESSARY, SKIP TO
G411 D1. I101.; NEXT. G411 D1. I101.; NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★ ★
M150; WAITING M150; WAITING
： BAR STOPPER
M61; SHAFT LOADER RETRACT
M10; CHUCK CLOSE ：
M57; SHAFT LOADER RETURN
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
★ ★
M151; WAITING M151; WAITING
; ;
; ;
N101 (L MACHINING); N101 (L MACHINING);
WHEN L-MACHINING IS WHEN L-MACHINING IS
UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO
G411 L1. I102.; NEXT. G411 L1. I102.; NEXT.
： ：
： L-MACHINING PROGRAM ： L-MACHINING PROGRAM
： ：
● M797; L-MACHINING FINISH ;
; ;
◆; ◆;
N102 (R MACHINING); N102 (R MACHINING);
WHEN R-MACHINING IS WHEN R-MACHINING IS
UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO
G411 R1. I200.; NEXT. G411 R1. I1200.; NEXT.
： ：
： R-MACHINING PROGRAM ： R-MACHINING PROGRAM
： ：
; ● M799; R-MACHINING FINISH
; ;
; ;
N200 (1 CYCLE STOP); N200 (1 CYCLE STOP);
WHEN 1 CYCLE STOP, JUMP WHEN 1 CYCLE STOP, JUMP
▼ ▼
G411 C1. I2.; TO END. G411 C1. I2.; TO END.
; ;
; ;
N201 (UNLOADING); N201 (UNLOADING);
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆ ☆
M152; WAITING M152; WAITING
WHEN UNLOADING IS WHEN UNLOADING IS
UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO
G411 U1. I202.; NEXT. G411 U1. I202.; NEXT.
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆ ☆
M153; WAITING M153; WAITING
; M458; SAFT UNLOADER ADVANCE
; M51; CHUCK OPEN
SHAFT UNLOADER
; M459; RETRACT
UPPER AND LOWER UPPER AND LOWER
☆ ☆
M154; WAITING M154; WAITING
; ;
; ;

31-263
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

N202 (TRANSFER); N202 (TRANSFER);

WHEN TRANSFERRING IS WHEN TRANSFERRING IS
UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO UNNECESSARY, JUMP TO
G411 T1. I30.; NEXT. G411 T1. I30.; NEXT.
： ：
： TRANSFER PROGRAM ： TRANSFER PROGRAM
： ：
; ;
; ;
N30 M30; RESTART/RESET N30 M30; RESTART/RESET
; ;
; ;
N2 M2; RESET STOP N2 M2; RESET STOP
% %

The machining program of L and R does not necessarily follow this order. Also, it does not matter
how many times or in what order the L and R are used. Make sure that a jump program is always
inserted at the head of the program.
G411 D1. I101.; Skip loading
G411 L1. I102.; Skip L-machining
G411 R1. I200.; Skip R-machining
G411 U1. I202.; Skip unloading
G411 T1. I30.; Skip work delivery
G411 C1. I2.; During 1 cycle stop, skip unloading and work delivery
G411 F15.; Operation pattern select & Status check
With this command, the machine checks the chuck and hand statuses and
decides the next operation. At the same time, the machine selects the
specification of operation (in this example: L-side automatic loading and
R-side automatic unloading with work delivery from L-side to R-side). Be
sure to insert the jump program at the head of upper and lower heads.
NOTE) In this pattern, the machine decides whether a chuck has a workpiece or not referring to the chuck
open/close state. It is not necessary to use M705 (bar advance completion) or M405 (cut-off comple-
tion) command because this example program does not assume a bar feeder.
● Insert M797 and M799 into the predetermined place in the machining program. It is required to
change the operation.
M797: L-machining end Input this M code into the end of the L-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the lower turret per-
forms L-side machining in the end, input in the lower head.
M799: R-machining end Input this M code into the end of the R-workpiece machining block
regardless of upper head or lower head. When the upper turret per-
forms R-side machining in the end, input in the upper head.
This command is necessary when the upper turret machining cannot be performed until the L-side
loading operation is completed (e.g. When the first process of upper turret is L-side machining.) In
this case, use the waiting M code of upper and lower turrets to wait for the start of lower turret ma-
chining. Use this command when the upper turret cannot perform the R-machining during the L-side
loading due to long workpieces. This waiting M code is not necessary when the upper turret per-
forms the R-machining during the L-side loading.
This command is necessary when the R-side unloading cannot be performed until the upper turret
machining is completed (e.g. When the last process of upper turret is R-side machining.) In this case,
use the waiting M code of upper and lower turrets to wait for the start of R-side unloading. Use this
command when the upper turret cannot perform the L-machining during the R-side unloading due to
long workpieces. This waiting M code is not necessary when the upper turret performs the
L-machining during the R-side unloading.

As shown in the program example above, when you perform the L-side loading and R-side unload-
ing using the waiting M code for upper and lower turrets, both “G411 F15.” and “G411 F16.” will

31-264
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2
function in the same way.

To perform the R-machining during the L-side loading, use “F15.” or “F16.” properly depending on
whether the loading is performed by upper turret or lower turret. This is the same difference as
“F11.” and “F12.” (or “F13.” and “F14.”) for bar feeder.
G411F15. When commanding L-side loading from upper turret
G411F16. When commanding L-side loading from lower turret

The above program shows an example for WT or WY series. For 3-path machines such as NTY3,
how to use “F15.” or “F16.” is the same.

31-265
C-NA104204-A2205
 31 JUMP PROGRAMMING (G411): WT/WY SERIES/
NTJ/ NTJ-100/NTX/NTXL/STW/STS/NTY3 SERIES
/NTJX/NTMX/NTMXL/MX5/MX-100/JX-250/SC-100X2

MEMO

31-266
C-NA104204-A2205
 32 ECOREG UNIT

32 ECOREG UNIT
ECOREG unit is the coolant system that changes the cooling oil and the lubricat-
ing oil into the mist state, mixes, and is injected from the high thrust nozzle to the
tool nose for machining.
(For details, see the operation manual published by the ECOREG unit maker.)
Set the mode on the ECOREG unit operation panel to AUTO mode, and perform
automatic operation or manual operation from the lathe side after checking that
the AUTO indicator is lit.
32-1 M Code
With the following M code commands, operate the ECOREG unit from the lathe
side.
M422 ECOREG unit ON
M423 ECOREG unit OFF
32-2 Program Example
O1234;
:
M9; Coolant pump OFF
M422; ECOREG unit ON
:
Machining program
:
M423; ECOREG unit OFF
:
M30;

NOTE: Simultaneous injection of ECOREG unit and the coolant unit cannot be
performed.
(Command M422 ECOREG unit ON after commanding M09 Coolant
stop.)

32-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 32 ECOREG UNIT

32-3 Parameter Description

PMC Parameter
Model Symbol Address
NCTW10, 20 ES4077 D4077 (L-turret)
TW8, TW30 ES5077 D5077 (R-turret)
WT150(II), 250(II), 300,
WY100II, WY150, WY250,
D4077 (Upper turret, Up-
WY250L, NTJ ES4077
per milling spindle)
STS40,WY-100 ES5077
D5077 (Lower turret)
NTX (S),NTMX, NTMXL,
MX-100
WTS150
ES4077 D4077 (L-upper turret)
NTM3,NTY3,
ES5077 D5077 (R-upper turret)
NTY3-100, NTY3-150
ES6077 D6077 (Lower turret)
NTY3-250
STW40 D4077 (Upper milling
ES4077
NTX (W) spindle)
ES5077
NTXL D5077 (L-lower turret)
ES6077
JX-250 D6077 (R-lower turret)
ES4077 *1 D4077 (Upper turret)
WTW150
ES5077 *1 D5077 (Lower turret)
*1: The NC on L unit sets the L-turret, and the NC on R unit sets the R-turret.
Contents: At the time of the low coolant level and the low cooling oil
level,
0: M30 Cycle stop
1: M30 Cycle stop and M01 Optional stop

32-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 33 IDLE OPERATION

33 IDLE OPERATION
This is the function to check the movements by running a machining program in
idle operation.
33-1 Idle Operation Screen
Idle operation switches are available on the following NT SETTING screen.

(26) IDLE OPERATION soft-keys

Changes to idle operation-effective/ineffective.
(27) L-CHUCK OPEN CHECK soft-keys
Changes to L-chuck check-effective/ineffective: setting whether or not to add
“L-chuck open” in the conditions of cycle start at idle operation.
(28) R-CHUCK OPEN CHECK soft-keys
Changes to R-chuck check-effective/ineffective: setting whether or not to
add “L-chuck open” in the conditions of cycle start at idle operation.
(29) GR/PC HAND CHECK soft-keys
Changes to hand check-effective/ineffective: setting whether or not to add
“GR hand/PCG hand open” in the conditions of cycle start at idle operation.
NOTE: “26. idle operation” soft-keys are used as main function. The soft-keys
of 27 to 29 are used as parameters to change the conditions of cycle
start.

33-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 33 IDLE OPERATION

33-2 Description of Operation

Validating idle operation function sets up the following conditions:
1) Chuck open/close operation is not actually performed. M codes for
chuck open/close are completed. Though the chuck close indicator on
the operation panel is turned ON or OFF, the chuck is not actually oper-
ated. The chuck is still in the same state as the idle operation function is
set effective.
2) Chuck interlock is ineffective.
3) Chuck foot switch is not actually operated. Though the chuck close in-
dicator on the operation panel is turned ON/OFF, the chuck is not actu-
ally operated. The chuck is still in the same state as the idle operation
function is set effective.
4) Bar advance command and bar change command are not outputted to
bar feeder. Though the M codes are completed, the commands are not
actually outputted. For the bar feeders that the bar advances only by
opening the chuck, even if a chuck open command is given by M code,
the chuck open signal is not outputted to bar feeder.
5) Workpiece change command is not outputted to shaft loader and shaft
unloader.
6) Parts catcher type G or C operates in idle operation mode. Alarms do
not occur to the condition that hand is gripping no workpiece. The
workpiece passage confirming function for conveyor is invalidated.
Conveyor is not operated.
7) Gantry loader operates in idle operation mode. Alarms do not occur to
the condition that hand is gripping no workpiece. Selecting “idle opera-
tion-ineffective” soft-key does not cancel the idle operation mode im-
mediately. Then, select a manual mode once on the teaching pendant of
gantry loader. The idle operation mode is cancelled.
8) When workpiece ejection confirming device is equipped at the outlet of
parts catcher type A, the workpiece ejection confirming function be-
comes ineffective.
9) Load monitoring function becomes ineffective.
10) G131 work pusher with software moves to the command position, and
“No workpiece” alarm doesn’t occur. .
11) G376 quill pusher with software moves to the command position, and
“No workpiece” alarm doesn’t occur.
12) G378 bar positioning with software moves to the command position,
and “No workpiece” alarm doesn’t occur.
13) G310 workpiece detecting function of NT WORK NAVIGATOR moves
to the command position, and “No workpiece” alarm doesn’t occur.
14) G312 workpiece judging function of NT WORK NAVIGATOR moves
to the command position, and “No workpiece” alarm doesn’t occur.
15) When correct chucking device is installed, the judgment of chucking is
processed as “OK”.
16) Program jumping function works even in idle operation mode. However
setting idle operation switch ineffective after running automatic opera-
tion with the idle operation switch effective clears the data of whether to
have processed the workpiece or not. When carrying out an actual ma-
chining after running idle operation, be sure to check the condition of
the workpiece on the status display screen beforehand.

33-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 33 IDLE OPERATION

33-3 Flow of Operation and the Precautions

When bar feeder is installed, set the idle operation switch effective under the con-
dition that L-chuck is closed and that R-chuck is open.
Then execute a machining program. The program is carried out with chuck
open/close commands and bar loading commands skipped.
(The status of CHUCK CLOSE indicator is changed according to commands.)
Though the parts catcher is also operated, the workpiece detecting function be-
comes ineffective.

When gantry loader is installed, set the idle operation switch effective under the
condition that L-chuck and R-chuck are open.
Then execute a machining program. The program is carried out with chuck
open/close commands skipped.
(The status of CHUCK CLOSE indicator is changed according to commands.)
Though the gantry loader is operated, the function of workpiece gripping detec-
tion becomes ineffective. Gantry hands are operated: open and close.

Starting automatic cycle in idle operation with a workpiece gripped by spindle

chuck or gantry hand may damage the workpiece or tools. In this case, set the
corresponding switch of the followings to “effective”.
27. L-CHUCK OPEN CHECK soft-keys
Changes to L-chuck open check-effective/ineffective: setting whether or not
to add “L-chuck open” in the conditions of cycle start at idle operation.
28. R-CHUCK OPEN CHECK soft-keys
Changes to R-chuck open check-effective/ineffective: setting whether or not
to add “L-chuck open” in the conditions of cycle start at idle operation.
29. GR/PC HAND CHECK soft-keys
Changes to GR/PC hand open check-effective/ineffective: setting whether or
not to add “GR hand/PCG hand open” in the conditions of cycle start at idle
operation.

For machines with bar feeder, set L-chuck open check switch ineffective, and set
R-chuck open check switch effective.

For machines with parts catcher type G (PCG), also set GR/PC hand open check
switch effective.

For machines with Gantry (GR), set all the switches effective.

33-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 33 IDLE OPERATION

NOTE: When single block switch is set ON, cycle start is enabled with the above
switches set effective, even if the corresponding conditions are not ful-
filled.
NOTE: Idle operation mode is available on gantry, but not on stocker. Therefore
it is required to shift the teaching point of workpiece transfer between
gantry and stocker, or to use dummy workpiece to turn on and off the
photoelectric sensor of the stocker.
NOTE: Setting the idle operation switch ineffective after operation check sets
the chuck close indicator back to the actual status (the status when the
idle operation switch is set effective.)
NOTE: R-chuck is turned at the speed as program command with R-chuck open.
If danger is high, or if chuck damage or tool interference is expected,
this function is not available. It is possible to run idle operation with
R-chuck closed, however the condition of R-chuck clamping no work-
piece may cause failure depending on the chuck. The operator should
make this judgment.
NOTE: When running idle operation, be careful not to interfere with chucks,
jaws and tools, and also not to fail to remove workpieces. For machines
with a bar feeder, pay attention to the projection amount of a bar.
NOTE: Idle operation is not available for HAN-BEI measuring unit. It is re-
quired to alter the program not to carry out HAN-BEI unit.
NOTE: Switching the idle operation switch is disabled during automatic opera-
tion, and even in emergency stop state.
NOTE: This function is available on the following machines:
WT-100, NTY3 series, NTJX, NTMX, NTMXL, MX5, MX-100, WY ,
WT-250series, WT-250II, NTX(II) WT-150(II), JX-250, SC-100X2
NOTE: The following G codes move to the command position if the workpiece
does not exist. Be very careful of the interference.
G131, G310, G312, G376, and G378 etc.

33-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 33 IDLE OPERATION

33-4 Warnings
The following warnings are for idle operation:

W0420 IDLE OPE. MODE ON IN AUTO CYCLE

Automatic operation is carried out while idle operation mode switch is
set to ON. To clear this warning, turn the idle operation mode switch to
OFF, or press RESET button.

W0421 L CHUCK NOT OPEN IN IDLE OPE.

While idle operation mode is effective, automatic operation with L
chuck closed cannot be started. To clear this warning, press RESET
button. To run idle operation with L chuck closed, set the interlock in-
effective on NT SETTING screen.

W0422 HAND NOT OPEN IN IDLE OPE.

While idle operation mode is effective, automatic operation with hand
closed cannot be started. To clear this warning, press RESET button. To
run idle operation with hand closed, set the interlock ineffective on NT
SETTING screen. Note: This warning is applied to GR hand and PC
hand.

W0423 IDLE OPE DISABLE CHUCK OPEN/CLOSE

Chuck open/close operation is disabled under idle operation mode.
Though the "CHUCK CLOSE" indicator on the operation panel is
turned ON or OFF, the chuck is not actually operated. To cancel the
warning, press RESET button.

W0427 R CHUCK NOT OPEN IN IDLE OPE.

While idle operation mode is effective, automatic operation with R
chuck closed cannot be started. To clear this warning, press RESET
button. To run idle operation with R chuck closed, set the interlock in-
effective on NT SETTING screen.

The warnings, W421, W422 and W427 can be set ineffective on NT SETTING
screen.

33-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 33 IDLE OPERATION

MEMO

33-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 34 1/2 REDUCTION HOLDER (SERVO MILLING TYPE)

34 1/2 REDUCTION HOLDER (SERVO MILLING TYPE)

34-1 Reduction Holder Application
Changeover of normal holder and reduction holder is available for rotary tool
holders.
The method of changing to 1/2 reduction holder differs between the employment
of only one reduction holder and the employment of several reduction holders.
This type is applicable only for rotary tools driven by servo motor.
Applicable machine model: NTY3, NTY3-100 (milling 6000min-1), WY-100II
(milling 6000 min-1), WY100, NTJ-100 (Except NTY3 Jumbo), SC-100, and
SC-100X2

34-2 Employing Several 1/2 Reduction Holders

34-2-1 M code
M function Contents
M454 1/2 reduction holder application start
(Specify this command after 1/2 reduction holder index by T
code and before tool rotation command.)
M455 1/2 reduction holder application cancel
(Specify this command after machining using 1/2 reduction
holder is finished and before the next T code is commanded.)

34-2-2 Setting
Set PMC counter C12, C92 and C172 (1-path, 2-path and 3-path) to "0". PMC
counter setting is for employing only one 1/2 reduction holder.
When employing several 1/2 reduction holders, this setting is not used.
Be sure to set C12, C92 and C172 to "0", otherwise M454 and M455 are not
available.

34-2-3 Programming
(1) T code is required to be specified before machining. Even when the turret
station is manually indexed beforehand, the T code block to command turret
station No. is required to be specified in machining program before machin-
ing start..
NOTE: This restriction is placed on all the machining using tools (not only
1/2 reduction holders but other tools).

(2) M454 is required to be specified after 1/2 reduction holder index by T code
and before machining. Even when 1/2 reduction holder is manually indexed
beforehand, M454 is required to be specified in machining program before
machining start.. If M454 is missing, tool rotational speed cannot correspond
to "S" command, and also the tool phase cannot be stable. Tool orientation is
performed automatically with M454 command.

(3) M455 is required to be specified after machining using 1/2 reduction holder
is finished. If M455 is missing,, machining using normal holder is performed
under the control for 1/2 reduction holder. In that case, tool rotational speed
does not correspond to "S" command, and the tool phase cannot be stable.
Tool orientation is performed automatically with M455 command.

34-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 34 1/2 REDUCTION HOLDER (SERVO MILLING TYPE)

(4) M454 command cannot be cleared even by RESET button until M455 com-
mand is given since M454 command is stored in NC memory. However,
turning off NC power clears the memory of M454 command, which is the
same as making a M455 command.

(5) It is unnecessary to set double the S/F command value or 0.5 times the S/F
command value since 1/2 reduction gear setting is set in internal process of
NC. Tool rotates at the speed corresponding to "S" command value as usual.
At the moment, the motor rotates at double the normal speed, and feed per
revolution is carried out according to program.

34-2-4 Example of programming (polygonal turning using 1/2 reduction holder)

Program Contents Remarks
: Normal machining
T0202; 1/2 reduction holder selection
M454; 1/2 reduction holder application start Change NC setting to 1/2 reduc-
tion holder
M41; Spindle selection
M03S1000; Spindle FWD. rotation
G352P1Q1 Synchronization start for polygonal turning Synchronization of spindle and
rotary tool
:
(Polygonal turning)
:
G50.2; Synchronization for polygonal turning cancel
M5; Spindle stop
M455; 1/2 reduction holder application cancel Change NC setting to normal holder
: Back to normal machining

NOTE: The order of programming must not be changed. Be sure to cre-

ate programs as above-indicated order.

34-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 34 1/2 REDUCTION HOLDER (SERVO MILLING TYPE)

34-3 Employing Only One 1/2 Reduction Holder

34-3-1 M codes
There are no M codes related to 1/2 reduction holder.

34-3-2 Setting
Set the No. of the turret station on which 1/2 reduction holder is mounted at PMC
counter.
.
PMC PARAM COUNTER
NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT
4 C0012 12 0
24 C0092 12 0
44 C0172 12 0

Set “12”. This example indicates that 1/2 reduction holder is mounted on No. 12
turret station.

Set the No. of the station on which 1/2 reduction holder is mounted for the ad-
dresses shown in the table below:

Table 34-1 Counter Table

Address
C12 C92 C172
Model
Super NTY3
L-turret R-turret Lower turret
NTY3-100
WY100
WY100II Upper turret Lower turret −
NTJ-100
SC-100
Upper turret − −
SC-100X2
Reference: For the method of displaying PMC COUNTER screen, see
MAINTENANCE manual.

34-3-3 Programming
(1) It is unnecessary to set double the S/F command value or 0.5 times the S/F
command value since 1/2 reduction gear setting is set in internal process of
NC. Tool rotates at the speed corresponding to "S" command value as usual.
At the moment, the motor rotates at double the normal speed, and feed per
revolution is carried out according to program.

34-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 34 1/2 REDUCTION HOLDER (SERVO MILLING TYPE)

34-3-4 Example of programming polygonal turning using 1/2 reduction holder

Program Contents Remarks
: Normal machining
T1212; 1/2 reduction holder selection The station preset at C12
M41; Spindle selection
M03S1000; Spindle FWD. rotation
G352P1Q1 Synchronization start for polygonal turning Synchronization of spindle and
rotary tool
:
(Polygonal turning)
:
G50.2; Synchronization for polygonal turning cancel command
M5; Spindle stop
: Back to normal machining

NOTE: The order of programming must not be changed. Be sure to cre-

ate programs as above-indicated order.

34-4 Interlock and Cautions

(1) When indexing 1/2 reduction holder, maximum speed is limited to 3000 rpm..
Maximum speed for normal holder is 6000 rpm..
(2) The reduction holders are applicable only for ratio 2:1. They are not applica-
ble for other ratios.

34-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

35-1 M Code
Fine drill breakage detecting operation is performed by the following M cord
command from the lathe.
M76 Fine drill breakage detector start
(Advance/Retract operations are performed.)
35-2 Program Example
O1234;
:
G00 X*** Z***: (Detecting position move)
M76:
G04 X0.5:
M01:
:
Machining program
:
:
:
:
M30;

NOTE: When the drill breakage is detected, the operation stops with the op-
tional stop (M01). Be sure to input M01 after M76 of the program.
NOTE: *** changes with the length of tools etc.
For details of detecting position per machine model, see the chapter
35-6 Detecting Position.

35-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

35-3 How to Execute Breakage Detector in ATC Cycle Command “G340”

When NC parameter P7291 is set to 4 as factory setting, specifying an argu-
ment ”W” in the block of ATC cycle command ”G340” automatically performs
drill breakage detecting operation while ATC cycle is running.
Drill breakage detection is performed for the tool currently being mounted on the
upper tool spindle before returning the tool to the magazine (before calling a next
tool).

• Programming
G340 T _. [W _.]

• Argument ”W”
Specify the position where tool is lased as shown above by the distance from
the tool nose to the lased point. (Tool position offset X needs to be set in ad-
vance.) Specifying an argument W in G340 block performs positioning to the
specified position right before Z-axis move to the ATC position, then M76 is
commanded to execute drill breakage detecting operation. If an argument W
is not specified in G340 block, only normal ATC cycle operation is per-
formed (drill breakage detection is not performed).

35-2
C-NA104204-A2205
35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

NOTE: The Z-axis position to perform the drill breakage detection is deter-
mined by the argument W and the tool offset (both position and wear).
Take care of the following points.
• To command the argument W of G340, command the argument W in
the state that the tool offset is read.
When the offset is canceled, the alarm “A743: tool offset not com-
manded” occurs.
• It is necessary to set the distance from the B-axis swing center to the
tool nose in the diameter value for the tool offset X. For details, refer
to the programming manual.
Unless the tool offset X is set correctly, the Z-axis position is not
calculated correctly when the drill breakage is detected.
• When you shift the sensor mounting position or when you want to
fine-adjust the detecting position from the tool nose, set the follow-
ing sequence parameter to fine adjust the X and Z positions for drill
breakage detection. This parameter shifts the base position for the
sensor, and this change will be validated to all the tools.
• D7116:
Z shift amount for drill breakage detecting position in ATC cycle

Setting unit: 0.001 mm (1000 = 1 mm)

Setting range: ±99999999
Setting unit (For sub-micron specification (ISC)): 0.0001 mm
(10000 = 1 mm)
NOTE: When the drill breakage is detected, the machine stops by alarm at the
breakage detecting position after the feed hold. Check whether the sen-
sor touches the tool correctly. Then move the Z-axis close to the ma-
chine zero point using the manual handle, and check the tool status.
When you move the Z-axis, be fully careful of the axis and direction to
be moved.
NOTE: The positions of X, Y, and B axes when the drill breakage is detected are
based on the ATC position.
To perform the drill breakage detection other than the ATC position, or
to perform the drill breakage detection not during the ATC cycle, move
the tool to the breakage detecting position, and command M76.
NOTE: For details on G340 command, refer to the chapter 22 in programming
manual.
NOTE: The argument W in the G340 command is available for NT NURSE ver-
sion V10.53 or higher.

35-3
C-NA104204-A2205
35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

• Program example
:
;
G340 T001001 A2. T001001 Tool exchange & T002 Next tool
preparation
Drill breakage detection is not executed

:
(Machining by (001001)
:
G340 T002002 A3. W3. ; T001001 Drill breakage detection &
T002002 Tool change & T003 Next tool
preparation
:
(Machining by (002002)
:

35-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

35-4 Related Parameters

ES4041 Fine drill breakage detection
0: Invalid
3: Valid
D7116 Z shift amount for drill breakage detecting position in ATC cycle
P7291 Sensor type for specifying argument W following G340
0: Laser type
4: Hard type
P7291 When breakage is detected,
0: an alarm occurs and the machine stops immediately.
1: an alarm occurs and the machine stops in the next M01 block.

NOTE: For the details of description and setting of P7291, refer to NT NURSE
operation manual.
NOTE: If the sensor (Hard SW) cannot return to the standby position (due to
the wrong connection etc.), an alarm occurs and the sensor stops im-
mediately regardless of the setting.

35-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

35-5 Long Tool Breakage Detection Command in NTRX-300L

Argument [W___ ] cannot be used for tool breakage detection command of long
tool to avoid collision caused by the swing B-axis shifted in the ATC cycle.
Create the following program to command the long tool breakage detection.

[Program example]
:
(Machining by long tool)
:
G00 B-90. B-axis feed
G330 A5. U0. V0. X-,Y-axis feed to tool breakage detecting position
M972 L-side ATC shutter open
G419 A__. Decide tool spindle orientation angle (By 30 deg.)
G00 W *1 Z-axis feed to tool breakage detecting position
G04 U1.
M76 Breakage check
G04 U1.
M01 Stop the operation when breakage is detected
G28 W0 Z-axis zero return
M973 L-side ATC shutter close
G00 B90. B-axis feed
G340T****** Tool exchange command

(*1)
Distance from the breakage detecting unit to the tool end.

35-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

35-6 Detecting Position

Model Turret Straight milling tool Cross milling tool Boring tool
X1=−30 X1=−30
X1=−30
Y1=31 Y1=31
L-upper Y1=3
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
Z1=−220
WT-100 tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X2=−30 X2=−30
X2=−30
R-lower Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
Z2=−245
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=−50 X1=−50
X1=−50
Y1=35 Y1=35
L-upper Y1=−29 to 35
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
Z1=163
WT-150II tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X2=0 X2=0
X2=−40
R-lower Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
Z2=250
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=−20 X1=−20
X1=−20
Y1=41 Y1=41
L-upper Y1=41
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
Z1=292.5
WT-250II tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X2=0 X2=0
X2=0
R-lower Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
Z2=307.5
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=0 X1=0
X1=0
Y1=60 Y1=60
L-upper Y1=0 to 60
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
Z1=−390
WT-300 tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X2=0 X2=0
X2=20
R-lower Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
Z2=390
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
L ϕ65, 51 specification
X2=−20
Y2=15
Z2=Z1=Depending on X2=0
the tool length (arbi- Y2=0
L-lower trary) − Z2=Z1=Depending on
L ϕ42 specification the tool length (arbi-
WY-100II X2=0 trary)
Y2=15
Z2=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary)
X1=0 X1=0
Y1=15 Y1=0
R-upper −
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)

35-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

Model Turret Straight milling tool Cross milling tool Boring tool
X2=−280 X2=−280
Y2=−35 Y2=−35
L-lower −
Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
WY-150
X1=−120 X1=−120
Y1=45 Y1=45
R-upper −
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=−50
X1=−50
Y1=0
Upper Y1=0 −
Z1=Depending on the
Z1=−579
tool length (arbitrary)
NTJ100
X2=0
X2=0
Y2=−15
Lower Y2=−15 −
Z2=Depending on the
Z2=325
tool length (arbitrary)
X1=−403 X1=−343
Y1=45 Y1=45
Upper −
Z1=Depending on the Z1=25 (The tool length:
Super-NTJ tool length (arbitrary) 40 mm or more)
X2=0 X2=−50
Lower Z2=Depending on the Z2=320 (The tool −
tool length (arbitrary) length: 20 mm or more)
X1=0 X1=0
Y1=15 Y1=0
L-upper −
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
L ϕ42 specification
X3=0
Y3=−15
Z3=Depending on the X3=0
tool length (arbitrary) Y3=0
NTY3-100 L-lower −
L ϕ65,51 specification Z3=Depending on the
X3=−20 tool length (arbitrary)
Y3=−15
Z3=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary)
X2=0 X2=0
Y2=15 Y2=0
R-upper −
Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)

35-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

Model Turret Straight milling tool Cross milling tool Boring tool
L ϕ65,51 specification
X1=0
X1=−100
Y1=0
L-upper Y1=45 −
Z1=Depending on the
Z1=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary)
tool length (arbitrary)
L ϕ65,51 specification
X3=0
X3=−280
NTY3-150 Y3=0
L-lower Y3=−45 −
Z3=Depending on the
Z3=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary)
tool length (arbitrary)
X2=−120 X2=0
Y2=45 Y2=0
R-upper −
Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=−80 X1=−80
Y1=50 Y1=50
L-upper −
Z1=Depending on the Z1=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X2=0 X2=0
Y2=30 Y2=30
NTY3-250 R-upper −
Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X3=0 X3=0
Y3=−5 Y3=−5
R-lower −
Z3=Depending on the Z3=Depending on the
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=0
Y1=−60
Upper − Z1=Depending on the −
tool length (arbitrary)
Super-NTJX B1=90°
X2=0 X2=0
X2=0
Y2=−50 Y2=−50
Lower Y2=−50
Z2=Depending on the Z2=Depending on the
Z2=495
tool length (arbitrary) tool length (arbitrary)
X1=−295
Y1=105
MX-100 Upper − Z1= Depending on the −
tool length (arbitrary)
B1=90°

35-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 35 FINE DRILL BREAKAGE DETECTOR (OPTION)

Model Turret Straight milling tool Cross milling tool Boring tool
X1=50
Y1=120
Upper − Z1= Depending on the −
tool length (arbitrary)
JX-250 (S) B1=90°
X2=−45
X2=−45
Y2=−40
R-lower Y2=−40 −
Z2=Depending on the
Z2=645
tool length (arbitrary)
X1=50
Y1=120
Upper − Z1= Depending on the −
tool length (arbitrary)
B1=90°
X2=−45
X2=−45
JX-250 (W) Y2=−40
R-lower Y2=−40 −
Z2=Depending on the
Z2=−505
tool length (arbitrary)
X3=−45
X3=−45
Y3=−40
L-lower Y3=−40 −
Z3=Depending on the
Z3=−500
tool length (arbitrary)

NOTE: Machine models which are not written in the table need to make
special arrangements.
NOTE: The coordinate values in the table are the values from zero point.
NOTE: The coordinate values of X-axis are written in diameter.
NOTE: Outward straight milling tools need to make a special arrange-
ment.
NOTE: Adjust the Z-axis coordinate values of straight milling tools and
boring tools arbitrarily depending on the tool length.
NOTE: The X-axis coordinate values of cross milling tools are reference
values.
NOTE: The length of standard sensing needle is 200 mm (7.87 in). The
sensing needles of other lengths need to make special arrange-
ments.

35-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 36 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (MULTIPOINT)

36 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (MULTIPOINT)

This function is usable for the machines with spindle orientation B/C.
36-1 G codes
• Spindle orientation command
G319 A_____. B_____. C_____. H_____.;
A_____.: Spindle selection
1: Main spindle
2: Sub spindle
B_____.: Brake designation
1: Spindle lock
If skipped, the spindle lock won’t be performed.
C_____.: Indexing angle (Absolute coordinate)
H_____.: Indexing angle (Absolute coordinate)

• Releasing the spindle orientation command

G318 A_____.
A_____.: Spindle selection
1: Main spindle
2: Sub spindle

NOTE: For TW series, omit the command A_____.(Spindle selection).

36-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 36 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (MULTIPOINT)

36-2 Program Example

For using the spindle lock
:
G319 A____. B1. C . Command orientation of main or
: sub spindle to C __ . position,
: and turn the spindle lock ON.
: After the spindle lock is completed,
: the orientation is released.
:
G318 A____. Release the spindle lock state of
: main or sub spindle.
: (Also available with M87 or M33)

For not using the spindle lock

:
G319 A_____. C . Command orientation of main or
: sub spindle to C __ . position,
:
G318 A____. Release the spindle lock state of
: main or sub spindle.
: (Also available with M18 or M418)

NOTE: For TW series, omit the command A_____. in the program above.

36-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 37 MACHINING CHECK FUNCTION (CUT IN CHECK)

37 MACHINING CHECK FUNCTION (CUT IN CHECK)

37-1 Description of this Function
This function enables the operators to suspend the machine operation in the mid-
dle of machining cycle, open the door, check the conditions of workpieces, tools,
and chips, close the door, and restart the machining cycle.
This function makes it easier to restart the machining cycle after the operator re-
moves chips that get tangled in tools during the operation.
This function is usable for the machines with “CUT IN CHECK” and “CUTTING
RESTART” switches on the operation panel or No.31 CUT IN CHECK menu on
the NT NURSE screen.

37-2 Flow of this Function

During the automatic operation
↓
Press the “CUT IN CHECK” switch.
↓
Single block stop by the block of rapid feed, and spindle rotation and coolant
blow stop.
↓
Press the “DOOR UNLOCK” switch to release the door lock. (NOTE 1)
↓
Open the door, and check the machining, remove chips, etc.
↓
Close the door, and press the “CUTTING RESTART” switch.
↓
The spindle starts rotating, and the coolant blow turns ON.
↓
Press the “CYCLE START” switch.
↓
Cycle restarts.

NOTE: 1) Only for machines with door lock specification

37-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 37 MACHINING CHECK FUNCTION (CUT IN CHECK)

37-3 Switches on Operation Panel

“CUT IN CHECK” and “CUTTING RESTART” switches are added for this func-
tion.
For these switches’ locations, see the operation manual.
For the NT NURSE screen type, use the soft-key displayed on the CUT IN
CHECK menu.

CUT IN CHECK switch

Used to suspend the machine operation in the middle of the machining cycle.
Pressing this switch lights the lamp above the switch.
When this lamp lights, the machining program which is currently being exe-
cuted stops in single block mode by the block of the first rapid feed.
After the single block stop, the spindle and coolant blow stop.
NOTE: When the CUT IN CHECK switch is pressed in the feed hold state, the
spindle rotation and the coolant blow stop.
NOTE: When the CUT IN CHECK switch is pressed, and then, the FEED
HOLD switch is pressed before the cycle stops, the machine stops in the
feed hold state, and the lamp of the CUT IN CHECK switch goes out.
NOTE: For the machines with 2-path or 3-path system, when other path system
stops in single block mode while the machine is in waiting mode by M
codes (M100 to M199), the machine stops by the block of waiting M
code.

CUTTING RESTART switch

Used to restart the spindle rotation, coolant blow, and cycle operation which
have been suspended by the CUT IN CHECK switch.
If this switch is pressed while the lamp of the CUT IN CHECK switch is il-
luminated and the cycle operation is stopping, the spindle rotation starts
again, and the coolant blow turns ON.
While the spindle is accelerating, the lamp above this switch blinks, and the
lamp lights when the spindle rotation reaches its spindle speed.

37-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 37 MACHINING CHECK FUNCTION (CUT IN CHECK)

37-4 Restrictions
• While the lamp of the CUT IN CHECK switch lights, the cycle operation is
unusable.
• If the RESET button is pressed while the lamp of CUT IN CHECK switch is
illuminated and the cycle operation is stopping, the spindle rotation and the
coolant blow cannot be restarted by the CUTTING RESTART switch.
• While the lamp of the CUT IN CHECK switch is illuminated, the operations of
spindle jog, spindle lock, chuck open/close, and coolant blow in manual mode
are not available.
• While the lamp of the CUT IN CHECK switch is illuminated, only the auto-
matic door (option) can be operative in manual mode.
• The gantry (GR) specification doesn’t apply this function. The GR doesn’t stop
by the CUT IN CHECK switch.
After the lathe stops its operation, the door can be opened when the GR stops in
the feed hold state. However, the door cannot be opened when the GR is over
the door. In order to restart the machining, close the door and press the CYCLE
START button of the lathe. Next, on the GR manual operation box, set the
OPERATION lever to the “+” position together with pressing the CONTROL-
LER ENABLE button.
• For the machines with polygon mode
Under the polygonal mode, the spindle operation cannot be suspended because
the phase of spindle and rotary tool changes by the spindle stop and return.
After the single block stop, the lamp of “CUT IN CHECK” goes out.
• For the machines with door lock specification
If the door is opened or closed during the spindle orientation, the retention of
orientation by the spindle motor is canceled.
• If the machine applies the specification which turns OFF the servomotor at the
door open, the slides drop by the amount of backlash by the brake from the
gravity axes (X-axis and Y-axis). Therefore, the tool may be broken or damaged
when the operation is stopped in the feed hold during the cutting operation, or
when the door is opened while the soft quill pusher (G376) is used.

37-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 37 MACHINING CHECK FUNCTION (CUT IN CHECK)

37-5 Warnings
There are following warnings related to this function.

W470 CYCLE IS IMPOSSIBLE IN CUT IN CHECK

It is impossible to start the cycle operation during the CUT IN
CHECK. Press the CUTTING RESTART button. After the
CUTTING RESTART lamp lights, press the CYCLE START
switch.
W471 CANCEL THE CUT IN CHECK MODE
It is impossible to restart the operation because the operation
was reset during the CUT IN CHECK.
Press the CUT IN CHECK button to cancel the CUT IN
CHECK mode.
W472 ONLY AUTO DOOR IN CUT IN CHECK
Operations other than automatic door (option) are disabled dur-
ing the CUT IN CHECK.

37-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 38 HOBBING FUNCTION

38 HOBBING FUNCTION
Applicable machine models:
Super NTY3 Jumbo, NTY3-250, NTRX-300/300L, MX-100, and JX-250
This function enables the cutting of gears by rotating the C-axis in synchroniza-
tion with a rotating hob.
Hob machining between the L-side milling and the C-axis or between the R-side
milling and the C-axis can be performed.
NOTE: Hobbing function is an optional function.
NOTE: Hob machining with lower milling is not available.
38-1 Program Command
G81.4R__ (L__) (Q__P__): Starts hob synchronization.
R: Number of teeth (Specified range: 1 to 1000)
L: Number of hob threads (Specifiable range: −200 to 200)
The sign of L determines the rotating direction for the C-axis.
When L is positive, the rotating direction for the C-axis is negative
when the milling rotates forward (− direction).
When L is negative, the rotating direction for the C-axis is positive
when the milling rotates forward (+ direction).
If L is omitted, the number of hob threads is assumed 1.
Q: Module or diametral pitch
Specify a module in the case of metric input.
(Unit: 0.00001 mm, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0 mm)
Specify a diametral pitch in the case of inch input.
(Unit: 0.00001 inch-1, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 254.0 inch-1)
P: Gear helix angle
(Unit: 0.0001 deg, Specifiable range: −90.0 to 90.0 deg)

NOTE: When the milling rotates in the reverse direction, the C-axis rotating di-
rection by the sign of L becomes the reverse direction described above.
NOTE: When specifying Q and P, the user can use a decimal point.

G80.4: Cancels hob synchronization.

38-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 38 HOBBING FUNCTION

38-2 Program Example

O1207
G80G40G97G98
G28U0W0V0
M91 Selects C-axis mode on L unit (R unit)
T0100
G28H0
M88S173 Milling rotation command
G4U2.
G81.4R25L1 Starts hob synchronization
G4U2.
:
(Machining)
:
G80.4 Cancels hob synchronization
M90 Milling stop
M41
M1
M30
%

NOTE: Command the milling speed which does not exceeds the C-axis maximum cutting feedrate
4800 deg/min (13.3 min-1).
If the C-axis maximum feedrate is exceeded, the C-axis unit may be damaged.
NOTE: Specify Q and P of G81.4 to use helical gear compensation. For the details, refer to the
user’s manual (B-63944) of NC unit.
NOTE: During hob synchronization, machine lock is invalid for the C-axis.
NOTE: Hob synchronization is not canceled with reset. If the operation stops with reset during hob
synchronization, cancel hob synchronization by commanding G80.4 in the MDI mode.
NOTE: During hob synchronization, the synchronization status between the milling and the C-axis
is maintained regardless of whether the operation is automatic or manual.
NOTE: During hob synchronization, G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.1, or G53 cannot be specified for
the C-axis.
NOTE: Hob synchronization is canceled when a servo alarm, a spindle alarm, or a PW alarm is
generated or an emergency stop is applied.
NOTE: During hob synchronization, AI contour control mode is temporarily canceled.
NOTE: During hob synchronization, inch/metric conversion commands (G20 and G21) cannot be
issued.
NOTE: Feed per revolution during hob synchronization is performed based on the speed on the
hob synchronous C-axis.
NOTE: During hob synchronization, do not issue the feed command for the C-axis from other tur-
ret heads.

38-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 38 HOBBING FUNCTION

38-3 Retract Function

In order to prevent damage of tools or workpieces, this function is employed
when the retract operation is carried out if an abnormality occurs during the ma-
chining.
To perform the retract operation, press the FEED HOLD switch during the hob
synchronization and press the FEED HOLD switch again while the FEED HOLD
indicator is lit.
Also, during the hob synchronization, if an NC alarm is generated, the retract op-
eration will be performed.

38-3-1 NC parameter for retract function

No.7740 (X/Z/Y): Retract speed
(Setting unit: mm/min, Setting range: 0 to 4800)

No.7741 (X/Z/Y): Retract amount

(Setting unit: mm, Setting range: −999999.999 to
999999.999)

NOTE: Standard setting value of the retract amount is set to 0 (no movement is
performed along an axis). Set the retract amount according to the ma-
chining.
NOTE: Feed hold or feedrate override is not effective to movement during re-
traction.

38-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 38 HOBBING FUNCTION

MEMO

38-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 39 INTERLOCK FOR HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT

39 INTERLOCK FOR HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT

39-1 Description
For the machines with high pressure coolant specification (1 MPa or higher), dis-
charging the high pressure coolant directly onto the X-axis protector may break
the protector. To avoid this, we prepare an interlock for high pressure coolant to
the turret bases constructed as shown below. This interlock is valid for the ma-
chines when the PMC parameter D4078, D5078, or D6078 is set to 1 at the ma-
chine ex-factory.
This interlock is not applied to the turret bases constructed differently from the
figure shown below. (Turret with swing B-axis, SC series(other than SC-100 and
SC-100X2), AS-200, TMC series turrets)

This protector

Move by G00

Move byG01
High pressure coolant is not discharged here.

Fig. 39-1

39-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 39 INTERLOCK FOR HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT

39-2 Condition for Interlock

The high pressure coolant is discharged only when the automatic operation (or
feed hold) is performed and that the axes move by G01/G02/G03 commands. The
high pressure coolant does not turn ON during the G00 feed command.
To avoid influence on machining, this interlock is automatically cancelled by the
following states. The coolant does not stop even by G00 feed command.
(1) While the canned cycle for drilling is executed: G81 to G89
(2) While the canned cycle is executed: G90, G92, and G94
This interlock is not cancelled automatically by the canned cycle for grinding
(G70s) or peck drilling cycle in NT NURSE function.
Also, if the machining program is created by combining normal G01/G02/G03
command and G00 command, this interlock is applied, and the high pressure
coolant stops every time the G00 feed is commanded. In this case, use the follow-
ing M codes to cancel this interlock temporarily.
M1021
High pressure coolant interlock ignore ON
M1022
High pressure coolant interlock ignore OFF
(At power ON, reset state, or turret index)

Example)
M8; High pressure coolant ON
G00X_; Approach (At this time, coolant is not ON)
M1021; High pressure coolant interlock ignore ON
G04Uxx; Adjust the timing if necessary.
G71•••; Turning machining
M9; High pressure coolant OFF
M1022; High pressure coolant interlock ignore OFF

NOTE: This interlock is invalid during the manual mode.

39-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 40 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION

40 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION

With this function, an overheat alarm (OH0704) occurs when the spindle speed
deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions.
Press the RESET button to cancel the alarm. Also, set all the parameters depend-
ing on user’s requirements. For details, refer to the FANUC operator’s manual
“Spindle speed fluctuation detection (G25, G26)” and FANUC parameter manual.
40-1 Explanations of Additional G Codes
・G26 Pp Qq Rr : Spindle fluctuation detection ON
P: Time from the change of the specified speed to the
start of the spindle fluctuation detection
(0-999999 msec)
Q: Tolerance of a specified spindle speed
(1-1000%)
R: Spindle speed fluctuation at which the actual
spindle speed is so fast that an overheat can occur.
(1-1000%)

・G25 : Spindle fluctuation detection OFF

40-2 Storing Programs

O1234(MAIN PROGRAM);
G26 P4000 Q5 R5;
M3 S2000;
Cutting
G25;
M30;

40-3 Alarm
・A391… Spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm
・A392… Sub spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm

NOTE: This function can be used for the machines with the software version is
higher than the following versions stored in the machine.
NC system 0i-TD/Nakamura-Tome FANUC
LADDER Version
40100243AF or higher, 40100314 (first edition) or higher,
40100254DD or higher
SC100, SC-100X2, SC200, SC200L, Super Mill SC200L, SC250,
SC300, SC300II, SC300IIL, SC300L, SC450, SC450L, SC450LL,
AS200, AS200L

40-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 40 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION

MEMO

40-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 41 ON/OFF CHANGEOVER FUNCTION WITH EXTERNAL M CODES

41 ON/OFF CHANGEOVER FUNCTION WITH EXTERNAL M CODES

41-1 Description
This function changes over ON/OFF of the relay output for external M
codes by commanding M code.
Also, the relay output for external M codes can be turned OFF with the
reset signal.
The relay for external M codes is provided for each path.
The number of sets of the relays varies depending on the number of sets
of the optional M codes type B.

41-2 M code
The number of
sets of the M Relay output ON Relay output OFF
codes
1 M751 M1751
2 M752 M1752
3 M753 M1753
4 M754 M1754
5 M755 M1755
6 M756 M1756
7 M757 M1757
8 M758 M1758

41-3 Related Parameter

Data No. Description

ON/OFF changeover function with external M codes.
D6002 0: Invalid
1: Valid

41-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 41 ON/OFF CHANGEOVER FUNCTION WITH EXTERNAL M CODES

MEMO

41-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 42 MIST COLLECTOR

42 MIST COLLECTOR
42-1 Description
• The mist collector unit collects the mist that occurs from the coolant oil during
the lathe machining.
• The MIST COLLECTOR ON/OFF switch is on the NT SETTING screen.
(a) NT-IPS screen

(b) FANUC LCD screen

• Setting the PMC parameter can change the manual operation or automatic op-
eration of the mist collector. (The mist collector switch is not on the operation
panel.)

42-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 42 MIST COLLECTOR

(1) Use the MIST COLLECTOR ON/OFF switch on the NT SETTING screen to
turn ON or OFF the mist collector in the manual operation.
When the PMC parameter D4505 is set to 3,
setting the MIST COLLECTOR ON/OFF switch to ON activates the mist
collector. The mist collector turns OFF when the switch is set to OFF.
(2) In the automatic operation, command the M codes in the program to turn ON
or OFF the mist collector.
When the PMC parameter D4505 is set to 1,
setting the MIST COLLECTOR ON/OFF switch to ON activates the mist
collector together with the M code command.
M1084 Mist collector ON
M1085 Mist collector OFF

Program Example
O__
M1084 Mist collector ON
(Machining)
M1085 Mist collector OFF
M30

42-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 42 MIST COLLECTOR

Change over the setting of mist collector ON by the PMC parameter.

PMC Parameter
Mist collector unit
0: Invalid
D4505
1: Valid (Turns ON by switch ON and M code command)
3: Valid (Turns ON by switch ON, M code is ignored)

PMC Timer
Delay timer for mist collector stop
The mist collector operation stops after the time set here when the
D4214 automatic operation is completed.
Unit: sec.
Standard setting value: 120 (2 min)

Alarm
Mist collector thermal trip
Turn OFF the main breaker and remove the cause of trouble.
A1061
Then, press the RESET button to reset the thermal. It may be
caused by motor overload, cable break, or earth fault.

NOTE: When the thermal trip occurs, turn OFF the main breaker to prevent
an electrical shock. It may be necessary to open the door of the lathe
control box.
NOTE: When the machining time is short, the thermal for oil mist collector
may trip if the mist collector ON/OFF operations are repeated in a
short cycle of time. Therefore, the mist collector stops after the time
set by the timer after the M code to turn OFF the mist collector is
commanded.

42-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 42 MIST COLLECTOR

MEMO

42-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 43 DRY TYPE CHIP FLUSH AIR BLOW

43 DRY TYPE CHIP FLUSH AIR BLOW

Supported machine model: SC-100

Specifying the M codes can turn ON/OFF the chip flush air blow.
It is also possible to turn ON/OFF the chip flush air blow in connection with the
automatic operation by the parameter setting (PMC parameter D4091).
The chip flush air blow has two types depending on the specifications - one air
blow unit or two air blow units. For details, see the table below.

Supported machine models

One chip flush air blow unit SC-100 (Without MATA-BEI (sub spindle))
Two chip flush air blow units SC-100 (With MATA-BEI (sub spindle))

43-1 One Chip Flush Air Blow Unit

43-1-1 PMC parameter
No. Contents Standard Setting
Chip flush air blow function
0: Invalid
D4091 3
1: In connection with automatic operation
3: By M code command

43-1-2 M code
M1023 Chip flush air blow ON
M1024 Chip flush air blow OFF

43-2 Two Chip Flush Air Blow Units

43-2-1 Air blow cycle
It is possible to command the air blow cycle (M1098) when the parameter D4091
(chip flush air blow) is set to 3 (M code ON/OFF). The order of air blow positions
is shown below.
It is possible to change this order by the parameter D5095. See below.

Chip flush air blow

↓
Chip flush air blow 2

43-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 43 DRY TYPE CHIP FLUSH AIR BLOW

43-2-2 PMC parameter

Standard
No. Contents
Setting
Chip flush air blow function
0: Invalid
D4091 1: In connection with automatic operation (Two air blow units turn ON 7
simultaneously)
7: By M code command
Order of air blow in the chip flush air blow cycle

Chip flush air blow Chip flush air blow 2

Setting value
Spindle side Right cover side
D5095 0 1 2 0

1 2 1
NOTE: The air blow does not operate when the setting is other than
above.

43-2-3 PMC timer

Standard Set-
No. Contents
ting
D5122 Air blowing time for the first air blow in the chip flush air blow cycle 63 (3 sec)
Air blowing time for the second air blow in the chip flush air blow
D5124 63 (3 sec)
cycle

43-2-4 M code
M1023 Chip flush air blow ON
M1024 Chip flush air blow OFF
M1086 Chip flush air blow 2 ON
M1087 Chip flush air blow 2 OFF
M1098 Chip flush air blow cycle ON (immediately completed)

43-2-5 Interlock
The chip flush air blow is operative only while the B2-axis is in the range shown
below.
When the B2-axis is outside of the range, both air blow units do not operate.

Machine model Chip flush air blow operation range (B2-axis)

SC-100 −230.0 to +2.5

43-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

This function is to machine workpiece while cutting the chips by making the tool
oscillate along the cutting direction.
Usual operation Oscillation
Long chips Cut chips

Machining path
Cut chips by air-cut

Fig. 44-1
NOTE: This function is optional.
NOTE: Axes which can perform oscillation (= oscillation axes) are
X-axis and Z-axis on each path system. Other axes (except for X
and Z) cannot be commanded as oscillation axes.
NOTE: Larger load will be imposed onto axis slides, ball screws, and
support bearings than usual because of inertial force by oscilla-
tion. In addition, travel distances of axis slides will be longer by
the amount the oscillation is performed. Therefore, lives of slides,
ball screws, and support bearings may deteriorate due to the
use of this function.
NOTE: In oscillation cutting, some intervals of machining path will
double. In speculation, therefore, the surface roughness (Rmax)
becomes four times larger than usual. Making the nose R larger
or setting the lower feedrate will reduce influence on the surface
roughness.
NOTE: When the oscillation frequency is too large or when the oscilla-
tion amplitude is too small, the fretting corrosion may occur on
the slides, ball screws, and support bearings. See “44-2-2 Set-
ting for oscillation conditions” and set the oscillation conditions
properly.

44-1 Oscillation Cutting Mode ON/OFF

44-1-1 Program commands
G8.5 P2 IP0 I_ K_ Oscillation cutting mode ON
G8.5 P0 Oscillation cutting mode OFF

IP Address of actual axis to be oscillated by machining of taper or circular arc (either X or Z)

(Can be omitted)
I Magnification of oscillation frequency (0.0 to 2.5 up to 3 digits after decimal point) (Can be
omitted)
K Magnification of oscillation amplitude (0.0 to 2.5 up to 3 digits after decimal point) (Can be
omitted)

44－1
C-NA104204-A2205
44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

NOTE: Command G8.5 alone in a single block at the head of the block.
NOTE: In the oscillation cutting mode, oscillation will be performed on-
ly during the cutting feed of the axis set as oscillation axis. Os-
cillation is not performed when the axis feed is not commanded
or commands such as rapid feed, dry run, manual operation,
thread cutting, and tapping are made.
NOTE: When IP0 is commanded, the following operations are per-
formed. (See E.g.1)
- In the machining of taper and circular arc, the oscillation
is performed only on the specified axis by IP0.
- In the cutting feed of only Z-axis, the Z-axis oscillates.
- In the cutting feed of only X-axis, the X-axis oscillates.
NOTE: When IP0 is omitted, the following operations are performed.
(See E.g.2)
- In the machining of taper and circular arc, the oscillation
is not performed.
- In the cutting feed of only Z-axis, the Z-axis oscillates.
- In the cutting feed of only X-axis, the X-axis oscillates.

E.g.1) When commanding G8.5 P2 Z0

Z-axis oscillation
X-axis oscillation

Workpiece

Fig. 44-2
E.g.2) When commanding G8.5 P2 (IP0 is omitted)

Z-axis oscillation
X-axis oscillation
No oscillation

Workpiece

Fig. 44-3

NOTE: Be sure to command values I and K with a decimal point.

NOTE: When values I and K are omitted, the setting value of NC param-
eters No.25692 and 25693 are applied. (Unit: 0.001, 0 to 2500)
NOTE: When “G8.5 P2” is commanded while the values exceeding the
specified range are set for values I and K, an alarm (PS5585) or
(PS5586) occurs.
NOTE: For details on how to set values I and K, see chapter 44-2.

44－2
C-NA104204-A2205
44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

NOTE: Commanding G8.5 P2 again during the oscillation cutting mode

can change the conditions for oscillation (values I and K).
NOTE: When the value of NC parameter No.25692 or No.25693 is
changed by NC parameter input mode (G10 L50 command), it is
necessary to command G8.5 P2 again to validate the change.
NOTE: Oscillation is synchronized to the spindle selected by the position
coder. Never change over the selection of position coder during
the oscillation.
NOTE: During the oscillation, do not change the spindle speed suddenly
by spindle override. Oscillation may become unstable, and it
may superimpose excessive load on the machine.
NOTE: It is not possible to oscillate axes of different axis directions sim-
ultaneously in the same path system. It is possible to oscillate
multiple axes without a restricted combination.
E.g.1)
In the machines set for the following as oscillation axis, when
either path system refers to L-spindle,
Setting for oscillation axis:
X-axis and Z-axis (X1-, Z1-axis) for the 1st path
X-axis and Z-axis (X2-, Z2-axis) for the 2nd path
Available combination for simul- (X1, X2), (Z1, Z2)
taneous oscillation
Unavailable combination for (X1, Z1), (X1, Z2), (X2, Z1),
simultaneous oscillation (X2, Z2)

E.g.2)
In the machines set for the following as oscillation axis, when the
1st path system refers to L-spindle and the 2nd path refers to
R-spindle,
Setting for oscillation axis:
X-axis and Z-axis (X1-, Z1-axis) for the 1st path
X-axis and Z-axis (X2-, Z2-axis) for the 2nd path
Available combination for simul- (X1, X2), (Z1, Z2), (X1, Z2),
taneous oscillation (X2, Z1)
Unavailable combination for (X1, Z1), (X2, Z2)
simultaneous oscillation

NOTE: The vibration component of the oscillation is not reflected to ab-

solute coordinates, relative coordinates, and machine coordi-
nates.
NOTE: When the reset operation, emergency stop, or alarm occurs, the
oscillation cutting mode is turned OFF.

44－3
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

44-1-2 Program example

O1001 ;
:
N10 M03 S2000;
:
N20 G8.5 P2 Z0 I0.5 K1.2 ; Oscillation cutting mode ON
: Magnification of oscillation frequency 0.5,
: Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.2
: Only Z-axis oscillates for taper or circular arc
:
N30 G00 X10.0 Z5.0 ; No oscillation in rapid feed
:
N40 G99 G01 X15.0 F0.1 ; X-axis oscillation (because only X-axis moves)
:
N50 G99 G01 X20.0 Z0.0 ; Only Z-axis oscillates for taper
:
N60 G8.5 P0 ; Oscillation cutting mode OFF
:
M30 ;

44－4
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

44-2 Oscillation Motion

44-2-1 Oscillation command
In oscillation cutting mode, the vibration component is added as the following
equation on the cutting feed.
𝐾𝐾 𝜋𝜋𝜋
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 = �cos � 𝑡� − 1�
2 30
Where
F: Feedrate [mm/rev]
S: Spindle speed [min-1]
I: Magnification of oscillation frequency [-]
K: Magnification of oscillation amplitude [-]
t: Time [sec]
Therefore, the nose position in the oscillation axis direction can be expressed by
the following.
𝐹𝑆 𝐾𝐾 𝜋𝜋𝜋
𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 𝑡+ �cos � 𝑡� − 1�
60 2 30

From the equation above, because oscillation is performed in opposite direction of

the axis moving command, the oscillation motion doesn’t go beyond the position
of cutting command. In addition, the time taken for moving to the commanded
position is the same as the time taken for usual cutting command regardless of the
oscillation command.

44-2-2 Setting for oscillation conditions

To cut the chips by oscillation, it is necessary to set the magnification of oscilla-
tion frequency and magnification of oscillation amplitude so that the machining
path passes the already cut area.

Fig. 44-4
The magnification of oscillation frequency is equal to the number of oscillation
per one rotation of spindle, and oscillation frequency is expressed as 𝑆𝑆/60 [Hz].
Also, the magnification of oscillation amplitude is equal to the oscillation ampli-
tude for feedrate per revolution, and oscillation amplitude is expressed as
𝐾𝐾 [mm].
For the cutting with only one feed axis, set the conditions for oscillation referring
to the following section. For conditions for oscillation on the taper and circular
arc, see 44-2-3.

44－5
C-NA104204-A2205
44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

• Setting the oscillation frequency to 𝑛/2 (𝑛 = 1, 3, 5) can cut the chips effec-
tively. Setting the higher magnification of oscillation frequency can cut the
shorter chips. However, the load onto the machine becomes large. Therefore,
we recommend you adjust the oscillation frequency to 20 Hz or lower.
• Setting the magnification of oscillation frequency to 1/𝑚 (𝑚 = 2, 3, 4, … )
can make air-cut part. However, the lower the magnification of oscillation fre-
quency becomes, the larger the oscillation amplitude requires.
• When setting the magnification of oscillation frequency to 𝑛/2 or 1/𝑚,
air-cut occurs on the specified spindle phase. Therefore, it may affect the shape
accuracy (circularity) of workpiece depending on the machining conditions.
When shifting the magnification of oscillation frequency slightly from 𝑛/2 or
1/𝑚 (such as 0.55), the cut position of chips will be dispersed to the circum-
ference of workpiece, which can reduce the influence on the shape accuracy.
However, when the magnification of oscillation frequency gets close to integer
value, it may require larger oscillation amplitude. Also, it is not possible to cut
the chips when the magnification of oscillation frequency is integer. It is be-
cause the air-cut does not occur for integer setting.
• For magnification of oscillation amplitude, set a value larger than 1 to generate
air-cut. Usually, set the value to 1.2. It is necessary to adjust the setting value
depending on the magnification of oscillation frequency or machining condi-
tions.
• It is recommended to set the oscillation amplitude to 0.05 mm or larger. When
the oscillation amplitude is smaller than 0.05, the fretting corrosion may occur
on the slides, ball screws, and support bearings.

Case 1) Magnification of oscillation frequency 1.5,

Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.2

Fig. 44-5

44－6
C-NA104204-A2205
44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

Case 2) Magnification of oscillation frequency 0.5,

Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.2

Fig. 44-6

Case 3) Magnification of oscillation frequency 0.55,

Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.2 (Disperse cut position of
chips)

Fig. 44-7

44－7
C-NA104204-A2205
44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

Case 4) Magnification of oscillation frequency 0.333,

Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.2

Fig. 44-8

Case 5) Magnification of oscillation frequency 0.333,

Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.4

Fig. 44-9

44－8
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

Case 6) Magnification of oscillation frequency 1.0,

Magnification of oscillation amplitude 1.2

Fig. 44-10

Table 44-1 Setting Example for Oscillation Conditions

Magnification of oscillation Magnification of oscillation

Chips cutting cycle
frequency (I) amplitude (K)
Every 2/3 rotation of the spindle 1.5 (3/2) 1.2
Every 2 rotations of the spindle 0.5 (1/2) 1.2
Every 3 rotations of the spindle 0.333 (1/3) 1.4
Every 4 rotations of the spindle 0.25 (1/4) 1.7

NOTE: The magnification of oscillation amplitude has an upper limit,

therefore, oscillation amplitude is clamped not to exceed the up-
per limit. Change the upper limit of oscillation amplitude by set-
ting the parameter No.2710 (Unit: X-axis 0.05 μm, Z-axis 0.1μm,
0 to 32767). Setting to “0” = 0.3 mm
NOTE: The maximum feedrate will be (𝜋𝜋𝜋 + 1) times larger than the
commanded value by oscillation. For example, when the magni-
fication of oscillation frequency is 𝐼 = 0.5, and magnification of
oscillation amplitude is 𝐾 = 1.2, the maximum feedrate is 2.9
times larger than the commanded value. To reduce influence on
tools, make the depth of cut smaller, set the lower feedrate, or
lower the oscillation frequency or oscillation amplitude.
NOTE: After setting the oscillation conditions, run the machine without
a workpiece to check the operations. Also, check if there is no
abnormal vibration or excessive load. After checking the opera-
tion without a workpiece, start the actual operation. At this time,
check if there is no abnormal vibration or excessive load. Also
check that the chips are cut finely.

44－9
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

44-2-3 Oscillation Motion in Machining at Taper and Circular Arc

In oscillation cutting mode, oscillation cutting along the workpiece shape by sim-
ultaneous oscillation in machining at taper and circular arc cannot be executed.
However, oscillating only one axis can cut the chips.
Set the oscillation conditions on the cutting of taper and circular arc referring to
the following.
• For magnification of oscillation frequency, conditions are the same as those of
cutting with only one feed axis. See 44-2-2.
• For magnification of oscillation amplitude on oscillation cutting of taper, it is
necessary to consider taper angles and tool angles. Oscillation amplitude on ta-
per machining in Fig. 44-11 is expressed by the following.
𝐾𝐾 𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝜃1 = 𝐹 𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝜃1 + 𝐹 𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝜃1 𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝜃2 + 𝛼
Therefore, magnification of oscillation amplitude 𝐾 is expressed by
the following.
𝛼
𝐾 = 1 + 𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝜃1 𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝜃2 +
𝐹 𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝜃1
• For magnification of oscillation amplitude on oscillation cutting of curved part
such as circular arc, regard the angle of the tool moving direction (tangent di-
rection) and the oscillation axis direction as the taper angle 𝜃1 . Then, calculate
so that 𝜃1 is maximized. However, be careful that the upper limit of the mag-
nification of oscillation amplitude is 2.5. When the oscillation amplitude is too
large in the middle of machining path, divide the machining path and adjust the
magnification of oscillation amplitude.

Fig. 44-11

44－10
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

Table 44-2 Setting Example for Oscillation Conditions (Taper Machining)

Magnification of oscillation Magnification of oscillation

Chips cutting cycle
frequency (I) amplitude (K)
Every 2/3 rotation of the spindle 1.5 (3/2) 1.5
Every 2 rotations of the spindle 0.5 (1/2) 1.5
Every 3 rotations of the spindle 0.333 (1/3) 1.7
Every 4 rotations of the spindle 0.25 (1/4) 2.1

NOTE: The vibration component of the oscillation motion is added in

opposite direction of the axis moving direction. If X-axis is set as
specified oscillation axis at taper and circular arc like Fig.44-12,
incision occurs in workpiece. In oscillation cutting of taper and
circular arc, it is necessary to select proper oscillation axis (ar-
gument IP0 for G8.5 P2 command) by fully confirming the axis
moving directions.

44-3 Use with Other Functions

• Canned cycle
When you execute each canned cycle in the oscillation cutting mode, oscilla-
tion is performed on the cutting feed commands.
• Multiple repetitive canned cycle
To use oscillation cutting in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72), set
the NC parameter CBR (No.5124#0) to 1. By doing so, oscillation right before
retraction after rough machining becomes stable.
• Constant surface speed control
This function can be used together with oscillation cutting. However, synchro-
nous accuracy of the oscillation motion and the spindle may decrease slightly
while spindle speed changes by constant surface speed control.
• Feed per minute
Oscillation cutting should be used with feed per revolution. However, oscilla-
tion cutting can be performed with feed per minute. In this case, oscillation
command is generated based on feed amount per revolution calculated by feed
amount per minute and rotation of spindle. Therefore, take enough care that os-
cillation amplitude becomes excessive.
NOTE: When the synchronized spindle is stopped, oscillation does not
occur.
• Synchronous control
When master axis and slave axis are set as oscillation axis, the master axis os-
cillates and the slave axis oscillates simultaneously by cutting command to
master axis in the oscillation cutting mode. However, since oscillation motion
differs depending on characteristic of each axis, synchronization performance
may be decreased.
NOTE: Oscillation can be used with parking. Axis in a parking state
does not oscillate.
NOTE: During synchronous control, oscillation cutting cannot be used
in the following states.
- While both ends of a workpiece are chucked
- While both ends of a workpiece are held by tailstock
NOTE: If any one of master axis and slave axis are non-oscillation axis,
both axes do not oscillate.

44－11
C-NA104204-A2205
 44 OSCILLATION CUTTING FUNCTION

• Composite control
When an axis commanded for cutting is interchanged by composite control in
oscillation cutting mode, the actual feeding axis oscillates when this axis is set
as oscillation axis.
• Manual handle retrace
In the cutting feed by manual handle retrace, oscillation is not performed.
• Use with functions to rotate coordinate system
When oscillation cutting is used together with functions to rotate coordinate
system such as 3D coordinate conversion, two or more axes may move actually
even if only one axis is commanded on machining program. Even when all the
axes are set as oscillation axis, only the oscillation axis specified by “IP0 in
G8.5 P2” oscillates.

44-4 Restrictions
Oscillation cutting function is not available during the use of functions shown be-
low.
• AI contour control
• Tool center point control
• Spindle electric gear box
• Superimposed control
• Flexible synchronous control

44－12
C-NA104204-A2205
 45 PROGRAM RESTART

45 PROGRAM RESTART
This function restarts the machining from the specified block by the sequence No.
of the block to be restarted or block No. when a tool is broken or when it is de-
sired to restart the operation after a day off.

Reference: For details on this function, refer to the chapter of “program restart”
in the FANUC operator's manual.

(1) Select the EDIT mode and turn ON the program restart switch on the opera-
tion panel or NT SETTING screen.

[Operation panel]
Switch Setting status Description

Light ON This switch is ON when the program

restart function is valid.
Light OFF This switch is OFF when the program
restart function is invalid.

[NT SETTING screen]

Function status Confirmation Setting status Description
display icon message
Not ON This icon appears when the program restart
equipped function is valid.

OFF This icon appears when the program restart

function is invalid.

Reference: For details, refer to “4-7 NT Setting Screen” in the NT-IPS opera-
tion manual.

(2) Press the RESET & REWIND switch to call the head of the program.

(3) Select the MEMORY mode, input the sequence No. of the block to be re-
started, and press the soft-key [P type].

(4) The sequence number search is performed, and the program restart screen
appears.

45－1
C-NA104204-A2205
 45 PROGRAM RESTART

(5) Turn OFF the program restart switch on the operation panel or NT setting
screen and press the CYCLE START switch.
The program moves to the restart position in the moving order set by the pa-
rameter.

45-1 NC Parameter
NC parameters are set to the standard setting. However, change the setting of the
following parameter when the moving order to position for program restart is
changed according to the machining conditions.

No. Contents Setting value

7310 Moving order to position for program restart Optional

NOTE: Set to 1 or more because an alarm occurs when this parameter is set to
0.
When this parameter is set to a minus value, the axis can not
move.

45-2 PMC Parameter

No. Contents Setting value

Program restart function
D4092 0: Invalid 1
1: Valid

45－2
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING
The superimposed machining shown below is available for the machine models
that the R-spindle unit can move in the X-axis direction such as SC-100X2.
This chapter describes the cautions for superimposed machining and “superim-
posed control mode ON/OFF cycle (G458/G459)” that makes the NC program for
superimposed machining easier to create.
(For machine models not supported, skip this chapter.)

It is also possible to insert or delete the G codes for superimposed control mode
ON/OFF cycle (G458/G459) automatically by the operations on the process edit
screen of LUCK-BEI II/NT Manual Guide i.

L
R

Fig. 46-1 Example for Superimposed Machining (SC100X2)

NOTE: Target axes for superimposed machining are X and Z (2 axes).

NOTE: During the superimposed control mode, the following definition is ap-
plied.
･ X1/Z1 axes in the upper turret: master axes
･ X2/Z2 axes in the R-spindle: slave axes
Therefore, the slave axes always operate following the master axes.
NOTE: For SC-100X2, the X2-axis in the R-spindle cannot move in the +X-axis
direction from the L-spindle center (stroke limit). Therefore, it is neces-
sary to overhang a tool on the R-spindle in the X-axis direction from a
tool on the L-spindle side.
(Target difference: [Workpiece diameter + approach clearance] or
more)

46－1
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

46-1 Tool Offset and Work Coordinate System for Superimposed Machining
For the setting of the tool offset function and work coordinate system for
R-spindle machining on the superimposed machining, follow the rules below with
the upper turret (HEAD-1) selected.
(There are no rules for L-side machining.)

･ Tool offset and tool definition for Manual Guide i

Set the lower two digits of T code to the “station number +40,” and set the
geometry and wear offset values and the required tool definition of Manual
Guide i with the upper turret (HEAD-1) selected.
<Example> ST-1 → T0141
ST-2 → T0242
ST-3 → T0343
: :
ST-12 → T1252

･ Work coordinate system

To use the work coordinate system, use the G55 code, and set the values with
the upper turret (HEAD-1) selected.

Upper turret
(HEAD-1)
G54 G55

T01 R-spindle
T0101 T0141
(HEAD-2)

G59 The value will be auto-

matically set by G458
T0141 command.

46－2
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

46-2 Superimposed Control Mode ON/OFF Cycle (G458/G459)

This G code cycle performs the superimposed control mode ON/OFF by one
block. Using this function makes it easier to create NC programs.

･ G458 X__. Z__. : Superimposed control mode ON cycle

X__. : Approach position X coordinate
Z__. : Approach position Z coordinate

･ G459: Superimposed control mode OFF cycle

After the T code command, insert the machining paths for upper turret (HEAD-1)
and R-spindle side (HEAD-2) between the block of “G458 X__. Z__.” and
“G459;.”

･ Program example
Upper turret (HEAD-1) R-spindle (HEAD-2)

N10 M41 (O.D. ROUGH) (SP@CTRL) N11 M441 (O.D. ROUGH) (SP@CTRL)
G54 G59
G18 G18
G28 W0 (@Z@)
G28 U0 V0 G28 U0
G50 S3000 G50 S3000
G0 G40 G96 G99 T0101 M3 S200 G0 G40 G96 G99 T0141 M54 S180
(APPROACH) (APPROACH)
G458 X64. Z2. G458 X54. Z-2.
: :
(Machining path) (Machining path)
: :
G0 X64. Z2. (ESCAPE) G0 X54. Z-2. (ESCAPE)
G459 G459
G28 W0 (@Z@)
G28U0 G28U0
M1 M1

46－3
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

NOTE: As shown in the program example above, command G458 and G459 to
be a pair at each head.
The following shows the operation flow for G458/G459 commands.
Waiting M codes are commanded before and after each operation.
Therefore, be careful that the machine stops by the waiting M codes or
that an alarm such as mismatched M code occurs when the G458 and
G459 codes are commanded only to the one head in multi memory
mode.

<G458 operation flow>

･ Upper turret: Z__. → X__. Move to approach position
(X1/Z1 stop confirmation)
↓
･ R-spindle: Tool offset/work coordinate system (G59) setting
(X2-axis zero return/mirror image ON)
X__. → Z__. Move to approach position
(X2/Z2 stop confirmation)
Superimposed control mode ON

<G459 operation flow>

･ Upper turret (X1/Z1 stop confirmation)
↓
･ R-spindle (X2-axis zero return/mirror image OFF)
(Offset cancel)
(X2/Z2 stop confirmation)
Superimposed control mode OFF

NOTE: During the superimposed control mode, the R-spindle side (HEAD-2)
automatically changes to the X-axis mirror image mode.

NOTE: During the superimposed control mode, the upper turret X1/Z1 axes are
defined as master axes, and the X2/Z2 axes (slave axes) always operate
following the master axes.
For example, when the X1-axis is moved closer to the zero position dur-
ing the superimposed control mode, the X2-axis follows the X1-axis and
moves outside of the stroke range, which causes the overtravel alarm.
Therefore, be careful.

NOTE: Be sure to use the G59 code for the work coordinate system for
R-spindle side (HEAD-2).
Moreover, never use the G59 code except for the superimposed ma-
chining because the R-spindle (HEAD-2) uses this code.
In addition, the value of G59 is automatically set based on the value of
G55 and approach position of upper turret (HEAD-1) when G458 is
commanded.
(G55 is used for machining with lower turret under the L-spindle.)

46－4
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

NOTE: During the superimposed control mode, the following restrictions are
applied. (Restrictions on NC unit)
• Zero return commands (G28/G30) are not available. (PS0363 alarm)
• Machine coordinate system command (G53 X/Z) is not available.
(PS0363 alarm)
• Never change NC parameters related to axis control using G10 com-
mand.
• This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
• AI contour control I/II
• Tool retract & return
• Manual interruption
• Program restart
• Machine lock
• Rigid tapping (spindle/milling)
• EGB (polygon/gear hobbing/skiving)
• NT NURSE G code function

However, this function can be used together with any of the fol-
lowing G code functions. When commanding any of the follow-
ing G codes, perform the program so that it turns ON before
G458 and turns OFF after G459.
- G316/G317 High-speed cutting feed mode function
- G356/G357 Acceleration/deceleration shock buffering function
• After the machine is stopped by the machining check function,
the door lock cannot be canceled. If it is necessary to open the
door during the superimposed control mode, stop the machine in
the reset mode and release the machining check function.
• The rapid feedrate and maximum cutting feederate are half the
normal values.

NOTE: For machine models without Y-axis on the R-spindle side such as
SC100X2, never operate the upper turret Y-axis during the superim-
posed control mode.

NOTE: It is necessary to set the tool geometry/wear offset value (station number
+40) and work coordinate system for R-spindle side (HEAD-2) from the
upper turret side (HEAD-1).

NOTE: When the T code is commanded at the R-spindle side (HEAD-2) of

SC100X2, the lower turret index is not executed only when the offset
number is 41 or larger. (Only the reading of tool offset is executed.)

NOTE: The superimposed control mode is not canceled with reset.

A warning “W1019 CANCEL SUPERIMPOSED MODE (G459)” oc-
curs. Follow the message on the screen and execute the G459 code in
the MDI mode with the R-spindle side (HEAD-2) selected to cancel the
warning.

46－5
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

NOTE: The machining simulation on superimposed process of Manual Guide i

only supports the tool path simulation.
(The machining simulation does not support animation and drawing
during machining.)
Click the soft keys in order of [TLPATH] → [>] → [ALLPATH] to set
the tool path to all-path mode, and then, execute this function. (This set-
ting is required only once.)

NOTE: To use the superimposed machining process and the jump programming
(G411) at the same time, follow the description below.
1) When the 1st workpiece performs L-machining only
･ Make a program to execute the superimposed process including
G458/G459 for L-side program. For R-side program, make a
program to execute the T code for R-side superimposed pro-
cess/G458/G459, but not to execute the spindle rotation and the
machining path.
or
･ Make a program not to execute the superimposed process in-
cluding G458/G459, but to execute a separately prepared pro-
cess to perform only the L-side machining with the upper turret.

2) When the last workpiece (ejection) performs R-machining only

･ Make a program to execute the superimposed process including
G458/G459 for R-side program. For L-side program, make a
program to execute the T code for L-side superimposed pro-
cess/G458/G459, but not to execute the spindle rotation and the
machining path.
or
･ Make a program not to execute the superimposed process in-
cluding G458/G459, but to execute a separately prepared pro-
cess to perform only the R-side machining with the upper turret.

NOTE: The NT Manual Guide i machining simulation of the superimposed pro-

cess supports only the tool paths simulation.

NOTE: G459 (superimposed control mode OFF cycle) operates as follows.

･ When G459 of the upper turret (HEAD-1) is commanded first,
the standby with G459 of the R-spindle (HEAD-2) is executed.
･ When G459 of the R-spindle (HEAD-2) is commanded first, the
standby with G459 of the upper turret (HEAD-1) is not execut-
ed.

46－6
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

46-3 Superimposed Setting Function on Process Edit Screen

It is possible to insert or delete the G codes for superimposed control mode
ON/OFF cycle (G458/G459) automatically by the operations on the process edit
screen of LUCK-BEI II/NT Manual Guide i.

Reference: For details on how to use the process edit function, refer to the op-
eration manual of LUCK BEI II/NT Manual Guide i.

This section describes how to set the superimposed process to N10 (L-side) and
N20 (R-side) on the upper turret showing the process edit screen of SC-100X2 as
an example.

(1) Click the [SpImp. SET] soft-key.

The cursor is illuminated in red, and the machine is in the standby mode for
process selection.

(2) Position the cursor to the processes of N10 and N20, and click the [SET]
button. Check that the frames of these two processes change to sky blue,
click [EXEC].

46－7
C-NA104204-A2205
46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

Executing the superimposed setting changes to the one-line display for the
selected N10 and N20 processes. The center of the screen displays “SU-
PERIMPOSED@CONTROL” to indicate the machine is in the superim-
posed control mode.
In addition, the process for R-spindle side moves to LOWER (HEAD-2) side
only when the machine is at the UPPER (HEAD-1) position.

46－8
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

The following NC program is changed or added.

(a) The message “SP@CTRL” is added in the comment line at the begin-
ning of the process.
Never delete or change this comment because this comment is very im-
portant for the superimposed process.
(b) The work coordinate system on the R-spindle side is changed from G55
to G59.
(c) The block of “G458 X_. Z_.” (superimposed control mode ON) is in-
serted in the next block of the comment (APPROACH).
The values of X_./Z__. are the same as those described after the com-
ment (APPROACH).
(d) The block of “G459” (superimposed control mode OFF) is inserted in
the next block of the comment (ESCAPE).
(e) “G28 W0 (@Z@)” is added just before the block of “G28 U0” at the
R-spindle side. Never delete and change the comment of “(@Z@).”
(The block deletion process is not performed normally when the process
is moved to the upper turret side.)

･ Program example
Upper turret (HEAD-1) R-spindle (HEAD-2)

N10 M41 (O.D. ROUGH)(SP@CTRL) (a) N20 M441 (O.D. ROUGH)(SP@CTRL) (a)
G54 G59 (b)
G18 G18
G28 W0 (@Z@) (e)
G28 U0 V0 G28 U0
G50 S3000 G50 S3000
G0 G40 G96 G99 T0101 M3 S200 G0 G40 G96 G99 T0141 M54 S180
(APPROACH) (APPROACH)
G458 X64. Z2. (c) G458 X54. Z-2. (c)
G0 Z2. G0 Z-2.
X64. X54.
: :
(Machining path) (Machining path)
: :
G0 X64. Z2. (ESCAPE) G0 X54. Z-2. (ESCAPE)
G459 (d) G459 (d)
G28 W0 (@Z@) (e)
G28U0 G28U0
M1 M1

NOTE: The comment (APPROACH) means the approach to a workpiece, and

(ESCAPE) means the retraction from the workpiece. These comments
are described as a standard in the fixed form sentences of NT Manual
Guide i.
Without these comments, the blocks of G458 and G459 are not inserted
correctly. After (?G458/G459) is inserted in the comment line at the be-
ginning of the process, the N-number changes to red (not completed) on
the process edit screen. Check the program.

NOTE: The following table shows the comments APPROACH and ESCAPE in
the language setting of the NC unit. These comments are described as a
standard in the fixed form sentences of NT Manual Guide i.

46－9
C-NA104204-A2205
 46 SUPERIMPOSED MACHINING

Displayed language setting on the

Approach Escape
NC unit
Japanese, English, and Chinese
(APPROACH) (ESCAPE)
Other languages
French (APPROCHE) (DEGAGEMENT)
German (ANFAHREN) (RUECKZUG)
Italian (AVVICINAMENTO) (ALLONTANAMENTO)
Spanish (APROXIMACION) (ESCAPE)
Czech (PRIJEZD) (ODJEZD)

(3) To cancel the superimposed control process, position a cursor to the super-
imposed control process. Then, press the soft keys [SpImp SET] →[EXEC].
When the mode is canceled, the changed or added NC program returns to the
original state. However, the R-spindle process stays as LOWER (HEAD-2).

46－10
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

1 INCOMPLETE THREAD
In threading operation, incorrect thread lead portions are made at the start and end
of the cycle due to automatic acceleration and deceleration in axis feed operation.
Therefore, these portions must be taken into consideration when programming a
threading cycle.

* This operation method can be used for all types of machines.

The length incomplete thread portion can be calculated as indicated below.

(1) δ2=LxR/1800 (mm)
(2) δ1=LxR/1800x(b)= δ2xb
L: Thread lead (mm)
R: Spindle speed (min-1)
Value “a” represents allowable thread pitch accuracy.
a b
0.005 4.298
0.01 3.605
0.015 3.200
0.02 2.912

Calculation example:
To cut the thread of L1 mm lead with thread lead error of 0.015 mm, at spin-
dle speed of 350 min-1.
δ2 = 350 x 1/1800 = 0.194 mm
δ1 = δ2 x 3.2 = 0.6208 mm

APP-1
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

Approach distance (δ1) can be known using monograph given in chart APP1.
How to use the monograph:
From the thread accuracy class and thread lead, thread accuracy “a” is obtained at
①. Using the curve, representing the acceleration/deceleration machine constant,
approach distance δ1 is known for V = 10 mm/sec at ②.
By extending the line left, approach distance δ1 is known at ③ for other cutting
speeds.

APP-2
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

Chart APP1 Monograph to Obtain Approach Distance δ1

V=1/60xRxL
L: Thread lead (mm)
R: Spindle speed (min-1)

APP-3
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

2 NT NURSE STANDARD FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the screen functions in NT NURSE standard parts.
(For NT NURSE optional specifications, refer to NT NURSE OPERATION
MANUAL.)
NT NURSE standard functions are available even when NT NURSE SYSTEM
(OPTION) is not installed for the machines.
NT NURSE screen can be displayed by pressing ’CUSTOM’ key. When the
screen does not change though ’CUSTOM’ key is pressed, skip this chapter.
2-1 NT Operation Message Display Function
This is the function to display cautions with respect to machine operations on the
NT OPERATION MESSAGE screen when operating the machine. There are 2
types of cautions to be displayed: warning and alarm.

(1) Selecting menu item “6. OPERATION MESSAGE” on the MENU screen
(Fig. 1-1, Fig. 1-2) displays OPERATION MESSAGE screen. If a warming
or an alarm is generated, the item “6. OPERATION MESSAGE” on the
MENU screen and operation massage on the OPERATION MESSAGE
screen blink.
(2) OPERATION MESSAGE screen is displayed as shown in Fig 1-3 in the state
that no alarms are generated.
(3) No. and message of the warning/alarm currently being generated is displayed
on the OPERATION MESSAGE screen. (Indicated by ②)
For warnings, warning No. follows after character “W”, and for alarms,
alarm No. follows after character “A”.
(4) Only when one message is displayed on the screen, the detail of the message
is displayed automatically as shown in Fig. 1-4. ③.
Cancel the warning/alarm according to the contents of the message.

APP-4
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

NOTE: For warnings and alarms, display in Japanese, English, French, Ger-
man, Italian or Spanish is enabled.
NOTE: The detailed messages of warnings/alarms can be displayed only in
Japanese or English. (If French, German, Italian or Spanish is em-
ployed, the details of the messages are displayed in English.)
NOTE: The following messages can be displayed on the OPERATION MES-
SAGE screen:
• Machine alarms
• Alarms and warnings on NT NURSE (when installed)
• Alarms and warnings on LUCK-BEI (When installed)]
• Alarms and warnings on GR/WS (When installed)
NOTE: If messages to be displayed are not enough to solve the problems, refer
to operation manuals or maintenance manuals such as “LST OF
WARNING AND ALARM”.
NOTE: This system displays automatically if alarms or warnings are generated.
However there are cases that the screen currently being displayed is not
changed to the OPERATION MESSAGE screen when alarms or warn-
ings are generated in succession. In that case, select the operation
message screen on MENU screen manually to see the contents of the
messages.
NOTE: For NC unit FS21TB (controller A), only No. of warnings/alarms are
displayed on the screen.

APP-5
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

2-1-2 Warning/alarm detailed message retrieval function

If more than one message are displayed on the OPERATION MESSAGE screen,
the detailed messages are not automatically displayed on the screen. When plural
warnings/alarms are generated simultaneously, using detailed message retrieval
function displays the detailed message of arbitrary No.
Enter the message No. to be displayed on the OPERATION MESSAGE or
WARNING/ALARM DETAIL screen, then press either soft-key [W DETAIL] or
[A DETAIL] soft-key depending on the message type, and the detailed message
will be displayed.

APP-6
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

The warning/alarm detailed message No. to be displayed are shown below:

Table 1-2-1 Warnings/Alarms with detailed Messages to be Displayed

Type No. Displaying method

Enter No. and press soft-key [W
Warning W001 to W999
DETAIL]
Enter No. and press soft-key [A
Machine alarm A00.0 to A69.7
DETAIL]
Enter No. and press soft-key [A
NT NURSE alarm A070 to A999
DETAIL]

NOTE: Press the soft-key [W DETAIL] or [A DETAIL] without entering mes-

sage No. generates a warning “W082”.
NOTE: If press soft-key [W DETAIL] or [A DETAIL] after entering warn-
ing/alarm No. whose detailed message does not exist, the message “NO
WARNING MESSAGE” “NO ALARM MESSAGE” will be displayed on
the warning/alarm detailed screen.

APP-7
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

2-2 NT Guidance Display Function

This is the function to display the following four guidance screens:
(1) M code list screen.
Displays the available M code list.
(2) G code list screen
Displays the available G code list.
(3) PC parameter setting screen
Enables easy operation for PC parameter setting
(4) PC timer setting screen
Enables easy operation for PC timer setting
Screen Example:

APP-8
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

NOTE: Though standard and optional M codes, G codes, PC parameters and

PC timers are displayed on each screen, special or additional M codes,
G codes, PC parameters and PC timers are not displayed.
NOTE: With respect to PC parameters and PC timers, only items of high fre-
quency are displayed on the guidance screen because of attaching much
importance to simple operation.
NOTE: Only Japanese or English display is available for NT GUIDANCE
screen. (Since Feb. 1999)
When French, German, Italian or Spanish display is employed for NT
NURSE SYSTEM, the GUIDANCE screen is displayed in English.

APP-9
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

2-3 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract Position Display Function

This is the function to display the retract position when thread cutting retract op-
eration is executed by pressing FEED HOLD button during thread cutting cycle
(execution of G76 or G92).
NOTE: This function is available only when thread cutting cycle retract func-
tion of NC option are validated. For the details of thread cutting cycle
retract, refer to the operation manual for NC unit.
NOTE: It is enabled to invalidate the display of thread cutting cycle retract po-
sition screen by setting NC parameter No.7282.

Fig. 2-1 Thread cutting cycle retract position display screen

(1) If retract operation is performed during thread cutting cycle, this function
changes the current screen to THREAD CUTTING CYCLE RETRACT PO-
SITION DISPLAY screen automatically. Z-axis coordinate value of retracted
position and left move amount of Z-axis are displayed on the screen.
(2) Press the right end soft-key [>], and NT NURSE MENU screen is displayed.
(3) To display the thread cutting cycle retract position display screen back, fol-
low the procedure described below:
① Display the MENU screen.
② Press numeric keys in the order of “2”, “7”, “5” and “4”, then
press [INPUT] key.
NOTE: The following restrictions are placed on distance “h” between starting
point of thread cut and ending point for the sake of reading Z-axis co-
ordinate of the retract position correctly.
h > [P5130]/10*[thread lead]+[P1420.1]/7500
P5130 NC parameter No.5130: chamfering amount of
thread cutting cycle (G76/G92)
[Thread lead] “F” value specified in thread cutting
cycle (G76/G92)
P1420.1 X-axis of NC parameter No.1420: Rapid feedrate
(Example)
When P5130=10, thread lead= 2(m), P1420.1 =24000 (mm/min),
h >5.2 mm

APP-10
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

3 LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY

Ladder diagram display shows ON/OFF status of contacts and/or coils and ad-
dress descriptions to confirm the ladder program status.
Follow the procedure below to display the ladder diagram.
(1) Press SYSTEM key, and soft-keys PMC and PMCLAD in turn.
(2) The following Fig.1 is displayed. Use the keys to select the program to
be displayed. Press the ZOOM soft-key to confirm.
(3) Press 1 and INPUT keys in turn.
To cancel the procedure, press CANCEL key.

Fig. 3-1 PMC PROGRAM LIST VIEWER Screen

Fig. 3-2 PMC PROGRAM LIST VIEWER (PASSWORD ENTER) Screen

(4) The following Fig. 1-21 is displayed.
Password is valid unless the NC power supply is off.

Fig. 3-3 PMC LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen

APP-11
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

4 CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAM EXAMPLE

This chapter describes program examples using custom macro function. For de-
tails on the custom macro function, refer to the operation manual of NC unit.

4-1 Text Data Output to Memory Card or USB Memory by DPRNT Command
Use the DPRNT command to output measuring result in the text format to
memory card or USB memory when automatic measuring unit is applied.
For details on the POPEN/DPRNT commands, refer to the operation manual of
NC unit.

First, set the following NC parameters.

(There is no need to change the parameters if they are already set.)
• P20 (I/O channel) = 4: memory card drive
17: USB drive
• P6008#3 = 1
(Press the RESET key to save the file. No need to command PCLOS)
• P6019#3 = 0
(File names are managed with serial numbers as PRNT????.DAT.)
• P6019#7 = 1
(File names are managed with serial numbers as PRNT????.DAT.)

Program example
Output [Date Time #501 #502] by DPRNT command.
O1234
:
:
#501=#501+1
:
POPEN
DPRNT[#3011[80]*#3012[80]*# 501[43]*# 502[43]]
:
M30

Repeat the above program five times in the memory restart mode, and then press
the RESET key. Text data is output as shown below.

File to be output (PRNT0001.DAT)

20180712 94643 1.000 100.123

20180712 94646 2.000 100.120
20180712 94650 3.000 100.122
20180712 94653 4.000 100.125
20180712 94657 5.000 100.124

APP-12
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

NOTE: The serial numbers <PRNT????.DAT> are assigned to file names au-
tomatically.
NOTE: [PCLOS] command is not necessary. Press the RESET key to create files.
Be sure to press the RESET key before removing the memory card.
NOTE: Comma [,] is not output in the FANUC specification. Use [*] to insert a
space. Click Fixed Width to read the text data with spreadsheet softwear.
NOTE: For machine with multiple turret heads, perform a program to command
[POPEN/DPRNT] on any one of turret heads.

APP-13
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

4-2 Reading/Writing Custom Macro Variables of Other Turret Heads

The following NC units can read/write custom macro variables of other turret
heads.
• FS30i series
• FS0iTF or higher
(Applicable machines: Machines with multiple turret heads)

Add the following values corresponding to turret number to custom macro varia-
bles.
• Turret1: +10,000,000
• Turret2: +20,000,000
• Turret3: +30,000,000

NOTE: Use the system variables #3019 to check each turret number.
Program example to check the turret number: #500 = #3019

NOTE: This function is not available when the following NC units are used.
•FS16/18/21-iTA/iTB or earlier
•FS0-iTC/iTD or earlier

Program example <Executed on Turret1>

#500 = #20000500 Read #500 from Turret2 to Turret1.

#501 = #20005021 Read #5021 (X-axis machine coordinate)
from Turret2 to Turret1.
#20000502 = 1 Write =1 to #502 of Turret2 on Turret1.
#20010001 = #20010001 + 0.01 Add 0.01 to #10001 (X-axis wear offset
value of No.1) of Turret2 on Turret1.

APP-14
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

4-3 Reading NC Parameter Values by PRM Command

The following NC units can read NC parameter values using PRM function.
• FS30i series
• FS0iTF or higher

NOTE: Normally, command G10 to write NC parameters.

For the details, refer to the operation manual of NC unit.

NOTE: This function is not available when the following NC units are used.
•FS16/18/21-iTA/iTB or earlier
•FS0-iTC/iTD or earlier

Program example

<Bit type parameter: P3202#4>

#501 = PRM[3202, 4]

<Axis type parameter: P1620 Y (4th axis)>

#502 = PRM[1620]/[4]

<Axis type and Bit type parameter: P12#0 Z (2nd axis)>

IF [PRM[12,0]/[2] EQ 0] GOTO 100
#3000=21 (Z MIRROR-IMAGE ON ALARM)
N100

4-4 B-axis Incremental Command

The axis address to perform the incremental command is not allocated for the
B-axis due to the restrictions from NC unit. However, the incremental command
is available using the custom macro program shown below.

Program Example (To move the B-axis +50.0 incrementally in the rapid feed)
:
G53
G00B[#5005+50.0]
:

NOTE: G53: Coordinate value look-ahead prevention block

#5005: B-axis block end position (work coordinate system)
The last digit indicates the B-axis number.
• When the B-axis number is the 3rd axis: #5003
• When the B-axis number is the 4th axis: #5004
• When the B-axis number is the 5th axis: #5005

APP-15
C-NA104204-A2205
 APPENDIX

4-5 Extracting the Tool Number and Offset Number from the Modal T-code
The following program example shows how to extract a tool number and offset
number to an arbitrary macro variable from the currently commanded modal
T-code (#4120).
This function can be used to check the current tool number when the tool life
function is used. Use this function if necessary.

<Program Example 1 (For T-code 4-digit specification)>

:
G0 T0125
:
#501 = FIX[#4120/100]; (Tool number/Upper 2 digits: 1)
#502 = #4120 - #501*100; (Offset number/Lower 2 digits: 25)
:

<Program Example 2 (For T-code 6-digit specification)>

:
G0 T040080
:
#501 = FIX[#4120/1000]; (Tool number/Upper 3 digits: 40)
#502 = #4120 - #501*1000; (Offset number/Lower 3 digits: 80)
:

APP-16
C-NA104204-A2205